Krone BiG X 600-2; BiG X 700-2; BiG X 770-2; BiG X 850-2, BiG X 1100-2 Operating Instructions

Add to My manuals
1023 Pages

advertisement

Krone BiG X 600-2; BiG X 700-2; BiG X 770-2; BiG X 850-2, BiG X 1100-2 Operating Instructions | Manualzz
Original operating instructions
Exact forage harvester
BiG X 600-2
BiG X 700-2
BiG X 770-2
BiG X 850-2
BiG X 1100-2
(from serial no.: 939 140)
Order no.: 150 000 663 02 us
12.10.2016
Table of Contents
2
Table of Contents
1
Table of Contents
1
Table of Contents ................................................................................................................................... 3
2
To this Document .................................................................................................................................14
2.1
Validity ..............................................................................................................................................14
2.2
Re-Ordering ......................................................................................................................................14
2.3
Further applicable documents ..........................................................................................................14
2.4
Target group of this document .........................................................................................................14
2.5
How to use this document ................................................................................................................15
2.6
Directional information......................................................................................................................15
2.7
Designation ......................................................................................................................................15
2.8
Means of representation ..................................................................................................................16
2.9
Representation and use of warnings................................................................................................17
2.9.1
Explanation of the danger sign .................................................................................................17
2.9.2
Explanation of the signal words: ...............................................................................................17
3
Safety .....................................................................................................................................................18
3.1
Intended use .....................................................................................................................................18
3.2
Improper use ....................................................................................................................................19
3.3
Service life of the machine ...............................................................................................................20
3.4
Basic safety instructions ...................................................................................................................21
3.4.1
Importance of the operating instructions ...................................................................................21
3.4.2
Personnel qualification ..............................................................................................................21
3.4.3
Children in danger .....................................................................................................................22
3.4.4
Connecting front attachments or trailers ...................................................................................22
3.4.5
Structural changes to the machine ...........................................................................................22
3.4.6
Additional equipment and spare parts ......................................................................................23
3.4.7
Workstations and passengers ...................................................................................................23
3.4.8
Operational safety: Technically perfect condition .....................................................................24
3.4.9
Danger zones ............................................................................................................................25
3.4.10
Keeping safety devices functional .............................................................................................27
3.4.11
Personal protective equipment .................................................................................................28
3.4.12
Safety signs on the machine .....................................................................................................28
3.4.13
Traffic safety..............................................................................................................................29
3.4.14
Parking the machine safely .......................................................................................................29
3.4.15
Consumables ............................................................................................................................30
3.4.16
Chemicals .................................................................................................................................31
3.4.17
Dangers associated with the operational environment .............................................................32
3.4.18
Sources of danger on the machine ...........................................................................................33
3.4.19
Dangers associated with certain activities: Climbing up and down ..........................................35
3.4.20
Dangers associated with certain activities: Work on the machine ............................................35
3.4.21
Dangers associated with certain activities: Checking and charging batteries ..........................37
3.4.22
Dangers associated with certain activities: Working on wheels and tyres ................................37
3.4.23
Behaviour in hazardous situations and when accidents occur .................................................37
3.5
Safety routines .................................................................................................................................38
3.5.1
Stopping and securing the machine ..........................................................................................38
3.5.2
Supporting lifted machine and machine parts securely ............................................................38
3.6
Safety stickers on the machine ........................................................................................................40
3.6.1
Position and meaning of the safety stickers on the machine ....................................................40
3
Table of Contents
3.6.2
Reordering the safety stickers ..................................................................................................52
3.6.3
Attaching the safety stickers .....................................................................................................52
3.6.4
Contact for KRONE NORTHAMERICA ....................................................................................52
3.7
Safety Equipment .............................................................................................................................53
3.7.1
Ladder .......................................................................................................................................53
3.7.2
Main battery switch ...................................................................................................................54
3.7.3
Seat switch in the driver's seat ..................................................................................................55
3.7.4
Fire extinguisher ........................................................................................................................56
3.7.5
Wheel chocks ............................................................................................................................56
3.7.6
Emergency exit .........................................................................................................................57
3.7.7
Instantaneous stop switch in the cab ........................................................................................59
3.7.8
Quick-Stop Switch Grinding Control Unit ..................................................................................59
4
Machine Description ............................................................................................................................60
4.1
Machine overview.............................................................................................................................60
4.1.1
Overview of crop flow ................................................................................................................62
4.2
Identification Plate ............................................................................................................................64
4.3
Information Required for Questions and Orders ..............................................................................64
4.3.1
Contact for KRONE NORTHAMERICA ....................................................................................64
4.4
Description of foraging process ........................................................................................................65
4.5
Picking up the crops .........................................................................................................................66
4.6
Feed drive ........................................................................................................................................67
4.7
Cutting Drum Unit .............................................................................................................................68
4.8
Main drive brake ...............................................................................................................................69
4.9
Corn conditioner ...............................................................................................................................69
4.10
Discharge accelerator ......................................................................................................................69
4.11
Discharge chute ...............................................................................................................................70
4.12
Travelling gear ..................................................................................................................................70
4.13
Central lubrication system ................................................................................................................70
4.14
System Settings ...............................................................................................................................70
4.15
On-board power supply voltage .......................................................................................................70
4.16
Silage additive system (option) ........................................................................................................70
4.17
Ladders and flaps .............................................................................................................................71
4.17.1
Ladder to the cab ......................................................................................................................72
4.17.2
Opening the cabin door .............................................................................................................73
4.17.3
Opening and closing flaps .........................................................................................................74
4.17.4
Right side flap ...........................................................................................................................75
4.17.5
Left side flap ..............................................................................................................................75
4.17.6
Tailgate engine compartment ...................................................................................................75
4.17.7
Front right side flap ...................................................................................................................76
4.17.8
Front left side flap ......................................................................................................................76
5
Data memory .........................................................................................................................................77
6
Technical Data ......................................................................................................................................78
Technical Data of the Machine .........................................................................................................78
Approved Headers ...........................................................................................................................88
Total Weights and Axle Loads .........................................................................................................89
Technical Data of Air Conditioning ...................................................................................................95
Technical Data of Integrated Silage Additives Unit ..........................................................................96
Consumables ...................................................................................................................................97
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
4
Table of Contents
7
Control and Display Elements ..........................................................................................................101
7.1
Roof Panel ......................................................................................................................................102
7.1.1
Roof Panel Switch Group ........................................................................................................103
7.2
Lighting ...........................................................................................................................................104
7.2.1
Direction indicator, hazard lights and brake light ....................................................................104
7.2.2
Side light/dipped beam............................................................................................................105
7.2.3
Working floodlights ..................................................................................................................107
7.2.4
Reversing lights .......................................................................................................................108
7.2.5
Ladder lighting .........................................................................................................................108
7.2.6
Warning beacons ....................................................................................................................109
7.2.7
Interior lighting/reading lamp ...................................................................................................110
7.2.8
Spotlight on control lever.........................................................................................................111
7.2.9
Coming Home function............................................................................................................111
7.3
Climatronic / heating.......................................................................................................................112
7.3.1
Control and display elements ..................................................................................................112
7.3.2
Operation ................................................................................................................................114
7.3.3
Switching on the system .........................................................................................................114
7.3.4
Setting the Desired Cab Temperature ....................................................................................114
7.3.5
Switch air conditioning On / Off ...............................................................................................115
7.3.6
Switching REHEAT mode on/off .............................................................................................116
7.3.7
Manually setting the evaporator fan speed .............................................................................117
7.3.8
Switching the Temperature Display to ° Fahrenheit ...............................................................118
7.3.9
Malfunctions indicated on the display .....................................................................................118
7.4
Air comfort seat ..............................................................................................................................120
7.4.1
ACTIVO design (optional) .......................................................................................................121
7.5
Verstellbare Lüfterdüsen ................................................................................................................126
7.6
Operation console ..........................................................................................................................127
7.6.1
Switches and control lamps ....................................................................................................128
7.6.2
Functions of the release switches and keys ...........................................................................129
7.6.3
membrane keyboard ...............................................................................................................133
7.7
Control lever ...................................................................................................................................134
7.8
Steering column and foot pedals ....................................................................................................138
7.8.1
Steering column adjustment ...................................................................................................139
7.8.2
Full beam ................................................................................................................................140
7.8.3
Headlamp flasher ....................................................................................................................140
7.8.4
Horn.........................................................................................................................................141
7.8.5
Direction indicator ...................................................................................................................141
7.8.6
Service brake ..........................................................................................................................142
7.9
Monitor for camera monitoring system (optional) ...........................................................................142
7.9.1
Drawer for first-aid kit/operating instructions...........................................................................143
7.10
Guide's seat....................................................................................................................................144
7.11
cooling box .....................................................................................................................................144
7.12
Ignition lock ....................................................................................................................................145
7.13
Cigarette lighter / 12 volt socket .....................................................................................................146
7.14
Steckdosen und USB Anschluss ....................................................................................................147
7.14.1
OBD diagnostic socket ............................................................................................................147
7.14.2
CAN diagnostic socket, USB connection and ISOBUS socket ...............................................148
7.15
Outside mirrors ...............................................................................................................................149
7.15.1
Left Outside Mirror ..................................................................................................................149
5
Table of Contents
7.15.2
Right outside mirror and anti-collision mirror ..........................................................................149
7.15.2.1
Setting the right outside mirror .........................................................................................149
7.16
Inside mirror ...................................................................................................................................150
7.17
Sun blind ........................................................................................................................................150
7.18
Wind shield wiper ...........................................................................................................................151
7.19
Washer system – windshield ..........................................................................................................151
7.20
Radio installation ............................................................................................................................152
7.21
Manual operation on the left platform .............................................................................................153
7.22
Trailer coupling ...............................................................................................................................154
8
6
Info centre "EasyTouch" ...................................................................................................................155
8.1
Overview ........................................................................................................................................155
8.2
Information Section ........................................................................................................................158
8.2.1
Status line ...............................................................................................................................159
8.2.2
Engine Data Information Section ............................................................................................161
8.2.3
Drive data information section ................................................................................................163
8.2.4
Settings information section ....................................................................................................170
8.2.4.1
Menu field working width .................................................................................................170
8.2.4.2
Front attachment menu area ...........................................................................................171
8.2.4.3
Intake menu area .............................................................................................................173
8.2.4.4
Lifting unit menu area ......................................................................................................175
8.2.5
General machine settings information section ........................................................................176
8.2.5.1
Memory keys ....................................................................................................................176
8.2.5.2
Grass pick-up mode .........................................................................................................178
8.2.5.3
Maize header ...................................................................................................................182
8.2.5.4
Direct cut header ..............................................................................................................194
8.2.5.5
Customer data counter ....................................................................................................199
8.2.5.6
Silage Fodder Addition.....................................................................................................206
8.2.5.7
Setting the corn conditioner distance...............................................................................210
8.3
Menu level ......................................................................................................................................211
8.3.1
Access a menu level ...............................................................................................................216
8.4
Main menu 1 Settings.....................................................................................................................217
8.4.1
Menu 1-1 Parameters .............................................................................................................218
8.4.1.1
Entering parameters ........................................................................................................220
8.4.2
Menu 1-2 Machine setting .......................................................................................................222
8.4.3
Menu 1-3 Units ........................................................................................................................223
8.4.4
Menu 1-4 PowerSplit (Option) .................................................................................................225
8.4.5
Menu 1-5 "Language" .............................................................................................................229
8.4.6
Menu 1-7 "Display" ..................................................................................................................230
8.4.7
Menu 1-7-1 "Day/night mode" .................................................................................................231
8.4.8
Menu 1-7-2 Beeper .................................................................................................................232
8.4.9
Menu 1-7-4 Direction of Rotation ............................................................................................234
8.4.10
Menu 1-7-5 Configure status line ............................................................................................235
8.4.10.1
NIR sensor for moisture measurement (option) ..............................................................236
8.4.11
Menu 1-8 Date/time.................................................................................................................239
8.4.12
Menu 1-9 Owner's address .....................................................................................................240
8.4.13
Menu 1-10 Memory keys.........................................................................................................241
8.5
Main menu 2 Counters ...................................................................................................................242
8.5.1
Deleting the day counter .........................................................................................................243
8.5.2
Switching to Customer DataCounters .....................................................................................243
Table of Contents
8.6
Main Menu 3 Maintenance .............................................................................................................244
8.6.1
Unfulfilled switching-on conditions and CAN bus disturbances ..............................................245
8.6.2
Menu 3-1 Central lubrication/cleaning ....................................................................................247
8.6.3
Menu 3-2 Grind/Counterblade ................................................................................................248
8.6.4
Menu 3-3 Calibration of absolute lifting unit height .................................................................254
8.6.4.1
Calibration process for absolute lifting unit height (cutting height) ..................................257
8.6.5
Calibrating the automatic steering system ..............................................................................261
8.6.5.1
Calibrating the steering angle sensor ..............................................................................264
8.6.5.2
Row tracer calibration ......................................................................................................266
8.6.5.3
Calibrating flexible row tracers .........................................................................................269
8.6.5.4
Calibration of valves for steering left/right (manual) ........................................................270
8.6.5.5
Calibration of valves for steering left/right (automatic) ....................................................272
8.6.5.6
Turning circle calibration (only for ISOBUS steering system) ..........................................275
8.6.6
Menu 3-5 Calibration Spout ....................................................................................................277
8.6.7
Menu 3-6 Corn conditioner calibration ....................................................................................280
8.6.8
Menu 3-7 Calibration of feed drive/front attachment ...............................................................282
8.6.8.1
Calibrate feed drive/front attachment...............................................................................283
8.6.9
Menu 3-9 Calibration of RockProtect ......................................................................................286
8.6.10
Menu 3-10 Calibration of main coupling .................................................................................287
8.6.11
Menu 3-11 Maintenance of additional axle (option) ................................................................290
8.7
Main menu 4 Service......................................................................................................................291
8.8
Menu 4-1 Diagnostics.....................................................................................................................292
8.8.1
Unfulfilled switching-on conditions and CAN bus disturbances ..............................................294
8.8.1.1
General Status Displays Sensors/Actuators ....................................................................296
8.8.1.2
Menu 4-1-1 Diagnostics intake ........................................................................................297
8.8.1.3
Menu 4-1-2 Diagnostics front attachment ........................................................................300
8.8.1.4
Menu 4-1-3 CAN bus .......................................................................................................304
8.8.1.5
Menu 4-1-4 Diagnostics spout .........................................................................................306
8.8.1.6
Menu 4-1-5 Diagnostics lifting unit ...................................................................................312
8.8.1.7
Menu 4-1-6 Diagnostics travelling gear ...........................................................................322
8.8.1.8
Menu 4-1-7 Metal detection .............................................................................................329
8.8.1.9
Menu 4-1-8 Diesel Engine ...............................................................................................333
8.8.1.10
Menu 4-1-9 Automatic steering system ...........................................................................341
8.8.1.11
Menu 4-1-10 Diagnostics AutoScan ................................................................................346
8.8.1.12
Menu 4-1-11 Diagnostics electronics ...............................................................................348
8.8.1.13
Menu 4-1-12 Diagnostics work ........................................................................................355
8.8.1.14
Menu 4-1-13 Diagnostics grind ........................................................................................368
8.8.1.15
Menu 4-1-14 Diagnostics counterblade ...........................................................................371
8.8.1.16
Menu 4-1-15 Diagnostics corn conditioner ......................................................................374
8.8.1.17
Menu 4-1-16 Diagnostics multi-function lever .................................................................376
8.8.1.18
Menu 4-1-17 Diagnostics CUC ........................................................................................380
8.8.1.19
Menu 4-1-18 Diagnostics manual operation ....................................................................383
8.8.1.20
Menu 4-1-19 Diagnostics terminal ...................................................................................384
8.8.1.21
Menu 4-1-20 Diagnostics RockProtect ............................................................................386
8.8.1.22
Menu 4-1-21 Diagnostics moisture ..................................................................................390
8.9
Menu 4-2 Error List.........................................................................................................................392
8.10
Menu 4-3 "Service level" ................................................................................................................398
8.11
Menu 4-4 Information .....................................................................................................................399
8.11.1
Menu 4-4-1 Multi-function lever ..............................................................................................399
7
Table of Contents
8.11.2
Menu 4-4-2 Software ...............................................................................................................400
8.11.3
Menu 4-4-3 Machine ...............................................................................................................403
8.11.4
Menu 4-4-8 Display Software Packages .................................................................................404
8.12
Menu 5 Working screen .................................................................................................................404
8.12.1
Error Messages .......................................................................................................................405
8.12.2
Instruction message ................................................................................................................406
8.12.3
Warning message ...................................................................................................................406
8.13
Printing customer data ...................................................................................................................407
8.13.1
Selecting the customer record ................................................................................................407
8.13.1.1
Print menu customer data ................................................................................................408
8.13.1.2
Printing cultivated area counter state/states ....................................................................410
8.14
Accessing the constant power setting menu (optional) ..................................................................411
8.14.1
Entering the degree of speed reduction ..................................................................................412
8.14.2
Setting the maximum speed ...................................................................................................414
8.14.3
Setting the minimum speed ....................................................................................................415
8.15
Operating CropControl System via KRONE CCI 200 Operation Terminal or KRONE Delta
Operation Terminal .....................................................................................................................................416
8.15.1
Connecting the Terminal in case of Self-Propelled Machines ................................................416
8.15.2
Design of the Display ..............................................................................................................418
8.15.3
Short-cut Buttons in the Working Screen ................................................................................420
8.15.4
Display in basic screen ...........................................................................................................422
8.15.5
Counterweighing and Calibration ............................................................................................423
8.15.5.1
Performing Counterweighing ...........................................................................................423
8.15.6
Menu Level ..............................................................................................................................425
8.15.7
Bringing up a Menu Level .......................................................................................................426
8.15.8
Main Menu 1 Settings .............................................................................................................427
8.15.9
Main Menu 2 Calibration .........................................................................................................429
8.15.10 Main Menu 13 Yield Counter ..................................................................................................434
8.15.11 Main Menu 14 ISOBUS Settings .............................................................................................444
8.15.12 Main Menu 15 Service ............................................................................................................446
8.15.13 Alarm Messages (VT) .............................................................................................................456
8.15.14 Physical messages .................................................................................................................457
8.16
Operation of the Internal Silage Additive System ..........................................................................458
8.17
Calibration of the Internal Silage Agent System ............................................................................460
8.18
Recording the Characteristic Line ..................................................................................................461
8.18.1
Usage ......................................................................................................................................461
8.18.2
Permanent Mode .....................................................................................................................462
8.18.3
Automatic Mode ......................................................................................................................463
8.19
Error Messages ..............................................................................................................................464
8.20
Cleaning and Maintenance ............................................................................................................465
9
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
Commissioning ...................................................................................................................................466
Checks before starting up the machine for the first time ................................................................466
Mounting warning panels in the operating position ........................................................................469
Mounting fire extinguisher in the holder .........................................................................................470
Identification plate ..........................................................................................................................470
10
Start-up ................................................................................................................................................471
10.1
Check before Start-up ....................................................................................................................471
10.2
Silage additive system....................................................................................................................473
10.2.1
Silage Additives Unit (internal) ................................................................................................473
8
Table of Contents
10.2.2
Silage additive system (external) ............................................................................................474
11
Start-up - Grass mode ........................................................................................................................475
11.1
Operating the cable winch ..............................................................................................................476
11.2
Removing the corn conditioner ......................................................................................................477
11.3
Installing the grass channel ............................................................................................................482
12
Start-up - Maize mode ........................................................................................................................487
12.1
Operating the cable winch ..............................................................................................................488
12.2
Removing the grass channel ..........................................................................................................490
12.3
Installing the corn conditioner ........................................................................................................494
12.3.1
Removing/installing the NIR sensor for moisture measurement.............................................501
12.4
Converting the pendulum frame cylinder for maize mode .............................................................507
12.5
Further conversion work .................................................................................................................509
13
Start-up – additional axle ...................................................................................................................513
13.1
Additional axle ................................................................................................................................513
13.1.1
Removing the additional axle ..................................................................................................513
13.1.2
Installing the additional axle ....................................................................................................515
13.1.3
Function test additional axle ...................................................................................................516
14
Start-up – Spout extension ................................................................................................................517
14.1
Removing/attaching the spout extension/spout end piece.............................................................517
14.1.1
Weights ...................................................................................................................................518
14.1.2
Removing the spout extension (12- and 14-row) ....................................................................518
14.1.3
Attaching the spout extension (12- and 14-row) .....................................................................519
14.1.4
Attaching the spout end piece (8- and 10-row) .......................................................................520
14.1.5
Setting the folding out and folding in speed of the spout extension .......................................521
14.1.6
Removing the spout end piece (8- and 10-row) ......................................................................522
14.1.7
Setting the start-up safety mechanism ....................................................................................523
15
Start-up – Attaching and removing the front attachment ..............................................................524
15.1
Adapting the adapter frame of the front attachment ......................................................................525
15.2
Preparing the pendulum frame for installation of the front attachment ..........................................526
15.3
Mounting the front attachment .......................................................................................................527
15.4
Removing EasyFlow.......................................................................................................................534
15.5
Switching off EasyFlow ..................................................................................................................536
16
Start-up – attaching the rear weight .................................................................................................537
17
Driving and Transport ........................................................................................................................540
17.1
Starting the engine .........................................................................................................................541
17.1.1
Observing indicator lamps.......................................................................................................543
17.2
Behaviour after the engine has stalled ...........................................................................................545
17.3
Starting with a back-up battery.......................................................................................................546
17.4
Starting up the machine .................................................................................................................547
17.4.1
General on Driving ..................................................................................................................547
17.4.2
Switching on road travel mode ................................................................................................548
17.4.3
Driving forwards ......................................................................................................................548
17.4.4
Setting the acceleration behaviour ..........................................................................................549
17.5
Reversing .......................................................................................................................................550
17.6
Cruise control .................................................................................................................................551
17.6.1
Saving speed for operation with cruise control .......................................................................551
17.6.2
Activating cruise control ..........................................................................................................552
17.6.3
Deactivating cruise control ......................................................................................................552
9
Table of Contents
17.7
Stopping .........................................................................................................................................553
17.7.1
Stopping with the multi-function lever .....................................................................................553
17.7.2
Stopping with the foot brake ...................................................................................................554
17.8
Applying the parking brake .............................................................................................................555
17.9
Switching off the engine .................................................................................................................555
17.10 Switching off the machine ..............................................................................................................556
17.11 Preparations for road travel ............................................................................................................557
17.11.1 Transport position ...................................................................................................................557
17.11.2 Folding/raising the front attachment into the transport position ..............................................558
17.11.3 Swivelling the discharge chute into transport position ............................................................561
17.12 Behaviour when driving downhill ....................................................................................................562
17.13 Towing ............................................................................................................................................563
17.13.1 Releasing the holding brake manually ....................................................................................564
17.14 Preparing the machine for transport ...............................................................................................565
18
Operation .............................................................................................................................................566
18.1
Raising and lowering the front attachment .....................................................................................566
18.2
Aligning the pendulum frame .........................................................................................................567
18.3
Operating the machine with a trailer ..............................................................................................568
18.3.1
Connecting trailer ....................................................................................................................569
18.3.2
Connecting trailer for Italy .......................................................................................................571
18.3.3
Disconnecting trailer ................................................................................................................573
18.3.4
Disconnecting trailer for Italy ...................................................................................................575
18.4
Additional axle (optional) ................................................................................................................576
18.4.1
Maize operating mode.............................................................................................................576
18.4.2
Grass mode .............................................................................................................................576
18.4.3
XDisc mode .............................................................................................................................576
18.4.4
Manual check of additional axle basic function .......................................................................577
18.4.5
Function test of additional axle automatic functions ...............................................................577
18.5
Field mode ......................................................................................................................................578
18.5.1
Field mode on slopes ..............................................................................................................579
18.5.2
Fast change of direction of travel (fast reversing) ...................................................................580
18.5.3
Emergency switching of the chopping drum ...........................................................................581
18.5.4
Operating intake/front attachment ...........................................................................................582
18.5.5
Metal detection ........................................................................................................................586
18.5.6
RockProtect (option) ...............................................................................................................586
18.5.7
Lifting unit control ....................................................................................................................587
18.5.8
Setting discharge chute...........................................................................................................589
18.5.9
Traction control system ...........................................................................................................591
18.5.10 Automatic steering system ......................................................................................................592
18.5.11 ConstantPower load limit control (optional) ............................................................................595
18.5.12 AutoScan (optional) .................................................................................................................596
18.5.13 Adjusting the chop length ........................................................................................................597
18.5.14 Adjusting the electrically adjustable discharge accelerator rear (optional) .............................598
18.5.15 Removing Crop Flow Blockages in the Area of the Crop Flow ...............................................599
18.5.16 Blowing device for intake unit and grinding device .................................................................603
19
Settings ...............................................................................................................................................604
19.1
Optimising Crop Flow .....................................................................................................................605
19.2
Optimising discharge capacity of the machine ...............................................................................606
19.2.1
Adjusting overhang of the cutting blades ................................................................................606
10
Table of Contents
19.2.2
Setting Drum Base ..................................................................................................................607
19.2.3
Setting the Discharge Accelerator Rear Wall..........................................................................609
19.2.3.1
Settings on the installed grass channel ...........................................................................609
19.2.3.2
Settings if a corn conditioner is installed ..........................................................................615
19.2.4
Setting the throttle valves ........................................................................................................621
20
Maintenance ........................................................................................................................................622
20.1
Tightening torques..........................................................................................................................622
20.1.1
Metric Thread Screws with Control Thread.............................................................................622
20.1.2
Metric Thread Screws with Fine Thread .................................................................................623
20.1.3
Metric Thread Screws with Countersunk Head and Hexagonal Socket .................................623
20.2
Maintenance table ..........................................................................................................................624
20.3
General maintenance work ............................................................................................................635
20.3.1
Fire extinguisher ......................................................................................................................635
20.3.2
Cleaning the machine completely ...........................................................................................636
21
Maintenance – Basic Machine ...........................................................................................................637
21.1
Windscreen washer system ...........................................................................................................637
21.2
Maintenance - air conditioning system and heating .......................................................................638
21.2.1
Components of the air conditioning system ............................................................................638
21.2.2
Refrigerant ..............................................................................................................................639
21.2.3
Collector / dryer .......................................................................................................................639
21.2.4
Filling Quantities of Consumables Air Conditioning System ...................................................640
21.2.5
Checking Refrigerant Condition and Filling Quantity ..............................................................640
21.2.6
Changing / cleaning the fresh air filter ....................................................................................641
21.2.7
Changing / cleaning the circulation filter .................................................................................642
21.3
Cleaning the Radiator and the Radiator Compartment ..................................................................644
21.4
Maintenance of brake (Bosch) .......................................................................................................645
21.5
Belt drives .......................................................................................................................................646
21.5.1
Checking the belt pulley ..........................................................................................................646
21.5.2
Checking the power belt..........................................................................................................646
21.5.3
Sieve drum drive .....................................................................................................................647
21.6
Tyres...............................................................................................................................................648
21.6.1
Checking and maintaining tyres ..............................................................................................648
21.6.2
Wheel mounting ......................................................................................................................649
21.6.3
Running direction of the tyres .................................................................................................649
21.6.4
Changing the tyre size ............................................................................................................649
21.6.5
Servicing the trailer coupling ...................................................................................................650
21.6.6
Servicing the trailer coupling for Italy ......................................................................................651
21.6.7
Clean silage additive system ..................................................................................................652
21.7
Dosing quantity of the silage additive system ................................................................................652
21.8
Cable winch ....................................................................................................................................653
22
Maintenance – Engine ........................................................................................................................654
22.1
Contamination in the engine compartment ....................................................................................655
22.2
Cleaning the Engine Compartment with Compressed Air..............................................................655
22.3
Engine oil level ...............................................................................................................................656
22.3.1
Checking Engine Oil Level ......................................................................................................657
22.4
Fuel system ....................................................................................................................................658
22.5
Refuelling .......................................................................................................................................658
22.5.1
Replacing fuel prefilter with water separator – Drain condensation water ..............................659
11
Table of Contents
22.5.2
Replacing the fuel prefilter hand pump ...................................................................................660
22.5.3
Replacing the fuel filter insert ..................................................................................................661
22.5.4
Venting the fuel system ...........................................................................................................661
22.6
Maintenance cooling system (engine) ............................................................................................662
22.6.1
Coolant ....................................................................................................................................662
22.7
Checking the engine pipework .......................................................................................................665
22.8
Air filter ...........................................................................................................................................667
22.8.1.1
Cleaning air filter (BiG X 600-2, BiG X 700-2, BiG X 770-2) ...........................................667
22.8.1.2
Cleaning air filter (BiG X 850-2, BiG X 1100-2) ...............................................................668
22.8.1.3
Replacing safety cartridge (BiG X 850-2,BiG X 1100-2) .................................................669
23
Maintenance – compressed air system ...........................................................................................670
23.1
Compressed-air reservoir ...............................................................................................................671
23.1.1
Checking the drain valve .........................................................................................................671
24
Maintenance – supply system ...........................................................................................................672
24.1
Feed Attachment ............................................................................................................................672
24.1.1
Remove the feed attachment with front attachment ...............................................................672
24.1.2
Attaching the feed attachment with front attachment ..............................................................678
24.1.3
Remove the feed attachment with installation cart .................................................................683
24.1.4
Attaching the feed attachment with installation cart ................................................................688
24.2
Grinding the cutting blade ..............................................................................................................693
24.3
Re-adjusting or replacing the grinding stone .................................................................................697
24.3.1
Checking the grinding stone ...................................................................................................698
24.3.2
Re-adjusting the grinding stone ..............................................................................................699
24.3.3
Replacing the grinding stone ..................................................................................................701
24.4
Re-adjusting or changing the cutting blades ..................................................................................703
24.4.1
Rotating the chopping drum ....................................................................................................704
24.4.2
Re-adjusting or changing the chopping blades on chopping drums with 20, 28, 36 blades ...705
24.4.3
Re-adjusting or changing the chopping blades on chopping drums with 40, 48 blades .........711
24.4.3.1
Locking the chopping drum ..............................................................................................711
24.4.3.2
Readjusting the Cutting Blades .......................................................................................712
24.4.3.3
Changing Cutting Blades .................................................................................................714
24.5
Working with half the number of cutting blades .............................................................................717
24.6
Turning or replacing the counterblade ...........................................................................................718
24.7
Turning or changing the conveyor bars on the pre-compression roller .........................................721
24.8
Adjusting the distance between the scraper and flat roller ............................................................723
24.9
Adjusting the gap between the baling roller and scraper ...............................................................725
24.10 Setting the tension springs on the feed attachment .......................................................................726
25
Maintenance - hydraulic system .......................................................................................................727
25.1
Over-pressure valves .....................................................................................................................727
25.2
Hydraulic oil ....................................................................................................................................727
25.3
Hydraulic tank .................................................................................................................................728
25.3.1
Oil level check and oil change on the hydraulic tank ..............................................................728
25.3.2
Change return suction filter .....................................................................................................730
25.4
High-pressure filter .........................................................................................................................731
26
Maintenance - Gearbox ......................................................................................................................732
26.1
Overview of the drives ....................................................................................................................732
26.1.1
Maintenance of power take-off gear .......................................................................................733
26.1.2
Maintenance of transfer gearbox ............................................................................................736
12
Table of Contents
26.1.3
26.1.4
26.1.5
26.1.6
26.1.7
Maintenance of lower roller gearbox .......................................................................................737
Maintenance of angular gearbox ............................................................................................738
Maintenance upper roller gearbox ..........................................................................................739
Maintenance worm drive .........................................................................................................740
Wheel hub gearbox maintenance ...........................................................................................741
27
Maintenance – electrical system .......................................................................................................744
27.1
Battery ............................................................................................................................................745
27.1.1
Removing and Installing Battery .............................................................................................746
27.1.2
Servicing the battery ...............................................................................................................747
27.2
Three-phase generator...................................................................................................................748
27.3
Starter .............................................................................................................................................749
28
Maintenance – lubrication .................................................................................................................750
28.1
Manual lubrication chart .................................................................................................................751
29
Maintenance – central lubrication system .......................................................................................753
29.1
Overview of the distributor blocks of the central lubrication system ..............................................753
29.2
Lubricant filling ...............................................................................................................................756
29.2.1
Visual filling level control .........................................................................................................756
29.2.2
Topping up lubricant................................................................................................................757
29.2.3
Signal displays ........................................................................................................................759
29.2.4
Fault ........................................................................................................................................760
30
Placing in Storage ..............................................................................................................................761
30.1
At the End of the Harvest Season ..................................................................................................761
30.2
Before the Start of the New Season ...............................................................................................762
31
Disposal of the machine ....................................................................................................................763
31.1
Disposal of the machine .................................................................................................................763
32
Appendix .............................................................................................................................................764
32.1
Parameter List ................................................................................................................................764
32.2
Error Messages ..............................................................................................................................765
33
Index ....................................................................................................................................................766
13
To this Document
2
To this Document
2.1
Validity
These operating instructions apply to the following machine types:
– Precision forage harvester BiG X 600-2
– Precision forage harvester BiG X 700-2
– Precision forage harvester BiG X 770-2
– Precision forage harvester BiG X 850-2
– Precision forage harvester BiG X 1100-2
2.2
Re-Ordering
If this document should become wholly or partially unusable, you can request a replacement
document by stating the order number mentioned on the cover sheet.
2.3
Further applicable documents
To ensure that the machine is used safely and as intended, observe the following further
applicable documents:
Part designation
Manufacturer
Document type
Diesel engine
MAN Truck & Bus AG
Operating instructions
Diesel engine
MAN Truck & Bus AG
Consumables specifications
Diesel engine
MAN Truck & Bus AG
Maintenance booklet
Electrical system
KRONE
Circuit diagram
KRONE
Spare parts list
BIG X 600-2
BIG X 700-2
BIG X 770-2
Spare parts
Spare parts list
BIG X 850-2
BIG X 1100-2
2.4
Target group of this document
This document aims at the operators of the machine fulfilling the minimum requirements of
personnel qualification; refer to chapter entitled Safety “Personnel Qualification”.
14
To this Document
2.5
How to use this document
Table of contents/headers:
The table of contents as well as the headers in this instruction are used for quick navigation in
the chapters.
Index directory:
In the index directory, you can find information on the desired subject via catchwords which are
in alphabetical order. The index directory can be found on the last page of this instruction.
Cross references:
Cross references to another place in the operating instructions or to another document are in
the text and specify the chapter and subchapter or section. The designation of subchapters or
sections is presented in quotation marks.
Example:
Check that all screws on the machine are tight, refer to chapter Maintenance, “Tightening
Torques”.
The subchapter or the section can be found via an entry in the table of contents and in the index
directory.
2.6
Directional information
Directional information in these operating instructions, such as front, rear, right and left, applies
in the direction of travel of the machine.
Orientation information concerning a diagram of a machine detail refers to the diagram itself and
is not relative to the direction of travel.
2.7
Designation
Throughout the remainder of these operating instructions, the “exact forage harvester BiG X”
will be referred to by the terms “machine” and “vehicle”.
15
To this Document
2.8
Means of representation
The following means of representation are used in these operating instructions:
Action step
A bullet point () identifies an action step which is to be implemented, for example:
• Adjust outside mirror.
Sequence of actions
Several bullet points (), which are located in front of a sequence of action steps, identify a
sequence of actions which are to be implemented step by step, for example:
• Loosen the counter nut.
• Screw in the screw.
• Tighten the counter nut.
List
Em dashes (–) identify lists, for example:
– Brakes
– Steering
– Lighting
Note with information and recommendations
Additional information and recommendations for a trouble-free and productive operation of the
machine are identified as follows:

NOTE
When driving on roads, the general requirements or special conditions of the Road Traffic Type
Approval Law and the Road Traffic Law must be observed.
Warning of material and environmental damage
Warnings of material and environmental damage are separated from the remaining text in these
operating instructions and are identified with the word CAUTION.
Example of a warning of material and environmental damage:
CAUTION
Gearbox damage if oil level is too low!
If the oil level is too low, the gearboxes may be damaged.
• Regularly check the oil level in the gearboxes and top up as required.
• Check the oil level in the gearboxes approx. 3 to 4 hours after switching off the machine
and only when the machine is horizontal.
16
To this Document
2.9
Representation and use of warnings
Warnings of dangers are separated from the remaining text in these operating instructions as
warnings and are identified with a danger sign and signal words.
The warnings must be read and the procedures followed to prevent injury.
2.9.1
Explanation of the danger sign
This is the danger sign which warns of a risk of injury:
Follow all instructions which are identified with the danger sign to prevent injuries or death.
2.9.2
Explanation of the signal words:
The warnings are introduced by signal words which indicate the hazard level.
DANGER
The signal word DANGER warns of a hazardous situation which will result in serious injuries or
death if the warning is ignored.
WARNING
The signal word WARNING warns of a hazardous situation which will result in serious injuries
or death if the warning is ignored.
CAUTION
The signal word CAUTION warns of a hazardous situation which will result in minor to
moderate injuries if the warning is ignored.
Example of a warning:
WARNING
Eye damaged caused by flying dirt particles!
When cleaning with compressed air, dirt particles are ejected at high speed.
• Keep people away from the working area.
• Wear suitable work clothes when performing cleaning work with compressed air (e.g. eye
protection).
17
Safety
3
Safety
Ver
3.1
Intended use
R
This machine is a forage harvester and is used to forage crops. The crops designated for the
intended use of this machine is in conjunction with
– a maize header for harvested thin-stemmed crops,
– a direct cutting system for mown stalk and leaf crops,
– a pick-up on the ground for lying, mown stalk and leaf crops,
– a front attachment for smallwood crops from cut groves.
The machine is designed exclusively for use in agriculture and may only be used when
– all safety equipment is available according to the operating instructions and is in the
protective position,
–
all safety instructions in the operating instructions, see chapter Safety, "Basic safety
instructions", have been observed and complied with.
The machine may be used only by people who satisfy the personnel qualification requirements
designated by the machine manufacturer. These requirements are described in the chapter
Safety "Personnel qualifications".
These operating instructions are a component of the machine and must therefore be at hand
when the machine is in use. The machine may be operated only when the operator has
received training and in compliance with these operating instructions. If the machine is used for
applications which are not described in these operating instructions, this may result in serious
injuries or death and damage to the machine and other property.
Unauthorised modifications to the machine may affect the properties of the machine or disrupt
proper operation. For this reason, unauthorised modifications will exclude any liability of the
manufacturer for consequential damage.
Intended use also includes observance of the operating, maintenance and repair conditions
specified by the manufacturer.
18
Safety
3.2
Improper use
Any use beyond intended use (as described above) is regarded as improper use and is
therefore misuse according to the Machinery Directive. The user, and not the manufacturer, is
liable for any resulting damage.
Such misuse is for example:
–
Using the machine when stationary
–
Processing of crops which are outside the intended use of the machine, see chapter Safety,
"Intended use"
Transportation of people
Transportation of crops
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Exceeding the permitted technical gross weight
Non-compliance with the warnings on the machine and in the operating instructions
Use of areas and rooms as a workstation or maintenance station which are not described
as such in the operating instructions
Performing setting, cleaning, repair and maintenance work contrary to the information in the
operating instructions
Performing troubleshooting, setting, cleaning, repair and maintenance work while the drives
are running
Performing setting, cleaning, repair and maintenance work by personnel who do not have
the proper training
Unauthorised modifications to the machine
Attachment of unauthorised or unapproved additional equipment
Use of spare parts which are not KRONE original spare parts
Unauthorised modifications to the machine may affect the properties of the machine and/or
jeopardise safe use or disrupt proper operation. For this reason, unauthorised modifications will
exclude any liability of the manufacturer for consequential damage.
19
Safety
3.3
Service life of the machine
–
–
–
–
–
–
20
The service life of this machine strongly depends on proper use and maintenance as well as
the operating conditions.
Permanent operational readiness as well as long service life of the machine can be
achieved by observing the instructions and notes of these operating instructions.
After each season of use, the machine must be checked thoroughly for wear and other
damage.
Damaged and worn parts must be replaced before placing the machine into service again.
After the machine has been used for five years, carry out full technical inspection of the
machine. According to the results of this inspection, a decision concerning the possibility of
reuse of the machine should be taken.
Theoretically, the service life of this machine is unlimited as all worn or damaged parts can
be replaced.
Safety
3.4
Basic safety instructions
Non-compliance with the safety instructions and warnings
Non-compliance with the safety instructions and warnings may result in injuries and damage to
the environment and property.
3.4.1
Importance of the operating instructions
The operating instructions are an important document and a part of the machine. They are
intended for the user and contain information relevant to safety.
Only the procedures indicated in the operating instructions are reliable. If the operating
instructions are not followed, people may be seriously injured or killed.
• Before using the machine for the first time, read and follow all the "Basic safety instructions"
in the chapter Safety.
• Before working, also read and observe the respective sections in the operating instructions.
• Retain the operating instructions and ensure that they are always available.
• Hand over the operating instructions to subsequent users.
3.4.2
Personnel qualification
If the machine is not used properly, people may be seriously injured or killed. To avoid
accidents, each person who works with the machine must satisfy the following minimum
requirements:
– He is physically capable of controlling the machine.
– He can work safely with the machine in accordance with these operating instructions.
– He understands the method of operation of the machine within the scope of his work and
can identify and avoid the dangers associated with the work.
– He has read the operating instructions and can implement the information in the operating
instructions accordingly.
– He is familiar with driving vehicles safely.
– For road travel he has adequate knowledge of the highway code and has the stipulated
driving licence.
21
Safety
3.4.3
Children in danger
Children cannot assess danger and behave unpredictably.
As a result, children are especially at risk.
– Children are especially at risk when climbing up and down the machine.
– Children cannot be adequately secured on the self-propelled harvester.
– Vibrations can be particularly harmful to children's bodies.
– Children may cause the machine to make hazardous movements.
• Never take children on the self-propelled harvester.
• Keep children away from the machine.
• Keep children away from consumables.
• Especially before starting up and moving the machine, ensure that there are no children in
the danger zone.
3.4.4
Connecting front attachments or trailers
If front attachments or trailers are incorrectly connected to the machine, there is a risk of
causing serious accidents.
• When connecting front attachments or trailers, follow all operating instructions:
– The operating instructions for the front attachment
– The operating instructions for the trailer
– The operating instructions for the machine
– The operating instructions for the universal shaft
• Follow the coupling instructions, see chapter Installing and removing front attachments or
chapter Start-up, "Trailer operation".
• Note the modified driving behaviour of the combination.
3.4.5
Structural changes to the machine
Structural changes and enhancements may impair the functionality and operational safety of the
machine. As a result, people may be seriously injured or killed.
• Have structural changes and enhancements performed by an authorised service centre
only.
22
Safety
3.4.6
Additional equipment and spare parts
Additional equipment and spare parts, which do not comply with the requirements of the
manufacturer, may impair the operational safety of the machine and cause accidents.
• To ensure operational safety, use original or standard parts which comply with the
requirements of the manufacturer. If in doubt, have parts verified by the dealer or
manufacturer.
3.4.7
Workstations and passengers
Control of the moving machine
The moving machine requires the driver to react quickly at any time. Otherwise, the machine
may move in an uncontrolled manner and seriously injure or kill people.
• Start the engine from the driver's seat only.
• Never leave the driver's seat while the machine is moving.
• Never climb in or out of the machine while it is moving.
On-board instructors when machine is working (passenger seat)
On-board instructors may fall and be injured due to movements of the machine.
• Use the passenger seat for temporary training, instruction or short-term monitoring
purposes only.
• Never use the passenger seat for road travel.
23
Safety
3.4.8
Operational safety: Technically perfect condition
Operation only when the machine has been started up correctly
If the machine is not started up correctly according to these operating instructions, the
operational safety of the machine is not ensured. As a result, accidents may occur and people
may be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not use the machine unless it has been started up correctly, see chapter Start-up.
Technically perfect condition of the machine
Improper maintenance and adjustment may affect the operational safety of the machine and
cause accidents. As a result, people may be seriously injured or killed.
• Perform all maintenance and adjustment work according to the chapters Maintenance and
Adjustment.
• Before performing any maintenance or adjustment work, shut down and safeguard the
machine, see chapter Safety "Shutting down and safeguarding the machine".
Danger resulting from damage to the machine
Damage to the machine may impair the operational safety of the machine and cause accidents.
As a result, people may be seriously injured or killed. The following parts of the machine are
particularly important for safety:
– Brakes
– Steering
– Safety devices
– Connecting devices
– Lighting
– Hydraulic system
– Tyres
– Universal shaft
If there are doubts about the operational safety of the machine, for example due to leaking
consumables, visible damage or an unexpected change to the driving behaviour:
• Shut down and safeguard the machine, see chapter Safety, "Shutting down and
safeguarding the machine".
• Immediately eliminate potential causes of damage, for example heavy soiling, or tighten
slack screws.
• Determine the cause of damage according to these operating instructions, see chapter
Malfunctions – Cause and remedy.
• If possible, repair the damage according to these operating instructions.
• In the case of damage which may affect operational safety and cannot be repaired
according to these operating instructions: Have damage repaired by a qualified service
centre.
24
Safety
Technical limit values
If the technical limit values of the machine are not observed, the machine may be damaged. As
a result, accidents may occur and people may be seriously injured or killed. Observance of the
following technical limit values is particularly important for safety:
– Permitted gross weight
– Maximum axle loads
– Maximum payloads
– Maximum trailer load
– Maximum bearing load
– Maximum transport height
– Maximum speed
• Observe limit values, see chapter Description of machine, "Technical data".
3.4.9
Danger zones
Danger zones of the machine
The area around the machine is a danger zone.
There are the following hazards in this danger zone:
– The self-propelled harvester and the front attachment / the trailer may start moving or rolling
away and run over people.
– If the lifting unit is unintentionally actuated, the machine may make hazardous movements.
– Defective or insecurely attached electrical cables may cause fatal electric shocks.
– Defective or insecurely attached hydraulic or pneumatic lines may become detached and
flail around. Hydraulic oil may escape under high pressure and cause serious injuries to the
skin or face.
– Clothing may become caught and wrapped around an exposed, rotating shaft or a damaged
or incorrectly installed universal shaft.
– When the drive is switched on, machine parts may rotate or swivel.
– Hydraulically raised machine parts may descend unnoticed and slowly.
If the danger zone is not monitored by the driver, people may be seriously injured or killed.
• Keep people away from the danger zone of the machine, front attachment / trailer.
• Do not switch on the drives and engine until there is nobody in the danger zone.
• Before working in front of and behind the self-propelled harvester and in the danger zone of
the machine: Shut down and safeguard the machine, see chapter "Shutting down and
safeguarding the machine". This also applies to brief inspection work. Many serious
accidents in front of and behind the self-propelled harvester and the front attachment /
trailer occur due to negligence and with the engine running and the machine rolling away or
unsecured.
• Consider the information in all relevant operating instructions.
– The operating instructions for the machine
– The operating instructions for the front attachment
– The operating instructions for the trailer
– The operating instructions for the universal shaft
25
Safety
Danger zone between machine and front attachment
People situated between the machine and front attachment may be seriously injured or killed if
the machine rolls away or moves.
• Before working between the machine and the front attachment: Shut down and safeguard
the machine, see chapter Safety, "Shutting down and safeguarding the machine". This also
applies to brief inspection work. Many serious accidents occur due to negligence and with
the engine running and the machine rolling away or unsecured.
• If the lifting unit has to be actuated, keep all people away from the movement area of the
machine parts to be raised.
Danger zone of ejected objects
Crops, foreign objects in the crops, and detached blades may shoot out and injure or kill people.
• Before starting the machine, direct all people out of the danger zone of the machine.
• If people are in the danger zone of the machine, switch off drives and diesel engine
immediately.
Danger zone when drive switched on
When the drive is switched on, there is a danger to life from rotating and swivelling machine
parts. There must be nobody in the danger zone of the machine.
• Before starting the machine, direct all people out of the danger zone of the machine.
• If a hazardous situation arises, switch off drives and diesel engine immediately.
Danger zone of quick connector
People may be caught, pulled in and seriously injured by the quick connector and the driven
components.
Before switching on the quick connector:
• Attach all safety devices and move them into protective position.
• Ensure that the selected speed and direction of rotation of the quick connector agree with
the permitted speed and direction of rotation of the machine.
• Ensure that nobody is in the danger zone of the machine or the universal shaft.
26
Safety
Danger zone due to coasting machine parts
When the drives have been switched off, the following machine parts will coast:
– Universal shaft
– Header
– Feed drive rollers
– Chopping drum
– Corn conditioner
– Discharge accelerator
– Drive belts
As long as the machine parts are coasting, an alarm sounds.
On machines with a built-in main drive brake, an alarm only sounds if the drives have not come
to a standstill 10 seconds after switching off.
When machine parts are coasting, people may be seriously injured or killed.
• Wait until the coastdown alarm stops sounding.
• Do not touch machine parts until they have come to a standstill.
3.4.10
Keeping safety devices functional
If safety devices are missing or damaged, people may be seriously injured or killed by moving
machine parts.
• Replace damaged safety devices.
• Re-install all removed safety devices and all other parts and move them into protective
position before starting up the machine.
• If it is doubtful whether all safety devices have been correctly installed and are functional,
have a service centre check them.
27
Safety
3.4.11
Personal protective equipment
The wearing of personal protective equipment is an important safety measure. Missing or
unsuitable personal protective equipment increases health risks and injuries.
Personal protective equipment is for example:
– Work gloves
– Safety boots
– Close-fitting protective clothing
– Hearing protection
– Safety glasses
• Specify and provide personal protective equipment for the particular job.
• Use only personal protective equipment which is in proper condition and offers effective
protection.
• Adjust personal protective equipment to the person, for example the size.
Wear suitable clothing
Loose clothing increases the risk of it becoming caught or wrapped around rotating parts and of
it becoming caught on protruding parts. As a result, people may be seriously injured or killed.
• Wear tight-fitting clothing.
• Never wear rings, chains or other items of jewellery.
• Cover long hair with a hairnet.
• Wear sturdy shoes or protective work boots.
3.4.12
Safety signs on the machine
Safety stickers on the machine warn of hazards in danger areas and are an important
component of the safety equipment of the machine. Missing safety stickers increase the risk of
serious and fatal injuries.
• Clean dirty safety stickers.
• After cleaning, always check that safety stickers are complete and legible.
• Immediately replace missing, damaged and unrecognisable safety stickers.
• Provide spare parts with the designated safety stickers.
Description, explanation and order numbers of the safety stickers, see chapter Safety, "Safety
stickers on the machine".
28
Safety
3.4.13
Traffic safety
Dangers in road traffic
If the machine exceeds maximum dimension and weights specified by national law and if it is
not properly lit, other road users could be endangered when driving on public highways.
• Before road travel, ensure that the maximum permissible dimensions, weights and axle
loads, supported loads and hitching loads which apply according to national law for driving
on public roads are not exceeded.
• Before road travel, switch on lighting and ensure the proper function.
Dangers when driving on roads and in fields
The self-propelled harvester has special handling characteristics which also depend on the
operational state and on the ground. If the driver does not consider changed handling
characteristics, he may cause accidents.
• Observe procedures for driving on roads and in fields, see chapter Driving and
transportation.
Prepare the machine for road travel
If the machine is not prepared properly for road travel, serious accidents may occur with traffic.
• Before travelling on the road, always prepare the machine for road travel, see chapter
Driving and transportation, "Preparations for road travel".
Danger of overturning
The machine may overturn when driving on slopes. As a result, accidents may occur and
people may be seriously injured or killed. The risk of overturning depends on many factors.
• Observe procedures for driving, see chapter Driving and transportation.
Dangers when cornering with pulled trailer
When cornering, the trailer swivels out stronger than the self-propelled machine.
This may result in accidents.
• Consider the larger swivel range.
• Note persons, oncoming traffic and obstacles when performing a turn.
3.4.14
Parking the machine safely
The parked machine may overturn. People may be crushed and killed.
• Park the machine on a stable and even surface.
• Before adjusting, repairing, servicing or cleaning the machine, ensure that it is securely
positioned. If in doubt, support the machine.
• In the chapter Driving and transportation note the section "Parking the machine".
Unattended parking
Adults and children are at risk from an inadequately secured and unattended parked machine
with or without a connected front attachment or trailer.
• Before leaving the machine: Shut down and safeguard the machine, see chapter Safety,
"Shutting down and safeguarding the machine".
29
Safety
3.4.15
Consumables
Unsuitable consumables
Consumables which do not comply with the requirements of the manufacturer, may impair the
operational safety of the machine and cause accidents.
• Use only consumables which comply with the requirements.
For the requirements of fuels, see chapter Description of machine, "Consumables".
Fuel is harmful
Fuels are carcinogenic. If fuel is swallowed or fuel vapours inhaled, the fuel may cause organ
damage.
• Do not inhale the vapours.
• Do not swallow the fuel.
• To prevent skin damage, avoid skin contact with the fuel.
• Wear suitable gloves and goggles.
Protection of the environment and disposal
Consumables such as diesel fuel, brake fluid, antifreeze and lubricants may damage the
environment and the health of people.
• Do not release consumables into the environment.
• Absorb leaked consumables with an absorbent material or with sand, place in a liquid-tight
labelled container and dispose of according to the official regulations.
30
Safety
3.4.16
Chemicals
Keep cab free of chemicals
Harmful and aggressive chemicals will pollute the air in the cab. Harmful and aggressive
reactive substances are for example:
– Solvents
– Fuels
– Oils and greases
– Cleaning agents
– Acids
These chemicals may stick to clothing and enter the cab in this way. Gases and liquids may
escape even from closed tanks. The chemicals may impair health and the ability to concentrate
and cause accidents as a result.
Electrical components may be damaged, for example control units and plug connections. This
may result in malfunctions, system failures or short-circuits, fire and accidents.
• Keep the cab interior clean.
• Do not store or transport any harmful of aggressive chemicals in the cab.
• Before entering the cab, remove clothing which may be contaminated with harmful and
aggressive chemicals.
• Before entering the cab, remove soil and other substances from shoes or boots. The soil
may be contaminated with chemicals.
31
Safety
3.4.17
Dangers associated with the operational environment
Danger of fire
To reduce the risk of fire, regularly check the machine for crop or dirt deposits and clean as
required.
In very dry operating conditions, when crop or dust is being swirled up, the accumulation of
grass, crop and other deposits may increase. To ensure that the machine functions perfectly
and to reduce the risk of fire, all accumulations must be removed.
•
•
Check and clean the machine every day before using it for the first time.
Regularly check and clean the machine during the working day.
Life-threatening electric shock from overhead lines
The machine may reach the height of overhead lines when the discharge chute is folded out
and folded in, during operation or by antennas. This may cause voltage to flash over to the
machine and cause a fatal electric shock or fire.
• When folding the discharge chute in and out, keep an adequate distance from the power
transmission lines.
• Never fold the discharge chute out or in near pylons or power lines.
• When the discharge chute is folded out, keep an adequate distance from the power
transmission lines.
• To avoid a potential electric shock caused by a flashover, never leave or climb into the
forage harvester under overhead lines.
Characteristics of a flashover from overhead lines
Flashovers generate high voltages on the outside of the machine. On the ground around the
machine there are large potential differences. Life-threatening electric shocks are generated by
taking large steps, lying down on the ground or supporting yourself with your hands on the
ground (step voltage).
• Do not leave the cab.
• Do not touch metal parts.
• Do not make a conductive connection to earth.
• Warn people: Do not approach the machine. Voltages on the ground may result in serious
electric shocks.
• Wait for help from professional rescue teams. The overhead line must be switched off.
If people have to leave the cab despite the flashover, for example because there is an imminent
threat to life due to fire:
• Jump away from the machine. Jump into a safe standing position. Do not touch the outside
of the machine.
• Move away from the machine in small steps.
32
Safety
3.4.18
Sources of danger on the machine
Noise may damage your health
When working continuously with the machine, health may be damaged, such as hardness of
hearing, deafness or tinnitus. When the machine is used at high speed, the noise level also
increases.
• Before starting up the machine, estimate the risk caused by noise. Depending on the
ambient conditions, working hours and the working and operating conditions of the
machine, specify and use suitable hearing protection. In doing so, consider the sound
pressure level, see chapter Description of machine, "Airborne noise emission".
• Specify rules for the use of hearing protection and for the working time.
• During operation keep windows and doors of the cab closed.
• Remove hearing protection when travelling on the road.
Vibrations may damage your health
Vibrations generated by the combination of the self-propelled harvester and front attachment
may seriously damage your health and have long-term consequences. The type of work and the
connected devices, working hours, speeds, tyre pressure and ground conditions also affect the
loads.
• Observe the maintenance intervals for the seat, see chapter Maintenance of basic machine,
"Maintenance table".
• Adjust the driver's seat to the operator, see chapter "Adjusting driver's seat".
Liquids under pressure
The following liquids are under high pressure:
– Hydraulic oil
– Diesel fuel
– Engine coolant
– Refrigerant for the air conditioning system
Liquids under high pressure may penetrate the body through the skin and cause serious
injuries.
• If a damaged pressure system is suspected, immediately contact a qualified service centre.
• When searching for leaks, use suitable aids to avoid the risk of injury.
• Never search for leaks with bare hands. Even a pin-sized hole may cause serious injuries.
• Keep body and face away from leaks.
Danger of infection!
• If liquids penetrate the body, immediately consult a doctor. The liquid must be removed from
the body as quickly as possible, as there is a risk of infection.
33
Safety
Hot liquids
Risk of burns and scalding from hot liquids!
• When draining hot consumables, wear protective gloves.
• If required, leave liquids and machine parts to cool down before performing repair,
maintenance and cleaning work.
A damaged compressed air system may damage your health
Damaged compressed air hoses in the compressed air system may cause hoses to tear off.
Flailing hoses may cause serious injuries.
• If it is suspected that the compressed air system is damaged, immediately contact a service
centre.
Toxic exhaust gases
Exhaust gases may seriously damage your health or be fatal.
• While the engine is running, provide adequate ventilation to prevent prolonged exposure to
exhaust gases.
• Do not leave the engine running in a closed room unless there is a suitable exhaust gas
extraction system.
Hot surfaces
The following components may become hot during operation:
– Engine
– Exhaust system
– Cooling hoses
– Hydraulic system
– Wheel motor
– Distributor and intermediate gearbox
– Intermediate gear of the drive pump
Danger of burns!
• Maintain an adequate distance from hot surfaces.
• Leave machine parts to cool down and wear protective gloves.
34
Safety
3.4.19
Dangers associated with certain activities: Climbing up and down
Climbing up and down safely
People who behave carelessly when climbing up and down may fall off the ladder. People, who
climb onto the machine without using the designated ladders, may slip, fall and seriously injure
themselves.
Dirt as well as operating fluids and lubricants may cause you to lose your footing.
• Always keep the steps and platforms clean and in a proper condition to prevent people from
losing their footing.
• Never climb up and down while the machine is moving.
• Face the machine when climbing up and down.
• When climbing up and down, maintain a three-point contact with the steps and hand rails
(always two hands and one foot or two feet and one hand on the machine).
• When climbing up and down, never use the controls as handles. Inadvertent activation of
the controls may cause functions to be unintentionally actuated which could be hazardous.
• When climbing down, never jump off the machine.
• Climb up and down using only the steps and platforms designated in these operating
instructions, see chapter Description of machine, "Ladders".
3.4.20
Dangers associated with certain activities: Work on the machine
Work on the machine only when it has been shut down
If the machine has not been shut down and safeguarded, parts may move unintentionally or the
machine may start moving. As a result, people may be seriously injured or killed.
• Before performing any work on the machine, such as making adjustments, cleaning,
preparing for road travel, preparing for work, servicing or rectifying malfunctions, shut down
and safeguard the machine, see chapter Safety "Shutting down and safeguarding the
machine".
Maintenance and repair work
Incorrect maintenance and repair work will endanger operational safety. As a result, accidents
may occur and people may be seriously injured or killed.
• Only perform work which is described in these operating instructions. Before performing any
work, shut down and safeguard the machine, see chapter Safety, "Shutting down and
safeguarding the machine".
• All other maintenance and repair work may be performed by a qualified service centre only.
35
Safety
Raised machines and loads
Raised loads may fall. Hydraulically raised front attachments and machine parts may
inadvertently drop and crush and kill people. The raised machine may drop, roll away or
overturn and kill people.
• Do not stand under raised loads. First put the loads down.
• Before performing any work under the machine, securely support the machine, see chapter
Safety, "Securely supporting the raised machine and machine parts".
• Before performing any work on or under raised machine parts, lower the machine parts or
secure them mechanically with rigid safety supports or with a hydraulic shut-off device to
prevent them from dropping.
Danger associated with welding work
Improper welding work will endanger the operational safety of the machine. As a result,
accidents may occur and people may be seriously injured or killed.
• Never weld on the following parts:
– Engine
– Gearboxes
– Components of the hydraulic system
– Components of the electronics
• Have welding work performed by a KRONE dealer only or contact our customer service.
Before performing welding work on the forage harvester:
• Switch off the main battery switch.
• Pull the engine control plug out of the engine block.
• Disconnect the batteries.
• Connect the positive and the negative cables electroconductively to the machine.
• Attach the earthing of the welding device near the welding points.
• Caution when performing welding work near electrical and hydraulic parts, plastic parts and
accumulators. The parts may be damaged, endanger people or cause accidents.
• Before performing welding work on front attachments, disconnect the front attachment from
the forage harvester. Follow the operating instructions for the front attachment.
36
Safety
3.4.21
Dangers associated with certain activities: Checking and charging batteries
If the battery is handled incorrectly, e.g. inadvertent connection of the battery terminal to a metal
object, excessive charging in conjunction with a spark, the battery may explode. People may be
injured or burnt by the explosion or burnt by spraying battery acid.
• Check the condition of the battery using a suitable voltmeter.
• To charge the battery outside the self-propelled harvester, follow the operating instructions,
see chapter Maintenance of electrical system "Battery".
• Keep fire, sparks and naked flames away from the battery.
• To prevent acid from leaking, transport the battery in the installation position only.
3.4.22
Dangers associated with certain activities: Working on wheels and tyres
Fitting/removing wheels and tyres
Improper fitting or removal will endanger operational safety. As a result, accidents may occur
and people may be seriously injured or killed.
The fitting of wheels and tyres requires adequate knowledge and approved tools.
• If there is a lack of knowledge, have the wheels and tyres fitted by the KRONE dealer or by
a qualified tyre service.
• When fitting tyres on the wheel rims, never exceed the maximum permitted pressure
specified by the tyre manufacturers, otherwise the tyre or even the wheel rim may explode.
• When fitting the wheels, tighten the wheel nuts to the stipulated torque, see chapter
Maintenance "Tyres".
3.4.23
Behaviour in hazardous situations and when accidents occur
Neglected or incorrect procedures in hazardous situations may obstruct or prevent the rescue of
people in danger. Difficult rescue conditions will impair the chances of helping and healing the
injured.
• In principle: Switch off the machine.
• Gain an overview of the hazardous situation and identify the cause of the hazard.
• Safeguard the accident location.
• Rescue people from the danger zone.
• Withdraw from the danger zone and do not enter again.
• Alert rescue teams and, if possible, fetch help.
• Take immediate life-saving measures.
37
Safety
3.5
Safety routines
3.5.1
Stopping and securing the machine
WARNING
Crush hazard due to movement of the machine or machine parts!
If the machine has not come to a standstill, the machine or parts of the machine can move
unintentionally. People may be seriously injured or killed as a result.
• Before leaving the machine, shut down and secure the machine.
To park the machine securely:
• Park the machine on a stable, paved and even surface.
• Switch off the drives and wait until coasting parts have come to a standstill.
• Apply the parking brake.
• Switch off the engine, remove the ignition key and take it with you.
• Switch off the main battery switch.
• Secure the machine against rolling away with wheel chocks and the parking brake.
3.5.2
Supporting lifted machine and machine parts securely
WARNING
Crushing hazard due to movement of the machine or machine parts!
If the machine is not securely supported, the machine or machine parts may roll, fall or sag.
Thus there is a risk of crushing or death.
• Before working on or under raised parts: Securely support the machine or machine parts.
In order to securely support the machine or machine parts:
• Shut down and safeguard the machine, refer to “Shutting down and Safeguarding the
Machine”.
• Securely support the raised machine or machine parts.
• Never support the raised machine or machine parts with materials which may give way.
• Never use hollow blocks or bricks to support the machine or machine parts. Hollow blocks
and bricks may break in case of permanent load.
• Never work under the machine or machine parts that are held up by a car jack.
38
Safety
This page has been left blank deliberately.
39
Safety
3.6
Safety stickers on the machine
3.6.1
Position and meaning of the safety stickers on the machine
Fig. 1
40
Safety
1) Order No. 27 002 054 0 (1x)
L
CAUTION
-
CAUTION
To avoid serious injury or death.
- Read and understand operator´s manual before operating
equipment.
- Lower implement, stop tractor engine and remove key before
leaving operator´s platform.
- Keep all shields and guards in place.
- Keep hands, feet and clothing away from moving parts.
- Keep riders off the machine.
- Make certain everyone is clear of the machine before starting
tractor engine and starting.
- Do not allow unqualified operator to run equipment.
- Do not operate equipment in transport position.
- Never lubricate, adjust, unclog or service the equipment with
tractor engine is running.
- Wait for all movement to stop before opening shield or
servicing machine.
- Never work underneath equipment without securely
supporting.
To a v oid s e rious injury or de a th
Re a d a n d u n d e rs ta n d o p e ra to r´s m an u a l b e fo re o p e ra ti n g e q u i p m e n t.
Lower implement, stop tractor engine and remove key before
l e a v i n g o p e ra to r´s p l a tfo rm .
Ke e p a l l s h i e l d s a n d g u a rd s i n p l a ce .
Ke e p h a n d s fe e t a n d c l o th i n g a wa y fro m m o v i n g p a rts .
Ke e p ri d e rs o ff th e m a c h i n e .
Make certain every one is clear of the machine before starting
tra c to r e n g i n e a n d s ta rti n g .
Do n o t a l l o w u n q u a l i fi e d o p e ra to r to ru n e q u i p m e n t.
Do n o t o p e ra te e q u i p m e n t i n tra n s p ort p o s i ti o n .
Never lubricatem, adjust, unclog or service the equipment with
tra c to r e n g i n e i s ru n n i n g .
Wait for all movement to stop before opening shield or servicing
m ac hine.
Ne v e r wo rk u n d e rn e a th e q u i p m e n t wi th o u t s e c u re l y s u p p o rti n g .
27 002 054 0
2) Order No. 27 014 830 0 (1x)
––
WARNING
Do not operate machine unless an approved fire extinguisher is
installed.
3) Order No. 27 014 824 0 (1x)
-
Make cer tai n ever y
WARNING
To avoid serious injury or death.
- Do not ride on platform or ladder.
- Do not carry passengers.
––
4) Order no. 27 018 121 0 (2x)
DANGER
Avoid death or serious injury from entanglement in the feed rolls.
The harvester takes crop faster than you can release it.
NEVER feed with hands or feet or use as a manually-fed
stationary machine.
Disengage drives and shut off engine before manually unplugging.
41
Safety
Fig. 2
42
Safety
5) Order no. 27 014 829 0 (8x)
WARNING
To avoid serious injury or death.
- Do not touch any moving machine components.
- Wait until all machine components have completely stopped.
––
6) Order no. 27 018 120 0 (1x)
DANGER
Rotating cutterhead can
cause serious injury or
death.
Never oper ate the
cutterhead without the
feedr oll housing.
DANGER
Rotating knifes can cause serious injury or death.
Never operate engine with feedroll housing open.
27 018 120 0
7) Order No. 27 008 201 0 (1x)
L
WARNING
Severe injuries of fingers and hands.
Wear protective gloves to remove/ install blades.
8) Order No. 27 014 826 0 (2x)
WARNING
To avoid personal injury.
- Close protective guard before grinding knives.
- Keep protective guard closed while grinding knives.
43
Safety
Fig. 3
44
Safety
9) Order No. 942 538 0 (1x)
L
WARNING
Avoid sever e injur y to eyes
and skin fr om sulfur ic acid.
Wear face mask, gloves and
goggles when ser vicing batter y.
WARNING
Avoid severe injury to eyes and skin from sulfuric acid.
Wear face mask, gloves and goggles when servicing battery.
942 538 -0
10) Order no. 942 549 0 (2x)
L
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury.
Look and listen for rotation evidence.
Do not remove or open the guard or the access door until all the
components have stopped.
11) Order No. 27 014 825 0 (2x)
WARNING
Hot surfaces
- Keep sufficient distance from hot surfaces.
- Allow to cool before servicing.
12) Order no. 942 546 0 (2x)
L
WARNING
WARNING
Avoid bodily injuries from rotating engine fan.
Keep hands out of fan discharge area when engine is running.
Avoid bodily injur y fr om
r otating engine fan.
Keep hands out of fan
dischar ge ar ea when
engine is r unning.
942 546 - 0
45
Safety
Fig. 4
46
Safety
13) Order No. 942 551 0 (1x)
L
CAUTION
1. Keep all shields in place.
2. Disengage and shut off all
engine and/or motor power
before servicing or uncloggin machine.
3. Keep hand, feet and clothing away from power942 551 -0
driven parts.
CAUTION
1. Keep all shields in place.
2 Disengage and shut off all engine and/or motor power before
servicing or unclogging machine.
3. Keep hand, feet and clothing away from power-driven parts.
14) Order No. 942 552 0 (1x)
L
CAUTION
Avoid bodily injury.
Before searching for metal:
1. Disengage all drives.
CAUTION
Avoid bodily injury.
Before searching for metal:
1. Disengage all drives.
2 Shut off engine. Remove key.
3. Wait until all parts stop moving.
2. Shut off engine. Removey.ke
3. Wait until all parts stop moving.
942 552 -0
15) Order No. 942 542 0 (1x)
L
CAUTION
Before operating machine, add rear ballast as specified in
Operator’s Manual. Failure to add proper amount of ballast can
result in vehicle instability and loss of steering control.
16) Order No. 27 014 828 0 (2x)
WARNING
To avoid serious injury or death
Wheels must be chocked to secure machine against unintended
rolling.
47
Safety
Fig. 5
48
Safety
17) Order No. 942 547 0 (1x)
L
DANGER
To avoid injury or death, do not contact electric lines.
To avoid injury or death,
do not contact electric
lines.
18) Order No. 27 014 827 0 (1x)
WARNING
To avoid serious injury or death
Shut off engine and remove key before performing repair work or
maintenance.
49
Safety
Fig. 6
50
Safety
19) Order no. 27 018 052 0 (1x)
L
WARNING
High pressure oil easily punctures skin. Causing serious
injury, gangrene or death
• If injured, seek emergency medical help.
• Immediate surgery is required to remove oil.
• Do not use finger or skin to check for leaks.
• Lower load or relieve hydraulic pressure before loosening
fittings.
20) Order no. 27 018 009 0 (6x)
L
WARNING
27 018 009 0
WARNING
High pressure oil can cause severe injury
• Hydraulic accumulators contain oil and gas under high
pressure.
• Relieve pressure before servicing hydraulic system.
• Hydraulic accumulators may be removed and repaired by a
qualified workshop only
21) Order No. 27 007 573 0 (1x)
L
EM ERGENC Y
EXIT
EMERGENCY EXIT
1. Pull top handle down.
2. Push window out.
27 007 573 0
22) Order No. 942 550 0 (1x)
ACHTUNG
ATTENTION
1 .ALLE SCHUTZVORRICHTUNEN
M ÜSSENANGEBRACHT SEIN.
2. VOR DEM WARTEN ODER REINIGEN
DER M ASCHINEALLEANTRIEBE
AUSKUPPELN UND M T
OOR ABSTELLEN.
1 . PLACERTOUS LES ÉCRANS DE
PROTECTION.
2 . DEBRAYERTOUTES LES COM M ANDES
ETARRÊTER LE M OTEUR POUR
TOUS
TR
AVAUX DE SERVICE ET ENTRETIEN
DE LA M ACHINE.
ATTENTION
1. Keep all shields in place.
2 Disengage all power and shut off engine before servicing or
cleaning machine.
1 .KEEP ALL SHIELDS IN PLACE.
2 .DISSENGAGEALL POWERAND SHUT
OFF ENGINE BEFORE
SERVICING
OR CLEANING M ACHINE:
1. COLOCARTODAS AS TAMPAS DE
PROTECÇÃO.
2. COLOCARTODAS AS ALAVANCAS DE
COM ANDO EM PON
TO M ORTO E
PARAR O M OTOR SEM PRE QUE SE
EFECTUAR QUALQUER TRABALHO DE
REPARAÇÃO E M ANUTENÇÃODA
M AQUINA.
942 550 - 0
51
Safety
3.6.2

Reordering the safety stickers
NOTE
Every safety sticker is provided with an order number and can be ordered directly from the
manufacturer or from the authorised dealer, see chapter Safety "Contact".
3.6.3

Attaching the safety stickers
NOTE
When attaching safety stickers, the contact surface on the machine must be clean and free of
dirt, oil and grease to ensure optimum adhesion of the stickers.
3.6.4
52
Contact for KRONE NORTHAMERICA
Mailing address
Krone North America, Inc.
P.O. Box 18880
Memphis, TN 38181-0880
USA
Physical address
Krone North America, Inc.
3363 Miac Cove
Memphis, TN 38118
USA
Phone
+1 901 842-6011
Fax
+1 901 842-6016
E-mail
[email protected]
Internet
www.krone-northamerica.com
Safety
3.7
Safety Equipment
3.7.1
Ladder
WARNING
Risk of injury when climbing up and down.
Careless behaviour when climbing up and down can result in people falling from the ladder.
Persons climbing onto the machine outside the designated ladders can slip, fall and seriously
injure themselves. Dirt as well as consumables and lubricants can impair one's footing and
stability.
• Use the designated ladders only.
• Always keep the steps and platforms clean and in a proper condition to prevent people from
losing their footing.
• Never climb up and down while the machine is moving.
• Face the machine when climbing up and down.
• When climbing up and down, maintain a three-point contact with the steps and hand rails
(always two hands and one foot or two feet and one hand on the machine).
• When climbing up and down, never use operating elements as handles. Inadvertent
actuation of operating elements can lead to accidental actuation of functions that pose a
danger.
• When climbing down, never jump off the machine.
Fig. 7
•
•
To safely climb up to the cabin and back down again, tread only on the steps of the
ladder (3). When doing so, use the handrails (3).
To safely climb onto the top of the machine and back down again, use the step (2) and the
right handrail.
53
Safety
3.7.2
Main battery switch
Fig. 8
Position I
Position 0
The electrical circuit is closed.
The electrical circuit is interrupted.
The main battery switch (2) is located on the left side of the machine behind the cover beside
the battery compartment.
The main battery switch (2) is used to switch on or interrupt the machine’s power supply.
After using the machine, in emergencies and for repairs, interrupt the circuit.
To protect the machine's electronics, do not actuate the main battery switch until the ignition key
is in the "STOP" position.
• To interrupt the circuit, turn the main battery switch (2) to position "0".
If the ignition key can no longer be reached during an emergency, the main battery switch can
also be actuated when the ignition key is not in the "STOP" position.
54
Safety
Abb. 9
The battery compartment is located on the left-hand machine side behind the cover (1).
Opening the battery compartment
Pre-condition:
– The side flap at the front left is open.
•
•
3.7.3
Open the lock (2) on both sides.
Unhook and remove the cover (1) including the battery cover.
Seat switch in the driver's seat
There is a seat switch in the driver's seat. This seat switch is used to query whether the driver's
seat is occupied.
When the driver stands up from the driver's seat, the feed drive and the front attachment are
switched off after 7 s and cannot be switched on again while the driver's seat remains
unoccupied.
When the driver's seat is occupied again, the feed drive and the front attachment can be
switched on again.
55
Safety
3.7.4
Fire extinguisher
Fig. 10
The machine must not be operated without an on-board fire extinguisher which contains
at least 6 kg of extinguishing agent. The manufacturer recommends a powder fire
extinguisher for fire classes A, B and C.
The retainer (1) for the fire extinguisher is located in the direction of travel on the left on top of
the machine and can be reached via the ladder and the platform.
• Before the starting up machine, ensure that the fire extinguisher is operational.
Have the fire extinguisher registered. Only then can you be sure that the required
inspections (every two years in Germany) will be carried out.
The test intervals may differ in other countries. In this case, the instructions on the fire
extinguisher of the respective countries shall be applicable.
• Observe regulations of the respective countries.
3.7.5
Wheel chocks
1
BX480360
Fig. 11
The machine is equipped with two wheel chocks (1), which are located at the front left behind
the side flap.
• Ensure that the wheel chocks are always carried.
When switching off the machine, always secure it against rolling away with both wheel chocks.
• Fully open the wheel chocks and place them tightly against the wheels, either in front or
behind depending on the direction of the slope, to prevent the machine from rolling away.
56
Safety
3.7.6
Emergency exit
Fig. 12
In case of an emergency, the side window on the RH side in the direction of travel, next to the
driver's seat, can be opened as an exit door.
To exit the machine in an emergency:
• Swivel the lever (1) forward until it reaches the locking point.
• Pull out the safety pin (2).
• Open the side window (3) completely.
Fig. 13
•
•
•
Climb through the emergency exit over the right-hand platform using the handrail and step
onto the tool box (2).
Open the locks (1) on the tool box and fold down the cover (3).
Exit the machine through the cover (3).
57
Safety
If the optional silage tank is installed on the right mudguard, the right side window cannot be
used as an emergency exit.
Fig. 14
•
•
58
In case of danger, strike a cabin window with an emergency hammer (1) stored in the cabin.
If possible, use the ladder on the left side of the machine to exit the machine safely.
Safety
3.7.7
Instantaneous stop switch in the cab
Fig. 15:
The instantaneous stop switch in the cab (1) stops the working functions of the machine, the
diesel engine continues running.
To actuate the instantaneous stop switch:
• Press the instantaneous stop switch (1) until it engages.
To re-activate the machine after the instantaneous stop switch has been pressed:
• Move the depressed instantaneous stop switch (1) to its initial position by turning it slightly
in a clockwise direction.
3.7.8
Quick-Stop Switch Grinding Control Unit
The instantaneous stop switch for the grinding control unit is located at the front right outside
the cabin.
Fig. 16:
The instantaneous stop switch on the grinding control unit (1) stops the working functions of the
machine, the diesel engine and the travelling gear continue running.
To actuate the instantaneous stop switch:
• Press the instantaneous stop switch (1) until it engages.
To re-activate the machine after the instantaneous stop switch has been pressed:
• Move the depressed instantaneous stop switch (1) to its initial position by turning it slightly
in a clockwise direction.
59
Machine Description
4
Machine Description
4.1
Machine overview
Fig. 17
60
Item
Component
Item
Component
1
Cabin with control console
9
Air filter
2
Front left side flap
10
Cooler
3
Hydraulic oil tank
11
Spout
4
Left side flap
12
Battery compartment with batteries
5
Components for crop flow
13
Left ladder
6
Connection console for front
attachments
14
Grinding device
7
Intake
15
Grinding control unit with
instantaneous stop switch
8
Central lubrication system
Machine Description
Fig. 18
Item
Component
Item
Component
1
Right side flap
8
Traction drive pump
2
Coolant compensation tank
9
Rear ladder
3
Front right side flap
10
Trailer coupling
4
Working hydraulics block
11
Tailgate
5
Fuel tank
12
Engine
6
Tool box with cover. Folded out, it
is used as a step for an emergency
exit and for filling the optional silage
tank.
13
Intake/front attachment pump
7
Wheel hub gearbox
61
Machine Description
4.1.1
Overview of crop flow
Fig. 19
Item
62
Component
Item
Component
1
Feed drive rollers, bottom
2
Feed drive rollers, top
3
Chopping drum
4
Counterblade
5
Drum base
6
Transfer shaft
7
Corn conditioner/grass chute
(not shown)
8
Discharge accelerator
9
Rear wall discharge accelerator
10
Channel support
Machine Description
Overview of main valve block
The main valve block is located behind the front side flap on the right side of the machine.
Fig. 20
Valve
Function
Valve
Function
Y20
Turn spout "left"
Y29
Extend supporting wheels/lower
plant divider
Y21
Turn spout "right"
Y30
Grinding device "Cylinder in"
Y22
"Lift" discharge chute flap
Y31
Grinding device "Cylinder out"
Y23
"Lower" discharge chute flap
Y37
Pendulum frame "rotate left"
Y24
"Raise" upper discharge chute
Y38
Pendulum frame "rotate right"
Y25
"Lower" upper discharge chute
Y39
Auto steering left
Y26
Fold in front attachment "transport
position"
Y40
Auto steering right
Y27
Fold out front attachment "working
position"
Y66
Lock steering on left
Y28
Retract supporting wheels/raise plant
divider
Y67
Lock steering on right
63
Machine Description
4.2
Identification Plate
Abb. 21
Die Maschinendaten befinden sich auf dem Typenschild (1). Dieses befindet sich an der
rechten vorderen Maschinenseite.
4.3
Information Required for Questions and Orders
Type/
trade name
Vehicle identification number
(VIN)
machine number

NOTE
The entire identification plate represents a legal document and must not be altered or rendered
illegible!
When asking questions concerning the machine or ordering spare parts, be sure to provide type
designation, vehicle ID number and the year of manufacture. To ensure that these data are
always available, we recommend that you enter them in the fields above.

4.3.1
64
NOTE
Original KRONE spare parts and accessories authorised by the manufacturer help to ensure
safety. The use of spare parts, accessories or additional equipment not manufactured, tested or
approved by KRONE will exclude any liability for consequential damage.
Contact for KRONE NORTHAMERICA
Mailing address
Krone North America, Inc.
P.O. Box 18880
Memphis, TN 38181-0880
USA
Physical address
Krone North America, Inc.
3363 Miac Cove
Memphis, TN 38118
USA
Phone
+1 901 842-6011
Fax
+1 901 842-6016
E-mail
[email protected]
Internet
www.krone-northamerica.com
Machine Description
4.4
Description of foraging process
Grass mode with pick-up
To use grass mode, the forage harvester must be fitted with a suitable header, approved by the
manufacturer, and the crop must lay cut in a swath.
The header picks up the crop from the field and conveys it in front of the intake in the middle of
the forage harvester.
The intake of forage harvester draws in the crop with its rollers, compresses it and transports it
to the chopper unit.
The chopper unit chops up the crop with the blades on its rotating chopping drum and conveys
it through the grass channel to the discharge accelerator.
The discharge accelerator accelerates the crop to such an extent that they are conveyed at high
speed through the spout and out of the forage harvester, e.g. into a trailer pulled next to the
forage harvester.
Maize mode
To use the forage harvester in maize mode, it must be fitted with maize header approved by the
manufacturer.
The maize header uses its cutting system to cut the crops and conveys them in front of the
intake of the forage harvester in the middle of the vehicle.
The intake of forage harvester draws in the crops with its rollers, compresses them and
transports them to the chopper unit.
The chopper unit chops up the crops with the blades on its rotating chopping drum and conveys
them through the grass channel to the discharge accelerator.
The corn conditioner strikes the grains in the crops using two profiled rollers and conveys the
crops into the discharge accelerator.
The discharge accelerator accelerates the crops to such an extent that they are conveyed at
high speed through the spout and out of the forage harvester, e.g. into a trailer pulled next to
the forage harvester.
65
Machine Description
4.5
Picking up the crops
The crops are picked up by front-mounted front attachments which can be changed for the
corresponding application depending on the season.
All front attachments approved by the manufacturer,.
–
"EasyFlow" pick-up
Fig. 22
The pick-up (1) driven by the machine picks cut, stem-like crops in the swath off the ground
and conveys them with an auger conveyor to the intake unit of the machine.
3
BX480364
Fig. 23
– The maize front attachments "EasyCollect" 450-2, 600-2 and 750-2 (3) are in two parts and
have a right and left frame. The frames are folded up once for transport (both outriggers are
vertical).
66
Machine Description
4.6
Feed drive
The feed drive compresses the crops and conveys them to the chopper unit.
The feed drive consists of a housing with six rollers. The lower three rollers are permanently
mounted in the housing and the upper roller pack is spring-mounted. The spring force allows the
upper rollers to exert a defined prebaling pressure on the crops.
Drive
The lower intake rollers are powered by the hydrostatic drive by means of a cardan shaft. From
there, the drive energy is distributed via the lower and upper roller gearboxes, which drive the
upper rollers.
The stepless speed adjustment of the feed drive, which can be performed from the cab, enables
the chop length to be adjusted steplessly and manually.
Fig. 24
Metal detection
The front lower roller is equipped with metal detection system that reacts to magnetisable steel.
For this reason, the front upper and the front lower rollers are made of stainless steel.
If a material passes through the magnetic field which triggers metal detection, the front
attachment drive is switched off and the intake is stopped by the quick stop function.
67
Machine Description
4.7
Cutting Drum Unit
In the chopper unit the crops are cut to a set chop length.
Design
The chopping drum unit consists of a cutting drum housing in which the chopping drum is
mounted.
The chopping drum is a closed cylindrical body, on which the chopping blades are arranged in a
V-shape. Each chopping blade is screwed to the chopping drum with three hexagon head
screws.
Fig. 25
Drum base
The base of the chopper unit can be adjusted to optimise the crop flow and is spring-mounted
so that it can move downward when material accumulates in the crop flow.
Cutting blades
The chopping blade (1) is available in two versions: Grass and maize blades, which differ in
terms of blade geometry.
The chopping blades can be adjusted to the counterblade and replaced using the fastening
screws.
Counterblade
The counterblade (2) is available in two versions, which differ in terms of the type of overlay
welding/geometry.
The counterblade can be adjusted with the grinding control unit at the front left of the machine.
Cutting length
The chopping drum cuts the crops to a defined value.
The chop length depends on the number of chopping blades on the cutting drum and the speed
of the feed drive.
Grinding device
The grinding device grinds the chopping blades on the chopping drum using a grinding stone
which is moved back and forth by the rotating chopping drum. During each grinding cycle, the
sharpening stone is automatically re-adjusted.
68
Machine Description
4.8
Main drive brake
Fig. 26
To reduce the coast down time of the chopping drum, the main drive is equipped with a
hydraulically controlled brake (1).
If the chopping drum is switched off in field mode, the engine brakes from full speed to the idle
speed of 1100 rpm. After that, the main coupling is switched off.
Then the brake main drive is automatically activated and brakes the chopping drum to a
complete stop in a short time.
After max. 10 sec. the entire crop flow stops.
4.9
Corn conditioner
The corn conditioner, which is installed in the crop flow for the maize crops, strikes the grains
contained in the crops to improve the digestibility of the forage.
The corn conditioner features two toothed rollers which are driven by a power belt.
Both rollers can be used with 105, 123, 144 or with 166 teeth.
The rollers rotate at different speeds and the space between them can be adjusted from the
terminal to obtain an optimum work result.
Optionally the corn conditioner can also be fitted with discs.
4.10
Discharge accelerator
The discharge accelerator accelerates the crops out of the corn conditioner or to the grass
channel and conveys them further into the discharge chute.
The discharge accelerator rear is spring-mounted so that it can move backwards when material
accumulates in the crop flow.
To optimise the discharge capacity or to reduce wear, the rear wall can be adjusted.
69
Machine Description
4.11
Discharge chute
The accelerated crops are conveyed out of the forage harvester via the discharge chute.
The discharge bend can be rotated via a hydraulic motor and the discharge angle can be
adjusted to obtain different discharge widths of the crops.
4.12
Travelling gear
The traction drive is fully hydraulic and is driven by hydraulic motors with wheel motors on the
front wheels (optionally: on all four wheels).
In road mode the traction drive steplessly reaches speed ranges from 0 to 40 km/h, backwards
from 0 to 14 km/h.
In field mode speeds can also be adjusted steplessly forwards from 0 to 25 km/h and
backwards from 0 to 14 km/h.
In field mode a traction control system ("Traction Control") is active.
The traction control system can be adjusted in two stages.
TC II allows increased slip. This setting is usually used in maize mode to ensure sufficient
propulsion even under difficult conditions.
TC I allows only little slip (spinning wheels). This setting is usually used in grass mode to
protect the sward.
The selection of the traction control system stage does not depend on the mode (grass/maize)
set on the terminal.
4.13
Central lubrication system
The central lubrication system supplies selected lubrication points cyclically with an adjustable
amount of lubricant.
4.14
System Settings
The working units, drive and power transmission components are monitored by sensors.
Malfunctions are displayed on the terminal.
The working units, drive and power transmission components can be calibrated from the
terminal.
4.15
On-board power supply voltage
The voltage of the on-board power supply is 12 V.
4.16
Silage additive system (option)
Fig. 27
The silage additive system consisting of the silage additives tank (2) including a pump unit for
rough dosing of silage additives is mounted on the right mudguard of the machine.
Dosing can take place via nozzles or a flow sensor.
The fill level can be read from the filling level indicator (1) on the tank or in the info centre.
The system is controlled from the info centre.
70
Machine Description
4.17
Ladders and flaps
WARNING
Risk of injury when climbing up and down.
Careless behaviour when climbing up and down can result in people falling from the ladder.
Persons climbing onto the machine outside the designated ladders can slip, fall and seriously
injure themselves. Dirt as well as consumables and lubricants can impair one's footing and
stability.
• Use the designated ladders only.
• Always keep the steps and platforms clean and in a proper condition to prevent people from
losing their footing.
• Never climb up and down while the machine is moving.
• Face the machine when climbing up and down.
• When climbing up and down, maintain a three-point contact with the steps and hand rails
(always two hands and one foot or two feet and one hand on the machine).
• When climbing up and down, never use operating elements as handles. Inadvertent
actuation of operating elements can lead to accidental actuation of functions that pose a
danger.
• When climbing down, never jump off the machine.
71
Machine Description
4.17.1
Ladder to the cab
WARNING
Risk of injury due to falling from a great height!
The ladder allows operators to climb to heights from which a fall could lead to severe to fatal
injuries.
• Do not climb up or down the ladder while the machine is moving.
• It is impermissible to carry passengers on ladder steps or platforms.
• Always keep the ladder clean. In particular, make sure that it is free of deposits of grease or
other slippery substances.
Fig. 28
To reach the cab safely:
• Climb on to the machine via the ladder (1) and the platforms (2) only, using the hand rails
(3).
72
Machine Description
4.17.2
Opening the cabin door
Fig. 29
Fig. 30
To open the cab door from outside:
• Use the door key to unlock the door lock (1); press in the button (2) and open the door.
To open the cab door from inside:
• Lift the door opening lever (3) and open the door.
73
Machine Description
4.17.3
Opening and closing flaps
WARNING
Risk of injury from moving parts!
If the flaps for the engine compartment and crop flow are opened while the diesel engine is
running, people may be injured by moving machine parts.
• Do not open the flaps until the diesel engine is at a standstill.
• Ensure that the flaps are closed when starting the diesel engine.
Fig. 31
–
Opening the flap:
• Use an open-jawed spanner or ring spanner (NW 13) or a screwdriver to unlock the flap
lock (1) by turning to the left.
• Open the flap using the handle (2).
Closing the flap:
• Close the flap by pressing closed (without tools).
74
Machine Description
4.17.4
Right side flap
Fig. 32:
The right side of the engine compartment is located under the right side flap.
4.17.5
Left side flap
Fig. 33:
The left side of the engine compartment is located under the left side flap.
4.17.6
Tailgate engine compartment
Fig. 34:
Access the rear part of the engine compartment via the tailgate:
Open the flap (1).
•
Fold down the ladder (2).
75
Machine Description
4.17.7
Front right side flap
Fig. 35:
To access the hydraulic block behind the open front right side flap:
• Open the lock (2) of the tool box (1) and fold down the lid (3).
• Use the lid and top of the tool box as steps.
Do not use the step when the tool box is swivelled open.
4.17.8
Front left side flap
Fig. 36:
To access the cooler compartment containing the coolers and air filters:
• Open the front left side flap (1).
• Enter the cooler compartment via the steps (3) on the ladder and the standing area (2). Use
the handrails (4).
76
Data memory
5
Data memory
A variety of electronic components of the machine contains data memories that save
temporarily and permanently technical information on machine condition, events and errors.
This technical information generally documents the condition of a part, module, system or of the
environment:
–
Operating states of system components (e.g. filling levels)
–
Status messages of the machine and its single components (e.g. number of revolutions of
wheel, wheel speed, retardation of movements, lateral acceleration)
–
Malfunctions and defects in important system components (e.g. light and brakes)
–
Reactions of machine in special driving situations (e.g. actuation of airbag, installing stability
control systems)
–
Ambient conditions (e.g. temperature)
These data are exclusively of a technical nature. They are used to detect and remedy errors as
well as to optimize machine functions. There is no possibility to create motion profiles on driven
routes from these data.
If services are occupied (e.g. repair services, service processes, warranty cases, quality
assurance), this technical information can be read by employees of service network (including
manufacturer) from the event and error data memory by means of special diagnostic units.
There you receive further information, if necessary. After the error has been remedied, the
information in the error storage is either deleted or overwritten continuously.
When using the machine, situations are possible in which these technical data in connection
with other information (accident protocol, damage to the machine, testimonies etc.) could
become transferable to people - if applicable in consultation with an expert.
Additional functions regulated by a contractual agreement with the customer (e.g. remote
maintenance) permit the transmission of certain machine data from the machine.
77
Technical Data
6
Technical Data
6.1
Technical Data of the Machine
Fig. 37
Machine dimensions
Length (L)
8335-9440 mm
Width (B)
3000-3920 mm
Height (H)
3915-3980 mm
Centre distance (A)
3250 mm
Centre distance front axle-additional axle
(not shown)*
1060 mm
*
•
•
78
for 3-axle machines
The width and height are dependent on the tires fitted.
The length depends on the machine type, the front attachment and spout used.
Technical Data
Fig. 38
Max. working height of the machine
a
Spout 8 rows
6668 +50 mm
b
Spout 10 rows
6928 +50 mm
c
Spout 12 rows
7126 +50 mm
d
Spout 14 rows
7305 +50 mm
79
Technical Data
Lashing points
Fig. 39
To connect lashing equipment, appropriate lashing points are available on the axles and
bumper of the machine.
80
Item
Explanation
1
Front axle left
2
Front axle right
3
rear axle, left side
4
Rear axle right
5
Bumper left
6
Bumper right
Technical Data
Engine data
BiG X 600-2
Manufacturer
MAN
Engine type
Design
D 2868
V-8
Emissions level
TIER 3
Displaced volume
16.16 l
Engine performance (ECE R120)
570 kW (775 HP)
Max. continuous chopping output X-Power
441 kW (600 HP)
Cooling system
Diesel injection process
Liquid cooling
Common Rail injection
Starter
24 V (7 kW)
Alternator
12 V (270 A)
Engine data
BiG X 700-2
Manufacturer
MAN
Engine type
Design
D 2868
V-8
Emissions level
TIER 3
Displaced volume
16.16 l
Engine performance (ECE R120)
570 kW (775 HP)
Max. continuous chopping output X-Power
492 kW (669 HP)
Max. continuous chopping output Eco Power
374 kW (509 HP)
Cooling system
Diesel injection process
Liquid cooling
Common Rail injection
Starter
24 V (7 kW)
Alternator
12 V (270 A)
Engine data
BiG X 770-2
Manufacturer
MAN
Engine type
Design
D 2868
V-8
Emissions level
TIER 3
Displaced volume
16.16 l
Engine performance (ECE R120)
570 kW (775 HP)
Max. continuous chopping output X-Power
552 kW (750 HP)
Max. continuous chopping output Eco Power
404 kW (550 HP)
Cooling system
Diesel injection process
Liquid cooling
Common Rail injection
Starter
24 V (7 kW)
Alternator
12 V (270 A)
81
Technical Data
Engine data
BiG X 850-2
Manufacturer
MAN
Engine type
D 2862
Design
V-12
Emissions level
TIER 3
Displaced volume
24.2 l
Engine performance (ECE R120)
625 kW (850 HP)
Max. continuous chopping output X-Power
607 kW (825 HP)
Max. continuous chopping output Eco Power
469 kW (638 HP)
Cooling system
Liquid cooling
Diesel injection process
Common Rail injection
Starter
24 V (7 kW)
Alternator
12 V (270 A)
Engine data
BiG X 1100-2
Manufacturer
MAN
Engine type
D 2862
Design
V-12
Emissions level
TIER 3
Displaced volume
24.2 l
Engine performance (ECE R120)
793 kW (1,078 HP)
Max. continuous chopping output X-Power
758 kW (1,031 HP)
Max. continuous chopping output Eco Power
469 kW (638 HP)
Cooling system
Liquid cooling
Diesel injection process
Common Rail injection
Starter
24 V (7 kW)
Alternator
12 V (270 A)
Travelling gear
82
Type
Hydrostatic drive with axial piston adjusting motor
with wheel motor
Forward speed in field mode
0-25 km/h
Forward speed in road mode
0-40 km/h
Suspension
Hydropneumatic
All-Wheel Drive
Standard equipment
Traction control system
Standard equipment
Technical Data
Tyres
Front axle
Rear axle
Equipment
Tyre dimensions
Standard*
650/75 R32
Option*
680/85 R32
Option*
710/75 R34
Option*
710/70 R42
Option*
800/65 R32
Option*
800/70 R38
Option*
900/60 R32
Option*
900/60 R38
Standard*
540/65 R30
Option*
600/70 R28
Option*
620/70 R30
Option*
710/60 R30
* Restricted use depending on harvesting work
83
Technical Data
Tyre pressure for version with 2 axles
Abb. 40
84
Technical Data
Tyre pressure for version with 3 axles
Abb. 41
85
Technical Data
Wheel nuts
Tightening torque front axle
510 Nm
Tightening torque rear axle
270 Nm
Maximum permitted inclination angle
Longitudinal inclination (up and down)
25% (14°)
Transversal inclination (side)
50% (26.5°)
Trailer coupling
permitted D-value
permitted bearing load on the coupling point
max. trailer load (braked)
permitted towing rings
78.2 kN
max. 2,000 kg*
11,000 kg
DIN11026,11034,74053
*) Observe maximum permitted rear axle load!
Trailer coupling for Italy
permitted bearing load on the coupling point
max. 1,500 kg*
max. trailer load (unbraked)
6,000 kg
permitted towing rings
E, E2, E3
*) Observe maximum permitted rear axle load!
Electrical system
Alternator power
14 V/270 A
Number of batteries
2
Battery voltage
(2x) 12 V
Battery capacity
(2x) 135 Ah
Vibration values
The determined values are below the values required according to the EU Vibration Directive
2002/44/EC.
• The vibration values for hand-arm vibrations are below 2.5 m/s².
• Concerning whole body vibrations the action value of 0.5 m/s² is not exceeded.
Noise in the operator station (closed cabin)
86
BiG X 700-2
75.7 dB
pA
BiG X 1100-2
76.6 dB
pA
Technical Data
Chopper unit
Drum width /
drum diameter
800 mm/660 mm
Blade arrangement
V-shaped
Number of blades
20
28
36
40
48
Chop length range
5-29 mm
4-21 mm
3-17 mm
2.5-15 mm
2-12 mm
Cuts per minute
12,500
17,500
22,500
25,500
30,000
Stepless drum adjustment /
suspension of the drum base
Standard
Corn conditioner
Rollers with 105 teeth: standard profile/chromeplated saw tooth profile
Option/option
Rollers with 123 teeth: standard profile/chromeplated saw tooth profile
Option/option
Rollers with 144 teeth: standard profile/chromeplated saw tooth profile
Option/option
Rollers with 166 teeth: saw tooth profile
Option
Speed difference
20%
Space adjustment from the cabin and coupling
to central lubrication system
Standard
Roller diameter/roller distance
250 mm / 0.5 - 10 mm
Corn conditioner with discs
Option
87
Technical Data
Discharge accelerator
Diameter / width / number of discharge scoops
560 mm / 480 mm / 6
Discharge scoop arrangement
V-shaped
Speed
1,980 rpm
Stepless setting of the rear wall / suspension of
the rear wall
Standard
Spout
6.2
Angel of rotation
210°
Overload height
6,000 mm
Dimensions cross-section
340 mm x 320 mm
Approved Headers
Front attachment type
Design
Maize header
EasyCollect 603
EasyCollect 753
EasyCollect 903
EasyCollect 1053
EasyCollect 600-2
EasyCollect 750-2
EasyCollect 6000
EasyCollect 7500
EasyCollect 9000
Pick-up
EasyFlow 300
EasyFlow 380
EasyFlow 3001
EasyFlow 3800
EasyFlow 3801

NOTE
Header pick-up EasyFlow 380 S is not authorized to use in all countries.

88
NOTE
For part of the front attachments listed, a transportation trailer is available. The regional legal
regulations must be observed when a transportation trailer is used.
Technical Data
6.3
Total Weights and Axle Loads
Depending on the type of machine, whether an additional axle is used and the front attachment
used, the front axle load allows the following to be derived:
– the rear axle load
– the total weight
– the number of basic weights and additional plates required.

NOTE
For information on the permissible front axle load, please refer to the report issued by TÜV of
your machine

NOTE
Additional ballasting with basic weights and additional plates requires a change to the vehicle
papers.
BiG X 600-2 / 700-2 / 770-2 (2 axles)
Weight to ballast front axle load of 11,500 kg
Without header/with EasyFlow 300
Permitted axle load at rear
8,250 kg
Permitted total weight
18,000 kg
Number of basic weights
—
Number of additional plates
—
Weight to ballast front axle load of 12,000 kg
Permitted axle load at rear
Permitted total weight
Number of basic weights
Without header/with
EasyFlow 300
With EasyCollect
EC 600-2
EC 6000
Refer to table “Weight
to ballast front axle
load of 11,500 kg”
9,300 kg
10,000 kg
21,250 kg
22,000 kg
1
1
7
9
Number of additional plates
Weight to ballast front axle load of 12,650 kg
Permitted axle load at rear
Permitted total weight
Number of basic weights
Without header/with
EasyFlow 300
With EasyCollect
EC 600-2
EC 750-2
EC 6000
Refer to table “Weight to
ballast front axle load of
11,500 kg”
8,250 kg
9,300 kg
8,250 kg
20,500 kg
21,800 kg
20,900 kg
1
1
1
0
8
0
Number of additional plates
Permitted axle load at rear
Permitted total weight
Number of basic weights
Number of additional plates
Without header/with
EasyFlow 300
With EasyCollect
EC 7500
EC 603
EC 753
Refer to table “Weight to
ballast front axle load of
11,500 kg”
10,000 kg
9,000 kg
10,000 kg
22,500 kg
21,500 kg
22,650 kg
1
1
1
11
6
14
89
Technical Data
Weight to ballast front axle load of 13,000 kg
Permitted axle load at rear
Permitted total weight
Number of basic weights
Without header/with
EasyFlow 300
With EasyCollect
EC 750-2
EC 7500
Refer to table “Weight
to ballast front axle
load of 11,500 kg”
8,250 kg
9,000 kg
21,000 kg
22,000 kg
1
1
2
7
Number of additional plates
Permitted axle load at rear
Permitted total weight
Number of basic weights
Number of additional plates
90
Without header/with
EasyFlow 300
With EasyCollect
EC 753
EC 903
Refer to table “Weight
to ballast front axle
load of 11,500 kg”
9,300 kg
10,000 kg
22,200 kg
23,000 kg
1
1
9
14
Technical Data
BiG X 850-2 / 1100-2 / 770-2 (2 axles)
Weight to ballast front axle load of 11,500 kg
Without header/with EasyFlow 300
Permitted axle load at rear
9,000kg
Permitted total weight
18,000 kg
Number of basic weights
—
Number of additional plates
—
Weight to ballast front axle load of 12,650 kg
Permitted axle load at rear
Permitted total weight
Number of basic weights
Without header/with
EasyFlow 300
With EasyCollect
Refer to table “Weight to
ballast front axle load of
11,500 kg”
10,300 kg
Number of additional plates
EC 750-2
22,900 kg
1
9
Weight to ballast front axle load of 13,000 kg
Without
header/with
EasyFlow 300
Permitted axle load at
rear
Permitted total weight
Number of basic
weights
Number of additional
plates
Refer to table
“Weight to ballast
front axle load of
11,500 kg”
With EasyCollect
EC 750-2
EC 7500
9,300 kg
10,300 kg
22,300 kg
23,300 kg
1
1
4
9
91
Technical Data

NOTE
Ex works, the additional axle is set so that it transfers 2300 kg (additional axle load) of the total
weight of the machine to the road.
When using certain front attachments (see the table below and/or the type plate), it is necessary
to increase the value to 2500 or 2750 kg in order to achieve specific front axle loads.
For details of the settings, refer to the documentation in the retrofit kit for the additional axle.
BiG X 600-2 / 700-2 / 770-2 (3 axles)
Weight to ballast front axle load of 11,500 kg
Without
header/with
EasyFlow 300
With EasyCollect
EC 600-2
EC 750-2
EC 6000
Permitted axle load at rear
8,250 kg
8,250 kg
8,250 kg
8,250 kg
Permitted axle load
additional axle
—
2,300 kg
2,300 kg
2,300 kg
Permitted total weight
18,000 kg
21,000 kg
22,000 kg
21,000 kg
Number of basic weights
—
1
1
1
Number of additional plates
—
—
4
1
Without
header/with
EasyFlow 300
With EasyCollect
EC 7500
EC 603
EC 753
Permitted axle load at rear
8,250 kg
9,000 kg
8,250 kg
9,000 kg
Permitted axle load
additional axle
—
2,300 kg
2,300 kg
2,300 kg
Permitted total weight
18,000 kg
22,500 kg
21,000 kg
22,500 kg
Number of basic weights
—
1
1
1
Number of additional plates
—
8
—
11
Weight to ballast front axle load of 12,000 kg
Without
header/with
EasyFlow 300
Permitted axle load at rear
Permitted axle load
additional axle
Permitted total weight
Number of basic weights
Number of additional plates
92
Refer to table
“Weight to ballast
front axle load of
11,500 kg”
With EasyCollect
EC 750-2
EC 7500
8,250 kg
8,250 kg
2,300 kg
2,300 kg
21,000 kg
22,000 kg
1
1
—
3
Technical Data
Without header/with
EasyFlow 300
Permitted axle load at rear
Permitted axle load
additional axle
Permitted total weight
Number of basic weights
Refer to table
“Weight to ballast
front axle load of
11,500 kg”
Number of additional plates
With EasyCollect
EC 753
EC 903
8,250 kg
9,000 kg
2,300 kg
2,300 kg
22,000 kg
23,000 kg
1
1
3
11
Weight to ballast front axle load of 12,650 kg
Permitted axle load at rear
Permitted axle load additional
axle
Without header/with
EasyFlow 300
With EasyCollect
Refer to table “Weight to
ballast front axle load of
11,500 kg”
8,250 kg
EC 903
2,300 kg
Permitted total weight
22,500 kg
Number of basic weights
1
Number of additional plates
6
93
Technical Data
BiG X 850-2 / 1100-2 / 770-2 (3 axles)
Weight to ballast front axle load of 11,500 kg
Without
header/with
EasyFlow 300
With EasyCollect
EC 750-2
EC 7500
EC 903
Permitted axle load at rear
8,250 kg
9,000 kg
10,000 kg
10,000 kg
Permitted axle load
additional axle
—
2,500 kg
2,300 kg
2,750 kg
Permitted total weight
18,000 kg
23,000 kg
23,800 kg
24,250 kg
Number of basic weights
—
1
1
1
Number of additional plates
—
5
12
14
Weight to ballast front axle load of 12,000 kg
Without
header/with
EasyFlow 300
Permitted axle load at rear
Permitted axle load
additional axle
Permitted total weight
Number of basic weights
Refer to table
“Weight to ballast
front axle load of
11,500 kg”
Number of additional plates
Without header/with
EasyFlow 300
Permitted axle load at rear
Permitted axle load
additional axle
Permitted total weight
Number of basic weights
Refer to table
“Weight to ballast
front axle load of
11,500 kg”
Number of additional plates
With EasyCollect
EC 750-2
EC 7500
8,250 kg
9,000 kg
2,500 kg
2,300 kg
22,000 kg
23,000 kg
1
1
—
5
With EasyCollect
EC 753
EC 903
9,000 kg
10,000 kg
2,500 kg
2,500 kg
23,500 kg
24,000 kg
1
1
8
13
Weight to ballast front axle load of 12,650 kg
Without header/with
EasyFlow 300
Permitted axle load at rear
Permitted axle load
additional axle
Permitted total weight
Number of basic weights
Number of additional plates
94
Refer to table
“Weight to ballast
front axle load of
11,500 kg”
With EasyCollect
EC 753
EC 903
8,250 kg
8,250 kg
2,500 kg
2,500 kg
23,000 kg
23,000 kg
1
1
—
4
Technical Data
Weight to ballast front axle load of 13,000 kg
Without header/with
EasyFlow 300
Permitted axle load at rear
Permitted axle load
additional axle
Permitted total weight
Number of basic weights
EC 903
8,250 kg
Refer to table
“Weight to ballast
front axle load of
11,500 kg”
Number of additional plates
6.4
With EasyCollect
2,500 kg
23,000 kg
1
2
Technical Data of Air Conditioning
Part
Evaporator
Refrigerating capacity* 5,200 W
Heater
Heating capacity 4,000 W
Fan
1000 m³/h free blowing
Voltage
12 V
Power consumption
15 A
* measured at +30°C ambient temperature (manufacturer's specifications)
95
Technical Data
6.5
Technical Data of Integrated Silage Additives Unit
System
Drive:
electrical 12 V direct voltage
Max. power consumption
8A
Pump head material, external
Polypropylene (PP)
Pump head material, internal
Viton, Santoprene
Bypass idle pressure
3.15 bar
Max. liquid temperature
77 °C
Delivery rate (spout injection
point):
0.5 - 3.2 l/min
30 - 192 l/h
Max. suction height:
3.1 m
Type of application/duration
Continuous operation
Max. engine temperature
65 °C
Flow sensor
Material
Ryton / PVDF
Temperature range
-10°C to +100°C
Measuring range
0.1235 l/min to 8.3893 l/min
Nozzle
TK-SS7,5
96
Outlet borehole
[mm]
2.3
Volumetric flow [l/min]
0.2 bar
1 bar
1.5
3.4
4 bar
6.8
Technical Data
6.6
Consumables
Designation
Filling
quantity
Fuel tank
960 l
Fuel additional tank
(optional)
330 l
Specification
Initial filling ex works
•
Diesel fuel
•
•
European Standard EN
590 DIN EN 590
(Germany)
ASTM D 975 No. 1 D
(USA)
BS 2869 Part 1 Class A
1 (Great Britain)
Is not filled ex works.
Diesel engine
(engine oil)
Up-to-date information on
engine oils and
consumables can be found
on the Internet:
https://ws-public.manmn.com/portal/irj/asp?Navi
gationTarget=navurl://6094
c82e6511333980d041baae
52732c
SAE 10W40
Engine coolant tank
Mix frost protection agent
and water as a percentage
in the ratio 50:50.
BASF Glysantin G40
SRS Wiolan HS 46
BiG X 600-2/700-2/
BiG X 770-2
90 l
BiG X 850-2/1100-2
130 l
Hydraulic oil tank
150 l
Hydraulic oil HLP 46
Power takeoff
gearbox
12.5 l
Gearbox oil Renolin Unisyn CLP 220
ISO viscosity class (220)
Transfer gearbox
8,5 l
Gearbox oil Renolin Unisyn CLP 220
ISO viscosity class (220)
Angular gearbox
0.5 l
Gearbox oil API-GL4-SAE90
Lower roller gearbox
on left
3.0 l
Gearbox oil API-GL4-SAE90
Upper roller gearbox
on right
1.5 l
Gearbox oil API-GL4-SAE90
Auger gearbox spout
1.5 l
Gearbox oil Mobil Glygoyle 460
Front wheel hub
gearbox
3.0 l
Gearbox oil Shell Spirax S4 CX 50
Rear wheel hub
gearbox
1.5 l
Gearbox oil Shell Spirax S4 CX 50
Central lubrication
(grease)
12 kg
NLGI class 2
For serial numbers 940838 – 942704
Use PAO Renolin Unisyn CLP 220.
Air conditioning
(refrigerant)
1500 g
R134a
Air conditioning (oil)
215 cm³
PAG
Silage additives tank
(optional)
300 l
EP 2
Is not filled ex works.
The filling quantities of the gearboxes are guide values. The correct values occur by changing
the oil/checking the oil level, see chapter Maintenance – Gearboxes.
97
Technical Data
The following oil types may be used for the hydraulic oil tank
List of mineral oils of quality class HLP (HM) and environmentally friendly HEPG
pressure fluids that decompose quickly.
ISO viscosity class
Manufacturer
ADDINOL
AGIP
ARAL
ASEOL
AVIA
BECHEM
BP
CASTROL
COFRAN
DEA
ELF
ENGEN
ESSO
FINA
FRAGOL
FUCHS
Houghton
KLÜBER
KUWAIT
HEPG VG 46
BAF 46Vitam
Aqua VG 46
Avia Hydrosynth 46
Hydrostar UWF 46
Biohyd PEG 46
Econa PG 46
Hydraulic oil PGK 46
Hydraulic oil D3031.46
Hydraulic TR 46
Renolin PGE 46
Fluid BD 46
SRS
98
Hydraulic oil HLP 46
OSO 46
Aral Vitam GF 46
AVILUB RSL 46
Avia Fluid ZAD 46
Energol HLP 46
HYSPIN AWS 46
Cofraline extra 46 S
Astron HLP 46
ELFOLNA 46
ELFOLNA DS 46
Engen TQH 20/46
NUTO H 46
HYDRAN 46
RENOLIN
MR 15, VG 46, B15 VG 46
Syntolubric 46
LIQUI MOLY
Mobil
SHELL
HLP VG 46
Stuart
Theunissen
TOTAL
TRIBOL
Hydrocor E46
ISOCOR E46
VALVOLINE
VERKOL
Ultrasyn PG 46
LAMORA HLP 46
Q8 Haydn 46, Q8 Holst 46
Hydraulics S46
HLP 46 ISO
Mobil DTE 25
Mobil Hydraulic Oil Medium
Shell Tellus oil 46
Shell Hydrol DO 46
WIOLAN HS 46
WIOLAN HX 4
Cofraline
extra 46 S
Azolla ZS 46
Tribol 772
Tribol ET 1140-46
Tribol 943 AW 46
Vesta HLP 46
Technical Data
Lubricant types NLGI class 2
Manufacturer
Type designation
Saponification
Minimum
conveying
temperature [°C]
Spec. Ca
-10
AGIP
Autol Top 2000
ARAL
Long-term grease H
Li
-25
High–Lub L4742
Li
-20
Energrease LS EP 9346
Li
-25
Energrease LS-EP2
Li
-20
Spheerol EP L2
Exxon multi-purpose
grease
Li
-20
ELF
ELF Multi 2
Li
-20
FINA
EP multi-purpose grease
Li
-20
FUCHS
LZR 2
Li
-25
KROON OIL
Lithep Grease
Li
-10
MOBIL
Mobilux EP 2
Li
-15
Mobilgrease
MB 2
Li
-20
MOGUL
LV 1 EP
Li
-25
ÖMV
ÖMV Signum M283
Li/Ca
-25
OPTIMOL
Olit EP 2
Li
-25
SHELL
Retinax EP L2
Li
-20
Multifak EP2
Li
-15
Multis EP2
Divinol multi-purpose
grease 2
Li
-20
BECHEM
BP
CASTROL
ESSO
TEXACO
TOTAL
Zeller & Gmelin
Li
-20
Li
-20
Lubrication greases with fast bio-degradable times
ARAL
BAB EP 2
Li/Ca
-20
AVIA
Syntogrease
Li
-25
BECHEM
UWS VE 42
Li/Ca
-25
DEA
Dolon E EP2
Li/Ca
-20
FINA
Biolical EP S2
Li/Ca
-25
FUCHS
Plantogel 0120S
Li
-25
LUBRITECH
Stabyl Eco EP2
Li/Ca
-20
ÖMV
ÖMV ecodur EP2
Ca
-25
Starfak 2
Ca
-20
Divinol E2
Li
-25
TEXACO
Zeller & Gmelin
Table 1
99
Technical Data
This page has been blank deliberately.
100
Control and Display Elements
7
Control and Display Elements
Fig. 42
Item
Control
Item
Component
1
Automatic climate control operation
unit (Climatronic)
6
Operation console
2
Roof Panel Switch Group
7
Control lever
3
Camera monitoring system (optional)
8
Steering column
4
Driver's seat with operating elements
9
Service brake
5
Info centre
101
Control and Display Elements
7.1
Roof Panel
Fig. 43
Item
102
Control
1
Automatic climate control operation unit (Climatronic)
2
Roof Panel Switch Group
3
Interior lamp
4
Air nozzle
5
ISO compartment for radio
6
Spotlight on control lever
Control and Display Elements
7.1.1
Roof Panel Switch Group
Fig. 44
Item
Control
1
Working light on cabin roof
2
Front guard working light
3
Working light on cabin platform/rear wheel light
4
Mirror adjustment (right rear view mirror only)
5
Working light on rear
6
parking light/dipped beam
7
Warning beacons
8
Hazard lights
9
Wind shield wiper
10
Windscreen washer
11
Switching between driving headlights on the railings and driving headlights on the
lamp carrier for the high/dipped beam
12
Spotlight on control lever (brightness can be controlled)
13
Working light spout
103
Control and Display Elements
7.2
Lighting
7.2.1
Direction indicator, hazard lights and brake light

NOTE
In road traffic the change of travelling direction is indicated by a flashing light.
Fig. 45
Switching on the direction indicator
• Actuate the direction indicator on the steering wheel; the flashing lights (1, 2, 3) will flash on
one side (right/left).
Brake light
The brake lamps (4) light up if:
• the foot brake is pressed when the ignition is switched on,
• the machine is decelerated using the multi-function lever.
104
Control and Display Elements
Hazard lights
If the hazard lights have been switched on, all flashing lights (1, 2, 3) will flash at the same time.
Switching on the hazard warning flasher
The switch (1) for the hazard warning flasher is located in roof panel switch group.
Fig. 46
• To switch on the hazard lights, press the switch (1).
The red pilot lamp in the switch (1) will start flashing.
7.2.2
Side light/dipped beam
The switch for the parking light and the dipped beam is located in the roof panel switch group.
Fig. 47
The switch (1) can be switched to three positions:
I
Off
II Parking light
III Dipped beam
• To switch on the parking light or dipped beam, move switch (1) to the corresponding
position.
105
Control and Display Elements
Fig. 48
When the parking light is switched on, the following light up:
Item
Designation
Explanation
1
Front side marker lamps
In specific countries, side marker lamps are
mounted on both sides of the platform for
certain tyre sizes.
2
Lateral side marker lamps
3
Number plate illumination
4
Clearance lamp at the rear
The following light up in addition when the dipped beam is switched on:
106
Item
Designation
Explanation
5
Driving headlights
The dipped beam cannot be switched on until
the ignition has been switched on.
Control and Display Elements
7.2.3
Working floodlights
The switches for the working lights are located in the roof panel switch group.
Fig. 49
Item
Designation
1
Switch working light for cabin roof
2
Switch working light for front guard
3
Switch working light for cabin platform
4
Switch working light for rear
5
Switch working light spout
Prerequisite for releasing the working light:
– The dipped beam must be switched on.
To do this, press the switch (6).
•
To switch on a working light, press the corresponding switch.
Fig. 50
Item
Designation
1
Working light on cabin roof
2
Front guard working light
3
Cab platform working light
4
Working light on rear
5
Working light spout
Explanation
The working lights on the cabin platform can
be directed by hand.
107
Control and Display Elements
7.2.4
Reversing lights
Fig. 51
The reversing lights (1) light up when reversing, and an acoustic warning signal sounds at the
same time.
7.2.5
Ladder lighting
optional
Fig. 52
• To turn on the ladder lightning (2) press button (1).
The ladder lighting turns off automatically after a short time.
108
Control and Display Elements
7.2.6
Warning beacons
The switch (1) for the warning beacons is located in the roof panel switch group.
Fig. 53
Item
Designation
Explanation
1
Warning beacons
–
•
In some countries the allround lights
must be switched on in road traffic.
To switch on the warning beacons, press the switch (1).
Fig. 54
Item
Designation
1
Warning beacons
109
Control and Display Elements
7.2.7
Interior lighting/reading lamp
Fig. 55
The interior lighting (1) and the reading lamp (2) are located on the cab roof.
Item
Designation
Explanation
3
On/Off switch
Switches the interior lighting (1) on and off.
4
On/Off switch
Switches the lighting for the reading lamp (2) on
or off.
After ignition stage II is switched off, the interior lighting will stay on for the amount of time set
on time relay.
The time for switch-off delay can be adjusted with the time relay (5):
• Open the cover (7) on the cab roof
• Move switch (6) S1 and S2 to the desired position (see table)
S1
S2
(s)
Off
Off
110...900
On
On
14...110
On
Off
2.5 14
Off
On
0...2.5
Use a screwdriver to make fine adjustments to the rotary potentiometer (8) of the time relay (5)
that controls the switch-off delay (amount of time) to match time intervals t (s).
110
Control and Display Elements
7.2.8
Spotlight on control lever
The switch for lighting the multi-function lever is located in the roof panel switch group.
Fig. 56
The switch (1) can be switched to three positions:
I 30% brightness
II Off
III 100% brightness
• To change the brightness of the multi-function lever, turn the switch (1) to the corresponding
position.
Fig. 57
7.2.9
Item
Designation
1
Spotlight on control lever
Coming Home function
To ensure that the operator can leave the machine safely, some lights and the optional ladder
lighting are illuminated for a short time after the machine has been switched off.
111
Control and Display Elements
7.3
Climatronic / heating
7.3.1
Control and display elements
The Climatronic is the control unit for the air conditioning and heating systems which the driver
can operate via the Climatronic control unit.

NOTE
If the electrical power supply to the control unit is interrupted, the control unit automatically
performs a self test after power is restored. After the self test is complete, the last setting to be
saved appears.
Fig. 58
112
Control and Display Elements
Functions of the keys
Item
Control
Explanation
1
Air conditioning key
Switches air conditioning on/off
2
Plus key
In automatic mode: increases the value for
the required cab temperature
In manual mode: increases the rotational
speed of the evaporator fan
3
Minus key
In automatic mode: reduces the value for the
required cabin temperature
In manual mode: reduces the rotational speed
of the evaporator fan
4
Control unit on/off key
Switches the control unit on/off
5
Switch key for operating mode
Switches the evaporator fan speed
automatic/manual
6
REHEAT key
Switches REHEAT mode (demoisturising the
cab air) on/off
7
Switch key for temperature units
Switches the temperature unit
°Celsius/°Fahrenheit (key covered)
Indications of the display
Item
Control
Explanation
8
REHEAT mode icon
Is indicated in REHEAT mode
9
Air conditioning symbol
Is indicated in air conditioning mode
10
Fully automatic mode symbol
Is indicated in fully automatic mode
11
Bar symbol for evaporator fan
speed
Indicates the evaporator fan speed in manual
mode
12
Manual fan mode symbol
Is indicated in manual fan mode
13
Numeric display
Indicates the setpoint value of the cab
temperature or the error code
14
Temperature unit
Indicates the temperature unit of the setpoint
value of the cab temperature in °C or °F
15
Symbol for the cab
Indicates the air flow in the cab in REHEAT
mode
113
Control and Display Elements
7.3.2
Operation
7.3.3
Switching on the system
Fig. 59
Press the

key
NOTE
After the system is switched on, the control unit performs a self-test and the software version is
displayed for approx. 5 sec.
Then the operating hours of the air conditioning system are displayed for 5 s (e.g. 6 operating
hours).
Then the last saved setting appears in the display.
7.3.4
Setting the Desired Cab Temperature
Fig. 60
The set cab temperature is shown in °C, for example 26°C. The control unit is in Automatic
mode.
To lower the desired cab temperature to 21°C, for example, press the
value appears in the display. (press key 5 x)
114
key until the desired
Control and Display Elements
7.3.5
Switch air conditioning On / Off
Fig. 61
You can switch on the air conditioning with the
Air conditioning is now turned on; icon
key.
indicates air conditioning.
The compressor is turned on by the control unit if necessary.
Pressing the
icon disappears.
key again turns off air conditioning (compressor is deactivated). The
115
Control and Display Elements
7.3.6
Switching REHEAT mode on/off
Fig. 62
REHEAT mode = (demoisturising the cab air)
Switching on REHEAT mode:
•
Press the
The symbol

key
(REHEAT mode on) is indicated on the display.
NOTE
In REHEAT mode,
– the compressor is switched on permanently to vent the cab air.
– the evaporator speed can still be adjusted manually.
– the control unit switches on the heating as required to prevent the cab temperature from
changing.
REHEAT mode is automatically limited to 60 minutes.
Switching off REHEAT mode:
•
Press the
key.
REHEAT mode has been switched on. The
116
symbol is no longer displayed.
Control and Display Elements
7.3.7
Manually setting the evaporator fan speed
Fig. 63
Switch on manual evaporator fan speed with the
key.
The manual setting for fan speed is now active. The currently set fan speed appears in bar
display
(full bar display = 100%). The
icon no longer appears.
Fan
flashes for 5 s. During this time the fan speed can be increased with the
lowered with the

key or
key in increments of 10%.
NOTE
The lowest adjustable fan speed is 30% (three bars are displayed).
If the
key is pressed twice, AUTO mode is re-activated, the
and
symbol is displayed, the
symbols are no longer displayed.
117
Control and Display Elements
7.3.8
Switching the Temperature Display to ° Fahrenheit
Fig. 64
The current set-point temperature is shown in ° Celsius.
Press and hold the covered key (8) and press the
key as well. The display switches to °
Fahrenheit.
The current set-point temperature is shown in ° Fahrenheit.
Pressing the (8) key and
7.3.9
key again switches the display back to ° Celsius.
Malfunctions indicated on the display
Error code (F0)´
Fig. 65
Error in room temperature sensor is indicated by flashing indicator (

).
NOTE
The control unit has recorded an error in the room temperature sensor. Controller is no longer
ready for operation.
Cause of sensor fault:
Short circuit or interruption in the sensor line, plug connection on the sensor or control unit,
temperature sensor defective. The controller will not be ready for operation again until the error
is eliminated. Then the sensor fault no longer appears.

NOTE
If a sensor fault occurs, the controller continues working with the setting which was valid before
the fault was recorded.
118
Control and Display Elements
Error code (FI)
Fig. 66
Error in blow-out temperature sensor is indicated by flashing indicator (F1).

NOTE
The control unit has recorded an error in the blow-out temperature sensor. The controller is no
longer ready for operation.
Cause of sensor fault:
Short circuit or interruption in the sensor line, plug connection on the sensor or control unit,
temperature sensor defective. The controller will not be ready for operation again until the error
is eliminated. Then the sensor fault no longer appears.

NOTE
If a sensor fault occurs, the controller continues working with the setting which was valid before
the fault was recorded.
119
Control and Display Elements
7.4
Air comfort seat
WARNING
Danger to life due to brief distraction of the driver!
If the driver adjusts the driver's seat while driving, he cannot pay adequate attention to his
driving and endangers people as a result.
• The driver’s seat must not be adjusted until the machine is at a standstill.
WARNING
Risk of injury due to movement of the machine or machine parts!
If the control lever does not move freely in all directions, not all functions of the control lever can
be implemented. It may then not be possible to respond quickly and correctly to hazardous
situations.
• After adjusting the comfort seat, the right armrest and the steering column, check whether
the control lever can move freely in all directions.
• If the control lever does not move freely in all directions, adjust the setting.
WARNING
Risk of injury due to incorrectly adjusted driver's seat!
If the driver's seat is not adjusted individually to the driver, the driver may damage his health
due to bad posture while working.
• Before starting up the machine, adjust the driver's seat ergonomically and individually to the
driver.
WARNING
Risk of injury due to uncontrolled movement of the machine!
If the vibration damper has been set too softly, the seat may hit the floor when driving on a bad
road and contact with the controls is no longer guaranteed. It may then not be possible to
respond quickly and correctly to hazardous situations.
• Always set the vibration damper of the comfort seat tightly enough to prevent the seat from
hitting the floor even when driving on a bad road.
120
Control and Display Elements
7.4.1
ACTIVO design (optional)
10
8
9
11
1
14
2
13
3
4
5 12 6
7
BX480217
Fig. 67
Pos.
Part
Pos.
Part
1
Air comfort seat ACTIVO
2
Seat depth adjustment
3
Seat angle adjustment
4
Longitudinal adjustment
5
Horizontal suspension ON / OFF
6
Weight and height adjustment
7
Adjustment of the backrest
8
Left armrest
9
Seat heating and climate control ON
/ OFF
10
Headrest
11
Cover cap of armrest adjustment
12
Vibration damper adjustment
13
Lumbar support setting bottom
14
Lumbar support setting top
121
Control and Display Elements
The air-cushioned comfort seat (1) can be individually adapted to the requirements of the driver.
Seat depth adjustment
• Pull the right key (2) up and at the same time bring the sitting surface into the required
position by pushing forward and backward.
Seat angle adjustment
• Pull the left key (3) up and at the same time set the angle of the sitting surface by increasing
or decreasing the pressure on the seat surface.
Longitudinal adjustment
• Pull the locking lever (4) up, and push the driver’s seat (1) forward or backward into the
requested position. Permit the locking lever (4) to snap into place; after locking, the driver’s
seat must not be movable into any other position.
Horizontal suspension
The shock load in direction of travel through the driver’s seat (1) is cushioned better by the
horizontal suspension.
• Swing the lever (5) to the front - the horizontal suspension is active; swing the lever (5) back
– the horizontal suspension is switched off.
Set the Vibration Damper
12
III
I
II
BX480269
Fig. 68
The oscillating behaviour of the driver’s seat can be adapted ideally to each driving situation via
the adjustable vibration damper.
The lever (12) for the setting of the oscillating behaviour has three settings:
Pos
Explanation
I
Soft damping
II
Middle damping
III
Hard damping
To set the vibration damper:
• Turn lever (12) to the desired damping level and release it.
Damping level II is the default setting recommended by the manufacturer at average driver’s
weight.
The damping behaviour can be coordinated between the damping levels by two additional
setting positions each.
122
Control and Display Elements
Weight adjustment
The weight adjustment is made automatically when the driver sits down on the seat. There is no
need to additionally actuate the handle.
Height adjustment
The height can be adjusted continuously by means of a hydraulic system. In order to prevent
damage, actuate the compressor for a maximum of 1 minute.
• Pull the lever (6) upwards completely (position I) to move the driver’s seat (1) up. Press the
lever (6) down completely (position II) to move the driver’s seat (1) down. When the upper
or lower end position of the height adjustment mechanism is reached, the height will be
adjusted automatically in order to ensure a minimum spring travel.
Adjustment of the backrest
• Pull the locking lever (7) up to set the inclination of the backrest. Permit the locking lever (7)
to snap into place – after locking, the backrest must not move into a different position any
more.
Lumbar support
14
13
BX480218
Fig. 69
The lumbar support can be used to adapt the intensity of the swell of the backrest individually
so that the spine is supported and back stress is relieved.
To adapt the intensity of the swell in the upper area of the backrest cushion:
• Press „+“ or „-“ on switch (14) until the desired setting is reached.
To adapt the intensity of the swell in the lower area of the backrest cushion:
• Press „+“ or „-“ on switch (13) until the desired setting is reached.
123
Control and Display Elements
Seat heating and seat climate control
I
0
II
9
BX480268
Fig. 70
Heating and climate control of the seat are switched with switch (9).
The switch has three positions:
Pos.
Explanation
0
Seat heating and seat climate control OFF
I
Seat climate control ON (seat heating OFF)
II
Seat heating ON (climate control of the seat OFF)
The seat surface can be vented via seat climate control so that a cool and dry seating is
enabled.
To switch on seat climate control:
• Move switch (9) to position I.
The left lamp shows the operation of the seat climate control.
To switch on seat heating:
• Move switch (9) to position II.
The right lamp indicates the operation of the seat heating.
Headrest
Set the headrest in such a way that the upper edges of the head and the headrest are on the
same height, if possible.
• Adjust the height of the headrest (10) by pulling out and pressing down across the
noticeable snaps.
124
Control and Display Elements
Setting the left armrest
8
11
BX480219
Fig. 71
•
•
•
Tilt the armrest (8) up or down as requested.
Remove the cover cap (11) to adjust the height of the armrest.
Undo the hexagon nut; move the armrest into the requested position and tighten the
hexagon nut again. Press the cover cap (11) onto the hexagon nut again.
Fig. 72
The right armrest (1) and the control lever are one unit.
To adjust the right armrest:
• Loosen the clamping screw (2); move the armrest (1) to the required height and tighten the
clamping screw (2).
• Press the lever (3) to adjust the angle and height of the right armrest.
The right armrest remains at the set height.
125
Control and Display Elements
7.5
Verstellbare Lüfterdüsen
Abb. 73
Lüfterdüsen (1), verstellbar

HINWEIS
Lüfterdüsen so einstellen, dass das Beschlagen der Scheiben vermieden wird.
126
Control and Display Elements
7.6
Operation console
Fig. 74
Item
Control
1
Membrane keyboard
2
Quick-stop switch
3
Indicator lamps
4
Cigarette lighter
5
Ignition lock
6
Release switch
127
Control and Display Elements
7.6.1
Switches and control lamps
Fig. 75
Pos.
128
Operating element
Explanation
1
Road/field release switch
Switches between road mode and field mode.
2
Intake/header release switch
Releases the drive for intake rollers/header.
3
Parking brake switch
Engages the parking brake or releases it again.
4
Charging warning light
Lights up if the battery is not charged.
5
Warning light for engine oil
pressure
Lights up if the engine oil pressure is too low.
6
Warning light for coolant
temperature
Lights up if the coolant temperature has reached
the critical range.
7
Maintenance release switch
Releases maintenance mode of the machine.
Activates the grinding control unit.
8
Automatic steering system
release switch
Releases the automatic steering system.
9
Sensitivity switch TC I/II
(switching grass/maize)
Sets the sensitivity of the traction control
system.
10
TC switch (traction control
system)
Switches the traction control system on and off.
11
Traction drive release switch
Releases the traction drive.
Control and Display Elements
Actuating the release switch
Every release switch (1) is assigned different functions in position I (initial position) and position
II (pressed).
Fig. 76 Example
The release switches (1) are locked against unintentional actuation.
• To unlock the release switch (1), push the lock (2) forwards and switch the release
switch (1) to the other position.
• Release the lock (2) to lock the release switch (1) in this position.
7.6.2
Functions of the release switches and keys
"Road/field" release switch
The release switch "road/field" must be in position "I" road mode when the machine travels on
the road.
This ensures that only the travelling gear, steering and brakes are activated.
Fig. 77
I
Road mode
II Field mode
129
Control and Display Elements
Release switch "Intake/front attachment"
Actuating the "feed drive/front attachment" release switch releases the feed drive rollers and the
corresponding attachment.
Fig. 78
Prerequisite for switching on the feed drive/front attachment:
– The release switch road/field (2) is set to field mode (II).
I
II
Feed drive/front attachment off
Feed drive/front attachment on
"Parking brake" key
Fig. 79
•
To manually apply or release the parking brake, press the key "Parking brake" (1)
repeatedly.
The status of the parking brake is shown in the display (drive data information section):
–

The parking brake is engaged if the icon
appears in the display.
NOTE
The parking brake is released if the brake pedal and the parking brake momentary switch are
actuated simultaneously.
Automatic actuation of the parking brake:
– The parking brake is automatically applied if the driver's seat is not occupied.
– The parking brake is automatically applied when the diesel engine is switched off.
– The parking brake is automatically released when the machine starts.
130
Control and Display Elements
"Travelling gear" release switch
Actuate the release switch "traction drive" to release traction drive. The machine can only be
moved with the help of the multi-function lever following the release.
When the travelling gear is switched on, the maintenance functions for manual operation on the
left platform are not released.
Fig. 80
I
Travelling gear on
II Travelling gear off
Traction control system switch
Traction control is a connectable traction control system which can be adjusted in two stages.
Fig. 81
• Pressing the TC switch (1) repeatedly switches the traction control system off or on.
• Pressing the "TC I/II" button (2) repeatedly allows you to switch between the sensitivity
levels.
The status of the traction control system is shown in the display see page 167
131
Control and Display Elements
Release switch "automatic steering system"
For the selected mode, the automatic steering system guides the machine along the row of
plants with the help of the row tracer at the maize header. If there are short gaps in the maize
crop, the autopilot keeps the machine driving straight ahead.
Fig. 82
Prerequisite for switching on the automatic steering system:
– The release switch road/field is set to field mode.
– The release switch traction drive is switched on.
I
automatic steering system switched on
II automatic steering system switched off
"Maintenance" release switch
Actuating the maintenance release switch (1) releases all maintenance functions of the grinding
control unit on the left platform.
Prerequisites for releasing the maintenance operating mode:
– The release switch road/field is set to field mode.
– The release switch traction drive is switched off.
Fig. 83
I
Maintenance on
II Maintenance off
132
Control and Display Elements
7.6.3
membrane keyboard
Fig. 84
Item
Control
Explanation
1
Key "Rear wall of discharge
accelerator +"
Moves the rear wall of discharge accelerator
into the crop flow. The discharge distance at the
spout increases.
2
Key "Rear wall of discharge
accelerator –"
Moves the rear wall of discharge accelerator out
from the crop flow. The discharge distance at
the spout reduces.
3
"Main coupling on" key
Switches the main coupling on.
4
"Main coupling off" key
Switches the main coupling off.
5
Key "Pendulum frame left"
Swivels the pendulum frame up high to the left
6
Key "Pendulum frame right"
Swivels the pendulum frame up high to the right
7
8
"Hydraulic circuit 1" keys
For maize header: folds in the maize header.
For pick-up: Lifts the roller crop guide.
For maize header: folds the maize header out.
For pick-up: lowers the roller crop guide.
Press keys (7) and (8) simultaneously to depressurise hydraulic circuit 1.
9
10
"Hydraulic circuit 2" keys
For maize header: raises the plant divider./
For pick-up: swivels in the guide wheels.
For maize header: lowers the plant divider./
For pick-up: swivels out the guide wheels.
Press keys (9) and (10) simultaneously to depressurise hydraulic circuit 2.
11
Key "Auxiliary hydraulics I-A"
Lift hitch attachment, hopper (optional)
12
Key "Auxiliary hydraulics I-B"
Lower hitch attachment, hopper (optional)
13
Key "A"
for additional control (optional)
14
Key "B"
for additional control (optional)
15
Key "Auxiliary hydraulics II-A"
Lift hitch attachment, hopper (optional)
16
Key "Auxiliary hydraulics II-B"
Lower hitch attachment, hopper (optional)
133
Control and Display Elements
7.7
Control lever
The control lever is used to make important settings and issue commands for road and field mode of the
machine.
Fig. 85
134
Control and Display Elements
Item
Explanation
1
Memory keys (M1)
2
Memory keys (M2)
3
Activating/deactivating the automatic steering system
4
•
•
5a
Ejector flap open
5b
Turn spout clockwise.
5c
Ejector flap shut
5d
Turn spout anticlockwise.
6
Memory key for adjusting process lifting gear
7
Slide controller for rotating speed of spout
8
Indicator lamp – traction drive on
9
Inoperative
10
Reduce the engine speed.
11
Switch from rated speed to idle speed and vice versa.
12
Engine speed increase.
13
Switching diesel engine operating mode (optional) (PowerSplit)
14a
Lowering lifting unit manually.
14b
Raising the lifting unit automatically, saving height.
14c
Raising lifting unit manually.
14d
Lowering the lifting unit automatically, saving height.
15
Switching the feed drive/front attachment on and off.
16
Reverse feed drive/front attachment.
17
Save the chopping length.
Folding the spout extension in/out.
18
Traction drive activation key.
19
Selector switch acceleration ramp
20
Cross actuating lever
Mirror spout (with main coupling switched on)
Move spout to transport position (with main coupling switched off)
135
Control and Display Elements
Fig. 86
136
Control and Display Elements

Item
Explanation
A
•
•
•
B
Control lever in central position
C
•
•
•
Acceleration (during reverse travel)
Deceleration (during forward travel)
Start travelling gear with activation key pressed (18)
D
•
•
Deceleration to 0 km/h
Fast reversing with the activation key (18) pressed (in Field mode only)
E
Control lever in central position
F
Switch on cruise control (during forward travel only)
Saving the current speed for cruise control:
• Press the activation key (18) and press the multi-function lever in the direction F.
Activating the "Constant Power" (option) load limit control:
• In field mode, tap the multi-function lever 2 x briefly to the right.
G
Calling up chop length value 1.
• Press the button (17) and move the cross actuating lever to the left (G) to save
the chop length set in the info centre.
H
Cross actuating lever central position
J
Calling up chop length value 2
• Press the button (17) and move the cross actuating lever to the right (J) to save
the chop length set in the info centre.
K
Lower spout
• If a 14-row spout extension is fitted:
Press button (17) and move the cross actuating lever forward (K); the spout
extension folds in and the spout is lowered.
L
Cross actuating lever central position
M
Lift spout
• If a 14-row spout extension is fitted:
Press button (17) and move the cross actuating lever backward (M); the spout
extension folds out and the spout is raised.
Acceleration (during forward travel)
Deceleration (during reverse travel)
Start travelling gear with activation key pressed (18)
NOTE
When the discharge chute flap is raised, the discharge chute extension folds in after a delay of
approx. 2 seconds, as the discharge chute flap is automatically lowered beforehand.
While the discharge chute extension is being folded in or out, the spout flap cannot be actuated.
137
Control and Display Elements
7.8
Steering column and foot pedals
Fig. 87
Item
138
Control
Item
Component
1
Button for horn
6
Full beam warning light
2
Indicator Switches
7
Pilot lamp – trailer function
3
Indicator lamp for direction indicator
8
Release lever for horizontal and
vertical steering column adjustment
4
Full beam
9
Release lever for horizontal steering
column adjustment
5
Headlamp flasher
10
Service brake
Control and Display Elements
7.8.1
Steering column adjustment
The steering column can be adjusted 3-fold
– Tilt adjustment around the lower pivot point (a).
– Tilt adjustment around the upper pivot point (b).
– Height adjustment of the steering wheel (c).
c
3
2
b
a
BX480418
Fig. 88
Adjusting the inclination of the steering column around the lower pivot point (a)
• Actuate the release pedal (1) and move the steering column (3) to the required position.
• To lock the steering column (3), release the release pedal (1).
Adjusting the height of the steering wheel (c) and the inclination of the steering column
around the upper pivot point (b)
• Release the release lever (2) and move the steering column (3) to the required position.
• To lock the steering column (3), lock the release lever (2).
139
Control and Display Elements
7.8.2
Full beam
Fig. 89

NOTE
Full beam does not function until the dipped beam has been switched off.
If a vehicle is approaching, switch off full beam to prevent dazzling the driver.
To switch on full beam:
• Press the steering column switch (1) downwards.
The steering column switch locks in this position and full beam is switched on.
To switch off full beam:
• Move the steering column switch (1) to the neutral position.
When full beam is switched on, the blue indicator lamp for full beam (2) lights up.
7.8.3
Headlamp flasher
Fig. 90
• To activate the headlamp flasher, pull the steering column switch (1) briefly upwards.
As long as the steering column switch is pulled, the full beam and the blue full beam control
lamp (2) light up.
140
Control and Display Elements
7.8.4
Horn
Fig. 91
To actuate the horn:
• Press the push-button (1) for the horn on the steering column switch.
As long as the push-button is pressed, the horn sounds.
7.8.5
Direction indicator
Fig. 92
To switch on the direction indicator on the right:
• Move the steering column switch (1) forwards.
The direction indicator on the right is switched on.
To switch on the direction indicator on the left:
• Move the steering column switch (1) backwards.
The direction indicator on the left is switched on.
The direction indicator is switched off when the steering wheel is turned.
To switch off the direction indicator when the steering wheel is not turned:
• Move the steering column switch (1) in the opposite direction.
The direction indicator lamp (2) lights up when the indicators have been switched on.
141
Control and Display Elements
7.8.6
Service brake
1
BX480366
Fig. 93
The machine brakes if the brake pedal (1) is activated. The braking effect is increased as
increased pressure is applied on the brake pedal.
7.9
Monitor for camera monitoring system (optional)
Fig. 94
•
142
Manually adjust the monitor (1) for the camera monitoring system so that the road and the
working area at the side and behind the machine are in full view.
Control and Display Elements
7.9.1
Drawer for first-aid kit/operating instructions
Fig.95
The drawer (2) for the first-aid kit and the operating instructions is located below the front of the
driver’s seat (1).
143
Control and Display Elements
7.10
Guide's seat
WARNING
Danger to life due to brief distraction of the driver!
The driver may be distracted by a second person in the cab, possibly causing him not to pay
adequate attention to his driving and to endanger people as a result.
• The passenger seat may only be used while the driver is being instructed.
• While the machine is being operated, there must be no other person in the cab or on the
machine except the driver, unless the driver is being instructed.
Fig.96
•
7.11
Before use fold down the guide's seat surface (1).
cooling box
1
2
3
3
1
4
BX480365
Fig. 97
The cooler (1) is located under the guide's seat (2) in the cab.
The cooler can be connected to the 12-V socket (3) on the right next to the passenger seat with
the 12-V plug (4).
144
Control and Display Elements
7.12
Ignition lock
Fig. 98
The ignition lock (1) has four positions:
Position
Explanation
0 (STOP)
•
•
The ignition is off
The circuit is interrupted.
I
The circuit for the electronics is switched on.
II
The ignition is switched on
III
Start position
145
Control and Display Elements
7.13
Cigarette lighter / 12 volt socket
Fig. 99
CAUTION
Risk of burns from the hot cigarette lighter!
During operation the cigarette lighter generates such high temperatures that it may cause burns
if it is held in the depressed position.
• Never hold the cigarette lighter when it is in the depressed position.
• Hold the hot cigarette lighter by the handle only.
The 12 volt socket (1) can be used to connect consumers of 12 V and a maximum of 10 A. If the
diesel engine is not running, this will discharge the battery. Use the prescribed plugs when
using additional equipment.
Operating the cigarette lighter:
• Press in the cigarette lighter (2).
Once the necessary temperature is reached, the insert jumps back automatically.
146
Control and Display Elements
7.14
Steckdosen und USB Anschluss
7.14.1
OBD diagnostic socket

NOTE
Exclusively for the use of authorised technicians from KRONE for engine diagnostics purposes.
Fig. 100
The OBD diagnostic socket (1) is located in the cabin behind the guide's seat, under the
pocket (2).
147
Control and Display Elements
7.14.2
CAN diagnostic socket, USB connection and ISOBUS socket
The CAN diagnostic socket (1) and the USB connection (2) are located on the right beside the
driver's seat in the operation console.
The ISOBUS diagnostic socket (3) is located on the right beside the guide's seat.
Fig. 101

NOTE
The CAN diagnostics socket and the ISOBUS socket may only be used by authorised
technicians.
The CAN diagnostic socket (1) is used to perform diagnostic work and software updates.
It is possible to connect a printer.
The following actions can be performed via the USB connection (2):
• Transfer of customer data from the info centre to a laptop. see page 205
148
Control and Display Elements
7.15
Outside mirrors
WARNING
Danger to life of persons next to and behind the machine due to impaired view of the
driver!
If the outside mirror has not been set correctly, the driver does not have a proper view around
the machine, possibly placing people in danger when the machine is being driven.
• Before driving the machine, adjust the outside mirror so that the rear area is fully visible to
the driver from the driver's seat.
7.15.1
Left Outside Mirror
Fig. 102
• Adjust the left outside mirror (1) manually.
7.15.2
Right outside mirror and anti-collision mirror
Fig. 103
7.15.2.1
Setting the right outside mirror
The right outside mirror (1) is electrically adjustable. The switch (3) is located in the roof panel.
• Turn the switch (3) to the right (arrow to the right).
• Press the switch (3) up, down and to the side until the outside mirror (1) is set correctly.
•
Manually set the anti-collision mirror (2) in such a way that the ground area next to the right
front wheel can be checked prior to starting.
149
Control and Display Elements
7.16
Inside mirror
Fig. 104:
• Manually set the interior mirror according to the operation requirements.
7.17
Sun blind
Fig. 105
Adjust the sun blind according to requirements.
150
Control and Display Elements
7.18
Wind shield wiper
The switch (1) for the wind shield wiper is located in the roof panel switch group.
Fig. 106
It can be switched to three positions:
Off
Interval
Continuous operation
7.19
Washer system – windshield
Fig. 107
The rocker switch (1) for the windshield washer system is located in the roof panel.
Switching on the windshield washer system
• Press switch (1).
151
Control and Display Elements
7.20
Radio installation
Abb. 108
The ISO slot for installing the radio (1) is located in the roof panel.
See circuit diagram for information about the connections.

152
NOTE
Telephones and radio equipment not connected to the outside antenna may lead to functional
troubles in the vehicle's electronic system, thus jeopardising the operational safety of the
vehicle.
Control and Display Elements
7.21
Manual operation on the left platform
Fig. 109
Item
Control
Explanation
1
"Right counterblade towards" key
Moves the right counterblade towards the
chopping drum.
2
"Left counterblade towards" key
Moves the left counterblade towards the
chopping drum.
3
"Close grinding flap" key
The grinding flap closes.
4
"Open grinding flap" key
The grinding flap opens.
5
"Raise lifting unit" key
Raises the lifting unit (manual).
6
Quick-stop switch
Stops the working functions of the
machine. The diesel engine and the
travelling gear continue running.
7
"Lower lifting unit" key
Lowers the lifting unit (manual).
8
"Move grinding stone manually" key
Moves the grinding stone.
9
"Automatic grinding operation" key
Starts an automatic grinding process.
10
"Left counterblade away" key
Moves the left counterblade away from the
chopping drum.
11
"Right counterblade away" key
Moves the right counterblade away from
the chopping drum.
12
"Reversing feed drive/front attachment"
key
Reverses the feed drive/front attachment
To activate manual operation:
• Switch on the diesel engine.
• Release switch road/field in field mode
• Switch off the release switch traction drive.
• Switch on the maintenance release switch.
• Switch on the main coupling.
153
Control and Display Elements
7.22
Trailer coupling
CAUTION
Damage to the tow coupling and the components of the drive!
If stuck vehicles are retrieved using the tow coupling or are towed over prolonged distances,
components on the machine may be damaged.
• Tow the machine using the trailer coupling at maximum 8 km/h and for not longer
than 45 min.
• Do not use the trailer coupling to retrieve the stuck machine.
• Do not use the trailer coupling to tow other vehicles.
• Do not use the trailer coupling to retrieve stuck vehicles.

NOTE
The trailer coupling may be used on the highway for the transportation of braked cutting system
transporters or braked empty trailers only.
During operation observe the permitted bearing load and the permitted rear axle load of the
machine.
Fig. 110
154
Item
Designation
1
12 volt socket for lighting
2
Auxiliary hydraulics (optional)
3
Trailer coupling
4
Compressed air connections for two-line brake (optional)
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.1
Overview
Fig. 111
Item
Designation
1
Display
2
Keys
3
1 to 8
Incremental encoder
4
Menu button
5
Keys
A to
D
155
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Abb. 112
The info centre informs about current actions and current operating state of the machine. The
info centre can be used to make settings for the machine and start and stop functions.
Its main components are:
Keys 1-8 (1)
Keys 1-8 are used to activate the softkeys located in the right column (IV). For the assignment
of the keys, see the graphic. If there is no softkey next to the key, the key is without function.
Keys A-D (2)
The keys A-D are used to activate the softkeys located in the line just above them (V). For the
assignment of the keys, see the graphic. If there is no softkey above the key, the key has no
function.
156
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Abb. 113
Inkrementalgeber (1)
Der Inkrementalgeber kann nach links/rechts gedreht und tastend betätigt werden. Die
Bedienung des Inkrementalgebers wird je nach Darstellung/Modus unterschiedlich interpretiert.
Im Hauptmenü:
• Um das Menü hoch/runter zu scrollen, den Inkrementalgeber nach links/rechts drehen.
• Um in das ausgewählte Menü zu wechseln, den Inkrementalgeber betätigen.
In beliebigen Menüs (Diagnose):
• Um ein Eingabefeld zu markieren, den Inkrementalgeber nach links/rechts drehen (Das
Eingabefeld ist „blau“ hinterlegt).
• Um in den Eingabemodus wechseln, den Inkrementalgeber betätigen (Das Eingabefeld ist
„gelb“ hinterlegt).
Im Eingabemodus:
• Um den jeweiligen Wert zu verringern/erhöhen, den Inkrementalgeber nach links/rechts
drehen.
• Um den eingestellten Wert zu übernehmen und den Eingabemodus zu verlassen, den
Inkrementalgeber betätigen.
Menütaste (2)
Die Betätigung der Menütaste wird je nach Darstellung/Modus unterschiedlich interpretiert.
• Im Grundbild durch Betätigung in das Hauptmenü (Hauptebene) wechseln.
• Im Hauptmenü durch Betätigung in die darüber liegende Ebene wechseln.
• In der Hauptebene durch Betätigung in das Grundbild wechseln.
• In beliebigen Menüs (Eingabemodus nicht aktiv) durch Betätigung und Halten für länger als
3 Sekunden in das Grundbild wechseln.
• Im Eingabemodus durch Betätigung die Änderung am Wert verwerfen und den
Eingabemodus verlassen.
157
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.2
Information Section
IV
I
II
III
V
B
C
D
5
6
7
8
BX500001
Fig. 114
After the ignition is switched on, the working screen appears in the display.
The display is divided into the following information sections:
158
Information Section
Designation
I
Status line
II
Engine data
III
Drive data
IV
Settings
V
General Machine Settings
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.2.1
Status line
I
BX500002_2
Fig. 115
Status line (1) displays the current operating states and general information for the machine.
With the help of the incremental encoder, one of the following types of information can be
assigned to the left field of the status line:
• Time, fuel consumption, acreage, fuel per area, moisture of the crops, fuel per tonnage,
chopping drum speed.
The other fields of the status line display current operating states of the machine:
Icon
Designation
Explanation
Current errors
An error has occurred and is currently
pending.
– The number of currently pending errors is
indicated in front of the icon.
Status display of the central
lubrication system
The central lubrication is active (lubricating).
The central lubrication system is faulty.
– Error correction, see page 753.
The central lubrication is inactive
Status display of the blowing device
The blowing device is active
The blowing device is faulty.
The blowing device is inactive.
159
Info centre "EasyTouch"
B
C
D
5
6
7
8
BX851013
Fig. 116
Statuses of the pendulum frame
Icon
Position of pendulum
frame
Status of pendulum
frame
Explanation
Horizontal
Free
The pendulum frame can be
Actuated.
Raised to the right
Free
The pendulum frame can be
Actuated.
Raised to the left
Free
The pendulum frame can be
Actuated.
Unknown
Horizontal
Locked
Raised to the right
Locked
Raised to the left
Locked
Unknown
160
The "Pendulum frame
position" sensor is faulty
The "Pendulum frame
position" sensor is faulty.
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.2.2
Engine Data Information Section
The current engine data is displayed in the engine data information section (II).
Fig. 117
Engine speed (1)
-1
Road mode: 1000 - 1700 min
-1
Field mode: 1100 – 1950 min
Coloured display of engine speed (1) in field mode
Black
• The diesel engine is not within its optimum rotational speed working range.
-1
– BiG X 600-2, 700-2, 770-2, 850-2 above 1,800 min
-1
– BiG X 1100-2 above 1,850 min
Green
• The diesel engine is within its optimum rotational speed working range.
-1
– BiG X 600-2, 700-2, 770-2, 850-2 between 1,700 and 1,800 min
-1
– BiG X 1100-2 between 1,750 and 1,850 min
Red
• The diesel engine is within its critical rotational speed working range. The diesel engine
must be unloaded immediately.
-1
– BiG X 600-2, 700-2, 770-2, 850-2 below 1,700 min
-1
– BiG X 1100-2 below 1,750 min
161
Info centre "EasyTouch"
General engine data
B
C
5
6
7
8
D
BX851057
Fig. 118
Icon
Designation
Explanation
Engine load as %
R
162
Engine warning light
Severe engine fault!
– Bring the machine to a standstill
immediately and switch off the diesel
engine.
– Notify your KRONE dealer or the
KRONE customer service department.
Engine warning light
Minor engine fault!
– Visit a qualified service centre as soon
as possible.
Coolant temperature
display.
The coolant temperature is in the normal
range.
Coolant temperature
display highlighted in
yellow
The coolant temperature has reached the
critical range.
– Bring the machine to a standstill.
– Allow the diesel engine to run at idle
speed until the temperature returns to
the normal range.
– Clean the cooler and cooler
compartment.
– Check the coolant level.
Diesel fuel level
The bar display indicates the current filling
level of the fuel tank.
Diesel fuel reserve
display
–
Appears when the tank contains less
than 10 per cent of the diesel fuel.
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.2.3
Drive data information section
The drive data information section (III) displays values and the current status of the traction
drive, automatic steering system and lifting unit control.
BX850863
Fig. 119
Cruise control
Icon
Explanation
Cruise control active
The number after the icon is the stored cruise control speed in km/h.
Cruise control inactive
Load limit control
III
B
C
D
5
6
7
8
BX770066
Fig. 120
Icon
Explanation
Load limit control active
The driving speed is automatically adjusted to the speed reduction of the
engine.
Load limit control inactive
Driving speed
Road mode:
0 - 40 km/h
Field mode:
0 - 25 km/h
163
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Acceleration ramp
The greater the run-up time of the diesel engine, the flatter the acceleration ramp.
Icon
Explanation
1
Low acceleration.
2
3
4
High acceleration
Direction of travel
Icon
Explanation
Forward travel
Neutral (standstill)
Reverse travel
164
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Electric discharge distance adjustment (optional)
To operate the electric discharge distance adjustment, see page 598.
Icon
Explanation
The electric discharge distance adjustment is active.
Level I (low discharge capacity) is approached.
The electric discharge distance adjustment is active.
Level II (medium discharge capacity) is approached.
The electric discharge distance adjustment is active.
Level III (maximum discharge capacity) is approached.
The electric discharge distance adjustment is inactive.
The current position is Level I.
The electric discharge distance adjustment is inactive.
The current position is Level II.
The electric discharge distance adjustment is inactive.
The current position is Level III.
Error, the position Level I could not be approached.
The current position is unknown.
Error, the position Level II could not be approached.
The current position is unknown.
Error, the position Level III could not be approached.
The current position is unknown.
165
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Status displays
B
C
D
5
6
7
8
BX850871_1
Fig. 121
Icon
Explanation
Error on additional axle
Parking brake is applied
Emergency mode
allows the driver to drive the vehicle out of the danger zone at reduced driving
speed even if there are serious drive problems.
Quick-stop switch
Fig. 122
Icon
Explanation
Quick-stop switch has been activated on the console.
Quick-stop switch has been activated on the manual control unit (platform).
Both quick-stop switches on the manual control unit (platform) and the console
are activated.
166
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Traction control system Traction Control (TC)
Icon
Explanation
Traction Control TC I (maize) active
The traction control system is currently active to prevent the wheels from
spinning.
Traction Control TC I (maize) ready for operation
The traction control system is switched on. All wheels are currently
synchronised, and regulation is not necessary.
Traction Control TC II (grass) active
The traction control system is currently active to prevent the wheels from
spinning.
Traction Control TC II (grass) ready for operation
The traction control system is switched on. All wheels are currently
synchronised, and regulation is not necessary.
Traction Control TC off
167
Info centre "EasyTouch"
automatic steering system (optional, only in maize field mode)
If one of the following displays appears in white, the automatic steering system for this function
is ready (inactive).
Icon
Status
Explanation
Automatic
steering system
active (outer tip).
The row tracer left is evaluated.
The row tracer right is evaluated.
Both row tracers are evaluated
The row tracer left is evaluated (depending on the
position of the spout).
The row tracer right is evaluated (depending on the
position of the spout).
The row tracer left is mirrored and evaluated
(depending on the position of the spout)
The row tracer right is mirrored and evaluated
(depending on the position of the spout)
Automatic
steering system
active (central tip)
The row tracer right is evaluated.
The row tracer left is evaluated.
The row tracer central tip right and left are evaluated.
The row tracer central tip left is evaluated (depending
on the position of the spout).
The row tracer central tip right is evaluated, (depending
on the position of the spout).
The row tracer central tip left is mirrored and evaluated
(depending on the position of the spout).
The row tracer central tip right is mirrored and
evaluated (depending on the position of the spout).
ISO bus
168
The machine is controlled by means of ISO bus
steering commands.
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Lifting gear control (only in field mode)
Setting the control type, see page 587.
Icon
Explanation
Lifting unit ground pressure control active
Lifting unit ground pressure control ready
Lifting unit distance control active
Lifting unit distance control ready
Lifting unit position control active
Lifting unit position control ready
169
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.2.4
Settings information section
8.2.4.1
Menu field working width
The settings information section (IV) displays the current working width in the Working width
menu field.
The working width setting is needed to calculate the area.
Fig. 123
Icon
Designation
Explanation
Grass mode (pick-up)
If grass mode is set, the icon and the set width
(swathed width) in cm or inch are displayed.
Maize mode (EasyCollect)
If maize mode is set, the icon and the set
number of rows with the resulting working width
in cm or inch are displayed.
Direct cutting system (XDisc)
If the direct cutting system is set, the icon and
the set width in cm or inch are displayed.
Temporary change to the working width
If the entire working width of the front attachment is not used, the working width must be
adjusted in the terminal. Only then can the acreage counter correctly calculate the area.
•
To reduce the working width, press the
•
To increase the working width, press the
pre-set maximum width.
key.
key. You can only increase the value up to the
Alternatively, you can also make the setting with the incremental encoder, see page 157.

NOTE
If you press the key "Raise lifting unit automatically" on the multi-function lever, the pre-set
working width is reset, see page 176.
170
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.2.4.2
Front attachment menu area
The front attachment menu area displays the status and the set setpoint speed of the front
attachment in the settings information section (IV).
2
4
1
3
IV
B
C
D
5
6
7
8
BX500006_2
Fig. 124
Status (1)
Icon
Designation
Explanation
Front attachment error
An error has occurred.
Front attachment inactive
The switching-on conditions are not fulfilled.
Front attachment ready
All switching-on conditions are fulfilled. The front
attachment can be switched on using the key on
the multi-function lever (first reverse, then switch
on forward).
Front attachment forward
active
The front attachment turns forward.
Front attachment reverse
active
The front attachment turns backward (reverses).
Foreign object detection (2)
Icon
Designation
An error has occurred in metal detection and RockProtect
Metal detection
Metal detection is deactivated.
Metal detected in intake.
An error has occurred in metal detection.
RockProtect (option)
A rock was detected in the feed drive.
An error has occurred in RockProtect.
171
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Setting the setpoint speed (3)
The setpoint speed must be adjusted to the operating and harvesting conditions in order to
guarantee optimum crop flow.
2
4
1
3
IV
B
C
D
5
6
7
8
BX500006_2
Fig. 125
•
To reduce the setpoint speed, press the
•
To increase the setpoint speed, press the
key.
key.
Alternatively, you can also make the setting with the incremental encoder, see page 157.

NOTE
In maize mode, the setpoint speed is reduced to 400 rpm after each restart, if it was set higher
beforehand.
The current actual speed (4) of the front attachment is displayed.
172
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.2.4.3
Intake menu area
The chop length is determined by the speed of the intake rollers and the number of blades that
are used.
The settings information section (IV) displays the current chop length and the status of the
maturity level detection in the intake menu area.
Fig. 126
Displaying the chop length
Icon
Designation
Explanation
Chop length
Shows the current chop length in mm or inch.
Maturity level detection active
If maturity level detection (AutoScan) is
activated, the optimum chop length is
automatically calculated and set, see page 191.
Maturity level detection
inactive
The chop length is not automatically adjusted.
173
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Adjusting the chop length
•
To reduce the chop length, press the
•
To increase the chop length, press the
key.
5
6
key.
Alternatively, you can also make the setting with the incremental encoder, see page 157.
Two different chop lengths (value 1/value 2) can be saved and retrieved with the multi-function
lever, see page 597.
Depending on the set number of blades, the chop length can be set in the following areas. For
half the set of blades, the chop lengths are doubled.

174
Number of blades
20
28
36
40
48
Chop length [mm]
5.0 - 31
4.0 - 22
3.0 - 17
2.5 - 15
2.0 - 12
NOTE
As soon as the chop length is manually adjusted or a stored value is retrieved using the multifunction lever, the maturity level detection is inactive.
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.2.4.4
Lifting unit menu area
In field mode, the current control type status of the lifting unit is displayed in the drive data
information section (III). The actual height of the lifting unit and the corresponding setpoint
pressure or setpoint height are displayed in the settings information section (IV) in the Lifting
unit menu area.
Fig. 127
Show
Item
Designation
Explanation
(1)
Actual height of the lifting unit in cm
or inch.
If the lifting unit distance control is active, the
actual height is hidden.
(2)
Setpoint pressure in percent
For lifting unit ground pressure control
Setpoint pressure is percentage of the front
attachment's dead weight. It is adjustable
between -6% (front attachment sways above
the ground) up to max. 70% (front attachment
presses on to the ground with 70% of its
dead weight).
Setpoint height in cm or inch
For lifting unit position control
Setpoint height in percent
For lifting unit distance control
Setpoint height in % of the control path of the
sliding skid sensors. Can be set between
10-90%.
Status displays of the lifting unit
control types
•
(3)
Status displays, see page 169.
Changing the setpoint pressure or setpoint height (2)
•
To reduce the setpoint value, press the
•
To increase the setpoint value, press the
7
key.
8
key.
Alternatively, you can also make the setting with the incremental encoder, see page 157.

NOTE
The setpoint pressure and/or setpoint height can also be stored using the multi-function lever,
see page 587. If the setpoint value is changed using the keys on the terminal, the value is
saved directly, which means that there is no need to save using the multi-function lever.
175
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.2.5
General machine settings information section
8.2.5.1
Memory keys
On delivery, the keys M1 and M2 on the multi-function lever are not assigned any functions.
Fig. 128
• To call up the "Memory keys" mask, press the D key in the working screen.
Menu item 1-10 can also be used to call up the mask, see page 241.
The following functions can be assigned to the memory keys:
– Raise/lower plant divider (only in maize) / holding-down clamp (only in grass)
– Increase/reduce working width
– Call up stored chop lengths 1 or 2
– Increase/reduce front attachment speed
– Turn pendulum frame left/right
– Extend and/or retract the rear wall of discharge accelerator to reduce and/or increase the
discharge distance.
176
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Assigning occupancy of memory keys
Fig. 129
• You can use the incremental encoder to choose M1 and/or M2 choose, the selection box is
highlighted in colour.
• Press the incremental encoder to jump to the selection box.
• Turn the incremental encoder to set the desired function.
• Press the incremental encoder to accept the setting and to exit the selection box.
•
Press the
B
key to approve the setting.
After the start
Fig. 130
The setting mask appears each time the machine is started and displays the occupancy of keys
M1 and M2.
• Press the key B to release the setting. The lock icon turns off.
Only than can the corresponding function be executed using the memory keys on the multifunction lever.
If no release is performed, the memory keys are not functioning.
If you wish to change an assignment, you can re-assign the keys as described above.
Exiting the settings mask
•
Press the
D
key to call up the working screen.
•
Press the
C
key to jump to the next page of the machine settings information section.
•
Press the
key on the incremental encoder to return to the previous menu level.
177
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.2.5.2
Grass pick-up mode
B
C
5
6
7
8
D
BX770170
Fig. 131
•
•
You can use the incremental encoder to choose the operating mode setting. The selection
box is highlighted in colour.
Press the incremental encoder to jump to the selection box.
•
Turn the incremental encoder to set the required grass pick-up mode
•
Press the incremental encoder to accept the setting and to exit the selection box.
•
To exit the settings mask, press the
D
key or the
.
key on the incremental encoder.
Setting the grass pick-up working width
The working width corresponds to the swathed width.
B
C
D
5
6
7
8
BX770171
Fig. 132
• You can use the incremental encoder to choose the working width setting. The selection
box is highlighted in colour.
• Press the incremental encoder to jump to the selection box.
• You can use the incremental encoder to set the required working width.
178
•
Press the incremental encoder to accept the setting and to exit the selection box.
•
To exit the settings mask, press the
D
key or the
key on the incremental encoder.
Info centre "EasyTouch"
To adjust the lifting gear control
Three lifting unit controls, see page 587, can be selected:
– Lifting unit ground pressure control
– Lifting unit distance control
– Lifting unit position control
B
C
D
5
6
7
8
BX500021_1
BX500017_1
Grass mode
Maize mode
Fig. 133
• You can use the incremental encoder to choose the lifting unit control setting. The selection
box is highlighted in colour.
• Press the incremental encoder to jump to the selection box.
• You can use the incremental encoder to set the required lifting unit control.
•
Press the incremental encoder to accept the setting and to exit the selection box.
•
To exit the settings mask, press the
D
key or the
key on the incremental encoder.
179
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Setting the number of blades
After changing the number of blades, see page 717, the current number of blades must be set.
When the number of blades is set, the setting area for the chop length is adjusted.
B
C
D
5
6
7
8
BX500018_1
Grass mode
Maize mode
Fig. 134
• You can use the incremental encoder to choose the number of blades setting. The selection
box is highlighted in colour.
• Press the incremental encoder to jump to the selection box.
• You can use the incremental encoder to set the required number of blades.
180
•
Press the incremental encoder to accept the setting and to exit the selection box.
•
To exit the settings mask, press the
D
key or the
key on the incremental encoder.
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Setting the automatic steering system
B
C
5
6
7
8
D
BX770172
Fig. 135
Icon
•
Designation
Explanation
automatic steering system
inactive
The automatic steering system is inactive or not
fitted.
automatic steering system
active
The automatic steering system is active. The
machine is activated by the ISO bus.
•
•
You can use the incremental encoder to choose the automatic steering system setting. The
selection box is highlighted in colour.
Press the incremental encoder to jump to the selection box.
Use the incremental encoder for setting the automatic steering system.
•
Press the incremental encoder to accept the setting and to exit the selection box.
•
To exit the settings mask, press the
D
key or the
key on the incremental encoder.
181
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.2.5.3
Maize header
To set the operating mode of the maize header
Fig. 136
• You can use the incremental encoder to choose the operating mode setting. The selection
box is highlighted in colour.
• Press the incremental encoder to jump to the selection box.
182
•
You can use the incremental encoder to set the required maize header mode
•
Press the incremental encoder to accept the setting and to exit the selection box.
•
To exit the settings mask, press the
D
key or the
.
key on the incremental encoder.
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Setting the front attachment type
The following front attachment types can be set:
Icon
Explanation
KRONE EasyCollect, two-part
KRONE EasyCollect, three-part
Not a KRONE product
BX500166
Fig. 137
• You can use the incremental encoder to choose the front attachment type setting. The
selection box is highlighted in colour.
• Press the incremental encoder to jump to the selection box.
• You can use the incremental encoder to set the front attachment type.
•
Press the incremental encoder to accept the setting and to exit the selection box.
•
To exit the settings mask, press the
D
key or the
key on the incremental encoder.
183
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Setting the maize header working width
BX500019
Fig. 138
• You can use the incremental encoder to choose the setting for the number of rows. The
selection box is highlighted in colour.
• Press the incremental encoder to jump to the selection box.
• You can use the incremental encoder to set the desired number of rows.
•
Press the incremental encoder to accept the setting and to exit the selection box.
1
B
C
D
5
6
7
8
BX500020
Fig. 139
• You can use the incremental encoder to choose the row spacing setting. The selection box
is highlighted in colour.
• Press the incremental encoder to jump to the selection box.
Use the incremental encoder to adjust the desired number of row spacing.

•
Press the incremental encoder to accept the setting and to exit the selection box.
•
To exit the settings mask, press the
D
key or the
key on the incremental encoder.
NOTE
The resulting working width is calculated from the row distance and the number of rows directly
and the result is displayed (1).
184
Info centre "EasyTouch"
To adjust the lifting gear control
Three lifting unit controls, see page 587, can be selected:
– Lifting unit ground pressure control
– Lifting unit distance control
– Lifting unit position control
B
C
D
5
6
7
8
BX500021_1
BX500017_1
Grass mode
Maize mode
Fig. 140
• You can use the incremental encoder to choose the lifting unit control setting. The selection
box is highlighted in colour.
• Press the incremental encoder to jump to the selection box.
• You can use the incremental encoder to set the required lifting unit control.
•
Press the incremental encoder to accept the setting and to exit the selection box.
•
To exit the settings mask, press the
D
key or the
key on the incremental encoder.
185
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Setting the number of blades
After changing the number of blades, see page 717, the current number of blades must be set.
When the number of blades is set, the setting area for the chop length is adjusted.
B
C
D
5
6
7
8
BX500018_1
Grass mode
Maize mode
Fig. 141
• You can use the incremental encoder to choose the number of blades setting. The selection
box is highlighted in colour.
• Press the incremental encoder to jump to the selection box.
• You can use the incremental encoder to set the required number of blades.
186
•
Press the incremental encoder to accept the setting and to exit the selection box.
•
To exit the settings mask, press the
D
key or the
key on the incremental encoder.
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Select the row tracer for the automatic steering system
This mode determines which row tracer on the maize header will be evaluated for control of the
automatic steering system.
– For the row tracer outer tip, always activate the left or right. The recommendation is always
the side towards the crop, specifically for harvesting.
– For the row tracer central tip, always activate both, regardless of whether you are
harvesting or in the crop.
– Row tracer depending on the spout: The row tracer is selected automatically according to
the position of the spout. If the number of rows on the front attachment matches that of the
maize drill, we recommend setting the reflected evaluation. If not, we recommend
evaluating the same side.
BX500023_1
Fig. 142
187
Info centre "EasyTouch"
If one of the following displays appears in white, the automatic steering system for this function
is ready (inactive).
Icon
Status
Explanation
Automatic
steering system
active (outer tip).
The row tracer left is evaluated.
The row tracer right is evaluated.
Both row tracers are evaluated
The row tracer left is evaluated (depending on the
position of the spout).
The row tracer right is evaluated (depending on the
position of the spout).
The row tracer left is mirrored and evaluated
(depending on the position of the spout)
The row tracer right is mirrored and evaluated
(depending on the position of the spout)
Automatic
steering system
active (central tip)
The row tracer right is evaluated.
The row tracer left is evaluated.
The row tracer central tip right and left are evaluated.
The row tracer central tip left is evaluated (depending
on the position of the spout).
The row tracer central tip right is evaluated, (depending
on the position of the spout).
The row tracer central tip left is mirrored and evaluated
(depending on the position of the spout).
The row tracer central tip right is mirrored and
evaluated (depending on the position of the spout).
ISO bus

The machine is controlled by means of ISO bus
steering commands.
NOTE
In "Row tracer automatic" and "Row tracer mirrored automatic" mode, if the upper discharge
chute is not swivelled out, the "Upper discharge chute left" position is used as the basis.
188
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Setting the row tracer
• You can use the incremental encoder to choose the row tracer setting. The selection box is
highlighted in colour.
• Press the incremental encoder to jump to the selection box.
• You can use the incremental encoder to set the desired mode.
•
Press the incremental encoder to accept the setting and to exit the selection box.
•
To exit the settings mask, press the
D
key or the
key on the incremental encoder.
Setting the centre adjustment with the row tracer
The centre adjustment can be used to adjust the side distance from the machine to the crop
edge queried by the row tracer.
To reduce the side distance, you must set a negative value.
To increase the side distance, you must set a positive value.
Fig. 143
• You can use the incremental encoder to choose the centre adjustment setting. The
selection box is highlighted in colour.
• Press the incremental encoder to jump to the selection box.
• You can use the incremental encoder to set the desired distance.
•
Press the incremental encoder to accept the setting and to exit the selection box.
•
To exit the settings mask, press the
D
key or the
key on the incremental encoder.
189
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Setting the response sensitivity of the row tracer
The response sensitivity can be used to set the response (inertia) of the control system for the
row tracer.
With an even crop edge, slow driving speed and dry ground conditions, a low (slower) response
sensitivity can be set.
With an uneven crop edge, faster driving speed and moist ground conditions, a higher (faster)
response sensitivity should be set.
The setting can be changed during operation.
Fig. 144
Setting range from 1 to 10:
– 1 slow
– 10 fast
•
190
•
•
You can use the incremental encoder to choose the response sensitivity setting. The
selection box is highlighted in colour.
Press the incremental encoder to jump to the selection box.
You can use the incremental encoder to set the desired value.
•
Press the incremental encoder to accept the setting and to exit the selection box.
•
To exit the settings mask, press the
D
key or the
key on the incremental encoder.
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Automatic setting of the chop length by maturity level detection (AutoScan)
The system uses the AutoScan sensor to detect the degree of maturity of the maize plant.
The AutoScan control electronics calculate the optimum cutting length of the maize plant from
the previously entered minimum and maximum chopping length and control the speed of the
pre-compression rollers accordingly.
The chop length is not further enlarged above a degree of maturity of approx. 66% and is not
further reduced below 33%, as a higher or lower value is unlikely in practice.
Fig. 145
Item/Icon
Explanation
1
Enter the maximum chop length that is to be automatically actuated. The
value can also be entered using the keys
and
2
(to reduce the set value)
(to enlarge the set value).
Enter the minimum chop length that is to be automatically actuated. The
value can also be entered using the keys
and
(to reduce the set value)
(to enlarge the set value).
3
Graphical representation of the settings.
4
Setting as to whether the "AutoScan" degree of maturity sensor is present
(only effective after a restart).
5
–
Degree of maturity sensor present
–
Degree of maturity sensor not present
Status of automatic chop length adjustment
–
Automatic adjustment of the chop length active. The AutoScan sensor
adopts the chop length setting in the specified area.
–
Manual adjustment of chop length active.
191
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Switching on maturity level detection
• Set whether the degree of maturity sensor is present or not.
• Set the maximum (1) and minimum (2) chop length.
The values for the minimum and maximum chop length are checked for plausibility. For
example, it the maximum value is set to 4.6 mm and the minimum value is set to 4.7 mm, the
minimum value is automatically set to 4.5 mm.
•
Press the
Icon
D
key to switch the automatic chop length adjustment on or off.
Explanation
Automatic operation switched on/active
Automatic operation switched off/inactive
Setting not possible (AutoScan not connected)

NOTE
If automatic operation is active in the working screen, the chop length manually set or if a stored
chop length is called up using the control lever, automatic adjustment (AutoScan) is
deactivated.
If the AutoScan does not detect the degree of maturity correctly, it can be adjusted in expert
mode, see "Graphical representation of AutoScan sensor settings in expert mode".
192
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Graphical representation of AutoScan sensor settings in expert mode
The ex-works default values for minimum and maximum degree of maturity can only be
changed in expert mode. By changing the percentage values, you are influencing the ability of
the AutoScan to detect colour.
• To switch to expert mode, set parameter 34020 to the value 1 in the menu "AutoScan".
9
7
6
4
5
6
7
8
8
B
C
D
BX500777
Fig. 146
Item
Explanation
1
Theoretical maximum chop length at 100% degree of maturity. However, the chop
length is not further increased above approx. 66% degree of maturity as a degree of
maturity greater than 66% is unlikely to occur in practice.
2
Theoretical minimum chop length at 0% degree of maturity. However, the chop
length is not further reduced below approx. 33% degree of maturity as a degree of
maturity below approx. 33% is unlikely to occur in practice.
3
Current chop length
4
Currently determined degree of maturity. If the display remains at 50%, the sensor
does not detect a valid maturity.
5
The current position on the characteristic curve within the working range.
6
The minimum chop length set by the user, which can be changed using the
keys. The associated degree of maturity (8) can be changed using the
8
7
and
7
and
keys or the incremental encoder.
The maximum chop length specified by the user, which can be changed using the
and
and
keys. The associated degree of maturity (9) can be changed using the
keys or the incremental encoder.
193
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.2.5.4
Direct cut header
Set the operating mode to direct cutting system
B
C
D
5
6
7
8
BX500049
Fig. 147
• You can use the incremental encoder to choose the operating mode setting. The selection
box is highlighted in colour.
• Press the incremental encoder to jump to the selection box.
• You can use the incremental encoder to set the operating mode of the direct cutting
system
194
.
•
Press the incremental encoder to accept the setting and to exit the selection box.
•
To exit the settings mask, press the
D
key or the
key on the incremental encoder.
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Arbeitsbreite Direktschneidwerk einstellen
B
C
D
5
6
7
8
BX500026_1
Abb. 148
• Mit dem Inkrementalgeber die Einstellung Arbeitsbreite anwählen. Das Auswahlfeld wird
farblich hervorgehoben.
• Den Inkrementalgeber drücken, um in das Auswahlfeld zu springen.
• Mit dem Inkrementalgeber die gewünschte Arbeitsbreite einstellen.
•
Press the incremental encoder to accept the setting and to exit the selection box.
•
To exit the settings mask, press the
D
key or the
key on the incremental encoder.
Setting the lifting unit control for the direct cutting system
The direct cutting system is always operated using the "ground pressure control" control type,
which can be used to achieve an optimum cutting profile.
B
C
D
5
6
7
8
BX500027_1
Fig. 149
• You can use the incremental encoder to choose the lifting unit control setting. The selection
box is highlighted in colour.
• Press the incremental encoder to jump to the selection box.
• You can use the incremental encoder to set the required lifting unit control.
•
Press the incremental encoder to accept the setting and to exit the selection box.
•
To exit the settings mask, press the
D
key or the
key on the incremental encoder.
195
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Setting the number of blades for the direct cutting system
After changing the number of blades, see page 717, the current number of blades must be set.
When the number of blades is set, the setting area for the chop length is adjusted.
B
C
D
5
6
7
8
BX500028_1
Fig. 150
• You can use the incremental encoder to choose the number of blades setting. The selection
box is highlighted in colour.
• Press the incremental encoder to jump to the selection box.
• You can use the incremental encoder to set the required number of blades.
196
•
Press the incremental encoder to accept the setting and to exit the selection box.
•
To exit the settings mask, press the
D
key or the
key on the incremental encoder.
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Setting the automatic steering system
B
C
5
6
7
8
D
BX770174
Fig. 151
Icon
•
Designation
Explanation
Automatic steering system
inactive
The automatic steering system is inactive or not
fitted.
Automatic steering system
active
The automatic steering system is active. The
machine is activated by the ISO bus.
•
•
You can use the incremental encoder to choose the automatic steering system setting. The
selection box is highlighted in colour.
Press the incremental encoder to jump to the selection box.
Use the incremental encoder for setting the automatic steering system.
•
Press the incremental encoder to accept the setting and to exit the selection box.
•
To exit the settings mask, press the
D
key or the
key on the incremental encoder.
197
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Protection for wild animals information mask
Fig. 152
If the XDisc operating mode is set, an information screen regarding the correct mowing
behaviour appears briefly in the display when you start the front attachment.
If a field is mowed from the outside inwards, animals are slowly driven from the safe edge
sections into the middle of the field, making it more difficult or impossible for them to flee.
A remedy for this situation is provided by the mowing method that involves mowing the area
from the "inside out". In this case, you drive straight into the middle of the plot without mowing
the outer edge, and then mow anticlockwise from the "inside out". This allows animals to escape
from the field unharmed by following their natural instinct to flee.
198
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.2.5.5
Customer data counter
Fig. 153
•
Press the
key below
to call up the customer counter.
is displayed green if a customer counter is active.
B
C
D
5
6
7
8
BX500047_3
Fig. 154
199
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Item
1
2
3
Icon
Designation
Explanation
Customer record
Enter the customer data
Counter switched off
The customer counter was
stopped.
Counter switched on
The currently displayed
counter is activated.
Counter inactive
A counter other than the one
shown is activated.
An active counter is highlighted in colour
operating hour counter (h)
Active if the diesel engine is
running.
drum hours counter (h)
Active if the chopping drum is
switched on.
working hours counter (h)
Active if the front attachment
is switched on.
Road mileometer (km)
4
surface counter (ha)
Active if the lifting unit has
reached its working position.
Fuel consumption
measurement (l)
(optional)
Can be deleted using the
key
Status of the counter
The line displays which
customer counter and which
area is activated.
Additional counter
Can be set using the
Switch on counter
You can use the
key to
switch on the counter
Switch of the counter
You can use the
key to
switch off the counter.
5
6
Active during road travel.
D
C
key.
7
8
Freely usable numerical input
field
For example, to assign
multiple areas to the customer
data record.
9
200
Select customer counter
Use the
key to select the
next customer data record.
Select customer counter
Use the
key to select the
previous customer data
record.
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Modifying and/or creating a customer data record
A total of 30 customer records can be created.
Fig. 155
• To modify or create a customer record, select the corresponding customer data record
•
•
•
•
•

using the
and
keys.
You can use the incremental encoder to choose the required input field (name, street,
domicile). The input field is highlighted in colour.
Press the incremental encoder to open the alphanumeric input field.
Use the incremental encoder to enter and/or change the customer data record.
Press the incremental encoder to accept the alphanumerical value.
To save the customer data record, use the incremental encoder to select and press the
"Enter" field (2).
NOTE
Selecting the "ESC" symbol (1) and confirming causes the program to exit the input field without
saving the entries or changes.
Selecting the "Enter" symbol (2) and confirming causes the program to accept and save the
entry or change.
•
To exit the settings mask, press the
D
key or the
key on the incremental encoder.
201
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Activating the additional counter
Fig. 156
•
•
•
Press the D key to call up the additional counter.
You can use the incremental encoder to select the required additional counter.
Press the incremental encoder to confirm your selection.
Icon
202
Meaning
Explanation
Moisture measurement
The moisture value (%) averaged over the activation
duration of the counter is automatically listed as the final
point on the printing from the printer.
The graphical icon for the moisture on this printout
is "% ˜˜".
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Selecting/deleting the area(s) of a customer counter
Fig. 157
Up to 10 areas can be assigned to every customer counter (1). However, only one area can be
selected. All counters shown under (2) are assigned to the selected area.
Either single or all areas of a customer counter can be deleted. When the area is deleted, all
counters shown under (2) are reset to zero.
Assigning or selecting the area for a customer record
The selection of the right customer record is a prerequisite for this.
•
Press
or
key until the area appears in the input field (1).
Deleting individual areas of a customer counter
The prerequisite is that the correct customer data record is selected.

•
Press the
•
To delete the area, press the
"Delete?" appears).
•
To confirm the deletion, press the
•
To cancel the deletion, press the
or
keys until the area to be deleted appears in the input field (1).
key below the softkey
and the information message
key below the softkey
key below the softkey
.
.
NOTE
Repeat deletion of the counters for each previously created cultivated area as necessary.
203
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Deleting all areas of a customer counter
A prerequisite for this is that the right customer record is selected.
•
Press
•
To delete all areas, press
all areas?” appears.
•
Press
key under the softkey
•
Press
key under the softkey
or
key until the sigma sign (
) appears in the input field (1).
key under the softkey
, an information message “Delete
to confirm the deletion process.
to cancel the deletion process.
Switching the counter on or off
B
C
D
5
6
7
8
BX770176
Fig. 158
• The required customer data record and area are selected.
204
•
Use the
•
Activating the
and
keys to turn the counter on
key brings up the working screen.
and off
.
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Exporting the customer counter
To use the customer data records for other evaluations, you can save them to a USB flash
drive.
• Insert the USB flash drive into the USB connection on the operation console, see page 148.
1
Fig. 159
Once the terminal has recognised the USB flash drive, the icon (1) is displayed in the customer
counter.
•
Press the
key to export all customer counters (30 customers with ten areas each)
completely to the USB flash drive.
The file on the USB flash drive is called "…_CLientCounter.csv" and can be opened e. g. with
"Excel".
Switching to general counters (machine data counters)
•

Pressing the
menu.
key below
softkey brings up the "Counters and machine data"
NOTE
You can print out all customer records or selected ones with the aid of a printer (option).
For additional information, see page 407.
205
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.2.5.6
Silage Fodder Addition
In field mode, the info area settings (V) displays the setting for the silage fodder addition (1).
Fig. 160
Prerequisites for automatic mode:
– Diesel engine switched on
– Release switch road/field in field mode
– Release switch traction drive switched on
– Release switch intake/header switched on
– Main coupling switched on
– Feed drive/front attachment switched on
– Vehicle moves forward
– Lifting unit in working position
Prerequisites for continuous operation:
– Release switch road/field in field mode
Possible status displays (1)
Icon
Designation
automatic mode has been switched on; silage fodder addition is active.
automatic mode has been switched on; silage fodder addition is inactive.
Silage fodder addition deactivated.
Silage fodder addition always active.
Filling level indicator for silage fodder addition (optional)
206
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Display of unfulfilled switching-on conditions
Fig. 161
The menu field (I) displays unfulfilled conditions that must be fulfilled for setting the silage
fodder addition. An appropriate remedy must be found.
Icon
Meaning
Lower lifting unit
Vehicle must drive
Switch on main coupling
Switch on feed drive
Turn the travelling gear release switch on or off
Switch the maintenance release switch on or off
Unlock stop switch on CUC.
Unlock manual operation stop switch.
207
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Displaying possible disturbances
Fig. 162
The faults listed below may appear in menu field (I):
Error CAN* to CUC (CUC= Control Unit Console)
Error CAN* to DIOM
Error CAN* to multi-function lever
Error CAN* to KMC2 (KMC = KRONE Machine Controller)
Error CAN* to KMC3 (KMC = KRONE Machine Controller)
Error CAN* to metal detection
*) CAN = Controller Area Network
208
Info centre "EasyTouch"
To set silage fodder addition
Fig. 163
Possible settings for silage fodder addition (1)
To s et silage fodder addi tion
Icon
Designation
Silage fodder addition automatically active
Silage fodder addition deactivated.
Silage fodder addition always active.
Activate/deactivate fill level indicator for silage fodder addition (optional) (2)
To s et silage fodder addi tion
Icon
Designation
Filling level indicator for silage fodder addition activated
Filling level indicator for silage fodder addition deactivated
•
•
•
You can use the incremental encoder to choose the silage fodder addition setting. The
selection box is highlighted in colour.
Press the incremental encoder to jump to the selection box.
You can use the incremental encoder to set the required setting.
•
Press the incremental encoder to accept the setting and to exit the selection box.
•
To exit the settings mask, press the
D
key or the
key on the incremental encoder.
209
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.2.5.7
Setting the corn conditioner distance
If one of the modes maize header or XDisc is set, the info area settings (V) in the display shows
the
icon and the current actual value of the corn conditioner distance.
Fig. 164
Prerequisites:
– The corn conditioner has been calibrated prior to the setting, see page 280.
•
You can use the incremental encoder to choose the corn conditioner setting. The selection
box is highlighted in colour.
• Press the incremental encoder to jump to the selection box.
• You can use the incremental encoder to set the distance.
The currently set target distance is approached automatically.
210
•
Press the incremental encoder to accept the setting and to exit the selection box.
•
To exit the settings mask, press the
D
key or the
key on the incremental encoder.
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.3
Menu level
Brief Overview
Main menu
Menu
Menu
Designation
1
Settings
1-1
Parameter
1-1-1
1-1-2
1-1-3
1-1-4
1-1-5
1-1-8
1-1-9
1-1-10
1-1-11
1-1-12
1-1-13
1-1-14
1-1-15
Intake
Header
Spout
Grinding device
Counterblade
EasyFlow
EasyCollect
XDisc
Metal detection
Diesel engine
Travelling gear
Automatic steering system
Work
1-1
Parameter
1-1-17
1-1-20
1-1-21
1-1-25
Control lever
AutoScan
RockProtect (option)
Humidity measurement
211
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Main menu
Menu
Menu
Designation
1-2
Setting the machine
1-3
Units
1-4
Diesel engine PowerSplit
1-5
Language
1-7
Display
1-7-1
1-7-2
1-7-4
1-7-5
Setting background colour
Beeper
Direction of rotation
Configuring the status line
Settings
1-8
Date/time
1-9
Owner’s address
1-10
Memory keys
2
Counter
212
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Main menu
Menu
Menu
Designation
3
Maintenance
3-1
Central lubrication
3-2
Grind/counterblade
3-3
Calibrating the Pendulum Frame
3-4
Calibrating the automatic steering system
3-5
Calibrating the Discharge Chute
3-6
Calibrating the Corn Conditioner
3-7
Calibrate feed drive/front attachment
3-8
Calibrating the Travel Path
3-9
RockProtect (optional)
3-10
Calibrating the Main Coupling
3-11
Maintenance of the Additional Axle
(Optional)
213
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Main menu
Menu
Menu
Designation
4
Service
4-1
Diagnostics
4-1-1
4-1-2
4-1-3
4-1-4
4-1-5
4-1-6
4-1-7
4-1-8
Intake
Header
CAN bus
Spout
Lifting unit
Travelling gear
Metal detection
Diesel engine
4-1-9
Automatic steering system
(option)
4-1-10
AutoScan maturity level
detection (option)
4-1-11
Electronics
4-1-12
4-1-13
214
Work
Grinding
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Main menu
Menu
Menu
Designation
Service
4-1-14
4-1-15
Counterblade
Corn conditioner
4-1-16
Control lever
4-1-17
Control unit console
4-1-18
Manual operation
4-1-19
Terminal
4-1-20
4-1-21
RockProtect (option)
Humidity measurement (option)
5
Working screen
215
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.3.1
Access a menu level
Fig. 165
• Press the
key beside the incremental encoder to call up the menu level.
The display indicates the menu level.
The menu level is divided into five main menus:
Icon
Designation
Main Menu 1 "Settings"
Main menu 2 "Counters"
Main Menu 3 "Maintenance"
Main menu 4 "Service"
Main menu 5 "Working screen"
•
216
Press the
key beside the incremental encoder to exit the menu level called up.
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.4
Main menu 1 Settings
Fig. 166
The main menu level is active.
• You can use the incremental encoder to choose main menu 1.
• Press the incremental encoder.
The display shows menu level 1 Settings.
The main menu, Settings, is divided into the following menus:
Icon
Designation
Menu 1-1 Parameters
Menu 1-2 Machine setting
Menu 1-3 Units
Menu 1-4 Diesel engine PowerSplit (option)
Menu 1-5 Language
Menu 1-7 Display
Menu 1-8 Date/time
Menu 1-9 Owner's address
Menu 1-10 Memory keys
217
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.4.1
Menu 1-1 Parameters
Fig. 167
Main menu 1 Settings is opened.
• You can use the incremental encoder to choose menu 1-1 Parameters.
• Press the incremental encoder.
The display indicates the menu level Parameters.
• You can use the incremental encoder to choose the desired menu.
• Press the incremental encoder.
The display shows the parameters of the selected menu.
218
Info centre "EasyTouch"
The menu is divided into the following sub-menus:
Icon
Designation
Menu 1-1-1 Feed Drive
Menu 1-1-2 Front attachment
Menu 1-1-3 Upper Discharge Chute
Menu 1-1-4 Grinding device
Menu 1-1-5 Counterblade
Menu 1-1-8 EasyFlow
Menu 1-1-9 EasyCollect
Menu 1-1-10 XDisc
Menu 1-1-11 Metal Detection
Menu 1-1-12 Diesel Engine
Menu 1-1-13 Travelling gear
Menu 1-1-14 Automatic steering system
Menu 1-1-15 Work
Menu 1-1-17 Multi-function lever
Menu 1-1-20 Autoscan
Menu 1-1-21 RockProtect (option)
Menu 1-1-25 Humidity measurement
219
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.4.1.1
Entering parameters
1
B
C
D
4
2
3
5
6
7
8
BX500147_2
Fig. 168
Item
Explanation
1
Press the
key to reset all parameters of the selected menu to the basic setting.
Press the
key to call up the technician level (password-protected).
2
3
Press the
key to call up the control panel for optional components, this can only be
done by KRONE customer service.
4
Press the
•

key to go back to the previous mask.
You can use the incremental encoder to select the required parameter, the selection box is
highlighted in colour.
NOTE
Only input fields highlighted in light blue can be changed. If a parameter value of 99999 and
grey font are displayed, the associated control system is not in operation.
•
220
Press the incremental encoder to jump to the selection box.
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Fig. 169
The mask for parameter entry appears with the following displays:
Item
Explanation
1
Shows the designation of the selected parameter.
2
Visual display of the possible range of the parameter value.
3
Parameter data: (from top to bottom):
Parameter number, min. value, max. value, basic setting value, unit.
4
Actual value of the parameter.
5
Setpoint value of the parameter
6
Reset the parameter to the basic setting
221
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Fig. 170
• Enter the new setpoint value in the input field (5) using the incremental encoder or
keyboard (7).

•
Press the
key to delete the setpoint value.
•
Press the
key to accept the modified value and/or to exit the parameter input mask.
•
Press the
key beside the incremental encoder to jump back one menu level.
NOTE
For additional information on the individual parameters, refer to the see page 764.
8.4.2

Menu 1-2 Machine setting
NOTE
Menu 1-2 "Machine setting" can be selected from the working screen and is described in the
chapter "General machine settings".
222
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.4.3
Menu 1-3 Units
Fig. 171
Main menu 1 Settings is opened.
• Use the incremental encoder to select menu 1-3 Units.
• Press the incremental encoder.
The display shows 4 selection windows in which the measuring unit for various measured
values can be converted.
The metric or imperial unit system can be selected in the menu:
Icon
Designation
Metric unit system
Imperial unit system
Global settings in the selection window (1)
Measured value
Unit
Metric
Imperial
Area
ha
acres
route
km
miles
Fuel consumption
l
gal
Height of lifting unit
cm
inch
Working width
cm
inch
223
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Fig. 172
Item
Explanation
2
Setting the chop length unit
3
Setting the unit for the gap distance from the corn conditioner
4
Setting the unit for the speed display
Carrying out the setting
• You can use the incremental encoder to select the required selection window, the selection
box is highlighted in colour.
• Press the incremental encoder to jump to the selection box.
• You can use the incremental encoder to select the required setting.
• Press the incremental encoder to accept the setting and to exit the selection box.
•
224
To exit the settings mask, press the
D
key or the
key on the incremental encoder.
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.4.4
Menu 1-4 PowerSplit (Option)
The PowerSplit is used to increase efficiency. The continuous engine output is adjusted to the
operating conditions thereby helping to optimise fuel consumption.
I
1080
II
III
IV
V
B
C
D
5
6
7
8
BX500163_2
Fig. 173
The current PowerSplit mode is displayed in area (II)
Icon
Designation
Diesel engine in max. power operation, in challenging operating conditions.
Diesel engine with reduced output, in favourable operating conditions.
Diesel engine with large reserves of torque at full output
(only BiG X 700/770 Europe).
Used during heavily fluctuating and extreme operating conditions.

NOTE
For additional information on the individual parameters, refer to the see page 764.
225
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Setting the PowerSplit
Fig. 174
The main menu 1 Settings has been opened.
• You can use the incremental encoder to select menu 1-4 PowerSplit.
• Press the incremental encoder.
The display shows the "PowerSplit" menu level.
Item
Designation
1
Current power mode
2
Diesel engine speed at which it the engine should automatically switch from
ECOPower to XPower.
3
Initial setting for XDisc and maize mode
4
Initial setting for grass mode
5
Initial setting for road mode
6
Activate/deactivate setting for automatic switch between ECOPower and XPower
and the switching process.
Status displays
Icon
Explanation
Automatic switching is active and takes place abruptly.
Automatic switching is active and takes place continuously.
Automatic switching is inactive
226
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Automatic switch between ECO Power and X Power
Automatic switching only takes place from Eco-Power to X-Power and vice versa. Switching to
Tri-Power must always be performed manually. The type of switching from Eco-Power to
X-Power can be performed using two levels:
Icon
Designation
Switching is performed abruptly at a set rotational speed
Switching is continuous and starts approx. 100 rpm before the set rotational
speed
Automatic is only active if the setpoint diesel engine speed is above 1900 rpm. If the diesel
engine speed briefly falls below the setpoint and Eco-Power mode is active, then the automatic
mode is reactivated automatically.
X-Power always switches back to ECO Power mode abruptly as soon as the engine is relieved
to the necessary extent.
If Tri-Power mode was manually selected, the automatic mode is only ready to operate and no
longer intervenes.
227
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Manual switching between ECO Power, X Power and TRI Power
TRI Power mode cannot be pre-set and can only be accessed if you switch modes manually.
The manual switching from X Power - TRI Power -ECO Power takes place in sequence and is
only possible if the diesel engine is not overloaded.
Fig. 175
The characteristic curves are selected by means of the switch (1) on the multi-function lever.
Each time the switch is actuated, the next available mode is activated.
• Machine is in X-Power mode:
– ECO-Power > TRI-Power > X-Power.
• The machine is in ECO-Power mode:
– X-Power > TRI-Power > ECO-Power.
The current operating mode is displayed in the working screen.
228
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.4.5
Menu 1-5 "Language"
Fig. 176
Main menu 1 "Settings" is opened.
• You can use the incremental encoder to select menu 1-5 "Language".
• Press the incremental encoder.
The display shows the current set language (1), the selected language (2) and the selection of
all available languages (3).
Item
Explanation
1
Currently set language
2
Currently selected language (identified by a small triangle
3
Selection of all available languages
Carrying out the setting
• You can use the incremental encoder to select the required selection window, the selection
box is highlighted in colour.
• Press the incremental encoder to jump to the selection box.
• You can use the incremental encoder to select the required setting.
• Press the incremental encoder to accept the setting and to exit the selection box.

NOTE
The selected language will be active after the machine is restarted (ignition off and on again).
229
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.4.6
Menu 1-7 "Display"
Fig. 177
Main menu 1 "Settings" is opened.
• You can use the incremental encoder to select menu 1-7 "Display".
• Press the incremental encoder.
The display shows menu level 1-7 "Display".
The "Display" menu is divided into the following menus:
Icon
Designation
Menu 1-7-1 "Day/night mode"
Menu 1-7-2 "Beeper"
Menu 1-7-4 "Direction of Rotation"
Menu 1-7-5 "Setting the fields in the working screen"
230
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.4.7
Menu 1-7-1 "Day/night mode"
Fig. 178
In menu 1-7-1 "Day/night mode", you can set the brightness of the display.
When driving at night, the display should be dimmed so that the driver is not dazzled.
Menu 1-7 "Display" is active.
• You can use the incremental encoder to select menu 1-7-1 "Day/night mode".
• Press the incremental encoder.
The display shows the settings for day and night.
= Day design
= Night design
The value after the icons
/
indicates the set brightness value.
The higher the value, the brighter the display.
Carrying out the setting
• You can use the incremental encoder to select the required selection window, the selection
box is highlighted in colour.
• Press the incremental encoder to jump to the selection box.
• You can use the incremental encoder to select the required setting.
• Press the incremental encoder to accept the setting and to exit the selection box.
231
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.4.8
Menu 1-7-2 Beeper
B
C
D
5
6
7
8
BX500043_1
Fig. 179
In this menu, you can set the signal tone (beeper) for the error messages, information
messages and for pressing a key.
Menu 1-7 "Display" is active.
• You can use the incremental encoder to select menu 1-7-2 "Beeper".
• Press the incremental encoder.
The display indicates the beeper settings.
Icon
Designation
Setting the signal tone when a key is pressed.
Setting the signal tone for error messages.
Setting the signal tone for information messages.
Possible settings
Icon
Explanation
The beeper is inactive.
The beeper is active.
The beeper is active, with reduced volume.
The duration of the signal tone is limited and is specified in seconds.
Setting the volume
To test the beeper, you can switch it on using the
off using the
232
8
key.
7
key and switch it
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Carrying out the setting
• You can use the incremental encoder to select the required selection window, the selection
box is highlighted in colour.
• Press the incremental encoder to jump to the selection box.
• You can use the incremental encoder to select the required setting.
• Press the incremental encoder to accept the setting and to exit the selection box.
233
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.4.9
Menu 1-7-4 Direction of Rotation
Fig. 180
In this menu, the direction of rotation of the incremental encoder for scrolling purposes can be
changed. The incremental encoder is set at the factory so that it is rotated anticlockwise
to scroll down and clockwise
to scroll up (recognisable by the blue arrow).
Menu 1-7 Display is active.
• You can use the incremental encoder to select menu 1-7-4 Direction of rotation.
• Press the incremental encoder.
The display shows menu 1-7-4.
For the following displays, the direction of rotation of the incremental encoder can be changed:
Icon
Meaning
"Scrolling down" in the parameter list
Press the key
direction of rotation anticlockwise.
Press the key
direction of rotation clockwise
"Reduce values" in input fields
Press the key
direction of rotation clockwise
Press the key
direction of rotation clockwise
"Scrolling down" in menus
234
Press the key
direction of rotation clockwise
Press the key
direction of rotation clockwise
•
Press the key
under
to call up the working screen.
•
Press the key
under
to apply the basic setting values.
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.4.10
Menu 1-7-5 Configure status line
Fig. 181
The first field (1) of the status display for the working screens "Road travel / Field mode" can be
adjusted individually in this menu.
Menu 1-7 Display is active.
• You can use the incremental encoder to select menu 1-7-5 Configure status line.
• Press the incremental encoder.
The selection options of the displays (2) for the first field (1) of the status line are shown.
Possible displays (2)
Icon
Explanation
Current time/date
Current fuel consumption
Chopping drum speed
Acreage
Current fuel consumption with reference to the surface
Moisture value of the crop measured by the NIR sensor (option).
Current fuel consumption with reference to the crop yield. Only possible in
conjunction with CropControl yield recording (option).
To change the display for the status line:
• You can use the incremental encoder to select the desired display (the display is highlighted
in colour)
• Press the incremental encoder to accept the selected display.
•
Press the key
•
Press the key
under
B
to call up the working screen.
to reset the display to the default setting (time).
235
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Fig. 182
The newly selected display (1) appears in the working screens "Road mode / Field mode".
8.4.10.1
NIR sensor for moisture measurement (option)
B
C
D
5
6
7
8
BX851032
Fig. 183
The NIR sensor determines the moisture content of the crop, which can then be used to
determine the DS content. The data can be assigned to the harvested area in the customer
counter. The NIR moisture sensor is only approved for use in grass and maize.
• Before working on stony ground, it may be necessary to remove the NIR sensor, see page
501.
• If the NIR sensor is removed, it must be deactivated. To do this, set the parameter 34019
"Moisture measurement type" to the value "0" (no sensor) in the menu 1-1-25 "Moisture
measurement".

NOTE
The glass cover of the NIR sensor can be damaged by stones in the chopping crops.
In the event of damage due to stone chipping, all entitlements under the warranty are
invalidated!

INFO
Um genauere Messwerte zu erreichen, ist vor Saisonbeginn eine Grundkalibrierung
vorzunehmen. Dabei wird die Maschine einmalig für die Fruchtarten Mais und Gras kalibriert.
Bitte melden Sie sich mindestens 5 Werktage vor Einsatzbeginn bei ihrem Händler, um
einen Termin zu vereinbaren.
236
Info centre "EasyTouch"
•
•
•
Menu 1-7-5 "Configure status line" is active.
You can use the incremental encoder to select the display
highlighted in colour.
Press the incremental encoder to confirm your selection.
, the input field is
Fig. 184
If the NIR sensor is active, the working screen displays the current moisture value (1) of the
crop.
To ensure that the NIR sensor provides correct values, you must set the type of crop.
• Select menu 1-1-25 "Moisture measurement".
• Set the parameter 30044 "Type of crop". Value 16 = Maize, Value 32 = Grass,
Value 0 = User-defined.
The NIR sensor is active if the following conditions are fulfilled:
• After being installed for the first time, the NIR sensor is released by a technician.
• The NIR sensor is activated. To do this, set the parameter 34019 "Moisture measurement
type" to the value "2" (NIR sensor) in the menu 1-1-25 "Moisture measurement".
• The machine is in the XPower operating mode (optimum measurement results are only
obtained in this mode).
• The spout should ideally be fully raised to optimise the function of the NIR sensor.
• The release switch maintenance is switched off.
• The main coupling is switched on.
• The feed drive/front attachment is switched on.
• The lifting unit is in working position.
• The setpoint engine rotational speed is greater than 1500 rpm (fixed value, cannot be
changed).
• The machine load is greater than 60%.
237
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Automatic NIR sensor calibration
Fig. 185
The NIR sensor performs automatic calibration if the following conditions are fulfilled:
• At least 10 hours of sensor operation have elapsed since the last calibration of the NIR
sensor.
• The maintenance release switch is switched on or the field mode release switch is switched
off, see page 128.
• The setpoint engine rotational speed is 800 rpm or higher (fixed value, cannot be changed).
The calibration is cancelled once the "NIR sensor active" condition is met again.
Possible status displays
238
Item
Icon
Explanation
2
---
An impermissible measured value or a measured value outside the
measuring range was determined.
3
OFF
The NIR sensor is not active, or one/several conditions are not fulfilled.
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.4.11
Menu 1-8 Date/time
BX500045
Fig. 186
Main menu 1 Settings is opened.
• You can use the incremental encoder to select menu 1-8 "Date/time".
• Press the incremental encoder.
The display shows the date and the time.
Carrying out the setting
• You can use the incremental encoder to select the required selection window, the selection
box is highlighted in colour.
• Press the incremental encoder to jump to the selection box.
• You can use the incremental encoder to select the required setting.
• Press the incremental encoder to accept the setting and to exit the selection box.
239
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.4.12
Menu 1-9 Owner's address
Fig. 187
Main menu 1 Settings is opened.
• You can use the incremental encoder to select menu 1-9 Owner's address.
• Press the incremental encoder.

NOTE
A maximum of 30 characters per input field can be entered. The information is used for every
printout on the CAN printer, see page 407. If a row contains no characters (and no spaces),
then the row is omitted from the printout.
Carrying out the setting
• You can use the incremental encoder to select the required selection window, the selection
box is highlighted in colour.
• Press the incremental encoder to jump to the selection box.
• You can use the incremental encoder to select the required setting.
• Press the incremental encoder to accept the setting and to exit the selection box.
Fig. 188

NOTE
Select and confirm the "ESC" symbol (1) to exit the input field without saving the entries or
changes. By selecting and confirming the "Enter" symbol (2), the entry or change is accepted
and saved
•
240
Press the key
under
to call up the working screen
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.4.13
Menu 1-10 Memory keys
Fig. 189
Main menu 1 Settings is opened.
• You can use the incremental encoder to select menu 1-10 Memory keys.
• Press the incremental encoder.
Further procedure, see page 176.
241
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.5
Main menu 2 Counters
1
2
3
B
5
6
7
8
4
C
BX770180
D
Fig. 190
The main menu level is active.
• You can use the incremental encoder to select the main menu 2 Counters.
• Press the incremental encoder.
The display shows the "Counter" menu.
Item
Icon
Designation
Explanation
Total counters
The total counter counts the different
types of machine data and cannot be
deleted.
Counter levels
1
Day counter 1
Day counter 2
Day counter 3
The day counters count the different
types of machine data and can be
deleted. They can be used individually,
e.g., as season counters.
Counter (active counters are highlighted colour)
2
3
4
242
0.0
l
operating hour counter (h)
Active if the diesel engine is running.
drum hours counter (h)
Active if the chopping drum is switched
on.
working hours counter (h)
Active if the front attachment is
switched on.
surface counter (ha)
Active if the lifting unit has reached the
working position.
Mileometer
Active during road and field modes
Fuel consumption
measurement (l)
(optional)
Measures fuel consumption, can be
Current average consumption
(l/h)
deleted using the key
C
.
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.5.1
Deleting the day counter
Fig. 191
The day counters 1 to 3 can be deleted in this menu.
The main menu level is active.
• You can use the incremental encoder to select the main menu 2 Counters.
• Press the incremental encoder.
The display shows various counters.
8.5.2
•
Press the key
for
•
Press the key
under
•
Press the
•
Press the key
or
for
to choose the day counter (1) to be deleted.
to delete all counters for the selected day counter.
key beside the incremental encoder to go back one menu level.
under
to call up the working screen.
Switching to Customer DataCounters
•
Press the
key below the
softkey to open the "Customer data counter" menu.
For additional information, see page 199.
243
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.6
Main Menu 3 Maintenance
Fig. 192
The main menu level is active.
• You can use the incremental encoder to choose main menu 3.
• Press the incremental encoder.
The display shows menu level 3 Maintenance.
The maintenance main menu is divided into the following menus:
Icon
Designation
Menu 3-1 Central lubrication/cleaning
Menu 3-2 Grind / Counterblade
Menu 3-3 Calibration of pendulum frame
Menu 3-4 Calibration of Autopilot
Menu 3-5 Calibration of spout
Menu 3-6 Corn conditioner calibration
Menu 3-7 Calibration of feed drive/front attachment
Menu 3-8 Calibration of travel path
Menu 3-9 RockProtect (optional)
Menu 3-10 Calibration of main coupling
Menu 3-11 Maintenance of additional axle (optional)

NOTE
If you press the maintenance release switch in the working screen, the maintenance main menu
appears automatically.
244
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.6.1
Unfulfilled switching-on conditions and CAN bus disturbances
Depending on the selected diagnostics menu, non-fulfilled switching-on conditions and errors
are displayed in the terminal. There is a difference between:
– non-fulfilled switching-on conditions (yellow)
– CANBUS errors (red)
Overview of non-fulfilled switching-on conditions
Symbol
Description
Symbol
Description
Diesel engine speed is not at 1950
rpm
Lifting unit is too low / is not low
enough
Diesel engine has not been
started
Spout not parked
Diesel engine not off
Spout not up
Idle speed of diesel engine 1100
rpm is not reached
Intake OFF / not OFF
Vehicle speed incorrect
Intake ON / not ON
Switch the “autopilot” release
switch on or off
Cutting drum running / not running
Switch the “intake/header” release
switch on or off
Cutting drum stopped / not
stopped
Switch the “traction drive” release
switch on or off
Pendulum frame is not horizontal
Switch the “road/field” release
switch on or off
Grinding flap closed
Switch the “parking brake” release
switch on or off
Grinding flap open
Seat switch (no one on the driver’s
seat)
Header not folded out
“Quick stop console” switch on or
off
Header not folded in
“Quick stop manual operation”
switch on or off
Header off/not off
Open or close door
Header on/not on
Switch the “maintenance” release
switch on or off
Grass mode is not set
Main coupling on/off
Maize mode is not set
Lifting unit too high/not high
enough
XDisc mode is not set
Table 2
245
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Overview of possible CANBUS errors
Symbol
Description
Symbol
Description
Error CAN to ADM 1/MFR
Error CAN to control lever
Error CAN to ADM 2 (only double
engine)
Error CAN to KMC2
Error CAN to autopilot
Error CAN to KMC3
Error CAN to CUC
Error CAN to metal detection
Error CAN to DIOM
Error CAN to maturity level
detection
Error CAN to EMR
Error CAN to DRC
Error CAN to manual operation
Table 3
The switching-on conditions must be met in order for the diagnostic execution and the errors
must be eliminated.
An appropriate remedy must be found otherwise supply voltages are not available, sensors
return no values and actuators cannot be switched on.
246
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.6.2
Menu 3-1 Central lubrication/cleaning
Fig. 193
Main menu 3 Maintenance is active.
• You can use the incremental encoder to select menu 3-1 Central lubrication/cleaning.
• Press the incremental encoder.
The display shows the menu level Central lubrication/cleaning.
•
Press the key
to trigger the "Engine compartment cleaning" function (option). The
engine compartment is cleaned for as long as the function is switched on and compressed
air is available.
•
Press the key
•
Press the
key to trigger the "Intake cleaning". The intake unit is cleaned for as long as
the function is switched on and compressed air is available.
•
Press the key
•
Press the
key to trigger the "Intermediate lubrication" function. Central lubrication is
switched on and passes through a complete lubrication cycle.
to switch off the "Engine compartment cleaning" function.
to switch off the "Intake cleaning" function.
Displaying unfulfilled switching-on conditions and disturbances, see page 294.
247
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.6.3
Menu 3-2 Grind/Counterblade
Fig. 194
Main menu 3 Maintenance is active.
• You can use the incremental encoder to select menu 3-2 Grinding/counterblade.
• Press the incremental encoder.
The display shows the menu level Grinding/counterblade.
The display shows warning messages that draw attention to the special hazards associated with
grinding the chopping blades.
WARNING
Risk of injury due to failure to observe warnings on the display!
Risk of injury due to hazardous components and other residual risks if users or third parties
enter or reach into the danger zone because they are unaware of a risk.
• Ensure that everyone who works with or on the machine familiarises themselves with the
meaning of the warnings and observes them.
Displaying unfulfilled switching-on conditions and disturbances, see page 294.
248
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Status displays for grinding operation
Fig. 195
Status displays for the grinding flap (1)
Icon
Explanation
Grinding flap is closed.
Grinding flap is open.
Status of the grinding stone (2)
Icon
Explanation
Grinding stone is on the left.
Grinding stone is in centre.
Grinding stone is on the right
*
Grinding stone is moving to the left
Grinding stone is moving to the right
Grinding stone position unknown.
Both grinding stone sensors are attenuated/sensor is defective - ERROR
*
The display with the arrow appears in different positions that indicate the direction of
movement of the grinding stone.
Status of grinding operation (3)
Icon
Explanation
1st number = current grinding cycle,
2nd number = number of setpoint grinding cycles
One grinding cycle corresponds to a double stroke of the grinding stone (1 x left/1 x right).
249
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Status of remaining grinding cycles up to grinding stone readjustment
After approx. 560 grinding cycles, the grinding stone must be readjusted or replaced. Once this
number is reached, the information message "Readjust grinding stone" is displayed.
Fig. 196
Item
Explanation
4
Counter "Remaining grinding cycles up to grinding stone readjustment"
5
Maximum number of grinding cycles per grinding stone.
•

Press the
key to set the counter (4) "Remaining grinding cycles up to grinding stone
readjustment" to the maximum number of grinding cycles.
NOTE
If the number of remaining grinding cycles falls below 10% of the maximum number of grinding
cycles, the display of remaining grinding cycles is highlighted in red. The information
message 598 "Readjust grinding stone" appears
•
•
Use the
key under
to hide the message.
To set the counter (4) "Remaining grinding cycles up to grinding stone readjustment" to the
maximum number of grinding cycles, press the
250
key.
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Resetting the question dialogue (6)
Fig. 197
• Press the
key to open the question dialogue (6) in the display.
The display shows the question dialogue "Reset grinding cycle counter?"

•
Press the
value.
key under
•
Press the
key under
to reset the total of all grinding cycles to the maximum
if you do not want to reset the grinding cycle counter.
NOTE
Readjust or replace the grinding stone after resetting the error message, see page 697.
Then reset the counter to prevent the grinding stone from being arrested.
251
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Status displays of the counterblade motors (data as seen in the direction of travel)
Fig. 198
Status displays when the counterblade is moved using manual operation
Icon
Explanation
Approach counterblade on the right active.
Approach counterblade on the right inactive.
Moving away from counterblade on the right active.
Moving away from counterblade on the right inactive.
Counterblade right cable break.
Counterblade right short circuit.
Approach counterblade on the left active.
Approach counterblade on the left inactive.
Moving away from counterblade on the left active.
Moving away from counterblade on the left inactive.
Counterblade left cable break.
Counterblade left cable break.
252
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Moving the counterblade

•
Press the
key to approach the counterblade on the right.
•
Press the
key to leave the counterblade on the right.
•
Press the
key to leave the counterblade on the left.
•
Press the
key to approach the counterblade on the left.
NOTE
Using the manual operation on the platform, the grind can also be started and the counterblade
adjusted.
Changing the number of grinding cycles
Carrying out the setting
• You can use the incremental encoder to select the required selection window, the selection
box is highlighted in colour.
• Press the incremental encoder to jump to the selection box.
• You can use the incremental encoder to select the required setting.
• Press the incremental encoder to accept the setting and to exit the selection box.
Start/stop grinding operation
Prerequisites, see page 693.
•
Press the
Icon
key to start and stop grinding operation.
Explanation
Stop grinding operation.
Start grinding operation.
Grinding operation is not possible.
253
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.6.4
Menu 3-3 Calibration of absolute lifting unit height
B
C
D
5
6
7
8
BX500053
Fig. 199
Main menu 3 Maintenance is active.
• Using the incremental encoder, choose menu 3-3 Calibration of absolute lifting unit height.
• Press the incremental encoder.
The display shows the menu level Calibration of absolute lifting unit height.
Risk of injury due to unexpected movement of parts!
During the calibration process, there is a risk of injury for persons who stay in the area of lifting
gear, front attachment and discharge chute.
- Make certain no one remains in the swivel range or in the range of movement of lifting
gear, front attachment and discharge chute during the calibration process.
Before the lifting unit is calibrated, it must be adjusted, see page 256.
The absolute lifting unit height must be calibrated if
• the "KMC3" control unit was replaced,
• the terminal was replaced,
• the lifting unit control was replaced,
• valves on the valve block "working hydraulics" were replaced,
• sensors (B25, B47, B48, B49, B50, B55, ) were replaced,
• if the front attachment was replaced.
Displaying unfulfilled switching-on conditions and disturbances, see page 294.
254
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Displays on the display
Fig. 200
Icon
Designation
Displaying the current lifting height in %.
Display of the current saved absolute height of the lifting unit at 80 %.
Display of the current saved absolute height of the lifting unit at 20 %
255
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Adjusting the Lifting Gear
The following switching-on conditions must be satisfied to adjust the lifting unit.
– The diesel engine is at idle speed.
– The release switch field mode is switched off.
– The release switch traction drive is switched off.
– The release switch maintenance is switched off.
– The front attachment has been attached.
– The pendulum frame is horizontal.
– The operating mode is set according to the front attachment.
– All lifting unit sensors are set and calibrated.
Execution
Fig. 201
Adjusting process 3 "upper height" - calibration of the upper height of the lifting unit
• Press the "Raise lifting unit" key (2) and memory key for "Lifting unit adjusting process" (1)
and hold down simultaneously for approx. 7 seconds.
 After successful adjustment the message "Lifting unit control adjusting process 3 OK"
appears in the status line of the terminal.
Adjusting process 2 "Front attachment weight" - calibration of lifting unit pressure
• Hold down the "Lower lifting unit" (2) key and lower the lifting unit until the sliding skids of
the EasyCollect header contour are resting on the ground. The front attachment must not
make contact with the ground.
• Release the key (2).
• Hold down the memory key for "Lifting unit adjusting process (1)" for approx. 7 seconds.
– After successful adjustment the message "Lifting unit control adjusting process 2 OK"
appears in the status line of the terminal.

NOTE
If the front attachment weight is calibrated at an incorrect lifting unit height, malfunctions may
occur during lifting unit control.
256
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Adjusting process 1 "lower height" - calibration of the lower height of the lifting unit
Fig. 202
• Press the "Lower lifting unit" key (2) and memory key for "Lifting unit adjusting process" (1)
and hold down simultaneously for approx. 7 seconds. The lifting unit is fully lowered.
– After successful adjustment the message "Lifting unit control adjusting process 1 OK"
appears in the status line of the terminal.
Checking actual ground pressure
• Select menu 4-1-5, display 4 "Calibration values".
• Move the lifting unit up and down at least twice.
• Leave the lifting unit in a suspended position (no contact with ground) and read off
the "actual ground pressure" value next to the

8.6.4.1
symbol.
NOTE
The value "actual bearing pressure" must have a negative percentage value. If the percentage
value is positive, the adjusting process 2 must be repeated.
Calibration process for absolute lifting unit height (cutting height)
Calibration of the absolute lifting unit height is necessary to allow specification of the lifting unit
height, corresponding to the cutting height for EasyCollect and XDisc, in absolute terms in the
info centre.
The calibration values are stored separately for Pick-up, XDisc and maize header.
Prerequisites
– The lifting unit is adjusted, see page 256.
– The release switch field mode is switched on.
– The release switch traction drive is switched off.
– The front attachment is mounted.
– The pendulum frame is aligned straight ahead.
– The release switch maintenance is switched off.
– The pick-up/maize header/XDisc operating mode is set according to the mounted front
attachment.
– The front attachment (maize header folded out) is horizontally aligned on level ground.
257
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Measuring the lifting height
Pick-up
Fig. 203
• Measure the distance "a" between the ground and the lowest point of a spring tine.
Maize header EasyCollect
Fig. 204
• Measure the distance (a) between the ground and the cutter blade.
XDisc
Fig. 205
• Measure the distance "a" between the ground and the blade.
258
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Calibrating the upper lifting unit height
Fig. 206
• Press the "Raise lifting unit" key (1) on the multi-function lever until the display shows a
value of "80 %" beside the
•
•
•
•
icon.
Using the incremental encoder, choose the setting
"Saved absolute height of the lifting
unit at 80 %". The input field is highlighted in colour.
Press the incremental encoder to jump to the input field.
Set the distance "a" measured using the incremental encoder (see "Measuring the lifting
height").
Press the incremental encoder to accept the setting and to exit the selection box.
259
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Calibrating the lower lifting unit height
Fig. 207
• Press the "Lower lifting unit" key (1) on the multi-function lever until the display shows a
value of "20 %" beside the
•
•
•
•
260
icon.
Using the incremental encoder, choose the setting
"Saved absolute height of the lifting
unit at 80 %". The input field is highlighted in colour.
Press the incremental encoder to jump to the input field.
Set the distance "a" measured using the incremental encoder (see "Measuring the lifting
height").
Press the incremental encoder to accept the setting and to exit the selection box.
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.6.5
Calibrating the automatic steering system
Risk of injury due to unexpected movement of parts!
During the calibration process, there is a risk of injury for persons who stay in the area of lifting
gear, front attachment and discharge chute.
- Make certain no one remains in the swivel range or in the range of movement of lifting
gear, front attachment and discharge chute during the calibration process.

NOTE
To guarantee trouble-free operation, calibrate the automatic steering system before using it for
the first time.
Fig. 208
Prerequisites:
– The EasyCollect maize header with row tracer (1) is mounted.
– The release switch road/field is switched to field mode.
– The release switch traction drive is switched on.
– The release switch maintenance is switched off.
– The seat switch is actuated (driver seated).
– The switches quick-stop console and manual operation are not actuated.
– The machine is on a level surface.
If one of these conditions is not fulfilled, the right side of the screen will display a corresponding
message.
Displaying unfulfilled switching-on conditions and disturbances, see page 294.
261
Info centre "EasyTouch"
After exchanging the sensors and actuators, the ISOBUS steering system must be recalibrated.
Observe the sequence below to perform calibration:
• Calibrate the steer angle.
• Calibrate the row tracers.
• Calibrate the steering (valves) (automatic or manual).
• Enter the turning circle.
The calibrated values are checked for plausibility. If a value is outside the valid range, the
error message
•
•
appears beside the calibrated value. The value cannot be saved.
Start the engine and switch on the release switch "automatic steering system".
Drive the machine at a speed of 0.7 km/h.
Fig. 209
The main menu 3 Maintenance is open
• Using the incremental encoder, choose the menu Calibration of automatic steering system.
• Press the incremental encoder.
262
Info centre "EasyTouch"
The display shows the menu Calibration of automatic steering system.
Display with outer tip
Display with central tip
Fig. 210
Item
Meaning
1
Saved value, maximum steering angle, left
2
Saved value, straight-ahead driving
3
Saved value, maximum steering angle, right
4
Saved value, minimum row tracer, left
5
Saved value, minimum row tracer, right
6
actual value of steering angle sensor
7
Actual value of row tracer left
8
Actual value of row tracer right
9
Setpoint value, voltage or pulse duty factor in 0.01% steering angle left
10
Saved value, minimum current steering angle, left
11
Setpoint value, voltage or pulse duty factor in 0.01% steering angle right
12
Saved value, minimum current steering angle, right
13
Actual value engine speed
14
Automatic calibration of the minimum valve flows for steering left/right
263
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.6.5.1
Calibrating the steering angle sensor
B
C
D
5
6
7
8
BX500058
Fig. 211
The steer angle must be calibrated if:
• a new front attachment was mounted,
• control units (KMC 2, autopilot) were replaced,
• sensors B63 (steering wheel pressure), B64 (inclination registration, steering axle) were
replaced,
• actuators Y39, Y40, Y66, Y67 of the steering were replaced.
Calibrate steer angle left max.
At left lock, the value of the steering angle sensor must be approx. 220.
If the value is lower, the steering angle sensor must be readjusted.
If the value is higher, check whether the steering angle sensor is correctly mounted.
If the notches of the steering angle sensor point in the direction of the plug, the steering angle
sensor is correctly mounted.
• Move the steering axle to the max. left position (move it to the left until the steering axle has
gone as far as it can).
•
•
•
•
264
Use the incremental encoder
to choose <Saved value, maximum steering angle,
left>. The input field is highlighted in colour.
Press the incremental encoder to jump to the input field.
Press the incremental encoder 2 times to save the current actual value of the steering angle
sensor and to exit the input field.
The actual value or the saved value should be 220. If it is not, readjust the sensor.
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Calibrating the steering angle for straight-ahead driving
When driving straight ahead, the value for the steering angle sensor for straight-ahead driving
should be 400 +/- 10. If the value is not within this range, the steering angle sensor must be
readjusted.
• Move the steering axle to the centre position (move it until the steering is set to straightahead driving).
•
•
•
•
Using the incremental encoder
to choose <Saved value, straight-ahead driving>.
The input field is highlighted in colour.
Press the incremental encoder to jump to the input field.
Press the incremental encoder 2 times to save the current actual value of the steering angle
sensor and to exit the input field.
The actual value or the saved value should be 400 +/- 10. If it is not, readjust the sensor.
Calibrate steer angle right max.
At right lock, the value of the steering angle sensor must be approx. 630.
If the value is lower, the steering angle sensor must be readjusted.
If the value is higher, check whether the steering angle sensor is correctly mounted.
If the notches of the steering angle sensor point in the direction of the plug, the steering angle
sensor is correctly mounted.
• Move the steering axle to the max. right position (move it until the steering has gone as far
as it can)
•
•
•
•

Use the incremental encoder
to choose <Saved value, maximum steering angle,
right>. The input field is highlighted in colour.
Press the incremental encoder to jump to the input field.
Press the incremental encoder 2 times to save the current actual value of the steering angle
sensor and to exit the input field.
The actual value or the saved value should be 630. If it is not, readjust the sensor.
NOTE
If the steering angle sensor is readjusted during the calibration process, you must being the
calibration again from the start.
265
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.6.5.2
Row tracer calibration
B
C
D
5
6
7
8
BX500058
Fig. 212
The row tracers must be calibrated if the sensors B61, B65, B66 of the row tracers have been
replaced.
The row tracers in the central tip or the outer tips can be chosen.
• In the mask "Parameter", group automatic steering system, choose the parameter 34016
"automatic steering system row tracers in central tip":
– 0 = Outer tip
– 1 = Central tip
Calibrating row tracers with steel bracket
• In menu 1-1-14, set parameter 26025 in the group automatic steering system "Flexible row
tracer fitted" to the value 0.
Prerequisites:
– The row tracers are in the basic position and are not actuated.

NOTE
Both row tracer right/left are calibrated on a once-off basis.
266
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Calibrating row tracer outer tip left/central tip right (1)
When the row tracer "Outer tip left/central tip right" is activated, the sensor value is increased.
Fig. 213
•
•
•
•
•
Using the incremental encoder, choose the setting
or
<row tracer
left>, the input field is highlighted in colour.
Press the incremental encoder to jump to the input field.
Press the incremental encoder 2 times to save the current actual value of the row tracer left
and to exit the input field.
The actual value must be in the range of 265 ±50. If necessary, readjust the sensor.
If the row tracer actuated up to the end stop, the actual value must be in the range of
515-635.
267
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Calibrating row tracer outer tip right/central tip left (2)
When the row tracer "Outer tip right/central tip left" is activated, the sensor value is reduced.
Fig. 214
•
•
•
•
•
268
Using the incremental encoder, choose the setting
or
<row tracer
right>, the input field is highlighted in colour.
Press the incremental encoder to jump to the input field.
Press the incremental encoder 2 times to save the current actual value of the row tracer
right and to exit the input field.
The actual value must be in the range of 590 ±50. If necessary, readjust the sensor.
If the row tracer actuated up to the end stop, the actual value must be in the range of
220-340.
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.6.5.3
Calibrating flexible row tracers
Fig. 215
Prerequisites:
– The machine is on a level surface.
– The row tracers can vibrate freely without striking an obstacle.
Calibrating row tracers:
• In menu 1-1-14, set parameter 26025 in the group autopilot "Flexible row tracer fitted" to the
value 1.
• Recalibrate the value for the rest position of the row tracers, right see page 267, left see
page 268Calibrating row tracer outer tip right/central tip left.
The following approximate values are determined during the calibration of the flexible row tracer
(1 for sensor in zero position (momentary switch not actuated):
Row tracers in new condition
Sensor "row registration B66":
50 +/- 10
Row tracers in used condition
Sensor "row registration B66":
40 - 120
As a check:
The following approximate values are determined during the calibration of the flexible row tracer
for sensor in maximum position:
Sensor "row registration right B66": 450 +/- 10
Sensor "row registration left B66": 450 +/- 10

NOTE
After replacing the sensor and after harvesting an area measuring approx. 100 ha, the
automatic steering system must be recalibrated.
269
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.6.5.4
Calibration of valves for steering left/right (manual)
Display with outer row tracer
Display with row tracer central tip
Fig. 216
Prerequisites:
– The machine is on a level surface.
– The row tracers can vibrate freely without striking an obstacle.
– Machine drives at least 0.7km/h
– Diesel engine = idling speed.
– Release switch road/field is set to field mode.
– Release switch automatic steering system is switched on.
– Release switch traction drive is switched on.
– Release switch maintenance is switched off.
– Seat switch actuated (driver seated).
– Switch quick-stop console is not actuated.
– Switch quick-stop manual operation is not actuated.
– Hydraulic oil is at operating temperature.
– Steering axle is in centre position (steer until steering points straight ahead).
– The machine is on a level surface.
270
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Calibration of minimum current for valve, steering to the left
•
•
•
•
Using the incremental encoder, choose
<left valve current value> (9), the input
field is highlighted in colour.
Press the incremental encoder to jump to the input field.
With the incremental encoder, increase the current setpoint value (in increments of 0.01%)
of the valve until the steering just starts to move.Then reduce the setpoint value
(in increments of 0.01%), until the steering just stops moving.
Press the incremental encoder 2 times to save the current that is currently displayed and to
exit the input field.
The saved minimum current value for the left valve
•
Press the
is updated.
key beside the incremental encoder to cancel the operation.
Calibrating the minimum current for valve, steering to the right
• Move the steering axle to the straight-ahead position.
•
•
•
•
Using the incremental encoder, choose
"right valve current value" (11), the input
field is highlighted in colour.
Press the incremental encoder to jump to the input field.
With the incremental encoder, increase the current setpoint value (in increments of 0.01%)
of the valve until the steering just starts to move.Then reduce the setpoint value
(in increments of 0.01%), until the steering just stops moving.
Press the incremental encoder 2 times to save the current that is currently displayed and to
exit the input field.
The saved minimum current value for the right valve
•
Press the
is updated.
key beside the incremental encoder to cancel the operation.
271
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.6.5.5
Calibration of valves for steering left/right (automatic)
During automatic calibration, the system records and saves the valve flows.
Calibration is interrupted as soon as the steering wheel is moved or the driver gets up off the
seat.
Fig. 217
Prerequisites:
– The steering angle sensor is correctly calibrated, see page 264.
•
Press the
key to start the automatic calibration process. A new window is shown.
Item
Meaning
1
Momentary PWM pulse duty factor.
Voltage as % at which the particular coil is actuated.
2
Current currently flowing through the corresponding coil.
3
Current value of steering angle sensor B64.
4
Status of the calibration:
Valve Y39 "Steering left" is calibrated.
Valve Y40 "Steering right" is calibrated.
Calibration successful and values are saved.
Calibration is stopped.
5
If an error has occurred, the display shows the corresponding error number.
The valves are then immediately actuated automatically. The steering axle moves accordingly.
272
•
Press the
•
Once calibration is stopped, press the
B
key to cancel the operation.
key to switch to the previous view.
Info centre "EasyTouch"
If an error occurs during calibration, the calibration process will be interrupted and the
corresponding error will be displayed.
Calibrating Steering Error List Automatically
No.
Icon
Meaning
Cause/Remedy
1
The value of steering angle
sensor B64 is less than the
calibrated value "Steering all the
way to the left"
Recalibrate steering angle sensor B64.
2
The value of steering angle
sensor B64 is greater than the
calibrated value "Steering all the
way to the right"
Recalibrate steering angle sensor B64.
3
Valve Y39 "Steering left" has
been actuated. Then the value
of steering angle sensor B64
must also reduce. However, the
sensor value increased.
•
•
•
•
4
Valve Y40 "Steering right" has
been actuated. Then the value
of steer angle sensor must also
increase. However, the sensor
value reduced.
•
•
•
•
5
6
Although valve Y39 "Steering
left" is actuated, no change is
detected on steering angle
sensor B64.
Although valve Y40 "Steering
right" is actuated, no change is
detected on steering angle
sensor B64.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Valves Y39 and Y40 reversed. Left is
actuated but the steering turns right.
Parameter 26027 "Valves reversed" is
set incorrectly.
Steering angle sensor B64 is mounted
incorrectly.
Wrong sensor as steering angle
sensor B64.
Valves Y39 and Y40 reversed. Right is
actuated but the steering turns left.
Parameter 26027 "Valves reversed" is
set incorrectly.
Steering angle sensor B64 is mounted
incorrectly.
Wrong sensor as steering angle
sensor B64.
The minimum current that was previously
determined automatically is not correct.
repeat calibration.
Steering angle sensor B64 faulty.
Steering angle sensor B64 or linkage on
steering angle sensor mounted
incorrectly.
Hydraulics faulty.
Hydraulic valve Y39 "Steering left" faulty.
The minimum current that was previously
determined automatically is not correct.
repeat calibration.
Steering angle sensor B64 faulty.
Steering angle sensor B64 or linkage on
steering angle sensor mounted
incorrectly.
Hydraulics faulty.
Hydraulic valve Y40 "Steering right"
faulty.
273
Info centre "EasyTouch"
No.
Icon
Meaning
Cause/Remedy
7 and 9
Cable break Y40 steering left
valve
8 and 10
Cable break Y39 steering right
valve
•
•
•
•
11
274
A pressure was detected at the
pressure sensor B63 "Steering
pressure".
•
•
•
•
•
•
Cable break to valve Y39 "Steering Left".
Valve coil Y39 faulty.
Automatic steering system faulty.
Cable break to valve Y40 "Steering
Right".
Valve coil Y40 faulty.
Automatic steering system faulty.
Steering motion on the steering wheel.
Pressure sensor B63 faulty.
Automatic steering system faulty.
Hydraulics faulty.
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.6.5.6
Turning circle calibration (only for ISOBUS steering system)
Fig. 218
• Move the machine onto a solid surface and turn the steering as far to the left as possible.
•
To call up the menu "Set steering radius", press the key
C
under
.
275
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Left turning circle
Fig. 219
• Mark a spot on the ground at the outer edge of the front right tyre (1).
• Drive semi circle at low speed and with the steering turned as far as possible.
• Measure the distance (3) between the outer edge of the front left tyre (2) and the previously
marked point (1)
• Enter the value in the terminal in the input field "Left turning circle" and save it.
Right turning circle
Fig. 220
• Mark a spot on the ground at the outer edge of the front left tyre (1).
• Drive semi circle at low speed and with the steering turned as far as possible.
• Measure the distance (3) between the outer edge of the front right tyre (2) and the
previously marked point (1)
• Enter the value in the terminal in the input field "Right turning circle" and save it.
276
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.6.6
Menu 3-5 Calibration Spout
The calibration must be performed to determine the maximum final position left/right.
The spout must always be calibrated if:
• a new spout was mounted.
• the controlled final position is not reached.
• the KMC2 control unit was replaced.
• work was carried out on the drive train of the spout.
Fig. 221
Prerequisites:
– The spout is raised.
– Diesel engine speed = idle speed
– The “Road/field” release switch is switched to field mode.
– The traction drive release switch is switched off.
– The maintenance release switch is switched off.
– The seat switch is actuated (driver's seat is occupied).
– The “quick stop console” switch is not actuated or is switched off.
– The “quick stop manual operation” switch is not actuated or is switched off.
– The “spout bottom” position is unattenuated.
Main menu 3 “Maintenance” is active.
• Select the menu 3-5 “Calibration Spout” by using the incremental encoder.
• Press incremental encoder.
The display shows the “Calibration Spout” menu level.
Displaying unfulfilled switching-on conditions and disturbances, see page 294.
277
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Fig. 222
Status displays
Icon
Explanation
Upper discharge chute
Lower discharge chute
Position of lower discharge chute sensor, cable break.
Position of lower discharge chute sensor, short circuit.
Spout position unknown, sensor position bottom, may be defective.
spout position left
Spout central position
Spout position right
Spout position unknown, sensor position centre or faulty
Mask description
278
•
The icon
•
The icon
indicates the actual current of the valve from the spout for the current
direction of rotation.
•
The icon
indicates the stored number of max. pulses for left.
•
The icon
indicates the stored number of max. pulses for right.
indicates the current number of pulses for the current side.
Info centre "EasyTouch"

NOTE
The individual calibration processes are interrupted by manually operating the spout with the
keys on the multi-function lever and when the driver leaves the driver’s seat.
Calibration of the minimum flows is performed automatically.
After each time the machine is restarted and the first time the spout is reversed, the
flows are determined again. Therefore, we recommend carrying out the first reversing
operation when the machine is warm and at a standstill.
Calibration of the maximum angular momentum for "position right"
• Move the spout manually to the right to the end setting.
– The spout stops if the previously calibrated level of angular momentum for this side has
been reached.
•
•
If the spout is not at the stop, press the D key or the corresponding key on the multifunction lever to continue turning the spout up to the stop.
To ensure that the spout does not continuously bump against the mechanical stop, turn
back the spout slightly by pressing the
•
Press the
C
B
key.
key to start the "angular momentum right" calibration.
Calibration of the maximum angular momentum for "position left"
• Move the spout manually to the left to the end setting.
– The spout stops if the previously calibrated level of angular momentum for this side has
been reached.
•
•
If the spout is not at the stop, press the B key or the corresponding key on the multifunction lever to continue turning the spout up to the stop.
To ensure that the spout does not continuously bump against the mechanical stop, turn
back the spout slightly by pressing the
•
Press the
D
key.
key to start the "angular momentum left" calibration.
279
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.6.7
Menu 3-6 Corn conditioner calibration
The discharge chute must always be calibrated when
– a corn conditioner has been removed or installed again.
– the control unit KMC3 has been replaced.
– the actual roller distance deviates significantly from the target roller distance.
Fig. 223
Prerequisites:
– Diesel engine speed = idle speed
– Release switch "road/field" is set to field mode.
– Release switch "traction drive" is switched off.
– Release switch "maintenance" is switched off.
– The seat switch is actuated (the driver's seat is occupied)
– Switch "quick-stop console" is not actuated = OFF
– Switch "quick-stop manual operation" is not actuated = OFF
Main menu 3 Maintenance is active.
• Using the incremental encoder, choose menu 3-6 Corn conditioner calibration.
• Press the incremental encoder.
The display shows the menu level Calibration of corn conditioner.
Displaying unfulfilled switching-on conditions and disturbances, see page 294.
280
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Fig. 224
• To ensure precise calibration, it is necessary to measure the exact distance between the
rollers (1, 2) using a feeler gauge (3).
• Lower the corn conditioner down to the ground.
•
•

Reduce the roller distance to the minimum possible distance by pressing the
key.
Use the incremental encoder to choose the input field for the roller distance and turn the
incremental encoder to set the measured distance.
NOTE
To ensure precise measurement of the gap distance, it is essential to first set the corn
conditioner to the minimum gap distance and to then increase the roller distance until a distance
dimension of 3 mm is established.
Use the icon
to display the current power consumption of the corn conditioner. It is
used by KRONE service technicians for diagnostic purposes.
• Measure the current distance between the two rollers (1, 2) of the corn conditioner
(see above).
• Using the incremental encoder, choose the "distance" setting, the input field is highlighted in
colour.
• Press the incremental encoder to jump to the input field.
• Using the incremental encoder, set the distance to the measured actual value.
• Press the incremental encoder to exit the input field.
The display (1) switches to
successfully completed".
•
Press the
•
Press the menu button
or
"Calibration process running" and
"Calibration process
key to reduce or increase the corn conditioner distance.
to access the previous menu level.
281
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.6.8
Menu 3-7 Calibration of feed drive/front attachment
B
C
D
5
6
7
8
BX500622
Fig. 225
Main menu 3 Maintenance is active.
• Use the incremental encoder to choose menu 3-7 Calibration of feed drive/front attachment.
• Press the incremental encoder.
The display shows the menu level Calibration of feed drive/front attachment.
Status displays
Icon
Explanation
Central lubrication active (green)
Error central lubrication (red)
Central lubrication inactive (yellow)
Displaying unfulfilled switching-on conditions and disturbances, see page 294.
282
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.6.8.1
Calibrate feed drive/front attachment
The intake must always be calibrated if
– a new intake was mounted.
– the actual chop length deviates from the displayed chop length.
– the KMC2 control unit was replaced.
– if work was performed on components of the intake drive (pump, hydraulic motor or speed
sensor).
The front attachment must always be calibrated if
– a new front attachment was mounted.
– the actual header speed deviates from the setpoint speed.
– the KMC2 control unit was replaced.
– if work was performed on components of the front attachment drive (pump, hydraulic motor
or speed sensor).

NOTE
Always calibrate the intake and front attachment together.

NOTE

NOTE
The intake should only be calibrated if the actual chop length differs from the displayed chop
length.
The front attachment should only be calibrated if the actual speed deviates significantly from the
setpoint speed (on a once-off basis by fitter or after replacement of the job computer).
Prerequisites:
– Release switch road/field is switched to field mode
– Release switch traction drive is switched off
– Release switch "intake/header" is switched on
– Release switch maintenance is switched off
– Seat switch is actuated (the driver's seat is occupied).
– Diesel engine running at rated speed
– Lifting unit is in working position
– Main coupling is switched on
283
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Starting the calibration process:
•

Press the
key to start calibration for the intake/front attachment.
NOTE
The intake/front attachment starts to rotate after a short time. The calibration process last for up
to 120 seconds.
If the required data was not determined during this time, the calibration process is cancelled
and must be repeated.
•
Press the
B
key to stop calibration for the intake/front attachment.
Fig. 226
•
The display after the icon for the feed drive
calibration status:
Icon
/front attachment
shows the
Explanation
Calibration stopped/complete
Calibration is running
Calibration was successful
Calibration was not successful
Displays on the display
Icon
Explanation
Actual current through valve Y5 "feed drive forwards" in mA
Current rotational speed of the feed drive
284
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Fig. 227
The display shows the rotational speeds for the support values (1) and (2) of the calibration:
If calibration was successful, the status display switches to "
(power consumption and rotational speed are 0.
• The power consumption display is updated:
Icon
", the front attachment stops
Explanation
I0
Power consumption when turning is started.
I min
Power consumption at minimum rotational speed.
I max
Power consumption at maximum rotational speed.
285
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.6.9
Menu 3-9 Calibration of RockProtect
The nominal value of the sensor is 2500 mV. This value may deviate slightly due to component
tolerances.
The zero position of the sensor must always be calibrated if
– the sensitivity of the sensor is too strong or too weak.
– the sensor B76, KMC4 or cable harness/plug has been replaced.
– the saved value and the currently measured value deviate too greatly from each other.
Fig. 228
Prerequisites:
– KMC2: There must be no error message from the CAN bus.
– KMC4: There must be no error message from the CAN bus.
– The machine is switched off.
Main menu 3 Maintenance is active.
• Using the incremental encoder, choose menu 3-9 "Calibration of RockProtect".
• Press the incremental encoder.
The display shows menu level Calibration of RockProtect.
• Press the
key under
to start the calibration.
The current voltage value is saved.
286
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.6.10
Menu 3-10 Calibration of main coupling
The main coupling must always be calibrated if
– it does not switch on "smoothly".
– the KMC3 control unit has been replaced.
– parts of the main coupling have been worked on.
– the valve Y12 "Main coupling" or its valve coil have been replaced.
Fig. 229
Prerequisites:
– Quick-stop switch console is switched off.
– Quick-stop switch manual operation is switched off.
– Release switch traction drive is switched off.
– Release road/field is set to field mode.
– Release switch maintenance is switched off.
– The seat switch is actuated (the driver's seat is occupied).
– The door is closed.
Main menu 3 Maintenance is active.
• Using the incremental encoder, choose menu 3-10 "Calibration of main coupling".
• Press the incremental encoder.
The display shows menu level Calibration of main coupling.
287
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Status displays
Icon
Explanation
The calibration process has been stopped.
The calibration process is currently running.
A rotational speed was measured at the chopping drum. The current values
were saved.
The calibration process was concluded successfully.
Displays on the display
Icon
Explanation
Actual current to the valve Y12 "Main coupling ON" in mA.
Current rotational speed of the chopping drum in rpm.
All conditions for automatic calibration of the main coupling have been
fulfilled.
–
The calibration can be started with the
–
The calibration is currently running and can be stopped using the 5
key. No values are saved.
The calibration process cannot be started because e.g. one or more
switching-on conditions have not been fulfilled.
–
5
key.
The rotational speed of the diesel engine in rpm
Displaying unfulfilled switching-on conditions and disturbances, see page 294.
288
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Fig. 230
If all switching-on conditions are fulfilled, the
icon is displayed.
• Press the 5 key to start the calibration.
If rotation of the chopping drum is detected, the min and max current for the cutting drum valve
is calculated and automatically saved.
If no speed is detected on the chopping drum, the automatic calibration process is stopped at
1400 mA.
•

Press the
6
key to stop the calibration.
NOTE
If no current is measured, e.g. because of a cable break to the valve, the calibration process is
automatically interrupted and an error message appears.
289
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.6.11
Menu 3-11 Maintenance of additional axle (option)
A manual function test of the additional axle can be performed in this menu. This must be
performed after every installation.
Fig. 231
Prerequisites:
– The diesel engine is running.
– The release switch traction drive is switched off
– The maize operating mode is set.
Main menu 3 Maintenance is active.
• Using the incremental encoder, choose menu 3-11 Maintenance of additional axle.
• Press the incremental encoder.
The display shows menu level Maintenance of additional axle.
Displaying unfulfilled switching-on conditions and disturbances, see page 294.
Manually raising or lowering the additional axle:
•
Press the
•
•
Press the
or
key to lower the additional axle.
In parallel, check the set pressure at the pressure limiting valve on the additional axle
(sensor B80).
or
key to raise the additional axle.
Setpoint pressures at the pressure limiting valve on the additional axle:

290
Axle load
2.3 t
2.55 t
2.75 t
Setpoint pressure
approx.
78 – 84 bar
88 – 94 bar
98 – 104 bar
NOTE
If the setpoint pressure specified in the table is not reached, contact your Krone dealer.
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.7
Main menu 4 Service
Fig. 232
The main menu level is active.
• You can use the incremental encoder to choose main menu 4.
• Press the incremental encoder.
The display shows menu level 4 Service.
The main menu, Service, is divided into the following menus:
Icon
Designation
Menu 4-1 Diagnostics
Menu 4-2 Error list
Menu 4-3 Technician level (password-protected)
Menu 4-4 Information
291
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.8
Menu 4-1 Diagnostics
Errors can be analyses and rectified with the help of the "Diagnostics" menu. The error
descriptions in the appendix provide information as to which components could be affected.
These can then be checked in the corresponding diagnostics menu.
The individual menus consist of a sensor and actuator test.
The sensor test displays the current measurement results from the sensors and actuators.
These values are needed for further analysis of errors by the dealer.
The actuator test involves activating individual actuators directly to carry out an electrical check
on their function.
WARNING
Risk of injury from unexpected movement of components!
During the actuator test conducted from the terminal or directly on the actuator, there is a risk
due to unexpected movements of the machine or parts of the machine.
• Only allow qualified technicians to carry out work on the machine.
• Secure the actuated parts of the machine to prevent unexpected movements.
• During the actuator test, ensure that no persons remain within the range of the machine
parts which are moved by the actuators.
The actuator test must only be performed from a safe position outside the area that is
affected by machine parts moved by the actuators.

NOTE
In order to carry out an actuator test, you must ensure that all hydraulically moved parts are in
their home/initial position.
Fig. 233
Main menu 4 Service is open.
• Using the incremental encoder, choose menu 4-1 Diagnostics.
• Press the incremental encoder.
The display shows the menu level Diagnostics.
292
Info centre "EasyTouch"
The Diagnostics menu is divided into the following menus:
Icon
Designation
Menu 4-1-1 Feed Drive
Menu 4-1-2 Front attachment
Menu 4-1-3 CAN bus
Menu 4-1-4 Upper Discharge Chute
Menu 4-1-5 Lifting Unit
Menu 4-1-6 Travelling gear
Menu 4-1-7 Metal Detection
Menu 4-1-8 Diesel Engine
Menu 4-1-9 Autopilot (option)
Menu 4-1-10 Autoscan
Menu 4-1-11 Electronics
Menu 4-1-12 Work
Menu 4-1-13 Grind
Menu 4-1-14 Counterblade
Menu 4-1-15 Corn Conditioner
Menu 4-1-16 Joystick
Menu 4-1-17 Control Unit Console
Menu 4-1-18 Manual Operation
Menu 4-1-19 Terminal
Menu 4-1-20 RockProtect (option)
Menu 4-1-21 Moisture measurement (option)
293
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.8.1
Unfulfilled switching-on conditions and CAN bus disturbances
Depending on the selected diagnostics menu, non-fulfilled switching-on conditions and errors
are displayed in the terminal. There is a difference between:
– non-fulfilled switching-on conditions (yellow)
– CANBUS errors (red)
Overview of non-fulfilled switching-on conditions
Symbol
Table 4
294
Description
Symbol
Description
Diesel engine speed is not at 1950
rpm
Lifting unit is too low / is not low
enough
Diesel engine has not been
started
Spout not parked
Diesel engine not off
Spout not up
Idle speed of diesel engine 1100
rpm is not reached
Intake OFF / not OFF
Vehicle speed incorrect
Intake ON / not ON
Switch the “autopilot” release
switch on or off
Cutting drum running / not running
Switch the “intake/header” release
switch on or off
Cutting drum stopped / not
stopped
Switch the “traction drive” release
switch on or off
Pendulum frame is not horizontal
Switch the “road/field” release
switch on or off
Grinding flap closed
Switch the “parking brake” release
switch on or off
Grinding flap open
Seat switch (no one on the driver’s
seat)
Header not folded out
“Quick stop console” switch on or
off
Header not folded in
“Quick stop manual operation”
switch on or off
Header off/not off
Open or close door
Header on/not on
Switch the “maintenance” release
switch on or off
Grass mode is not set
Main coupling on/off
Maize mode is not set
Lifting unit too high/not high
enough
XDisc mode is not set
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Overview of possible CANBUS errors
Symbol
Description
Symbol
Description
Error CAN to ADM 1/MFR
Error CAN to control lever
Error CAN to ADM 2 (only double
engine)
Error CAN to KMC2
Error CAN to autopilot
Error CAN to KMC3
Error CAN to CUC
Error CAN to metal detection
Error CAN to DIOM
Error CAN to maturity level
detection
Error CAN to EMR
Error CAN to DRC
Error CAN to manual operation
Table 5
The switching-on conditions must be met in order for the diagnostic execution and the errors
must be eliminated.
An appropriate remedy must be found otherwise supply voltages are not available, sensors
return no values and actuators cannot be switched on.
295
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.8.1.1
General Status Displays Sensors/Actuators
The following status displays may appear when diagnosing all sensors and actuators:
Symbol
Table 6
296
Description
Symbol
Description
Error/implausible
Cable break
Broken cable sensor
Short circuit
Sensor alive
Actuator ON
Sensor not alive
Actuator OFF
Short circuit sensor
Actuator error
Sensor OK
Wiring/sensor defective
Normal operation, process active
Voltage value too large
Process inactive
Stop requested
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.8.1.2
Menu 4-1-1 Diagnostics intake
Fig. 234
• Select menu 4-1-1 “Intake”.
The “Intake” diagnostics menu is divided into three displays:
–
Display 1
“Sensor test”
–
Displays 2 and 3
“Actuator test”
Display 1 "Sensor test"
B
C
D
5
6
7
8
BX770181
Fig. 235
Display 1 "Sensor test" shows the current measurement results of the sensors and actuators for
the feed drive.
297
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Screen description display 1 "Sensor test"
BMK
Screen display/icons/description
Y5
Y6
Y5
Feed drive forwards
Y6
Feed drive backwards
Current amperage in mA.
B26
Intake speed
Current sensor value in rpm.
D614
Supply voltage +12V1 for the outputs of the KMC2 in mV.
B26
Status of sensor "feed drive rotational speed".
Y35
Status of the "quick-stop valve", read in via the input of the KMC2.
Y35
Status of the "quick-stop valve", read in via the metal detection.
Current setpoint chop length
Table 7
Status displays
Actuator
status
active
Actuator
status
inactive
Actuator
status
released
Actuator
status
Short-circuit
Description
Feed drive forwards
Feed drive backwards
Horn
Metal detection
Table 8
298
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Display 2 “Actuator test”
B
C
D
5
6
7
8
BX770182
Fig. 236
On display 2 "Actuator test" the function of the actuators associated with the feed drive can be
tested.
Mask description display 2 "Actuator test"
BMK
Screen display/icons/description
Y5
Feed drive forwards
Y6
Feed drive backwards
Current amperage in mA.
D614
Supply voltage +12V1 for the outputs of the KMC2 in mV.
Switching actuators on/off
If all switching-on conditions for the actuator test are fulfilled,
and
are displayed and
the actuators displayed are released. These can be switched on and off using the numerical keys.
BMK
Icon
Description
Y5
Feed drive forwards
Y6
Feed drive backwards
H59
Switch on actuator
Switch off actuator
Horn
299
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.8.1.3
Menu 4-1-2 Diagnostics front attachment
Fig. 237
• Select menu 4-1-2 "Front attachment".
The "Front attachment" diagnostics menu is divided into three displays:
–
Display 1
"Sensor test"
–
Displays 2 and 3
"Actuator test"
Display 1 "Sensor test"
B
C
D
5
6
7
8
BX770183
Fig. 238
Display 1 "Sensor test" indicates the current test results of the sensors and actuators for the
front attachment.
300
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Screen description display 1 "Sensor test"
BMK
Screen display/icons/description
Y7
Y8
Y7
Front attachment forwards
Y8
Front attachment backwards
Current amperage in mA.
B27
Front attachment speed
Current sensor value in rpm.
D614
Supply voltage +12V1 for the outputs of the KMC2 in mV.
B27
Status of "Front attachment speed sensor".
Y35
Status of the "quick-stop valve", read in via the input of the KMC2.
Y35
Status of the "quick-stop valve", read in via the metal detection.
Current setpoint front attachment speed.
301
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Status displays
Actuator
status
active
Actuator
status
inactive
Actuator
status
released
Actuator
status
Short-circuit
Description
Front attachment
forwards
Front attachment
backwards
Metal detection
Status active
Description
Headland position management error
Headland position management
Headland position management reduces the rotational speed of the intake unit and of the front
attachment above a specified lifting height. If the "headland position management error"
occurs, this means that the intake unit and the front attachment have come to a stop during the
automatic rotational speed reduction. The error messages 2408 "Front attachment rotational
speed disturbance" and/or 2407 "Feed drive rotational speed disturbance" appear on the
terminal. In this case, carry out the following steps:
•
•
•
302
Stop the machine.
Stop the lifting unit.
Check the front attachment and the intake unit for soiling and clean if required.
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Display 2 “Actuator test”
B
C
5
6
7
8
D
BX770184
Fig. 239
On display 2 "Actuator test" the function of the actuators associated with the front attachment
can be tested.
Mask description display 2 "Actuator test"
BMK
Screen display/icons/description
Y7
Front attachment forwards
Y8
Front attachment backwards
Current amperage in mA.
D614
Supply voltage +12V1 for the outputs of the KMC2 in mV.
Switching actuators on/off
If all switching-on conditions for the actuator test are fulfilled,
and
are displayed and
the actuators displayed are released. These can be switched on and off using the numerical
keys.
BMK
Icon
Description
Y7
Front attachment forwards
Y8
Front attachment backwards
Switch on actuator
Switch off actuator
303
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.8.1.4
Menu 4-1-3 CAN bus
Fig. 240
• Select menu 4-1-3 “CAN Bus”.
The “CAN Bus” diagnostics menu is divided into two displays:
–
Display 1
“CAN bus participant”
–
Display 2
“Terminating resistor CAN bus 2”
Display 1 "CAN Bus user"
Fig. 241
Display 1 "CAN Bus user" shows the current connected control units (participants) at the CAN
bus. In the event of an error, the relevant participants are shown in red with an exclamation
mark. An error message is also displayed on the terminal.

NOTE
For error correction, contact your dealer or KRONE customer service.
Sample illustration of an error at the CAN bus:
KMC2 active
304
KMC2 inactive or disconnected from CAN bus
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Display 2 “Terminating resistor CAN bus 2”
Fig. 242
In display 2 “Terminating resistor CAN bus 2”, the relay to switch the terminating resistor
installed in the CAN bus 2 can be switched on or off for extended diagnostics purposes. The
terminating resistor is switched on automatically if there is no AutoScan sensor installed on the
machine.
Mask description display 2 “terminating resistor CAN bus 2“
BMK
Mask display / symbols / description
Condition of terminating resistor CAN 2.
Table 9
Switching actuators on/off
If all switching conditions have been met for the actuator test,
the softkeys
and
are displayed and the displayed actuators are activated. They can
be switched on and off via number keys.
BMK
R61
Symbol
Description
Switch on the
actuator
Switch off the
actuator
Terminating resistor CAN2
Table 10
305
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.8.1.5
Menu 4-1-4 Diagnostics spout
Fig. 243
• Select menu 4-1-4 “Discharge Chute”.
The “Discharge Chute” diagnostics menu is divided into three pages:
–
Display 1
“Sensor test”
–
Displays 2 and 3
“Actuator test”
Display 1 "Sensor test"
B
C
D
5
6
7
8
BX770185
Fig. 244
Display 1 "Sensor test" shows the current statuses of the sensors and actuators for the spout.
For diagnostics purposes, the spout must be actively actuated from the multi-function lever.
306
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Screen description display 1 "Sensor test"
BMK
Screen display/icons/description
B30
Angular momentum discharge chute
Current sensor value in digits.
B28
Status of sensor "position spout centre".
B30
Status of sensor "angular momentum spout".
B29
Status of sensor "position spout below".
Y20
"turn spout left"
Y21
"turn spout right"
Current amperage in mA.
D616
Supply voltage +12V3 for the outputs of the KMC2 in mV.
307
Info centre "EasyTouch"
BMK
Screen display/icons/description
Status display of the valves.
D617
Supply voltage +12V4 for the outputs of the KMC2 in mV.
Status displays
BMK
Position
left
Position
centre
Position
right
Position
unknown
Angular momentum
discharge chute
B30
BMK
Position at top
Position at bottom
B29
308
Description
Position discharge chute at
bottom
B29
BMK
Description
Cable break
Short-circuit
Unknown
Description
Position discharge chute at
bottom
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Display 2 “Actuator test”
Fig. 245
On display 2 "Actuator test" the function of the actuators associated with the spout can be
tested.
Mask description display 2 "Actuator test"
BMK
Screen display/icons/description
D616
Supply voltage +12V3 for the outputs of the KMC2 in mV.
Y20
Turn discharge chute left
Y21
Turn discharge chute right
Current amperage in mA.
D617
Supply voltage +12V4 for the outputs of the KMC2 in mV.
309
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Switching actuators on/off
If all switching-on conditions for the actuator test are fulfilled,
and
are displayed and
the actuators displayed are released. These can be switched on and off using the numerical
keys.
BMK
Icon
Description
Switch on
actuator
Y20
Turn discharge chute left
Y21
Turn discharge chute right
Y22
Lift discharge chute flap
Y23
Lower discharge chute flap
Switch off
actuator
Status displays
Actuator
status
active
Actuator
status
inactive
Actuator
status
Error
Description
Turn discharge chute left
Turn discharge chute right
Lift discharge chute flap
Lower discharge chute flap
310
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Display 3 "Actuator test"
Fig. 246
On display 3 "Actuator test" the function of the actuators associated with the spout can be
tested.
Mask description display 3 "Actuator test"
BMK
Screen display/icons/description
D617
Supply voltage +12V4 for the outputs of the KMC2 in mV.
Switching actuators on/off
If all switching-on conditions for the actuator test are fulfilled,
and
are displayed and
the actuators displayed are released. These can be switched on and off using the numerical
keys.
BMK
Icon
Description
Switch on actuator
Y24
Lift spout
Y25
Lower spout
Y76
Hinged discharge chute
extension
Switch off actuator
Status displays
Actuator
status
active
Actuator
status
inactive
Description
Lift spout
Lower spout
Hinged discharge chute extension
311
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.8.1.6
Menu 4-1-5 Diagnostics lifting unit
Fig. 247
•
Select menu 4-1-5 "Lifting unit".
The "Lifting unit" diagnostics menu is divided into four displays:
312
–
Display 1
"Sensor test"
–
Displays 2 and 3
"Actuator test"
–
Display 4
"Calibration values"
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Display 1 "Sensor test"
I
B
C
II
5
6
5
6
7
8
7
8
B
D
C
D
BX770186
Fig. 248
I
Two-part EasyCollect
II
Three-part EasyCollect
Display 1 "Sensor test" indicates the current test results of the sensors and actuators for the
lifting unit.
Screen description display 1 "Sensor test"
BMK
Screen display/icons/description
Status display of the set functions and operating modes.
Current diesel engine speed in rpm.
B47
Header contour left
Current sensor value in digits and as %.
B48
Header contour right
Current sensor value in digits and as %.
B49
Lifting unit pressure
Current sensor value in digits and as %.
Table 11
313
Info centre "EasyTouch"
BMK
B50
Screen display/icons/description
Position lifting unit
Current sensor value in digits, as % and in cm.
B25
Position of front attachment on left (optional)
B55
Position of front attachment on right (optional)
Current status of the sensors.
B87
Position of pendulum frame at top left (optional)
B88
Position of pendulum frame at top right (optional)
Current status of the sensors.
B52
Transversal inclination of pendulum frame (optional)
Current status or sensor value in digits.
Status display of the valves.
Currently saved setpoint value of the lifting unit height in cm or as %.
Table 12
To switch to the "calibration values" display, press the
314
key under
.
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Status displays
Status
Active
Status
inactive
Description
Distance mode
Pressure mode
Position mode
Table 13
EasyCollect
EasyFlow
XDisc
Description
Set front attachment
Table 14
Status
Active
Status
inactive
Status
implausible
Description
Dumping/active vibration damping
Table 15
Status
Free
Status
Locked
Description
Position of pendulum frame at top right
Position of pendulum frame horizontal
Position of pendulum frame at top left
Position of pendulum frame unknown
Actuation of lifting unit control locked
Table 16
315
Info centre "EasyTouch"
BMK
Status
Active
Status
error
Description
B47
Header contour left
B48
Header contour right
B49
Lifting unit pressure
B50
Position lifting unit
Table 17
BMK
Actuator
status
inactive
Actuator
status
cable break
Actuator
status
short circuit
Description
Y32
Raise lifting unit
Y33
Lower lifting unit
Y34
Lifting unit
accumulator
Y37
Turn pendulum frame
on left
Y38
Turn pendulum frame
on right
Y53
Storage switch
grass/maize
Y54
Pendulum frame
free 1
Y55
Pendulum frame
free 2
Table 18
316
Actuator
status
Active
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Display 2 “Actuator test”
Fig. 249
On display 2 "Actuator test" the function of the actuators associated with the lifting unit can be
tested.
Mask description display 2 "Actuator test"
Most of the icons are already described in display 1 "Sensor test". For this reason, only new
icons are described below.
BMK
Screen display/icons/description
The pulse/pause ratio of the control signal to actuate the actuators can be adjusted
via the incremental encoder.
A9
Checking the "operational readiness" LED on the lifting unit control.
Table 19
317
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Switching actuators on/off
• Using the incremental encoder, set the value for the pulse/pause ratio at which the
"Lift lifting unit" and "Lower lifting unit" valves are to be actuated.
If all switching-on conditions for the actuator test are fulfilled, the softkeys
and
are
displayed and the actuators displayed are released. These can be switched on and off using the
numerical keys.
BMK
Icon
Description
Y32
Raise lifting unit
Y33
Lower lifting unit
Y34
Lifting unit accumulator
A9
"Operational readiness"
LED on the lifting unit
control.
Switch on
actuator
Switch off
actuator
Table 20
Status displays
Status
Active
Status
inactive
Description
"Operational readiness" LED on the lifting unit control.
Table 21
318
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Display 3 "Actuator test"
B
C
D
5
6
7
8
BX770187
Fig. 250
On display 3 "Actuator test" the function of the actuators associated with the lifting unit can be
tested.
Mask description display 3 "Actuator test"
The icons have already been described on display 1 "Sensor test" and
display 2 "Actuator test". For this reason, no icons are described below.
Switching actuators on/off
• Using the incremental encoder, set the value for the pulse/pause ratio at which the
"Lift lifting unit" and "Lower lifting unit" valves are to be actuated.
Mas k descripti on dis pl ay 3 Actuator test
If all switching-on conditions for the actuator test are fulfilled,
and
are displayed and
the actuators displayed are released. These can be switched on and off using the numerical
keys.
BMK
Y37
Y38
Y54
Y55
Icon
Description
Switch on
actuator
Switch off
actuator
Turn pendulum frame left
Turn pendulum frame right
Pendulum frame free Valve 1
Pendulum frame free Valve 2
Table 22
319
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Display 4 "Calibration values"
•
On display 1 "Sensor test", press the
B
C
D
key under
5
6
7
8
.
BX770188
Fig. 251
Display 4 "Calibration values" clarifies the dependencies between sensor and calibration values.
Mask description display 4 "Calibration values"
BMK
B47
Screen display/icons/description
Header contour left
Current sensor value in digits and as %.
B47
Header contour left
Currently calibrated sensor values in digits.
B48
Header contour right
Current sensor value in digits and as %.
B48
Header contour right
Currently calibrated sensor values in digits.
Table 23
320
Info centre "EasyTouch"
BMK
B49
Screen display/icons/description
Lifting unit pressure
Current sensor value in digits and as %.
B49
Lifting unit pressure
Currently calibrated sensor value in digits.
B50
Position lifting unit
Current sensor value in digits, as % and in cm.
B50
Position lifting unit
Currently calibrated sensor values in digits.
Table 24
Status displays
Active
Inactive
Successful
Description
Calibration position "at top"
Calibration position "at bottom"
Calibration lifting unit pressure
Table 25
321
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.8.1.7
Menu 4-1-6 Diagnostics travelling gear
Fig. 252
• Select menu 4-1-6 "Travelling gear".
The "Travelling gear (Bosch)" diagnostics menu is divided into three displays:
–
Display 1
"Sensor test"
–
Display 2
"Sensor test additional axle" (for additional axle option only)
–
Display 3
"Actuator test additional axle" (for additional axle option only)
Display 1 "Sensor test"
Fig. 253
Display 1 "Sensor test" indicates the current test results of the sensors and actuators for the
travelling gear.
322
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Screen description display 1 "Sensor test"
BMK
Screen display/icons/description
Current direction of travel and speed display in km/h.
Saved driving speed of the speed controller in km/h.
Current status of the parking brake.
S3
B18
"Travelling gear" release switch
Current status of the release switch.
Brake tank pressure
Current status of the sensor.
Status display of the power limitation.
Y101
Drive pump forwards
Y102
Drive pump backwards
B108
Pivoting angle pump
Current amperage in mA and current sensor value in mV.
Table 26
323
Info centre "EasyTouch"
BMK
Screen display/icons/description
Y105
Adjusting motor at rear left
B105
Speed sensor wheel at rear left
Current amperage in mA and current sensor value in rpm.
Y103
Adjusting motor at front left
B103
Speed sensor wheel at front left
Current amperage in mA and current sensor value in rpm.
B107
Steering angle at rear left
Current sensor value in digits and mV.
Y106
Adjusting motor at rear right
B106
Speed sensor wheel at rear right
Current amperage in mA and current sensor value in rpm.
Y104
Adjusting motor at front right
B104
Speed sensor wheel at front right
Current amperage in mA and current sensor value in rpm.
Table 27
324
Info centre "EasyTouch"
BMK
Screen display/icons/description
B101
Pump pressure MA
B102
Pump pressure MB
Current sensor values in bar.
B110
Y18
Parking brake pressure
Parking brake
Current sensor value in digits and current amperage in mA.
B109
Brake pedal angle
B16
Service brake pressure
Current sensor values in digits, µA and bar.
Table 28
325
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Status displays
Forwards
Neutral
(Standstill)
Backwards
Description
Direction of travel
Table 29
Status active
Description
Emergency operation: The travelling gear computer has detected a
serious error. The machine has been switched to a mode which allows the
machine to move at a reduced speed.
Table 30
Status active
Status inactive
Description
Cruise control
Power limitation
Table 31
Status active
Status ready
Status inactive
Description
Traction control system Level I
(maize mode)
Traction control system Level II
(grass mode)
Table 32
The icons in the lower part of the display (B16, B101 … B110) are colour-coded according to
status. The representation at sensor B16 is shown as an example below.
BMK
B16
Table 33
326
Status
ok
Status
Not OK
Status
unauthorised
Status
unknown
Description
Service brake pressure
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Display 2 "Sensor test additional axle" (for "additional axle" option only)
Fig. 254
Display 2 "Sensor test additional axle" indicates the current test results of the sensors and
actuators of the "additional axle"
Mask description display 2 "Sensor test additional axle"
BMK
Screen display/icons/description
Current driving speed in km/h.
D1301
Supply voltage of the control unit "additional axle" in mV.
D1302
Supply voltage of the sensors in mV
B80
Additional axle pressure
Current sensor value in mV and bar.
Y80
Lift additional axle
Current amperage in mA.
Y81
Lower additional axle
Current amperage in mA.
327
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Display 3 "Actuator test additional axle" (for "additional axle" option only)
Fig. 255
The functions of the "additional axle" valves can be tested on display 3 "Actuator test additional
axle"
Mask description display 3 "Actuator test additional axle"
BMK
Y80
Screen display/icons/description
Lift additional axle
Current amperage in mA.
Y81
Lower additional axle
Current amperage in mA.
Switching actuators on/off
If all switching-on conditions for the actuator test are fulfilled,
and
are displayed and
the actuators displayed are released. These can be switched on and off using the numerical keys.
BMK
328
Icon
Description
Y80
Lift additional axle
Y81
Lower additional axle
Switch on
actuator
Switch off
actuator
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.8.1.8
Menu 4-1-7 Metal detection
Figure 256
•
Select Menu 4-1-7 "Metal Detection”.
The “Metal Detection” diagnostics menu is divided into two displays:
–
Display 1
Sensor test/ actuator test
–
Display 2
Sensor test/ actuator test
329
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Display 1 "Sensor and actuator test"
Fig. 257
Display 1 "Sensor and actuator test" shows the current measurement results for the sensors
and actuators used for metal detection. Furthermore, the metal detection (the quick-stop valve)
can be tested.
Mask description display 1 "Sensor and actuator test"
CAUTION
Damage caused by deactivated "metal detection"!
If the "metal detection" function has been deactivated by the stop lock "on", the machine may
be damaged.
• Ensure that the stop lock is set to "off".
If metal detection is deactivated, the working screen displays the
It is essential to check the setting of the stop lock.
If a fault occurs, contact KRONE customer service!
330
icon
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Supply voltage for metal detection in mV.
Voltage present at the metal detection switching output in mV.
D500
Status of the metal detection output with position information of the metal, if detected.
Status of the KMC2 input.
(Also switched through the metal detection output)
B26
Intake speed
Current sensor value in rpm.
Software version of metal detection.
Currently set disturbance threshold value.
Currently set disturbance average value.
331
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Switching actuators on/off
The test stop can be executed with a stationary and running feed drive/front attachment.
Icon
Description
Run function
Execute test stop.
Cancel test stop and release metal detection.
Status displays
Status active
Status
inactive
Description
Metal detection (active = metal detected)
Function "Metal detection"
Test stop
0
Status OK
All the way
to the left
1
Status
faulty
All the way
to the right
6
Status cable
break
Description
D500 - metal position information
Status short
circuit
Status
current
> 10 A
Description
Metal detection
output
332
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.8.1.9
Menu 4-1-8 Diesel Engine
Fig. 258
• Select menu 4-1-8 "Diesel engine".
The "Diesel engine" diagnostics menu is divided into five displays:
–
Displays 1 to 3
Sensor test
–
Display 4
Hydrostatic fan
–
Display 5
Sensor test
–
Display 6
Service interval
333
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Display 1 “Sensor test”
Fig. 259
Display 1 “Sensor test” shows the latest measurement results for the “diesel engine”.
Mask description display 1 “Sensor test”
EId
Mask description/icons/description
D200
Current engine speed in rpm.
D201
Current coolant temperature in °C.
Current engine oil pressure in bar.
334
D204
Oil pressure recorded by the “EDC Master” control unit.
D224
Oil pressure recorded by the “EDC Slave” control unit.
B45
Current status of “filling level coolant” sensor.
B46
Current status of “air filter contamination” sensor.
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Display 2 "Sensor test"
Fig. 260
Display 2 "Sensor test" shows the latest measurement results for the diesel engine.
Mask description display 2 "Sensor test"
BMK
Screen display/icons/description
D202
Current engine load referred to maximum engine power.
D203
Current engine load referred to maximum engine power at current engine speed.
D207
Current fuel temperature in °C.
D208
Current fuel consumption in litres per hour.
D209
Current charge pressure in bar
D210
Current charge air temperature in °C
335
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Display 3 “Sensor test”
B
C
D
5
6
7
8
BX750019_1
Fig. 261
Display 3 “Sensor test” shows the latest measurement results for the “diesel engine”.
Mask description display 3 “Sensor test”
EId
Mask description/icons/description
B377
Fuel pressure (master)
B377S
Fuel pressure (slave)
Current sensor values in bar.
Current supply voltage of “EDC Master” control unit in V.
B633
Exhaust gas temperature
Current sensor value in °C
336
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Display 4 "Hydrostatic fan"
Fig. 262
Display 4 "Hydrostatic fan" shows the current measurement results of the fan system in
connection with the diesel engine. If inappropriate temperature values occur, and possible faults
need to be remedied, the fan speed can be varied for diagnostic purposes. Automatic fan
adjustment is resumed when you exit the display.
Screen description - display 4 "Hydrostatic fan"
Ref.
Screen display/symbols/description
Current diesel engine speed/duty in rpm/%.
Current fan speed in rpm.
Table 34
337
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Ref.
Screen display/symbols/description
B85
Hydraulic oil temperature
Current sensor value in °C.
B403
Charge air temperature
Current sensor value in °C.
B124
Coolant temperature
Current sensor value in °C.
Y82
Hydraulic fan control
Current rating in A.
Current reference variable of fan control with relative speed input in %.
= Wait position, fan rotating at minimum speed.
= Control based on current hydraulic oil temperature.
= Control based on current charge air temperature.
= Control based on current coolant temperature.
Table 35
338
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Symbol
Description
Key
Activate manual mode
Activate automatic mode
Select desired fan speed input in %
Select desired fan speed input in rpm
Reduce fan speed in rpm/% (according to selection)
Increase fan speed in rpm/% (according to selection)
Table 36
Status displays
The colours of the displayed bars change according to the temperature/speed range. This
ensures critical ranges are displayed.
Ref.
Description
Green
Fan speed in rpm.
190 – 1100
Yellow
Red
0 – 190
B85
Hydraulic oil temperature in °C.
30 – 75
75 – 85
85 – 120
B403
Charge air temperature in °C.
30 – 75
75 – 85
85 – 120
B124
Coolant temperature in °C.
30 – 75
75 – 85
85 – 120
Table 37
Symbol
Description
The fan is in automatic mode.
The fan is in manual mode.
Fault condition, fan rotating at maximum speed.
Cleaning condition, fan rotates at maximum speed for a pre-set time
(parameter 33759 "Cleaning phase duration"; parameter 33768 "Working
phase duration").
The diesel engine/fan is off.
Table 38
339
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Display 5 "Service interval"
•
On display 1 "Sensor test" press the
key under
.
Fig. 263
Display 5 "Maintenance interval" shows the hours until the next maintenance interval.
Screen description - display 5 "Service interval"
BMK
Screen display/icons/description
Number of hours until next scheduled maintenance.
Table 39
340
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.8.1.10
Menu 4-1-9 Automatic steering system
B
C
5
6
7
8
WHBBX03761
D
Fig. 264
•
Select menu 4-1-9 “Autopilot”.
The “Autopilot” diagnostics menu is divided into two displays:
–
Display 1
Sensor test
–
Display 2
Actuator test
Display 1 "Sensor test"
1
B
C
D
5
6
7
8
BX500153
Fig. 265
Display 1 "Sensor test" shows the current measurement results of the sensors and actuators for
the autopilot.
341
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Screen description display 1 "Sensor test"
BMK
Screen display/icons/description
Status display as to whether all switching-on conditions for the automatic steering are
fulfilled.
D900
1: Fulfilled
2: Not fulfilled
Status display as to whether the steering wheel is steered.
D901
1: Steering motion detected
2: No steering motion detected
Status display of automatic steering.
D902
1: Active
2: Not ready
3: Ready for activation
B63
Steering pressure
Current sensor value in V.
B64
Inclination registration, steering axle
Current sensor value in digits.
B65
Inclination registration left
Current sensor value in digits.
B61
Row registration right
Current sensor value in digits.
Y39
Steering to the left
Current amperage in mA.
Table 40
342
Info centre "EasyTouch"
BMK
Y40
Screen display/icons/description
Steering to the right
Current amperage in mA.
Current selected setpoint value mode "crop edge".
D912
1) Left
2) Right
3: Both
Current selected actual value mode "crop edge".
D913
1) Left
2) Right
3: Both
Status display for gap detection.
0: None
D914
1) Left
2) Right
3: Both
D903
Supply voltage HSO 1 for the autopilot outputs in mV.
Table 41
343
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Display 2 “Actuator test”
Mask description display 2 "Sensor and actuator test"
2
B
C
D
5
6
7
8
BX500152
Fig. 266
The display 2 "Sensor and actuator test" can be used to test the functions of the autopilot
actuators.
BMK
Y66
Screen display/icons/description
Lock steering on left
Current amperage in mA.
Y67
Lock steering on right
Current amperage in mA.
D906
Y39
Supply voltage of the control unit A5 in V.
Steering to the left
Current amperage in mA.
Y40
Steering to the right
Current amperage in mA.
344
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Switching actuators on/off
If all switching-on conditions for the actuator test are fulfilled,
and
are displayed and
the actuators displayed are released. These can be switched on and off using the numerical
keys.
BMK
Icon
Y66
Description
Switch on actuator
Switch off actuator
Lock steering on left
Y66
Y67
Lock steering on right
Y67
Y39
Steering to the left
Y40
Steering to the right
345
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.8.1.11
Menu 4-1-10 Diagnostics AutoScan
Fig. 267
• Select menu 4-1-10 "AutoScan".
The "AutoScan" diagnostics menu consists of a display:
–
Display 1
"Sensor test"
Display 1 "Sensor test"
B
C
D
5
6
7
8
BX770189
Fig. 268
Display 1 "Sensor test" shows the current voltages and settings for the "AutoScan" function.
346
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Screen description display 1 "Sensor test"
BMK
Screen display/icons/description
D1101
Supply voltage of the sensor in V.
D1103
Supply voltage of the signal LED 1 of the sensor in V.
D1104
Supply voltage of the signal LED 2 of the sensor in V.
Current set maximum chop length in mm.
Current set minimum chop length in mm.
Current degree of maturity in %.
Calculated chop length in millimetres for brown maize in mm.
Calculated chop length in millimetres for green maize in mm.
Current chop length in mm.
347
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.8.1.12
Menu 4-1-11 Diagnostics electronics
Fig. 269
•
Select menu 4-1-11 “Electronics”.
The “Electronics” diagnostics menu is divided into four displays:
–
Display 1
“Sensor test KMC2”
–
Display 2
“Sensor test KMC3”
–
Display 3
“Sensor test DIOM”
–
Display 4
“Autopilot sensor test”
Display 1 "Sensor test KMC2"
Fig. 270
The display 1 "Sensor test KMC2" can be used to check the input and output voltages at the
control unit A2 "KMC2". Furthermore, the value of the terminating resistor fitted in the control
unit can be checked.
Mask description display 1 "Sensor test KMC2"
348
BMK
Screen display/icons/description
D610
Supply voltage 12 V for the sensors at the KMC2 in mV.
D611
Supply voltage 8 V (digital) for the outputs of the KMC2 in mV.
Info centre "EasyTouch"
BMK
Screen display/icons/description
D612
Supply voltage 8 V (analogue) for the outputs of the KMC2 in mV.
D613
Current voltage of the back-up battery of the KMC2 in mV (SETPOINT = 3 V).
D614
Supply voltage +12V1 for the outputs of the KMC2 in mV.
D615
Supply voltage +12V2 for the outputs of the KMC2 in mV.
D616
Supply voltage +12V3 for the outputs of the KMC2 in mV.
D617
Supply voltage +12V4 for the outputs of the KMC2 in mV.
R163
Resistance of the terminating resistor fitted in ohm and digits.
349
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Display 2 "Sensor test KMC3"
Fig. 271
The display 2 "Sensor test KMC3" can be used to check the input and output voltages at the
control unit A3 "KMC3". Furthermore, the value of the terminating resistor fitted in the control
unit can be checked.
Mask description display 2 "Sensor test KMC3"
350
BMK
Screen display/icons/description
D710
Supply voltage 12 V for the sensors at the KMC3 in mV.
D711
Supply voltage 8 V (digital) for the outputs of the KMC3 in mV.
D712
Supply voltage 8 V (analogue) for the outputs of the KMC3 in mV.
D713
Current voltage of the back-up battery for the KMC3 in mV (SETPOINT = 3 V).
D714
Supply voltage +12V1 for the outputs of the KMC3 in mV.
D715
Supply voltage +12V2 for the outputs of the KMC3 in mV.
D716
Supply voltage +12V3 for the outputs of the KMC3 in mV.
Info centre "EasyTouch"
BMK
Screen display/icons/description
D717
Supply voltage +12V4 for the outputs of the KMC3 in mV.
R164
Resistance of the terminating resistor fitted in ohm and digits.
351
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Display 3 “Sensor test DIOM“
Fig. 272
In display 3 “Sensor test DIOM”, the input and output voltages and currents present at control
unit A6 “DIOM” can be checked.
Mask description display 3 “Sensor test DIOM”
Operating
equipment
designation
D1001
Current temperature of DIOM in °C.
D1002
Power supply voltage for outputs „DIG_OUT_1 … DIG_OUT_4“ as well
as „PWM_OUT_1 … PWM_OUT_4“ of DIOM in volts.
D1003
Power supply voltage for electronics of DIOM in volts.
D1004
Actual current intensity (sum) of outputs „DIG_OUT_1 … DIG_OUT_4“
as well as„PWM_OUT_1 … PWM_OUT_4“ of DIOM in A.
D1006
Power supply voltage for outputs „DIG_OUT_5 … DIG_OUT_8“ as well
as„PWM_OUT_5 … PWM_OUT_8“ of DIOM in volts.
D1007
Power supply voltage for electronics of DIOM in volts.
Table 42
352
Mask display/symbols/description
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Operating
equipment
designation
Mask display/symbols/description
D1008
Actual current intensity (sum) of outputs „DIG_OUT_5 … DIG_OUT_8“ as
well as „PWM_OUT_5 … PWM_OUT_8“ of DIOM in A.
D1010
Power supply voltage for outputs „DIG_OUT_9 … DIG_OUT_12“ as well as
„PWM_OUT_9 … PWM_OUT_12“ of DIOM in volts.
D1007
Actual current intensity (sum) of outputs „DIG_OUT_9 … DIG_OUT_12“ as
well as„PWM_OUT_9 … PWM_OUT_12“ of DIOM in A.
Table 43
353
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Display 4 "Sensor test Autopilot"
Fig. 273
The display 4 "Sensor test Autopilot" can be used to check the input and output voltages and
currents at the control unit A5 "Autopilot".
Mask description display 4 "Sensor test Autopilot"
BMK
354
Screen display/icons/description
D903
Supply voltage HSO 1 for the outputs of the Autopilot in V. (SETPOINT = 12 V).
D904
Supply voltage for the outputs of the autopilot in V.
D905
Supply voltage for the sensors at the autopilot in V.
(SETPOINT = 10 V(for ISO bus), SETPOINT = 8.5 V (for standard))
D906
Supply voltage of the autopilot in V. (SETPOINT = 12 V)
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.8.1.13
Menu 4-1-12 Diagnostics work
Fig. 274
• Select menu 4-1-12 "Work".
The "Work" diagnostics menu is divided into seven displays:
–
Display 1
"Sensor test"
–
Displays 2 - 6
"Actuator test"
–
Display 7
"Sensor test"
Display 1 "Sensor test"
Fig. 275
Display 1 "Sensor test" indicates the current measurement results of the sensors and actuators
for the work functions.
355
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Screen description display 1 "Sensor test"
BMK
Screen display/icons/description
B20
Status of "Return suction filter" sensor.
B43
Status of "filling level, oil tank" sensor.
B44
Filling level fuel tank
Current sensor value as %.
B58
Status of "Chopping drum speed" sensor.
B58
Chopping drum speed
Current sensor value in rpm.
Y12
Main coupling
Current amperage in mA.
M12
Status of "Central lubrication pump" actuator.
M12
General malfunction display for the "Central lubrication pump" actuator.
Filling level of additional tank
B60.1
Current sensor value in mV.
Current status of the sensor.
356
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Display 2 “Actuator test”
Fig. 276
The display 2 "Actuator test" can be used to test the actuators for the main coupling and the
coastdown alarm.
Mask description display 2 "Actuator test"
BMK
Screen display/icons/description
D716
Supply voltage +12V3 for the outputs of the KMC3 in mV.
Y12
Main coupling
Current amperage in mA.
Switching actuators on/off
If all switching-on conditions for the actuator test are fulfilled,
and
are displayed and
the actuators displayed are released. These can be switched on and off using the numerical
keys.
BMK
Icon
Description
Y12
Main coupling
H61
"Coastdown alarm" horn
Switch on actuator
Switch off actuator
357
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Display 3 “Actuator test”
Fig. 277
The display 3 "Actuator test" can be used to test the actuators for the front hydraulics. If
impermissible values occur which require error correction, further information can be found in
the "Work sensors" and "Work actuators" subsections.
Switching actuators on/off
If all switching-on conditions for the actuator test are fulfilled,
and
are displayed and
the actuators displayed are released. These can be switched on and off using the numerical
keys.
BMK
358
Icon
Description
Y26
Fold in front attachment, raise
holding-down clamp
Y27
Unfold front attachment
lower holding-down clamp
Y29
Extend supporting wheels
Lower plant divider
Y28
Retract supporting wheels
Raise plant divider
Switch on actuator
Switch off actuator
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Display 4 "Actuator test"
Fig. 278
The display 4 "Actuator test" can be used to test the actuators for the auxiliary hydraulics.
Mask description display 4 "Actuator test"
BMK
Y51
Screen display/icons/description
Auxiliary hydraulics up (I A)
Current amperage in mA.
Y52
Auxiliary hydraulics down (I B)
Current amperage in mA.
Y61
Auxiliary hydraulics up (II A)
Current amperage in mA.
Y62
Auxiliary hydraulics down (II B)
Current amperage in mA.
359
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Switching actuators on/off
If all switching-on conditions for the actuator test are fulfilled,
and
are displayed and
the actuators displayed are released. These can be switched on and off using the numerical
keys.
BMK
Description
Y51
Auxiliary hydraulics up (I A)
Y52
Auxiliary hydraulics down
(I B)
Y61
Auxiliary hydraulics up (II A)
Y62
Auxiliary hydraulics down
(II B)
Table 44
360
Icon
Switch on actuator
Switch off actuator
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Display 5 "Actuator test"
B
C
D
5
6
7
8
BX770190
Fig. 279
The display 5 "Actuator test" can be used to test the actuators for the intake cleaning and the
"Grass/Maize" storage switch. Furthermore, the signal for executing the moisture measurement
can be tested.
Mask description display 5 "Actuator test"
BMK
Y73
Screen display/icons/description
Compressed air intake
Current amperage in mA.
Switching actuators on/off
If all switching-on conditions for the actuator test are fulfilled,
and
are displayed and
the actuators displayed are released. These can be switched on and off using the numerical
keys.
BMK
Icon
Description
A36
Activate humidity
measurement (LED in the
lower right corner of the
display on the
HARVEST TEC operation unit
is lit, if active)
Y73
Compressed air intake
(optional)
Y53
Storage switch grass/maize
Switch on actuator
Switch off actuator
361
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Display 6 "Actuator test"
B
C
5
6
7
8
D
BX770191
Fig. 280
The display 6 "Actuator test" can be used to test the actuators for the silage additive system and
the central lubrication.
Mask description display 6 "Actuator test"
BMK
Screen display/icons/description
B60.1
Filling level of additional tank (optional)
Current sensor value in mV.
362
B77
Status of the "Silage additives" flow sensor (optional)
M12
Status of "Central lubrication pump" actuator.
M12
General malfunction display for the "Central lubrication pump" actuator.
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Switching actuators on/off
If all switching-on conditions for the actuator test are fulfilled,
and
are displayed and
the actuators displayed are released. These can be switched on and off using the numerical
keys.
BMK
Icon
Description
Y60
Molasses add-on (optional)
M16
Silage additives pump
(optional)
Switch on actuator
Switch off actuator
Enable voltage for the central
lubrication
M12
Intermediate lubrication is
triggered
363
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Display 7 "Sensor test"
Fig. 281
The display 7 "Sensor test" can be used to test the clamping cylinder for the main belt.
Screen description display 7 "Sensor test"
BMK
Screen display/icons/description
Current status "Intake/front attachment".
B92
Current status of the sensor "clamping cylinder main belt".
Y108
Tensioning roller main belt
Current rating in A.
Current status of the main coupling.
364
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Status displays
Actuator
status
active
Actuator
status
inactive
Actuator
status
released
Actuator
status
Error
Description
Intake/front attachment
forwards
Intake/front attachment
backwards
Intake/front attachment
Table 45
Status
extended
Status
retracted
Description
Position of clamping cylinder main belt
Table 46
Status ON
Status OFF
Description
Main coupling
365
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Display 8 "Sensor test"
B
C
5
6
7
8
D
BX770207
Fig. 282
Display 8 "Sensor test" shows the current measurement results of the sensors and actuators of
the main drive brake.
Screen description display 8 "Sensor test"
BMK
Screen display/icons/description
Y77
Release front attachment backwards
Current voltage in mV.
Y77
Release front attachment backwards
Current amperage in mA.
D614
Supply voltage +12V1 for the outputs of the KMC 2 in mV.
B58
Chopping drum speed
Current sensor value in rpm.
Y7
Front attachment forwards
Y8
Front attachment backwards
Current amperage in mA.
B27
Front attachment speed
Current sensor value in rpm.
366
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Display 9 "Sensor test"
Fig. 283
The display 9 "Sensor test" can be used to test the electric discharge distance adjustment.
Screen description display 9 "Sensor test"
BMK
M17
M17
M17
Screen display/icons/description
Discharge accelerator rear wall
Indicates the current status of the adjusting motor.
Discharge accelerator rear wall
Shows the current level (1-3) of the rear wall of discharge accelerator.
Discharge accelerator rear wall
Status displays
Icon
Explanation
At rest, waiting for commands.
The rear wall moves into the crop flow. The discharge distance increases.
The rear wall moves out of the crop flow. The discharge distance reduces.
Fault, no position reached.
The rear wall of discharge accelerator is deactivated.
367
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.8.1.14
Menu 4-1-13 Diagnostics grind
Fig. 284
• Select menu 4-1-13 "Grinding".
The "Grinding" diagnostics menu consists of a display:
–
Display 1
"Sensor and actuator test"
Display 1 "Sensor and actuator test"
B
C
D
5
6
7
8
BX770200
Fig. 285
Display 1 "Sensor and actuator test" shows the current statuses and measurement results of the
sensors and actuators for "Grind". Furthermore, the function of the associated actuators can be
tested.
368
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Mask description display 1 "Sensor and actuator test"
BMK
Screen display/icons/description
Current status of the grinding flap.
Current position of the grinding stone.
Current status of the sensors.
D716
Y65
Supply voltage +12V3 for the outputs of the KMC3 in mV.
Grinding flap closed
Current amperage in mA.
Y65
Grinding flap closed
Activation of the valve.
Y30
Grinding stone to the right
Y31
Grinding stone to the left
Activation of the valves.
369
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Switching actuators on/off
BMK
Description
Switch on
actuator
Y65
Grinding flap closed
Y31
Grinding stone to the left
Y30
Grinding stone to the right
Switch off
actuator
Status displays
Grinding stone position
left
Intermediate
position
right
Error
Grinding flap position
closed
370
Intermediate
position
open
unknown
Error
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.8.1.15
Menu 4-1-14 Diagnostics counterblade
Fig.286
• Select menu 4-1-14 “Counterblade”.
The “Counterblade” diagnostics menu consists of one display:
–
“Actuator test”
Display 1
Display 1 "Actuator test"
B
C
D
5
6
7
8
BX770202
Fig. 287
Display 1 "Actuator test" shows the current measurement results of the actuators for
"Counterblade". Furthermore, the function of the associated actuators can be tested.
371
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Mask description display 1 "Actuator test"
BMK
Screen display/icons/description
Current status of the grinding flap.
Current position of the grinding stone.
D714
Supply voltage +12V1 for the outputs of the KMC3 in mV.
D716
Supply voltage +12V3 for the outputs of the KMC3 in mV.
M9
Counterblade on left
Current amperage in mA.
M10
Counterblade on right
Current amperage in mA.
372
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Switching actuators on/off
•
•
Adjust the counterblade carefully and evenly, left and right.
After the actuator test, move counterblade away somewhat
Operating
equipment
designation
Description
Switch on the
actuator
Moving away counterblade left
M9
Moving up counterblade left
Moving away counterblade right
M10
Moving up counterblade right
Table 47
Status displays
Grinding stone position
Left
Intermediate
position
Right
Error
Table 48
Grinding flap position
Closed
Intermediate
position
Open
Unknown
Error
Table 49
Operating
equipment
designation
M9
M10
Actuator
status
active
Actuator
status
inactive
Actuator
status
Short
circuit
Actuator
status
Cable break
Description
Moving up
counterblade left
Moving away
counterblade left
Moving up
counterblade right
Moving away
counterblade right
Table 50
373
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.8.1.16
Menu 4-1-15 Diagnostics corn conditioner
Fig. 288
• Select menu 4-1-15 “Corn Conditioner”.
The “Corn Conditioner” diagnostics menu consists of one display:
–
374
Display 1
“Actuator test”
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Display 1 "Actuator test"
B
C
D
5
6
7
8
BX770203
Fig. 289
The display 1 "Actuator test" can be used to test the actuator for adjusting the corn conditioner.
Mask description display 1 "Actuator test"
BMK
Screen display/icons/description
D715
Supply voltage +12V2 for the outputs of the KMC3 in mV.
M11
Corn conditioner
Current amperage in mA.
M11
Current roller distance in mm.
Table 51
Switching actuators on/off
BMK
Description
Switching actuator on/off
Reduce corn conditioner roller distance
M11
Increase corn conditioner roller distance
375
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.8.1.17
Menu 4-1-16 Diagnostics multi-function lever
Fig. 290
• Select menu 4-1-16 "Control lever".
The diagnostics menu "Control lever" is divided into two displays:
–
Displays 1 and 2
"Sensor test"
Display 1 "Sensor test"
Fig. 291
The keys as well as the supply voltages of the control lever can be tested on display 1 "Sensor
test".
376
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Mask description display 1 "Sensor test"
BMK
Mask display/symbols/description
Supply voltage of the control lever in V.
Internal supply voltage of the control lever in V.
An internal error code can also be displayed following consultations with
KRONE customer service.
Current voltages for the axes of the joystick in V
Current voltage on the slide controller in V
Currently set driving stage.
Table 52
377
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Error messages
Symbol
Table 53
378
Error number
Description
113
Undervoltage 12 V
114
Overvoltage 12 V
115
Undervoltage 8 V
116
Fault pushbutton voltage 12 V
117
Fault voltage LEDs
118
Fault voltage Outs
119
Parameter error
120
Flash CheckSum
150
Key pressed / fault keyboard
151
Overtemperature.
152
Fault CAN bus
153
Fault LIN bus
154
EEPROM CheckSum
155
Restart by Watchdog
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Display 2 "Sensor test"
Fig. 292
The keys as well as the supply voltages of the control lever can be tested on display 2 "Sensor
test".
Mask description display 2 "Sensor test"
BMK
Mask display/symbols/description
Supply voltage of the control lever in V.
Internal supply voltage of the control lever in V.
Table 54
379
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.8.1.18
Menu 4-1-17 Diagnostics CUC
Fig. 293
• Select menu 4-1-17 "Control unit".
The diagnostics menu "Control unit" is divided into two displays:
–
380
Displays 1 and 2
"Sensor test"
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Display 1 "Sensor test"
I
B
C
D
5
6
7
8
BX770204
Fig. 294
The switches and keys as well as the supply voltages of the control unit console can be tested
on display 1 "Sensor test".
Mask description display 1 "Sensor test"
BMK
Mask display/symbols/description
Supply voltage of the control unit in V.
Input voltage for the day/night switchover in V.
Internal supply voltage of the control unit in V.
Table 55
Status displays
The symbols of the keys on the membrane keyboard and the release switches are highlighted in
green when pressed. The display of release switch S1 "road/field" is shown below as an
example.
BMK
Description
S1
"Road/field" release switch
S90
"Quick stop console" switch
S91
"Quick·stop·manual·operation" switch
Status
activated
Status not
activated
Table 56
Symbol
Description
Fault diesel engine
Table 57
381
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Display 2 "Sensor test"
B
C
D
5
6
7
8
BX770205
Fig. 295
The status of the seat switch can be checked on display 2 "Sensor test".
Mask description display 2 "Sensor test"
BMK
Screen display/icons/description
Current voltage of the seat switch, read in from KMC3, in digits.
The circle beside the digits indicates whether the driver is setting. (With a
diagnosable seat switch, the status changes directly)
The circle next to the clock indicates whether the time delay has already elapsed.
Current voltage of the seat switch, read in from the travelling gear computer, in mV.
Only available on machines manufactured since 2011 (diagnosable seat switch).
382
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.8.1.19
Menu 4-1-18 Diagnostics manual operation
Fig. 296
• Select menu 4-1-18 "Manual control unit".
Display 1 "Sensor test"
B
C
D
5
6
7
8
BX770206
Fig. 297
The display 1 "Sensor test" can be used to check the keys and internal supply voltage for
manual operation. If the keys are pressed, they are highlighted in colour.
Screen description display 1 "Sensor test"
BMK
Screen display/icons/description
Internal supply voltage of the manual control unit in V.
Table 58
383
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.8.1.20
Menu 4-1-19 Diagnostics terminal
Fig. 298
• Select menu 4-1-19 “Terminal”.
The “Terminal” diagnostics menu consists of a display:
–
384
Display 1
“Sensor test”
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Display 1 “Sensor test”
Fig. 299
In display 1 “Sensor test”, the keys on the terminal and the incremental encoder can be
checked.
Status displays
When activating the keys on the display or menu key
respective symbol is highlighted in green.
No rotation
Rotation left
or the incremental encoder, the
Rotation right
Description
Incremental encoder
Table 59
Status not actuated
Status actuated
Description
Menu key
Table 60
•
Press menu key
twice to bring up the main menu.
385
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.8.1.21
Menu 4-1-20 Diagnostics RockProtect
Fig. 300
•
Select menu 4-1-20 "RockProtect".
The diagnostics menu "RockProtect" is divided into two displays:
–
Display 1
"Sensor and actuator test"
–
Display 2
"Actuator test"
CAUTION
Damage caused by deactivated "rock detection RockProtect"!
If the "RockProtect" function has been deactivated by the stop lock
damaged.
•
386
Ensure that the stop lock is activated
.
, the machine may be
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Display 1 "Sensor and actuator test"
Fig. 301
The current measurement results of the sensors for the "RockProtect" function are indicated on
display 1 "Sensor and actuator test".
Mask description display 1 "Sensor and actuator test"
BMK
B76
Screen display/icons/description
Acceleration sensor
Current sensor value in mV.
D1200
Status of the RockProtect, rock was detected/not detected.
D1201
Status of the "RockProtect" function.
If a fault occurs, please contact KRONE customer service!
387
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Switching actuators on/off
Symbol
Description
Run function
Cancel stop and release intake.
Table 61
Status displays
Status
Active
Status
inactive
Description
"RockProtect" function
Table 62
Display 2 “Actuator test”
Fig. 302
Display 2 "Actuator test" shows the current measurement results of the actuators for the
"RockProtect" function. Furthermore, the "RockProtect" (quick-stop valve) function can be
tested.
Mask description display 2 "Actuator test"
BMK
Screen display/icons/description
D1200
Status of the RockProtect, rock was detected/not detected.
D1201
Status of the "RockProtect" function.
If a fault occurs, please contact KRONE customer service!
388
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Switching actuators on/off
Symbol
Description
Run function
Cancel stop and release intake.
Table 63
Status displays
Status
Active
Status
inactive
Description
"RockProtect" function
Table 64
389
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.8.1.22
Menu 4-1-21 Diagnostics moisture
Fig. 303
• Select menu 4-1-21 "Moisture".
The "Moisture" diagnostics menu consists of a display:
–
Display 1
"Sensor and actuator test"
Display 1 "Sensor and actuator test"
Fig. 304
Display 1 "Sensor and actuator test" shows the current voltages and measured values for the
"moisture measurement" function.
390
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Mask description display 1 "Sensor and actuator test"
BMK
Screen display/icons/description
Current moisture content in %.
Current internal temperature of the NIR sensor in ° C.
Supply voltage of the sensor in V.
Switching actuators on/off
If all switching-on conditions for the actuator test are fulfilled,
and
are displayed and
the actuators displayed are released. These can be switched on and off using the numerical
keys.
391
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.9
Menu 4-2 Error List
Fig. 305
The main menu level is active.
• Select main menu 4-2 by using the incremental encoder.
• Press incremental encoder.
The error list is displayed.
Icon
Explanation
Current errors
Error memory
Current errors diesel engine
Error memory diesel engine
Current errors
The display shows the error list with its current errors. The time, status, error number and
designation are displayed.
Status
C = Error has come
G = Error has gone
A = Error acknowledged
•
392
The general information messages are displayed by pressing the key
or
for softkey
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Error Storage
Fig. 306
• Press the
key under
to display the error storage.
The error storage is chronologically arranged. The date, time, status, error numbers and
designation are displayed.
Status
C = Error has come (Come)
G = Error has gone (Gone)
A = Error acknowledged
Menu control:
=
Activating the
key allows you to scroll up.
=
Activating the
key allows you to scroll up one line at a time.
=
Activating the
key allows you to scroll down one line at a time.
=
Activating the
key allows you to scroll down one page at a time.
393
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Current diesel engine errors
Fig. 307
• Press the
key under
to display the current diesel engine errors.
The display shows the list of errors with the current diesel engine errors. The error codes are
displayed with a sequential number.
Menu field (1) indicates the number of alarms present.
Meaning of row A
394
Display
Explanation
Seq.
Sequential number
SRC
Source address: address from control unit to the error messages
0:
EDC master
1:
EDC slave
39:
Engine Control Unit
SPN
Suspect Parameter Number: Identification of the error code
FMI
Failure Mode Identification: Identification of the error message
CNT
Counter: Recording the error frequency
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Diesel engine error storage
Fig. 308
• Press the
key under
to display the diesel engine error storage.
The display shows the error storage (chronologically) of the diesel engine. The error codes,
status, date and time are displayed with a sequential number.
Menu field (1) indicates the number of alarms present.
Status
1 = Error set
2 = Error deleted
•
You can use the
•
To display current errors, use the
•
Pressing the
back.
key
down to the end of the list and the
A key under
key
to scroll up.
.
menu button beside the incremental encoder takes you one menu level
395
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Error list "Informative events" and error list "Service events"
Fig. 309
Menu control:
=
Activating the
key allows you to scroll up.
=
Activating the
key allows you to scroll up one line at a time.
=
Activating the
key allows you to scroll down one line at a time.
=
Activating the
key allows you to scroll down one page at a time.
•
Press the
•
Press the
B
key under
•
Press the
7
key to call up the "Informative events" menu.
key under
to call up the working screen.
to call up the list of current errors.
The "Informative events" menu records the following messages:
– 3507 Diesel engine maintenance
– 3508 Air filter contamination
– 3509 Hydraulic oil filling level
– 4301 Metal in intake!
– 7016 Stone detected!
– 42 DRC parking brake active
– 45 Release switch traction drive (S3) not switched
– 3210 Lifting gear pressure too high during counterblade adjustment
– 3211 Lifting unit pressure low during counterblade adjustment.
•
396
Press the
C
key under
to call up the "Service events" page.
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Fig. 310
Error list "Service events"
The "Service events" menu contains the following events with the event time:
– 60000 Update completed
– 60001 Service performed for diesel engine 1
– 60002 Service performed for diesel engine 2
– 60003 Error list deleted
– 60004 Error deleted
– 60005 Max. speed changed
– 60006 Front tyre size changed
– 60007 Rear tyre size changed
– 60008 Max. road speed changed
– 60009 DRC software updated
– 60010 DRC parameter set updated
– 60011 ERR-INIT
•
Press the
C
key under
to call up the "Informative events" page.
397
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.10
Menu 4-3 "Service level"
Fig. 311
The main menu level is active.
• Use the incremental encoder to choose menu 4-3 Service level.
• Press the incremental encoder.
The "Service level" is protected by a password and is accessible only to the KRONE Customer
Service personnel.
398
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.11
Menu 4-4 Information
Fig. 312
The “Diagnostics” main menu is active.
• Use the incremental encoder to select menu 4-4 “Information”.
• Press incremental encoder.
The display shows menu level 4-4 “Information”.
The “Information” menu is divided into three menus:
Icon
Designation
Menu 4-4-1 Control Lever
Menu 4-4-2 Software
Menu 4-4-3 Machine
8.11.1
Menu 4-4-1 Multi-function lever
Fig. 313
Menu 4-4 Information is open.
• Using the incremental encoder, choose menu 4-4-1 Multi-function lever.
• Press the incremental encoder.
The display shows the "Multi-function lever information" menu.
399
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.11.2
Menu 4-4-2 Software
Fig. 314
Menu 4-4 Information is open.
• Using the incremental encoder, choose menu 4-4-2 Software.
• Press the incremental encoder.
The display shows the "Software" menu.
Software page 1
B
C
D
5
6
7
8
BX500131_2
Fig. 315
Terminal

NOTE
If the versions of resources and DLLs do not match for the terminal, the version numbers
appear in red.
SmartDrive
KMC2
KMC3

NOTE
If the KMC2 and KMC3 software is not designed for your machine type, the version numbers
appear in red.
•
400
Press the
key or turn the incremental encoder to display the second page.
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Software page 2
Fig. 316
Control lever
CUC
Manual operation
LUC
•
Press the
C
key or turn the incremental encoder to display the third page.
Software page 3
Fig. 317
Page 3
Automatic steering system
Metal detection
•
Press the
D
key or turn the incremental encoder to display the fourth page.
401
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Software page 4
Fig. 318
DIOM
AutoScan (optional)
RockProtect (optional)
NIR sensor (optional)
Printer (optional)
402
•
Press the
key or turn the incremental encoder to display the first page.
•
Press the
or
key to show or hide additional information on all pages.
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.11.3
Menu 4-4-3 Machine
Fig. 319
The “Information” menu is open.
• Select the menu 4-4-2 “Machine” with the incremental encoder.
• Press incremental encoder.
The display shows machine information.
Pos.
Meaning
1
Machine number
2
Engine setting
3
Engine number
4
EDC Master part number
5
EDC Master software version
6
EDC Slave part number
7
EDC Slave software version
8
ECU software version
403
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.11.4
Menu 4-4-8 Display Software Packages
Fig. 320
Main menu “Information” is called.
• Select menu 4-4-8 “Display Software Packages” using the rotary potentiometer.
• Press the rotary potentiometer.
The display “Software Packages” is shown.
The display shows the software packages of the machine.
Status displays:
Software is released
Software is not released
8.12
Menu 5 Working screen
Fig. 321
The main menu is open.
• Using the incremental encoder, choose menu 5 "Machine".
• Press the incremental encoder.
The display shows the working screen.
404
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.12.1
Error Messages
Fig. 322
If an error occurs on the machine, an error message appears in the display. The error message
and error number are displayed.
•
Press the
key under
to acknowledge the error message.
WARNING
Ignoring the error message can cause damage to the machine!
The error message is only hidden. The error may still be present, see menu 4-2 Error list.
• Stop the machine.
• Rectify the error immediately.
•
Press the

NOTE

NOTE
key under
for switching off the signal tone.
List of error messages, error description, possible error reason and error correction, see page
765.
Error messages for the diesel engine are also indicated by the lighting up of the engine warning
light
.
Engine faults are not shown in the error list. If an engine fault occurs, always contact your
KRONE dealer.
405
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.12.2
Instruction message
The instruction messages are included with an error number in the list of error messages in the
appendix.
B
C
D
5
6
7
8
BX500183
Fig. 323
If one or more conditions are not fulfilled when an action is executed, the display shows the
corresponding instruction message. The error number and error message are displayed.
Resetting instruction messages
Press the
key under
key to acknowledge the instruction message.
Description, possible cause and remedy of the message, see page 765.
8.12.3
Warning message
The warning messages are included with an error number in the list of error messages in the
appendix.
B
C
D
5
6
7
8
BX500184
Fig. 324
If one or more conditions are not fulfilled when an action is executed, the corresponding warning
message appears. The error number and error message are displayed.
Resetting warning messages
Press the
•

Press the
key under
B
key under
to acknowledge the warning message.
for switching off the signal tone.
NOTE
The warning messages must be observed and checked, otherwise this may cause damage to
the machine and malfunctions.
Description, possible cause and remedy of the message, see page 765.
406
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.13
Printing customer data
Fig. 325
Establishing a connection to the printer:
• Connect the printer via the diagnostics socket in the console in the cabin.
• Insert the paper as explained in the printer's operating instructions.
The printer is ready for operation.
The information items listed below can be printed with the aid of the printer:
Icon
Designation
Customer record
Operating hour counter (h)
Drum hours counter (h)
Working hours counter (h)
Surface counter (ha)
Kilometre counter (km)
Fuel consumption (l)
8.13.1
Selecting the customer record
•
Press the
B
key under
to switch to the Customer data counter menu.
The display shows the
icon. If there is no printer available, or no printer ready for
operation, the icon does not appear.
•
Press the
•
Press the
or
7
key to select the required customer record.
key to call up the customer data print menu.
407
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.13.1.1
Print menu customer data
Fig. 326
Displays on the display
Item
Explanation
1
Counter will not be printed.
2
Counter is selected for printing.
Operating the menu:
•
Press the
key to choose either the entered or last selected cultivated area counter in
the customer data counter menu to be printed.
•
Press the
printed.
•
Press the
5
key to start the paper feed.
•
Press the
8
key to stop the print job.
•
Press the
•
•
Press the B key to call up the working screen.
Using the incremental encoder, choose the desired counter. The input field is highlighted in
colour.
Press the incremental encoder to jump to the input field.
You can activate or deactivate the counter for printing with the incremental encoder.
•
•
key to choose all cultivated area counters of a customer data record to be
key to switch to the "Customer data counter" menu.
Printing the data of a customer record (example)
408
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Fig. 327
Item
Explanation
1
Name and address of the machine operator/contractor (can be adapted in mask 1-9).
2
Date of printout
3
Time of printout
4
Name and address of customer
5
Field number
6
Diesel engine operating hours
7
Chopping drum operating hours
8
Working hours
9
Surface counter
10
Overall distance
11
Average moisture of the crops
Print a customer record:
•
Press the
•
Press the
key to choose the customer record displayed for the pressure.
7
key to start the printer.
Print all customer records:
•
Press the
•
Press the
key to choose all customer records to be printed.
7
key to start the printer.
Only counters for which the counter status is greater than zero are printed.
409
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.13.1.2
Printing cultivated area counter state/states
Fig. 328
•
Press the
key to choose either the entered or last selected cultivated area counter in
the customer data counter menu to be printed.
•
Press the
•
Press the
printed.
•
Press the
7
key to start printing.
key to choose all cultivated area counters of a customer data record to be
7
key to start printing.
Printing all customer records and all cultivated area counter states
•
Press the
key.
•
Press the
printed.
key to choose all cultivated area counters of a customer data record to be
• Press the 7 key to start printing.
Only counters for which the counter status is greater than zero are printed.
Error messages when printing
Icon
Explanation/remedy
No paper.
• Insert paper and restart the print job.
The printer buffer is full.
• Switch the terminal off and on again.
• Restart the print job.
No CAN connection to the printer.
• Check the cabling to the printer.
410
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.14
Accessing the constant power setting menu (optional)
Fig. 329

•
In the working screen, press the
mask.
•
Press the
•
In maize mode, press the
C
D
key to switch to the memory keys/machine settings
key to call up the next constant power settings page.
C
key 2x as other settings are possible.
NOTE
The changes implemented in this menu are effective immediately.
This makes it possible to adapt the machine to the specific circumstances for which it is used.
411
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.14.1
Entering the degree of speed reduction
Speed reduction can be set dependent on speed and engine load.
– In the case of speed-dependent control, the driving speed is automatically adjusted so that
the engine speed is reduced until the specified setpoint engine speed is reached. At a rated
speed of 2000 rpm and a specified speed reduction of 10%, the engine speed is restricted
to 1800 rpm.
– In the case of load-dependent control, the driving speed is automatically adjusted so that
the engine speed is reduced until the specified setpoint load (torque) is reached.
Speed-dependent control
Load-dependent control
Fig. 330
Mask description:
Item
Explanation
1
Switching between speed-dependent control/load-dependent control (current
setting)
2
Switching to control depending on engine load
3
Setpoint engine speed (only for speed-dependent control)
4
Actual speed diesel engine
5
Diesel engine rated speed
6
Setpoint engine speed reduction/setpoint load
7
Maximum speed
8
Minimum speed
9
Actual engine load
Prerequisite:
– The machine is stopped.
Speed-dependent input:
•
•
•
•
•
412
Press the
key to select speed-dependent input (1).
Using the incremental encoder, choose the input field for speed reduction (6). The input
field is highlighted in colour.
Press the incremental encoder to jump to the input field. The input field is highlighted in
yellow.
Turn the incremental encoder to the left or right to reduce or increase the degree of speed
reduction from 3% – 20%.
Press the incremental encoder to accept the setting and to exit the selection box.
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Engine load-dependent input (does not apply to BiG X 1100-2):
•
•
•
•
•
Press the
key to select the engine load-dependent input (2).
Select the input field for setpoint load (6) by using the incremental encoder. The input field
is highlighted in colour.
Press the incremental encoder to jump to the input field. The input field is highlighted in
yellow.
Turn the incremental encoder to the left or right to reduce or increase the degree of speed
reduction from 65% – 95%.
Press the incremental encoder to accept the setting and to exit the selection box.
413
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.14.2
Setting the maximum speed
Fig. 331
• Using the incremental encoder, choose the input field for maximum speed (1). The input
field is highlighted in colour.
• Press the incremental encoder to jump to the input field. The input field is highlighted in
yellow.
• Turn the incremental encoder to the left or right to reduce or increase the maximum speed
value.
•
Press the incremental encoder to accept the setting and to exit the selection box.
The load limit control accelerates the traction drive to a maximum of this set speed, even if the
setpoint speed reduction or setpoint load is not yet reached.
414
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.14.3
Setting the minimum speed
Fig. 332
• Using the incremental encoder, choose the input field for minimum speed (1). The input field
is highlighted in colour.
• Press the incremental encoder to jump to the input field. The input field is highlighted in
yellow.
• Turn the incremental encoder to the left or right to reduce or increase the minimum speed
value.
•
Press the incremental encoder to accept the setting and to exit the selection box.
The load limit control decelerates the traction drive to the saved minimum speed, even if the
setpoint speed reduction or setpoint load has already been reached or exceeded.
415
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.15
Operating CropControl System via KRONE CCI 200 Operation Terminal or KRONE Delta
Operation Terminal
The CropControl system enables a complete yield recording and documentation of the
harvested areas.
Note
The CropControl system does not present a measuring device as defined by law via
measurement and calibration (Eichgesetz).
8.15.1
Connecting the Terminal in case of Self-Propelled Machines
Fig. 333
For the connection to a self-propelled machine, a special cable set “IN-CAB“ is required. It can
be ordered by stating KRONE number 20 082 207 1.
•
•
Connect interfaces “CAN1-IN” and “CAN1-OUT” on the terminal via “INCAB” cable with
“INCAB” bushing of the machine.
Mount KRONE CCI 200 control unit or KRONE Delta control unit as described in the
assembly instructions and connect it.
Switch control unit on and off if CropControl is not connected to ISOBUS
• Make sure that the connections on the device are correctly and firmly seated before the
terminal is switched on for the first time.
Fig. 334
• To switch the control unit on or off, press key (1) and hold it down for approx. 2 seconds.
416
Info centre "EasyTouch"
In Delta terminal, the CAN resistance must be deactivated before the terminal is used:
1
Fig. 335
Menu “CAN Settings” is called.
• Deactivate resistance by pressing the key “CAN 1 termination” (1).
For further information on the functioning of the terminal, observe the supplied terminal
operating instructions.
417
Info centre "EasyTouch"
0
mm
CC000848_1
Switch on/off terminal in case CropControl is connected to ISOBUS
When switching it on the first time, the configuration of the specific CropControl menus is loaded
to the terminal. The loading process may take a few minutes. The configuration is saved in the
memory of the terminal.
Fig. 336
After loading process, the “basic screen” is shown on the display.
CropControl is now ready for operation.
8.15.2
Design of the Display
Fig. 337
The display of the terminal is divided up into the following sections:
Status line (I)
– The status displays of the machine.
Function keys (II) (F1 to F12)
– CropControl is operated via function keys. The softkeys (graphics) belonging to the function
keys are touch sensitive.
Main window (III)
418
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Status line (I)
Current CropControl states are shown in the top line (I) of the display.
Fig. 338
Possible status displays:
Graphic
Meaning
Information
Alarm message present.
1
1
Currently active cultivated area.
Cultivated areas 1-50 exist.
Currently active counterweighing for
the displayed cultivated area
A total of 500 counterweighing
operations can be carried out.
CropControl counts yield.
The following conditions must be
fulfilled to enable CropControl to
count yield:
– Intake is rotating
– Header in working position
– Machine moves forward
– The excursion of the precompression rollers is more than
the set minimum excursion.
Cultivated area is active, but
CropControl is not counting yield.
The machine is not currently
harvesting, or insufficient crops are
passing through the machine.
419
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Description of graphics (II) for function keys (F1 to F12)
Fig. 339
Softkey
Meaning
Information
One cultivated area back
Cultivated areas can only be selected
when no is currently active.
One cultivated area forward
Stop yield counter of active cultivated
area.
The displayed cultivated area is
active.
Start yield counter of active cultivated
area
The displayed cultivated area is not
active.
Call menu level of CropControl
Start/reset load counter
The laden weight can be determined
by means of load counter.
Start or stop counterweighing
Short-cut button to the “List of yield
counters”
Call yield counter menu
8.15.3
Short-cut Buttons in the Working Screen
Selecting cultivated area
• Select the desired cultivated area by using function keys
and
.
The selected cultivated area is displayed on the status line!
Once a cultivated area has been started, no other cultivated area can be selected. The yield
counter must first be stopped.
Starting yield counter
• Start the yield counter for the selected cultivated area by using function key
The selected cultivated area is displayed on the status line!
At the same time the function key
420
.
indicates that no yield counter has been started.
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Stopping yield counter
• Stop the yield counter for the selected cultivated area by using function key
The selected cultivated area is displayed on the status line!
At the same time, function key
.
indicates that a yield counter has been started.
Calling menu level
• To call the menu level, press the function key
For further information, see chapter “Menu Level”.
, the CropControl menu level is displayed.
Load counter
This function can be used to measure the laden weight and so determine the total weight of the
tractor/wagon combination.
Note
The load counter only indicates the laden weight precisely when CropControl has been
calibrated for the field by means of counterweighing operations and the field is homogeneous
in terms of moisture. Otherwise, major differences may result.
Starting the load counter
•
Start the load counter by using function key
.
Stopping the load counter
•
Stop the load counter by using function key
and reset it at the same time.
Starting counterweighing
• To start counterweighing, press the function key
.
The number of the currently active counterweighing is displayed on the status line next to the
icon.
•
If the
icon does not appear, the list of possible counterweighings is full. A cultivated
area with counterweighing operations that is no longer required must be deleted.
Stopping counterweighing
•
To stop active counterweighing, press function key
.
Calling the list of yield counters
• To call the list of yield counters in the main menu 13 “Yield Counters”, press the function
key
.
421
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.15.4
Display in basic screen
3
4
5
1
7
2
6
8
CC000892_1
Fig. 340
422
Graphic
Meaning
1)
Excursion of the last pre-compression rollers
2)
Excursion of the last pre-compression roller as a numerical value.
3)
Harvested yield of selected cultivated area.
4)
Average yield per unit of area
• The values only appear when no yield was yet counted or the respective
cultivated area is deleted after software has been updated to version
150200570_07 or higher.
5)
Current yield per unit of area
6)
Average yield per unit of time
• The values only appear when the respective cultivated area is deleted or
no yield was yet counted after the software has been updated to version
150200570_07 or higher.
7)
Current yield per unit of time
8)
Payload counter
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.15.5
Counterweighing and Calibration
To ensure that the yield measurement is accurate, it is necessary to calibrate the CropControl
system. Carry out at least one counterweighing for each cultivated area and type of crop.
To obtain correct measurement values, counterweighing should be performed in the middle of
the stock and not at the edge of the field.
When counterweighing is complete and the entered control weight has been applied, the
correction factor is recalculated. The recalculation of correction factor initiates the correction of
the measured mass retrospectively for the entire cultivated area.
If several counterweighings are carried out, the correction factor is calculated from the average
of the total counterweighings for the cultivated area.
8.15.5.1
Performing Counterweighing
To ensure that the yield measurement is accurate, the following steps need to be done for
counterweighing:
• Select a trailer load that represents the average of the entire field.
• Run at average driving speed and engine capacity.
Prerequisites:
– Path sensor and pressure sensor are calibrated.
– Empty tractor/wagon combination with known tare weight is available.
– Machine stopped.
Performing counterweighing with active working screen:
• Position the empty tractor/wagon combination next to the machine.
•
To start counterweighing press function key
.
The number of the currently active counterweighing is displayed next to the
status line.
Note: Memorize the number of counterweighing and note it.
•
•
•
•
icon in the
Delete a cultivated area that contains counterweighing operations if the
icon does
not appear.
Load the tractor/wagon combination. Ensure that all harvested chopping crops are loaded
on the tractor/wagon combination.
Press the function key
to stop the active counterweighing.
Weight the tractor/wagon combination. Make sure no crops are lost when travelling to the
scale.
423
Info centre "EasyTouch"
•
to call the list of yield counters in the main menu 13 “Yield
Press function key
Counters”.
Fig. 341
•
Select the cultivated area to enter counterweighing by using the function keys
The selected cultivated area is highlighted in grey.
•
Press function key
or
and
.
.
Fig. 342
The display shows the “Counterweighing” menu.
•
•
Select the number of performed counterweighing by using the function keys
and . The
selected counterweighing is highlighted in grey.
Enter full weight minus tare weight of tractor/wagon combination (i.e. laden weight) for
counterweighing by using the function keys
•
and
.
To apply the value for calculation of correction factor, press the function key
. The
icon indicates that the value has been accepted.
•
To cancel the process, press the function key
. The value is not accepted.
Note
If a tractor/wagon combination with AutoCalibrate is used for counterweighing, the laden
weight is determined automatically and entered in the list of counterweighings. The
automatically determined value can be deleted or modified manually.
While the weight of weighing is being calculated, you can continue harvesting and/or carry out
another counterweighing operation.
424
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.15.6
Menu Level
Short Overview
Main menu
Sub-menu
Designation
1
Settings
Setting Minimum Excursion
1
Calibration
2
Calibration of Path Sensor
1
Calibration Pressure Sensor
2
13
Yield Counter of Individual Cultivated Areas
14
ISOBUS Settings
Setting the Background Colour
1
15
Service
Manual Sensor Test
1
Current Alarms
2
Information
4
Technician
5
425
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Bringing up a Menu Level
0
CC000848_1
8.15.7
mm
Fig. 343
•
Press
to bring up the menu level from the basic screen.
The menu level is divided into the following main menus:
Main menu 1 “Settings”
Main menu 2 “Calibration”
Main menu 13 “Yield Counter”
Main menu 14 “ISOBUS Settings”
Main menu 15 “Service”
Press function keys
or
to select the desired main menu.
The selected icon is highlighted in grey.
426
•
Pressing function key
•
Pressing function key
•
Pressing the function key
brings up the menu level of the selected main menu.
closes the called up menu.
and holding it down brings up the basic screen.
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Main Menu 1 Settings
1
CC000849_1
8.15.8
Fig. 344
•
Press function key
from the basic screen to bring up the menu level.
•
Press function key
or
to choose main menu 1
, the icon is highlighted in grey.
• Press function key
.
The display shows menu level 1 “Settings”.
Main menu 1 contains the following sub-menu:
Menu 1-1 “Minimum Excursion”
427
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Menu 1-1 Minimum Excursion
In menu 1-1 “Minimum Excursion”, you can set from what excursion of the pre-compression
rollers the measurement is started. The higher the minimum excursion setting, the more crops
must flow through the rollers to activate the yield counter.
Fig. 345
Calling the menu
Main menu 1 “Settings” is called.
•
Select menu 1-1
grey .
by pressing function keys
or
, the symbol is highlighted in
• Press function key
.
The display shows menu 1-1 „Minimum Excursion“.
The minimum excursion can be set between 0 and 30 mm.
The guide value to set the minimum excursion is 5 mm.
The symbol
•
Increase or reduce the desired value of minimum excursion via function key
symbol
•
in the upper line goes out.
Press function key
The symbol
428
in the upper line indicates that the displayed value is saved.
.
in the upper line indicates that the displayed value is saved.
•
Pressing the function key
closes the called up menu
•
Pressing the function key
and holding it down brings up the basic screen
or
, the
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Main Menu 2 Calibration
2
CC000852_1
8.15.9
Fig. 346
•
Press function key
•
Press function keys
from the basic screen to bring up the menu level.
or
to choose main menu 2
, the icon is highlighted in grey.
• Press function key
.
The display shows menu level 2 “Calibration”.
Menu level 2 is divided into two sub-menus:
Menu 2-1 “Calibration Path Sensor“
Menu 2-2 “Calibration Pressure Sensor“
429
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Menu 2-1 Calibration of Path Sensor
Before placing the machine in service the first time and after any assembly work on the path
sensor, it must be calibrated. In this process, it must be ensured that there is no crop in the
intake and the pre-compression rollers are in the bottom position on the stop.
Fig. 347
Calling the menu
Main menu 2 “Calibration“ is called.
•
Select menu 1-1
grey.
by pressing function keys
or
, the symbol is highlighted in
• Press function key
The display shows menu 2-1 „Calibration of Path Sensor“.
The left bar display and the value below it show the calibrated voltage value for the path sensor.
The right bar display and the value below it show the current voltage value of the path sensor. If
the red bar is the red marked area, the path sensor can be calibrated.
A calibration is not possible if the value is outside this area. The following causes may be
possible:
• The intake is soiled so that the intake rollers are not in the position on the stop.
• Path sensor defective.
• The voltage value is too small after assembly. Mount a distance sheet, if necessary.
The symbol
in the upper line indicates that the calibrated value is saved.
Calibrating the path sensor
The current voltage value of the path sensor is saved as a calibrated value via function key
.
430
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Menu 2-2 Calibration Pressure Sensor
The calibration of the pressure sensor must be carried out before placing the machine in service
the first time, after any assembly work and weekly during operation. Ensure that no crops are in
the intake and that the pre-compression rollers are in the bottom limit stop.
Fig. 348
Calling the menu
Main menu 2 “Calibration“ is called.
•
Select menu 2-2
grey .
by pressing function key
or
, the symbol is highlighted in
• Press function key
The display shows menu 2-2 “Calibration of Pressure Sensor“.
The symbol
in the upper line indicates that the displayed value is saved.
The bar indicates the intake speed.
The green areas specify the areas of the intake speed for the both intake speeds to be
calibrated.
To calibrate the pressure sensor, proceed according to the following steps:
• Move lifting unit in working position (not lifted).
• Turn on cutting drum.
• Turn on intake.
• Adjust engine to working speed (1950/2000 rpm).
• Set the cutting length in the machine terminal to the smallest possible value.
• Slowly increase the cutting length in the machine terminal until the black bar is within the
lower green area.
Fig. 349
•
•
Press function key
.
Calibration has been started. For a short time, an arrow appears on the right next to the
lower green area.
431
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Fig. 350
The arrow next to the bottom green area disappears and an arrow appears next to the upper
green surface.
The symbol
or
next to the bar flashes and it indicates whether the cutting length
in the machine terminal must be increased or reduced. The symbol
in the upper line goes
out.
• Adapt the cutting length until the black bar reaches the upper green area.
•
432
If the black bar is in the upper green area, the symbol
a short time.
or
disappears. Wait for
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Fig. 351
•
Press function key
to save the calibrated values.
Fig. 352
If the calibration has been completed successfully, the symbol
appears in the upper line
and for a short time in the lower right edge.
If the calibration has not been completed successfully, the symbol
appears on the right
and the symbol
•
is not shown in the upper line.
Press function key
to leave the “Calibration Pressure Sensor” menu.
433
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.15.10
Main Menu 13 Yield Counter
CC000864 _1
13
Fig. 353
•
Press function key
from the basic screen to bring up the menu level.
•
Press function key
grey.
or
•
Press function key
.
to choose main menu 13
, the icon is highlighted in
The display shows the yield counter list.
• The preselected cultivated area is shown in reverse video.
• At the end of the list, a maximum of three cultivated areas without mass (0.000t) are visible.
Fig. 354
434
Info centre "EasyTouch"
The total mass is displayed for each cultivated area:
Graphic
Softkeys
Meaning
Information
Yield counter (here for area
3)
Area 1 to 50
Meaning
Information
Scrolling up
Scrolling down
Printing yield counter
–
Print one or more cultivated areas.
Deleting yield counter
–
Delete one or more cultivated areas.
Calling up the list of control
weighings
–
The list of control weighings for the
cultivated area marked in grey is called.
Calling up the list of control
weighings
–
The list of control weighings for the
cultivated area marked in grey is called.
Leaving menu
–
Pressing the key and holding it down
brings up the basic screen.
435
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Printing yield counter value
If a CAN printer is connected to the diagnostics interface of the machine, the values of the yield
counter can be printed.
Fig. 355
•
Press function key
in menu 13 “Customer Counter”.
1
Fig. 356
The display shows the selection list (1) of data to be printed.
436
•
By making a cross in the box
•
By leaving the box blank
, select the data that you wish to print.
, select the data that you do not wish to print.
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Graphic
Meaning
Average value of yield per unit of time of the respective cultivated area.
Average value of yield per unit of area of the respective cultivated area.
Listing of all data concerning control weighings.
ALL
Graphic
Listing of all cultivated areas.
Meaning
Information
Print data.
Use
Leave menu.
to print the selected data.
Pressing the key and holding it down
brings up the basic screen.
437
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Description of printout in case of CropControl
Example 1:
1
2
5
3
6
4
7
8
Fig. 357
Example 2:
1
2
3
Fig. 358
1)
Date of printout
2)
Time of printout
3)
Determined weight of stated field (here field 4).
4)
Average value tons per hectare for the stated field.
5)
Average value tons per hour for the stated field.
6)
Average calibration value for the stated field.
7)
Mass entered by driver or mass determined by AutoCalibrate for control weighing.
8)
Determined calibration values for control weighing.
Deleting yield counter values
438
•
Press function key
for longer than one second to delete the selected cultivated area.
•
Press function key
for longer than 5 seconds to delete all cultivated areas.
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Entering the weighed mass of a control weighing
Fig. 359
Menu 13 “List of Yield Counters” is called.
Select the cultivated area to enter a control weighing by using function keys
selected cultivated area is highlighted in grey.
Press function key
or
and
. The
.
The display shows the “Counterweighing” menu.
•
Select the number of the desired counterweighing by using the function keys
The selected counterweighing is highlighted in grey.
•
Enter the value for counterweighing via function keys
•
Press the function key
been accepted.
•
To cancel the process, press
to adopt the value. The
and
and
.
.
icon indicates that the value has
. The value is not accepted.
439
Info centre "EasyTouch"
The display shows the counterweighing list for the selected cultivated area:
Graphic
440
Meaning
Information
Yield counter (here for cultivated
area 5)
1 to 50 areas
Correction factor for entire
cultivated area
In this case the value is
228.
This correction factor is not
used to determine the correction
factor of the cultivated area.
Entered weight is not
saved.
This correction factor is used to
determine the correction factor
of the cultivated area.
Entered weight is saved.
The total correction factor is
calculated from the
individual correction factors
of the displayed cultivated
area.
This line means:
– Counterweighing number 2
– Weight of 15,040 kg is
entered
– Calculated correction factor
of 228 for this
counterweighing.
The correction factor is also
used to determine the
correction factor of the
entire cultivated area.
Leave menu
–
By pressing the key a
little longer, the working
screen is called.
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Softkeys
Meaning
Information
Scroll up
Scroll down
Delete counterweighing.
– The entered weight is deleted and
saved.
– The correction factor is set to zero.
The correction factor is not used to
determine the correction factor of the
entire cultivated area.
If the weight of this
counterweighing is available
again later, it can be re-entered .
The entered weight is saved.
The calculated correction factor
is used to recalculate the
correction factor of the entire
cultivated area.
Reduce the weight for the
counterweighing highlighted in grey.
Increase the weight for the
counterweighing highlighted in grey.
Leave menu
–
By pressing the key a little
longer, the working screen is
called.
441
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Entering the correction factor directly
Note
The recalculation of the correction factor initiates the correction of the measured mass
retrospectively for the entire cultivated area.
If no control weighing has been carried out for the cultivated area, a correction factor directly be
entered. However, this correction value does not necessarily reflect the characteristics of the
cultivated area.
The accuracy that can be achieved by the direct entry of the correction factor strongly depends
on the experience of the operator.
The correction factor must only be entered when a control weighing cannot be carried out or the
current correction factor seems to be unrealistic.
Fig. 360
Menu 13 “List of Control Weighings” is called.
Select the cultivated area to enter a control weighing by using function keys
selected cultivated area is highlighted in grey.
Press function key
or
and
. The
.
The display shows the mask to enter the correction value for the selected cultivated area.
442
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Graphic
230
Meaning
Information
Yield counter
(in this case for cultivated area 6)
Area 1 to 50
Correction factor for entire cultivated area
(in this case for value 230)
Displayed correction factor is not saved.
230
Softkeys
This line means:
– A correction factor of 230 has been
entered and saved.
Meaning
Information
Entered correction factor is saved
Reducing the correction factor.
Increasing the correction factor.
Leave menu
–
By pressing the key a
little longer, the working
screen is called.
443
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.15.11
Main Menu 14 ISOBUS Settings
CC000955
14
Fig. 361
•
Press function key
from the basic screen to bring up the menu level.
•
Press function key
grey.
or
•
Press function key
.
to choose main menu 14
The display shows menu level 14 “ISOBUS Settings”.
Menu level 14 contains the following sub-menu:
Menu 14-1 “Setting the Background Colour”
444
, the icon is highlighted in
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Menu 14-1 “Setting the Background Colour”
CC000957
14-1
CC000956
14-1
Fig. 362
Calling the menu
Main menu 14 “ISOBUS Settings” is called.
•
Press function key
grey.
or
to choose menu 14-1
, the icon is highlighted in
• Press function key
.
The display shows menu 14-1 “Setting the Background Colour”.
You can select between three modes.
Icon
Designation
Explanation
Background colour white
Recommended for day
Background colour grey
Recommended for night
Automatic background colour
Background colour is set automatically.
• When headlight is switched on, the
background is grey.
• When headlight is switched off, the
background is white.
Selecting and saving mode
The icon
in the upper line indicates that the displayed mode is saved.
•
•
to bring up the next mode.
to bring up the previous mode.
Press
Press
The icon
•
Press
The icon
•
Press
in the upper line disappears.
to save the value.
in the upper line indicates that the chosen mode is saved.
to leave the menu.
445
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.15.12
Main Menu 15 Service
CC000874 _1
15
Fig. 363
•
Press function key
to bring up the menu level from the basic screen.
•
Press function key
grey.
or
•
Press function key
.
to select main menu 15
The display shows menu level 15 “Service”.
Menu level 15 is divided into the following sub-menus:
Menu 15-1 Manual Sensor Test
Menu 15-3 Alarms
Menu 15-4 Information
Menu 15-15 Technician
446
. The icon is highlighted in
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Menu 15-1 Manual Sensor Test
In the manual sensor test, the sensors are checked for errors.
Fig. 364
Calling the menu
Main menu 15 “Service” is called.
•
Press function key
highlighted in grey.
or
to select menu 15-1
. The selected symbol is
Selecting the sensor
•
Press function key
and tested.
or
to select the sensor.The selected symbol is highlighted in grey
447
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Diagnostics of analogue sensors
Fig. 365
Setting values:
The black bar must be in the green area of the bar display.
Analog sensors
No.
Sensor symbol
Description
B73
Pressure sensor
B72
Path sensor pre-compression rollers
State:
OK
/
•
ERROR
Sensor OK
Defect on sensor or job
computer
Cable break/short circuit on
the sensor
Press function key
to close the menu currently displayed.
The display shows the previously called main menu.
•
448
Pressing function key
longer brings up the basic screen.
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Diagnostics pressure increase
Fig. 366
Description of display:
The left black bar indicates the pressure measured by the pressure sensor. The value is
displayed under the black bar.
The right black bar indicates the pressure difference between the current pressure and the
calibrated pressure (by calibration of pre-compression rollers in the unloaded condition).
No.
Sensor symbol
B73
•
Press function key
Description
Pressure sensor with pressure difference
to close the menu currently displayed.
The display shows the previously called main menu.
•
Pressing function key
longer brings up the basic screen.
449
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Diagnostics power supply voltages
Fig. 367
No.
Sensor symbol
Description
U1
U1
Power supply voltage
Nominal voltages:
•
Designation
Values
+12V_EIN
12 - 14.5 V
+12V_Si
12 - 14.5 V
+12VANA
12 – 13 V
+8VDIG
8.5 – 9.1 V
+12V2FU_L
12 - 14.5 V
+12V3FU_L
12 - 14.5 V
3V Bat
Exeeds 2.5 volts
Press function key
to close the menu currently displayed.
The display shows the previously called main menu.
•
450
Pressing function key
longer brings up the basic screen.
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Diagnostics intake
The speed of intake drive as well as the speed of the crop through the intake is displayed.
Fig. 368
No.
Sensor symbol
D630
•
Press function key
Description
Display of speed/intake speed when the intake is
turning.
to close the menu currently displayed.
The display shows the previously called main menu.
•
Pressing function key
longer brings up the basic screen.
451
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Diagnostics acreage counter
Fig. 369
Description of display:
The latest state of the total acreage counter of the machine is displayed in the first line. This
must correspond to the total acreage counter displayed in the machine terminal.
The current acreage (in hectares per hour) of the machine is displayed in the second line.
No.
Sensor symbol
D731
•
Press function key
Description
Display acreage counter/hectares per hour.
If the machine is chopping actively and driving forward,
the acreage counter must increase and a value that is
bigger than 0 must be displayed for ha/h.
to close the menu currently displayed.
The display shows the previously called main menu.
•
452
Pressing function key
longer brings up the basic screen.
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Diagnostics machine chops
Fig. 370
Description of display:
It indicates whether the machine is currently chopping or not.
The state must be ON, if:
• The machine moves forward.
• The lifting unit is in the working position.
• The cutting drum is turned on.
• Intake and header turn forward.
No.
Sensor symbol
Description
The machine chops (status ON is displayed if the
machine chops and moves forward, otherwise OFF is
displayed).
D730
State:
ON
The machine chops actively.
OFF
The machine chops inactively.
•
Press function key
to close the menu currently displayed.
The display shows the previously called main menu.
•
Pressing function key
longer brings up the basic screen.
453
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Menu 15-3 Alarms
Fig. 371
Calling the menu
Main menu 15 “Service” is called.
•
Press function key
highlighted in grey.
or
to select menu 15-3
. The selected symbol is
• Press function key
.
The display shows menu 15-3 “Alarms”.
The currently pending alarms are displayed here.
Description, possible cause and remedy are listed in chapter “Alarm Messages”.
The current page and the number of pages are shown at the top left.
If there are several pages, press function keys
•
Press function key
or
to scroll in the list.
to close the menu currently displayed.
The display shows the previously called main menu.
•
454
Pressing function key
longer brings up the basic screen.
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Menu 15-4 Information
Fig. 372
Calling the menu
Main menu 15 “Service” is called.
•
Press function key
highlighted in grey.
or
to select menu 15-4
. The selected symbol is
• Press function key
.
The display shows menu 15-4.
The complete CropControl software version is displayed here.
• SW = complete software version
•
Press function key
to close the menu currently displayed.
The display shows the previously called main menu.
•
Pressing function key
longer brings up the basic screen.
Menu 15-5 Technician
Fig. 373
Calling the menu
Main menu 15 “Service” is called.
•
Press function key
highlighted in grey.
or
to select menu 15-5
. The selected symbol is
• Press function key
.
Menu 15-5 “Technician” is protected by password.
The display shows the password query.
455
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.15.13
Alarm Messages (VT)
Fig. 374
Alarm message
If there is a disturbance on the CropControl, an alarm message appears in the display and an
audio signal sounds at the same time (constant horn signal). Description, possible cause and
remedy are listed in chapter “Alarm Messages”.
To stop audio signal:
•
Press function key
.
To acknowledge the alarm:
• Press function key
briefly, the alarm is acknowledged and the audio signal stops.
If the disturbance occurs again, the alarm message will also appear again.
456
Info centre "EasyTouch"
General messages
No.
Image
Possible cause
–
A01
–
Remedy
Computer internal plug-in fuse 2 –
defective.
Short circuit on voltage output
+12V2FU_L.
Check wiring for short circuit.
Replace fuse.
–
Check wiring for short circuit.
A02
–
–
EEPROM error
– Job computer defective
–
Replace job computer.
A04
Undervoltage back-up battery
– Back-up battery defective
–
A13
Check the back-up battery and
replace it, if necessary.
Undervoltage
– Fuse -22F39 defective
–
Replace fuse.
A15
Overvoltage
– Alternator is defective
–
Check alternator
–
A16
RAM error
– Back-up battery defective
– Job computer defective
Check the back-up battery and
replace it, if necessary.
Replace job computer.
The yield counter for the currently
active cultivated area will soon
overflow (jumps to 0 t).
– The yield counter of the
currently active cultivated area
is active for too long.
–
Fuse 3 defective (self-repairing)
Short circuit on voltage outputs
+12V3FU_L
A14
A19
8.15.14
–
Use another cultivated area or
delete the currently active
cultivated area.
Physical messages
No.
Image
Sensor
Possible cause
Path sensor
–
101
102
Remedy
Sensor or supply line –
defective.
–
Perform sensor test.
Check sensor and
supply line for damage.
Pressure sensor
457
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.16
Operation of the Internal Silage Additive System
The following prerequisites must be met for operating the silage agent system:
• Quick-stop switch console: OFF
• Quick-stop switch manual operation: OFF
• Switch the release switch road/field to field mode.
Fig. 375
If an internal silage agent system has been set, an additional display (1) is shown in the main
screen. This additional display provides information on the current silage agent throughput rate
in l/min.
Note
Prior to initial operation of the silage agent system, read these Operating Instructions carefully
and observe the safety instructions for safe use.
CAUTION!
In case of abnormal handling, the chemicals used in the silage agent system can cause
damage to health.
• The silage agent system may only be operated by persons who are familiar with these
Operating Instructions and the silage agent manufacturer's safety data sheet. The safety
instructions issued by the silage agent manufacturer must be observed.
• The operating personnel must be instructed in the safe handling of the chemicals used.
458
Info centre "EasyTouch"
Fig. 376
•
Press the Terminal button
in the main screen. The setting options available for the
internal silage agent system are displayed:
1Button
:
Finish the settings and call up the main screen
2Button
:
Calibrate the internal silage agent system
3Button
:
Cancel the currently executed function of the silage agent system
4Button
:
Record the characteristic line of the silage agent system
5Current silage agent throughput rate in L/min
6Unit of silage agent dosing
7 Silage agent dosing
8Define the status of the silage agent system
9Define the flow sensor status
10Activate/deactivate the fill level indicator of the silage agent system (optional)
459
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.17
Calibration of the Internal Silage Agent System
The silage agent system should be calibrated prior to each use in order to achieve maximum
precision.
CAUTION!
In case of abnormal handling, the chemicals used in the silage agent system can cause
damage to health.
• The safety instructions issued by the silage agent manufacturer must be observed.
Fig. 377
STOP
1. Press the
(
) button to switch off the silage agent system .
2. Remove the quick-release coupling from the hose of the silage agent system.
3. Switch to Permanent mode (see Chap. "Permanent Mode") and operate the system in this
mode until the liquid leaks from the quick-release coupling.
STOP
4. Press the
(
) button to switch off the silage agent system .
5. During calibration, collect the liquid in a measuring cup (min. 2 litres).
6. Press the
(
) button to start the calibration. Use a measuring cup to collect the
liquid leaking from the quick-release coupling.
The calibration process stops automatically as soon as the progress bar (2) has reached
100%.
7. In the field (1) which pops up, enter the silage agent quantity collected in the measuring cup
in millimetres and then press the rotary potentiometer to confirm your entry. The calibration
is now complete.
Note
STOP
The calibration can be cancelled at any time by pressing the
460
(
) button.
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.18
Recording the Characteristic Line
The characteristic line can only be recorded by means of an existing flow sensor.
The characteristic line should be recorded after each change to the silage agent system (e .g.
changing the injection point or nozzle) or silage agent.
The quick-release coupling must not be opened whilst the characteristic line is recorded.
CAUTION!
In case of abnormal handling, the chemicals used in the silage agent system can cause
damage to health.
• The safety instructions issued by the silage agent manufacturer must be observed.
Note
Collect any silage agent escaping whilst the characteristic line is recorded and dispose of it
correctly.
1. Switch to Permanent mode (see Chap. "Permanent Mode") until liquid leaks from the
nozzle.
STOP
2. Press the
(
) button to switch off the silage agent system .
3. Press the
(
) button to start the recording of the characteristic line.
The characteristic line record is terminated automatically after approximately 1 or 2 minutes.
Note
STOP
The characteristic line record can be cancelled at any time by pressing the
8.18.1
(
) button.
Usage
Fig. 378
The flow sensor monitors the flow of silage agent through the silage agent system. If the flow
sensor is not ready for use, it must be switched off in the settings of the silage agent system
(input box 9).
461
Info centre "EasyTouch"
To set the flow sensor status:
Flow sensor existing
Flow sensor not existing
If the flow sensor status is set to Not Existing, the characteristic line of the last characteristic line
record serves as a basis to control the pump.
Note
If the flow sensor status is set to Not Existing, the silage agent system cannot determine
whether silage agent is actually pumped through. In this case it must be ensured that a
sufficient quantity of silage agent is available in order to prevent the pump running dry (which
can lead to damage of the pump).
Setting the Silage fodder addition mode (input box 8):
The following states are possible:
Silage fodder addition deactivated
Silage fodder addition permanently activated
Silage fodder addition Automatic mode
8.18.2
Permanent Mode
Fig. 379
In permanent mode, the throughput of the silage additives pump can be adjusted directly by
means of an input field (1) shown. The dosing information (input field 2 and 3) is not taken into
account in the permanent mode.
The silage additive system uses the flow sensor to monitor the flow of silage. If the flow sensor
is not ready for use, it must be switched off in the settings of the silage agent system (input field
9).
462
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.18.3
Automatic Mode
In Automatic mode, the silage agent is dosed depending on the time or product throughput rate
(only in combination with CropControl). Here, the pumping of silage agent is switched off whilst
the machine does not cut.
The active pumping of silage agent is indicated by a green background colour in the status
display.
Automatic mode active. Silage agent pumping inactive.
Automatic mode active. Silage agent pumping active.
Fig. 380
In Automatic mode, the dosing of silage agents can be influenced by adjusting the entries in
input boxes 6 and 7.
In input box 6, the unit for dosing the silage agents can be defined first.
The following settings are possible:
L/min
Litres per minute
L/t
Litres per tonne of product (only in combination with CropControl)
L/m3
Litres per cubic metre of product (only in combination with CropControl)
The required dosing of the silage agent system is determined on the basis of the value in input
box 7 combined with the unit in input box 6.
The actual delivery rate must therefore be defined in input box 7. The setting in input box 7 can
also be modified using the
and
buttons.
Note
The maximum delivery rate of the silage agent system must not be exceeded.
463
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.19
Error Messages
Fig. 381
The "8000 silage agent tank empty" error message can have the following causes:
• No silage agent in the tank
• The flow sensor is mechanically or electrically defective
• The electrical connections of the flow sensor are defective
• The pump mechanism of the silage agent pump is defective
• The intake pipe or the pump filter of the silage agent system is soiled
• The pressure pipe or the nozzle unit is soiled
The "8001 silage agent pump error" error message can have the following causes:
• Interruption of the pump electrics
• The cable harness towards the pump is damaged
• The power output of the job computer is overloaded and switched off
• Power supply failure (V2- KMC3)
464
Info centre "EasyTouch"
8.20
Cleaning and Maintenance
Danger! - When performing repair, maintenance or cleaning work on the machine , or in
the case of technical intervention, drive elements may start moving.
Effect: Danger to life, injuries or damage to the machine.
• Switch off the engine and remove the ignition key.
• Secure the machine against accidental start-up and against rolling!
• The cutter blades can continue to rotate after the drive has been switched off. Only
approach the machine once the work tools have come to a complete standstill!
• After completing maintenance work reattach all safety devices properly.
• Avoid skin contact with oil and grease.
• Seek medical help immediately should injuries caused by oil escaping under pressure
occur.
The silage agent system must be cleaned after each use:
1. Empty the silage agent tank and fill it with 10 litres of clear water.
2. Afterwards, activate the pump in order to pump the water out of the silage agent system
(see Chap. "Permanent Mode").
Note
The silage agent residues and the rinsing water must be disposed of properly (refer to the
silage agent manufacturer's instructions in the separate Operating Instructions).
In case of poor flow rates, the pipe filter insert and the nozzle filter must be cleaned.
CAUTION!
Machine damage.
• The flow sensor must not on no account be cleaned with compressed air.
Note
The silage agent system must be stored in such a way that it is protected against frost damage
in winter or filled with antifreezing agent.
465
Commissioning
9
Commissioning
WARNING
Risk of accident due to incorrect initial operation of the machine!
After incorrect initial operation by unauthorized persons, malfunctions of the machines may
occur which may endanger persons and cause damage to the machine.
• Only an authorized service technician is permitted to carry out the initial operation.
9.1
Checks before starting up the machine for the first time

NOTE
Compliance with the stipulated checks on the machine significantly increases the safety and the
service life of the machine.
A machine with established defects must not be started.
• If it is established that the machine has defects, shut down the machine and eliminate these
defects or have them eliminated by technicians.
• Before starting up the machine, carry out the inspections listed below and checks from the
maintenance table "Every 10 hours, at least daily".
General information:
– Check the machine for leakages of oil, water, fuel and refrigerant.
– Check the machine for sagging and detached cables, plugs and hoses.
– Check the safety devices for damage and, if required, replace.
– Ensure that the front attachment has been correctly mounted and fitted with the
corresponding safety devices.
– Ensure that the wheel chocks are at hand and ready to use.
– Ensure that the platforms, steps and standing spaces are clean and in a proper condition.
466
Commissioning
Hydraulic system:
– Check the hydraulic system for leaks.
Cabin:
– Check the function of the indicator lamps.
– Check the position of the outside and inside mirrors and the camera monitoring (optional).
Set if necessary.
– Adjust the driver's seat and the steering column to the driver.
– Ensure that the emergency exit can be opened without obstruction.
– Ensure that the discs and outside mirrors are clean and that the wiper blades are in a good
condition.
Lighting/signage:
– Check the function and setting of the lighting.
– When driving on public highways, ensure that the red and white warning panels to identify
the machine have been mounted according to national law.
Warning beacon and horn:
– Check the function of the warning beacon and the horn.
467
Commissioning
Service brake:
Check the function of the operating brake.
WARNING
Risk of injury due to defective operating brake!
If the operating brake has a restricted function, the machine cannot be brought to a standstill in
time and people and material assets are at risk.
• Before driving the machine, always check the operating brake and ensure that it functions.
• Accelerate the machine to 5-10 km/h and press the brake pedal (1).
If the machine brakes, the operating brake is functioning correctly.
If the machine does not brake, stop driving the machine.
• Shut down and safeguard the machine, see chapter Safety, "Shutting down and
safeguarding the machine".
• Have a technician check and repair the operating brake.
Maize mode / grass mode
The machine is supplied with an installed corn conditioner. The power belt for the drive of the
corn conditioner is not attached and can be found in the driver's cab. The grass channel is not
installed and can be found on the roof of the machine.
– Adapt to the required field mode.
468
Commissioning
9.2
Mounting warning panels in the operating position
Fig. 382
If the warning panels (1) have been mounted in alignment with the machine for transportation,
they must be located in operating position (a) before the machine is started up for the first time.
To adjust the position of the warning panels to the width of the tyres (2 settings are position):
• Loosen the screw connections (2).
• Determine the mounting position of the warning panels so that the distance from the outer
edge of the machine to the outer edge of the warning panel does not exceed 100 mm.
• Secure the right/left warning panels in the operating position with the screw connection (2).
469
Commissioning
9.3
Mounting fire extinguisher in the holder
Fig. 383
•
9.4
Mount the fire extinguisher with the tensioning straps on the holder at top left of the
machine.
Identification plate
Fig. 384
•
•
470
Mount the front licence plate on both support brackets (1) on the front skirt (2) of the cab.
Mount the rear licence plate in the designated indentation on the tailgate under the licence
plate lighting (3).
Start-up
10
Start-up
10.1
Check before Start-up

NOTE
Compliance with the stipulated checks on the machine significantly increases the safety and the
service life of the machine.
A machine with established defects must not be started.
• If it is established that the machine has defects, shut down the machine and eliminate these
defects or have them eliminated by technicians.
General information:
– Visual inspection of the machine:
No liquid under the vehicle, no sagging or detached cables, plugs or hoses, etc.
– Check the safety devices for damage and, if required, replace.
– Check that the screws are tight.
– Ensure that the front attachment has been correctly mounted and fitted with the
corresponding safety devices.
– Lubricate the machine.
– Ensure that the wheel chocks are at hand and ready to use.
– Ensure that the platforms, steps and standing spaces are clean and in a proper condition.
– Check the pre-cleaner for dirt and clean with compressed air if necessary.
Engine/engine compartment:
– Check that the engine compartment is clean.
– Check the engine oil level.
– Check the engine coolant level.
– Check the fuel level.
Central lubrication system:
– Check the central lubrication system.
471
Start-up
Hydraulics:
– Check hydraulic oil level.
– Check hydraulic system for leaks.
Gearbox:
– Check the oil level of all gearboxes.
Drives:
– Check drive belts.
– Clean the coupling journal on the machine and grease on the coupling surfaces by means
of multi-purpose grease.
Tyres:
– Check tyres for damage, cuts and breaks.
– Check tyre pressure.
Service brake:
– Check the functionality of the service brake.
Cabin:
– Check the functionality of the warning lights.
– Check the position of the mirrors and camera monitoring (optional).
– Set the driver's seat to the driver.
– Make sure that the emergency exit can be opened without problems.
– Make sure that the discs and outside mirrors are clean and that the wiper blades are in
good condition.
Lighting/signage:
– Check the functionality and the setting of the lighting.
– When driving on public highways, ensure that the red and white warning panels to identify
the machine have been mounted according to national law.
Warning beacon and horn:
– Check the functionality of warning beacon and horn.
Fire extinguisher:
– Check that the fire extinguisher is attached and ready for use.
Maize mode / grass mode
– Adapt to the required field mode.
472
Start-up
10.2
Silage additive system
10.2.1
Silage Additives Unit (internal)
WARNING
Danger of injury due to silage additives!
If handled improperly, the chemicals used in the silage additive system may damage health.
• The silage additive system may be operated only by persons who are familiar with these
operating instructions and the safety data sheet of the silage additive manufacturer. The
safety instructions issued by the silage additive manufacturer must be followed.
• The operating personnel must be instructed in the safe handling of the chemicals used.

NOTE
Before using the silage additive system for the first time, read these instructions carefully and
follow the safety instructions for safe use
For operating and setting the silage additive system, see page 458.
473
Start-up
10.2.2
Silage additive system (external)
Abb. 385
There is an option to connect an external silage additive system. The electrical connection (1)
for the silage additive system is located in the cooler compartment to the right beside the
channel support. It is a 3-pin plug bearing the designation XY60.
No fixed location is stipulated for the silage additive system and the injection of silage additives.
If the silage additive system is connected, it is controlled fully automatically via the electronics in
the machine.
The right connector cable (material no.: 303-558-1, length approx. 3 m) is included with the
machine.
Connection assignment of the cables
BX500652
Fig. 386
XY 60 contact 1:
+12 volts switched max. 15 amps through fuse 22-F74
XY60 contact 2:
Ground
XY60 contact 3:
+12 volts continuous voltage, max. 15 amps through fuse 22-F74
For operating and setting the silage additive system (external), see page 206.
474
Start-up - Grass mode
11
Start-up - Grass mode
This chapter describes the conversion from maize mode to grass mode.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Installing the grass channel, see page 482.
Setting the rear wall of discharge accelerator "Grass mode", see page 609.
Move the three-way stopcock to position "Grass"
Replace the hydraulic cylinder of the pendulum frame with a tension spring (in reverse
sequence), see page 507.
Turning the conveyor bars on the pre-compression roller, see page 721.
Grain capture sheets on the intake unit, see page 510dismounting grain capture sheets
Replace the chopping blade (maize blade → grass blade), for chopping drum with 20, 28,
36 blades see page 705, for chopping drum with 40, 48 blades see page 711readjust and/or
replace chopping blades for chopping drum with 40, 48 blades.
Replace counterblade (special → standard), see page 718.
Adapt the spout extension to the front attachment type, see page 517.
Adapting additional weights to the front attachment type and setting tyre pressure, see page
537.
Setting the rear axle suspension,
Setting the machine settings in the terminal, see page 178.
– operating mode Easy Flow
– Front attachment type Easy Flow
– Lifting unit mode
– Number of blades of the chopping drum
Calibration, see page 254.
– Lifting unit
– Pendulum frame/Cutting height
475
Start-up - Grass mode
11.1
Operating the cable winch
WARNING! – Risk of injury and damage to the machine due to the cable winch!
Careless operation of the cable winch can result in injury and damage to the machine.
• Only connect the remote control when the cable winch is required.
• When working with the cable winch, always wear protective gloves.
• Each time before using the cable winch, check to make certain the mounting screws are
securely seated on the winch attachment plate.
• Check the wire rope of the cable winch and the connecting cable of the remote control for
damage prior to each and replace if necessary.
• When winding up the cable, make sure it is wound evenly on the drum.
• Always leave five revolutions on the winch drum for safety.
Fig. 387
Note
The remote control (1) can be found in the tool box upon delivery of the machine.
After use, store the remote control in the drawer beneath the driver's seat to prevent
unauthorised use.
•
476
Connect the remote control (1) to the connection (2) relay housing of the cable winch (3).
Start-up - Grass mode
Method of Operation of Remote Control
Fig. 388
Unwind the rope from the cable winch:
• Press the momentary switch (1).
Wind the rope onto the cable winch:
• Press the momentary switch (2).
11.2
Removing the corn conditioner
Fig. 389
Item

Component
Item
Component
1
Rear roller unit
5
Corn conditioner mounting cart
2
Front roller unit
6
Connection for central lubrication
3
Channel
7
Deflection roller
4
Adjusting motor
NOTE
Depending on the version, the corn conditioner has a weight of approx. 450 kg. Only transport
with suitable slings.
477
Start-up - Grass mode
Prerequisites for installation and removal:
– Diesel engine is switched off.
– The side flap at the front right is open.
– The machine is shut down and safeguarded, see chapter Safety, "Shutting down and
safeguarding the machine".
Fig. 390
• Undo the lock (1) and swivel open the tool box (2).
• Remove the protective lid (4) between the discharge accelerator housing and the tank
cover.
• Make certain the discharge accelerator rear is secured on the left and rights side by two
spring locks (3).
Fig. 391
• Dismount the screws of the service cap (1) on the right side of the machine and remove the
service cap.
478
Start-up - Grass mode
Removing the corn conditioner
Fig. 392
• Relieve the power belt (2). To do this push the tension roll (4) back manually.
• Remove the power belt (2) from the belt pulley (3).
Fig. 393
• Move the cable winch hook (2) through the rope guide (1) and hook it in the corn
conditioner (3).
• Pull up the rope with the cable winch until it is taut.
• Loosen the screw connection for central lubrication (4).
• Loosen the plug connection (5) of the adjusting motor.
•
Fit a clean filler plug to guard the plug.
479
Start-up - Grass mode
WARNING! – Risk of injury due to suspended load!
There is a danger for persons due to falling load.
• Pay attention to sufficient carrying load of the hoist.
• Do not stay under the suspended load.
Fig. 394
• Loosen counter nut (2) (only right-hand side of machine).
• Unscrew the screws (1) on both sides of the corn conditioner.
• Lower the corn conditioner with the cable winch until it rests on the axle.
• Remove kraftband (3) from corn conditioner.
Fig. 395
• Hinge cable guide (1) on discharge accelerator rear wall and secure with screw (2). Make
sure that the cable guide rests correctly on the frame.
• Insert the cable (3) into the rollers of the cable guide (1) as well as into the deviation point
(5) on the channel.
480
Start-up - Grass mode
Fig. 396
• Dismount the safety plates (3) on both sides of the corn conditioner hooks.
• Pull corn conditioner up by using the cable winch until the hooks from the forage harvester
holder are released.
• Lower corn conditioner with cable winch and place it securely on the installation carriage.
Make certain no lubrication lines are crushed.
• Dismount the cable on the corn conditioner and push out the installation carriage to the
right-hand side of the machine.
Close the stop cock for the corn conditioner tension roll
Fig. 397
The stop cock (1) for the corn conditioner tension roll must be in the position I (closed).
• If necessary, close the stop cock (1) (position I).
481
Start-up - Grass mode
11.3
Installing the grass channel
WARNING! – Risk of injury due to suspended load!
There is a danger for persons due to falling load.
• Pay attention to sufficient carrying load of the hoist.
• Do not stay under the suspended load.
Prerequisites for installation and removal:
– Diesel engine is switched off.
– The side flap at the front right is open.
– The machine is shut down and safeguarded, see chapter Safety, "Shutting down and
safeguarding the machine".
Fig. 398
• Undo the lock (1) and swivel open the tool box (2).
• Remove the protective lid (4) between the discharge accelerator housing and the tank
cover.
• Make certain the discharge accelerator rear is secured on the left and rights side by two
spring locks (3).
Fig. 399
• Dismount the screws of the service cap (1) on the right side of the machine and remove the
service cap.
482
Start-up - Grass mode
Fig. 400
Depending on the actual design, the grass channel weighs approx. 30 kg.
• Loosen the wing nut (1) at the crane splice (2) of the grass channel.
• Raise the crane splice (2) as far as possible and tighten the wing nut (1) to fix it into
position.
Fig. 401
• Unwind the rope (1) from the cable winch.
• Catch the hook (3) of the cable winch in the crane splice (2).
• Wind the rope onto the cable winch until it is taut.
483
Start-up - Grass mode
Fig. 402
• Install the deflection pulley (1) with the bolt (2).
• Position the cable roller guide (3) and use the screw connection (4) to screw it to the lower
cross brace of the rear wall of discharge accelerator (right-hand borehole in the direction of
travel).
• Unwind the rope from the cable winch.
• Guide the rope (5) around the deflection rollers.
Fig. 403
• Place the grass channel (4) in the mounting position under the machine.
• Catch the hook (1) of the cable winch in the eye (2).
• Use the cable winch to raise the grass channel (4) until the retainer hooks (3) are
approximately at the height of the receivers (5).
• Tilt the grass channel forward manually so that the retainer hooks (3) engage into the
receivers (5).
Fig. 404
484
Start-up - Grass mode
•
•
Unwind the rope (1) from the cable winch so that the grass channel hangs down.
Release the hook on the rope (1) from the eye (2) on the grass channel.
Fig. 405
• Dismount the deflection pulley (1).
Fig. 406
• Swivel the crane splice (5) up as far as the stop.
• Catch the hook (1) of the cable winch into the crane splice (5).
• Raise the grass channel (4) with the help of the cable winch until the bolts (3) on the grass
channel are introduced into the receivers (2) on the rear wall.
Fig. 407
• Pre-assemble the grass channel (1) with the screws (2) on both sides of the machine frame,
starting on the right side of the machine.
485
Start-up - Grass mode
Fig. 408
• Actuate the spring-mounted bars (1) to release the lock on the rear wall (2).

NOTE
The spring locks (1) must be released as otherwise the rear wall cannot be springy and crest
lines can occur in the crop flow.
Fig. 409
• Tighten the screw connections (2) and secure with the counter nut.
Fig. 410
• Loosen the hook (1) on the cable winch and retract the rope all the way.
• Loosen the wing nuts on the crane splice (2) of the grass channel (3).
• Swivel the crane splice (2) down until the stop and secure with the wing nuts.
•
486
Set the rear wall of discharge accelerator, see page 609.
Start-up - Maize mode
12
Start-up - Maize mode
This chapter describes the conversion from grass mode to maize mode.
WARNING! – Risk of injury when working on the lifting unit!
When working on the lifting unit or when opening/closing the stop cocks on the lifting cylinders,
the lifting unit and the installed components may move unexpectedly. As a result, people may
be injured.
• To secure the lifting unit from unintentionally lowering, close the stop cocks.
• To reach the stop cocks safely, swivel open the tool box, go under the machine and
actuate the stop cocks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Install a corn conditioner, see page 494.
Setting the rear wall of the discharge accelerator rotor "maize", see page 609.
Move the three-way stopcock at the lifting unit to the "Maize" position.
Replace tension spring of the pendulum frame with a hydraulic cylinder, see page 507.
Turning the conveyor bars on the pre-compression roller, see page 721.
Mount the grain capture sheets on the intake unit, see page 510.
Replace the chopping blade (grass blade → maize blade), for chopping drum with 20, 28,
36 blades see page 705, for chopping drum with 40, 48 blades see page 711readjust
chopping blades and/or replace for chopping drum with 40, 48 blades.
Replace counterblade (standard → special), see page 718.
Adapt the spout extension to the front attachment type, see page 517.
Adapting additional weights to the front attachment type and setting tyre pressure, see page
537.
Setting the rear axle suspension.
Carry out machine settings in the terminal, see page 182.
– Operating mode EasyCollect
– Type of EasyCollect front attachment
– Number of rows and row spacing
– Lifting unit mode
– Number of blades of the chopping drum
– Operating mode and sensitivity of the automatic steering system
Calibration, see page 254.
– Lifting unit
– Corn conditioner
– Pendulum frame/Cutting height
487
Start-up - Maize mode
12.1
Operating the cable winch
WARNING! – Risk of injury and damage to the machine due to the cable winch!
Careless operation of the cable winch can result in injury and damage to the machine.
• Only connect the remote control when the cable winch is required.
• When working with the cable winch, always wear protective gloves.
• Each time before using the cable winch, check to make certain the mounting screws are
securely seated on the winch attachment plate.
• Check the wire rope of the cable winch and the connecting cable of the remote control for
damage prior to each and replace if necessary.
• When winding up the cable, make sure it is wound evenly on the drum.
• Always leave five revolutions on the winch drum for safety.
Fig. 411
Note
The remote control (1) can be found in the tool box upon delivery of the machine.
After use, store the remote control in the drawer beneath the driver's seat to prevent
unauthorised use.
•
488
Connect the remote control (1) to the connection (2) relay housing of the cable winch (3).
Start-up - Maize mode
Method of Operation of Remote Control
Fig. 412
Unwind the rope from the cable winch:
• Press the momentary switch (1).
Wind the rope onto the cable winch:
• Press the momentary switch (2).
489
Start-up - Maize mode
12.2
Removing the grass channel
WARNING! – Risk of injury due to suspended load!
There is a danger for persons due to falling load.
• Pay attention to sufficient carrying load of the hoist.
• Do not stay under the suspended load.
Prerequisites for installation and removal:
– Diesel engine is switched off.
– The side flap at the front right is open.
– The machine is shut down and safeguarded, see chapter Safety, "Shutting down and
safeguarding the machine".
Fig. 413
• Undo the lock (1) and swivel open the tool box (2).
• Remove the protective lid (4) between the discharge accelerator housing and the tank
cover.
• Make certain the discharge accelerator rear is secured on the left and rights side by two
spring locks (3).
Fig. 414
• Dismount the screws of the service cap (1) on the right side of the machine and remove the
service cap.
490
Start-up - Maize mode
Fig. 415
Depending on the actual design, the grass channel weighs approx. 30 kg.
• Loosen the wing nut (1) at the crane splice (2) of the grass channel.
• Raise the crane splice (2) as far as possible and tighten the wing nut (1) to fix it into
position.
Fig. 416
• Unwind the rope (1) from the cable winch.
• Catch the hook (3) of the cable winch in the crane splice (2).
• Wind the rope onto the cable winch until it is taut.
491
Start-up - Maize mode
Fig. 417
Note
The screw on the left-hand side can only be removed from below; therefore, remove the screw
connection on the right-hand side last.
•
•
•
Loosen the screws (2) of the grass channel (1) on both sides. First remove the left screw
from above. The right screw can be removed from outside or from above.
Slowly lower the grass channel using the cable winch (4) until the hole patterns in the rear
wall and the boreholes in the discharge accelerator housing are above one another. It may
be necessary to push the rear wall of discharge accelerator into the right position by hand.
As soon as the corresponding boreholes are in alignment, the spring pressure causes the
spring locks (3) to engage automatically. Check whether the spring lock has fully engaged.
Fig. 418
• Install the deflection pulley (1) with the bolt (2).
492
Start-up - Maize mode
Fig. 419
• Fully lower the grass channel
• Position the cable roller guide (3) and use the screw connection (4) to screw it to the lower
cross brace of the rear wall of discharge accelerator (right-hand borehole in the direction of
travel)
• Unwind the rope from the cable winch
• Guide the rope (5) around the deflection rolls
• Remove the cable winch hook from the pivoted lever on the grass channel and hook it into
the eye (1).
Fig. 420
• Use the cable winch to raise the grass channel until the retaining hooks (1) on both sides of
the grass channel are released from the receivers (2) at the transfer channel
• Continue to lower the rope (3) until the grass channel (4) reaches the floor
• Detach the cable winch hook and extract the grass channel from the side.
• Retract the rope fully, remove the deflection pulley, store the remote control safely.
493
Start-up - Maize mode
12.3
Installing the corn conditioner
Fig. 421
• Measure roller distance of corn conditioner for calibration before installation, see page 280.
• Make sure that the rear wall is secured by both spring locks (1) left and right.
• Push corn conditioner half way to the side under the forage harvester.
• Fit cable deflection (1) with bolt (2).
• Thread cable (3) into cable deflection (1).
• Guide the cable of cable winch behind the hook (5) along the corn conditioner channel to
the front, between corn conditioner and transport wagon.
Fig. 422
Do not lay the cable (5) outside over axle (1) or round bar (4).
• Guide the cable (5) between cable guide (3) and round bar (4).
• Hook the hook (2) of cable winch into corn conditioner eye.
494
Start-up - Maize mode
Fig. 423
•
•
Put kraftband (3) in place as shown in the diagram.
Push corn conditioner with transportation trailer (1) and fitted kraftband (3) under the forage
harvester and align it so that the receiving hooks of the corn conditioner (2) are in front of
the holders of forage harvester suspension.
WARNING! – Risk of injury due to suspended load!
There is a danger for persons due to falling load.
• Pay attention to sufficient carrying load of the hoist.
• Do not stay under the suspended load.
Fig. 424
Depending on the design, the weight of the corn conditioner is approx. 450 kg.
• Pull corn conditioner up by using the cable winch until the receiving hooks (1) on the corn
conditioner are located further up than the holders (2) on the transfer shaft of the forage
harvester.
• Push corn conditioner to the front until the receiving hooks (1) on the corn conditioner are
located directly above the holders (2) on the transfer shaft of the forage harvester.
495
Start-up - Maize mode
Fig. 425
• Lower corn conditioner until the cable (3) is loosely in the cable deflection.
Note
Make sure that the corn conditioner is hooked in correctly.
WARNING! – Risk of injury due to suspended load!
There is a danger for persons due to falling load.
• Pay attention to sufficient carrying load of the hoist.
• Do not stay under the suspended load.
•
Unthread the rope (3) from the deflection pulley and from the hook (2) on the channel of the
corn conditioner (1).
Fig. 426
• Raise the corn conditioner (5) with the cable winch until the locating bolts (1) of the corn
conditioner are resting in the supports (2) of the rear wall of discharge accelerator.
• Loosely mount the screw (3) on the left and right side until the screw completely fills the
clamping block (4).
496
Start-up - Maize mode
Fig. 427
• Loosen the lock on the rear wall of discharge accelerator (spring lock).
Note
The corn conditioner must be aligned with the belt pulley of the discharge accelerator rotor.
•
•
•
•
Tighten the screw on both sides and secure on the right side of the machine (2) with the
counter nut (3).
Remove the transportation trailer.
Loosen the hook on the cable winch and retract the cable winch all the way.
Remove the rope guide.
Fig. 428
• Secure the hook connection (1) (left/right) in the locating bolt (2) by fitting the safety
sheets (3).
• Remove the remote control from the cable winch and store it in the drawer beneath the
driver's seat to prevent unauthorised use.
497
Start-up - Maize mode
Fig. 429
• Place the belt (1) over the belt pulley (2), press the tension roll back by hand if necessary.
Fig. 430
• Connect the central lubrication plug (2) of the grain conditioner onto the central lubrication
coupling (1).
Fig. 431
After removing the corn conditioner, place the protective caps back on the connections.
• Connect the plug on the actuator (1) for the roller distance on the corn conditioner to the
electrics on the machine (2).
• Check the crop flow settings, see page 609.
• Close and lock the protective lid (4).
• Loosen the wing nuts and open the cover sheets (3) of the ventilation slots completely.
498
Start-up - Maize mode
Fig. 432
• Secure the maintenance flap (1) on the right side of the machine with the screws.
Fig. 433
• Close the tool box (1) and flap to the cooler compartment on the right side.
• Close the side flap at the front right.
Fig. 434
• Check the position of the two-way stopcock (1).
If a corn conditioner is mounted, the two-way stopcock must be opened.
Transverse position = closed
499
Start-up - Maize mode
Open the stop cock for the corn conditioner tension roll
Fig. 435
The shut-off valve for the corn conditioner tensioning roller (1) must be in the position II (open).
• If necessary open the stop cock (1) (position II).
500
Start-up - Maize mode
12.3.1
Removing/installing the NIR sensor for moisture measurement
Removing the NIR sensor
Fig. 436
• Unscrew the wing nuts (1) and remove with the disc.
• Open the protective lid (2) on the spout.
Fig. 437
• Loosen and disconnect the plug connection (3) of the connector cable for the
NIR sensor (1).
• Unscrew the wing nuts (2) and remove with the discs.
• Remove the NIR sensor (1).
501
Start-up - Maize mode
Mounting the closing plate

NOTE
For operation without an NIR sensor, a closing plate must be mounted to guarantee the
function of the machine.
Fig. 438
• Loosely screw the screws (1) and nuts (2) onto the closing plate (3).
Fig. 439
• Place the closing plate (1) from above into the opening of the back plate in such a way that
the connection (2) in the direction of travel of the machine points to the rear.
502
Start-up - Maize mode

NOTE
To avoid damage to the rear window of the cabin, close and secure the protective lid on the
NIR sensor before raising the spout.
Fig. 440
• Raise the spout.
• Open the inspection flap (1) on the underside of the spout.
• Check whether the closing plate seals exactly flush with the underside of the back plate. If
necessary, readjust using the screws (3).

NOTE
To avoid crest lines, the closing plate (1) must seal flush with the underside of the back plate.
•
•
•
•
Lock the screws (3) with the nuts (2).
Secure the closing plate (1) with the 2 wing nuts (4) and the discs.
Close the inspection flap.
Connect the bushing (5) of the connector cable to the connection (6) of the closing plate.
Fig. 441
• Close the protective lid (2) and secure using the wing nut (1) and disc.
503
Start-up - Maize mode
Installing the NIR sensor
Fig. 442
• Loosen the wing nuts (1) and open the protective lid (2).
Fig. 443
• Loosen and disconnect the plug connection (3) of the connector cable on the closing
plate (2).
• Unscrew the wing nuts (1) and remove the closing plate(2).
Fig. 444
• Insert the NIR sensor (1) from above into the opening of the back plate so that the electric
connection (2) in the direction of travel of machine points to the rear (to the end of the
spout).
504
Start-up - Maize mode
Fig. 445

NOTE
To avoid damage to the rear window of the cabin, close and secure the protective lid on the NIR
sensor before raising the spout.
•
•
•

Raise the spout.
Open the inspection flap (1) on the underside of the spout.
Check whether the NIR sensor seals exactly flush with the underside of the back plate. If
necessary, readjust using the screws (3) and lock with the nuts (2).
NOTE
To avoid crest lines, the closing plate (1) must seal flush with the underside of the back plate.
505
Start-up - Maize mode
Fig. 446
• Lock the 4 screws (3) with the nuts (4) (tightening torque 3.5 Nm).
• Secure the NIR sensor (1) with the wing nuts (2) and the associated discs.
Fig. 447
• Close the inspection flap (1).
506
Start-up - Maize mode
12.4
Converting the pendulum frame cylinder for maize mode
Fig. 448
•
Move three-way stopcock (2) to "Maize" position, see information label.
Replace the tension spring with the hydraulic cylinder
Prerequisites:
– Front attachment has been removed.
– Diesel engine is switched off.
Fig. 449
• In order to lock the pendulum frame, remove the spring cotter pin (1), fully insert the bolt (2)
and re-install the spring cotter pin (1)
507
Start-up - Maize mode
Fig. 450
• Loosen the counter nut (2) on the spindle (1)
• Remove spindle (1)
• Remove bolt (4) from the spring (3) and remove the spring
• Insert the hydraulic cylinder (6)
• Mount and secure the bolt (7) and the screw (5)
Note
After installing the front attachment, the pendulum frame must be unlocked.
Fig. 451
• Connect the hydraulic cylinder of the pendulum frame to the hydraulic connections (3, 4)
according to the colour-coded hydraulic plugs on the right-hand side of the machine,
underneath the cabin
Note
The pendulum speed of the pendulum frame can be adjusted with the throttle valves (5, 6).
•
508
Adjust throttle valves (5, 6) until the pendulum frame takes approx. 7 s to swivel from an
end position to the next position (with EasyCollect attached).
Start-up - Maize mode
12.5
Further conversion work
Turning the conveyor bars around
Fig. 452
The pre-compression roller (1) features conveyor bars which can be used on alternating sides.
One of the sides of the conveyor bar is smooth, while the other is designed with teeth.
Experience shows that the smooth side works well for use in grass silage while the toothed side
works well with maize.
• Shut down and secure the machine, see page 38.
• Unscrew the fastening screws (3) on the conveyor bar (2).
• Turn the conveyor bar (2) and mount it, tightening torque M8 =17.5 Nm, M10=35 Nm
Note
The conveyor bars must be changed if the wear is so great that the conveyor bars are no
longer higher than the crossbars on the pre-compression and feed roller.
Note
Because of metal detection, only fastening materials made of anti-magnetic steel may be used.
Never punch the screws into the boreholes or use an impact screw driver to tighten them
(magnetisation effect).
509
Start-up - Maize mode
Installing grain capture plates
• Remove the front attachment, see page 524.
• Fully lift the lifting unit
Fig. 453
•
Close two-way stopcock (1) and three-way stopcock (2), see information label
Fig. 454
• Insert the front grain capture plate (1) and tighten the screws (2) on both sides
510
Start-up - Maize mode
Fig. 455
• Loosely install the bracket (1) at the rear grain capture plate using the screws (2)
• Inserting the rear grain capture sheet (3). This plate must be located above the front grain
capture sheet, with the bevelled side facing upwards, the slots facing the rear and the
bracket facing downwards.
Fig. 456
• Insert the screws (1)
• Attaching the front attachment, see page 524.
511
Start-up - Maize mode
Cutting blade / Counterblade
• Replace the grass blade with the maize blade for chopping drum with 20, 28, 36 blades see
page 705, for chopping drum with 40, 48 blades see page 711readjust chopping blades
and/or replace for chopping drum with 40, 48 blades.
• Replace the "standard" counterblade with the "special" counterblade, see page 718.
Terminal
On the terminal, select the menu "General machine settings" and check or change the following
settings.
Fig. 457
1 Operating mode EasyCollect
2 Header type EasyCollect
3 Number of rows and row spacing
4 Lifting unit mode
5 Number of blades of the chopping drum
6 Operating mode and sensitivity of the autopilot
Calibration
• Adjust the lifting unit,
• Calibrate the distance of the corn conditioner
• Calibration of the pendulum frame and the cutting height, see page 254.
Discharge chute extension
Depending on the front attachment type, a corresponding discharge chute extension must be
installed.
• Mount the spout extension, see page 517.
Additional weights
Depending on the front attachment type, corresponding additional weights must be installed.
• Mount additional weights, see page 537.
512
Start-up – additional axle
13
Start-up – additional axle
13.1
Additional axle
The additional axle is required in order to reduce the axle load on the front axle. This is a
prerequisite for obtaining the required approval for the machine in combination with the various
front attachments (see the accompanying documents for the machine).
13.1.1
Removing the additional axle
WARNING
Danger to life due to the unsecured machine rolling away, unexpected movement of the
lifting unit and start-up of the machine!
Cleaning, maintenance and maintenance work, as well as the rectification of malfunctions
should only be carried out with the engine switched off, the drive switched off and the machine
properly secured.
• Move the parking brake release switch to the "Applied" position.
• Move the release switch traction drive to the "off" position.
• Switch off the engine, remove the ignition key and take it with you.
• Secure the machine against rolling with wheel chocks.
Note
Park the machine on a level surface.

NOTE
•
Park the machine on level ground.
•
Lower the additional axle manually via the terminal until the wheels are not touching the
ground at all.
Switch off the machine and remove the ignition key.
•
Fig. 458
• Hook the cable winch (1) into the additional axle.
• Slightly raise the additional axle using the cable winch.
513
Start-up – additional axle
Fig. 459
• Dismount the upper bolt (2) of the hydraulic cylinder on both sides and put the hydraulic
cylinder to one side
• Fully lower the additional axle using the cable winch and secure the wheels of the additional
axle against rolling away
• Loosen the hook on the cable winch from the additional axle and retract the cable winch all
the way
• Unhook the cable harness (1)
• Remove the hydraulic lines (3)
• Disconnect the plug of the sensor (4)
Fig. 460
The complete additional axle weighs approx. 120 kg.
• Slightly raise the additional axle (1) with the car jack (2)
• Dismount the front bolt (3) of the axle suspension on both sides
• Fully lower the additional axle onto wooden blocks
• Remove the car jack
• Check whether the additional axle is totally free and move the machine forwards
514
Start-up – additional axle
13.1.2
Installing the additional axle
Fig. 461
• Reverse the machine and position it above the additional axle (1)
• Raise the additional axle (1) with a car jack (2)
• Install the front bolt (3) of the axle suspension on both sides
Fig. 462
• Hook the cable winch into the additional axle and raise it so that the upper bolts (2) of the
hydraulic cylinder can be installed
• Unhook the cable winch and retract it all the way
• Hook in the cable harness (1)
• Install the hydraulic lines (3) (quick release)
• Connect the plug of the sensor (4)
• Check the function of the additional axle, see page 516.
515
Start-up – additional axle
13.1.3
Function test additional axle
Fig. 463
• In the terminal, select menu 4-1-6 "Traction drive".
•
•
Press the C key to call up page 2 "Sensor test additional axle" of the menu.
Check all voltages in menu "Sensor test additional axle".
•
Check whether the additional axle can be manually raised or lowered, see chapter 4
"Menu 3-11 "Maintenance of the additional axle" (option)".
Check whether the additional axle can be automatically raised or lowered, see chapter 8
"Automatic function of the additional axle (option)".
•
516
Start-up – Spout extension
14
Start-up – Spout extension
14.1
Removing/attaching the spout extension/spout end piece
When you convert from grass mode to maize mode or vice versa, the length of the spout must
be adapted to the front attachment.
WARNING
Risk of injury due to suspended load!
There is a danger for persons due to falling load.
• Pay attention to sufficient carrying load of the hoist.
• Do not stay under the suspended load.
• If work has to be performed under the load, securely support the load.
WARNING
Risk of injury from escaping hydraulic oil!
The hydraulic system operates at very high pressure. Escaping hydraulic oil will result in severe
injuries to the skin, limbs and eyes. The oil can penetrate the skin and cause severe injuries to
tissue and the bloodstream.
• When connecting the hydraulic hoses to the hydraulic system of the forage harvester, the
system must be relieved of the pressure on either side.
• When searching for leaks, use suitable aids and wear safety goggles to prevent the risk of
injury.
• Seek medical help immediately should injuries occur. Risk of infection!
• Before uncoupling the hoses and before performing work on the hydraulic system,
depressurise the hydraulic system.
• Check the hydraulic hoses regularly and replace them if they are damaged or show signs of
ageing! Replacement hoses must meet the technical requirements of the device
manufacturer.
Prerequisites:
– The spout is located on the right side of the machine and is fully lowered.
– The hydraulic circuits of the machine are de-pressurised, see page 133.
– The parking brake is applied.
– The machine is secured against rolling away with wheel chocks.
– The machine is shut down and secured, see page 38.
517
Start-up – Spout extension
14.1.1
Weights
The following table lists the weights of the spout end piece and the spout extensions:

14.1.2
Component
Weight
End piece 8-row
approx. 80 kg
Extension 10-row
approx. 112 kg
Extension 12-row
approx. 165 kg
Extension 14-row
approx. 180 kg
NOTE
Only transport the spout end piece and spout extensions with suitable slings.
Removing the spout extension (12- and 14-row)
Fig. 464
• Disconnect the hydraulic hoses (1) from the hydraulic lines.
• Close the openings of the hydraulic hoses with the dust caps.
Fig. 465
• Use a suitable sling to secure the spout extension (2) from falling.
• Unscrew the nuts (4) and remove the cover (3).
• Disconnect the plug connection (6).
• Unscrew the screws (1) at the coupling point.
• Disconnect the spout extension (2) from the spout basic (5) set it down safely.
518
Start-up – Spout extension
14.1.3
Attaching the spout extension (12- and 14-row)
Fig. 466
• Pick up the spout extension (1) using a suitable sling.
• Hook the spout extension (1) into the receivers (2) of the spout basic (5).
• Secure the spout extension with the screws (3, 4) on the spout basic (5).
Fig. 467
• Establish the plug connection (1).
• Fit the cover (3) and attach with the nut (2).
Fig. 468
• Connect the hydraulic hoses (1) to the hydraulic lines.
519
Start-up – Spout extension
14.1.4
Attaching the spout end piece (8- and 10-row)
Fig. 469
• Pick up the spout end piece (1) using a suitable sling.
• Hook the spout end piece (1) into the receivers (3) of the spout basic (2).
• Secure the spout end piece (1) with the screws (4, 6) on the spout basic (2).
• Connect the hydraulic hoses (5) to the hydraulic lines.
Fig. 470
• Establish the plug connection (1).
• Fit the cover (3) and attach with the nut (2).
520
Start-up – Spout extension
14.1.5
Setting the folding out and folding in speed of the spout extension
Fig. 471
• To set the folding out speed, turn the setting screw (1) on the throttle check valve.
• To set the folding in speed, turn the setting screw (2) on the throttle check valve.
521
Start-up – Spout extension
14.1.6
Removing the spout end piece (8- and 10-row)
Fig. 472
Disconnect the spout end piece (2) and the spout basic (5):
• Use a suitable sling to secure the spout end piece (2) from falling.
• Unscrew the nuts (4) and remove the cover cap (3).
• Disconnect the plug connection (1).
Fig. 473
• Disconnect the hydraulic hoses (3) from the hydraulic lines.
• Unscrew the screws (4, 5) at the coupling point.
• Separate the spout end piece (1) from the spout basic (2) set it down safely.
522
Start-up – Spout extension
14.1.7
Setting the start-up safety mechanism
1
2
7
6
X
5
4
3
Fig. 474
The start-up safety mechanism must be set using the compression spring (6) to suit the
mounted spout extension. This ensures that the forces acting on the spout are not too high if the
start-up safety mechanism is triggered.
The following table lists the setting values for the pretension dimension X of the compression
spring (6) depending on the spout extension:
Discharge chute version
Pre-tensioning dimension
Spout with end piece
124 mm
10 and 12-row extension
121 mm
14-row extension
118 mm
The specified dimensions are guideline values and can be adjusted.
Setting the pretension dimension of the compression spring (6):
• Release the counter nut (1).
• Continue turning the nut (2) until the required pretension dimension X is set. Measure the
pretension dimension X from the upper side of the compression sleeve (7) to the skid
surface area of the spring hanger (5).
• Tighten the counter nut (1).
• Check whether the disc (4) turns freely after the setting.
• If not, set the axial play of the disc to 0-1 mm using the hexagon head screw (3).
523
Start-up – Attaching and removing the front attachment
15
Start-up – Attaching and removing the front attachment
WARNING
Risk of injury due to unexpected movement of the front attachment and moving
components!
There is an increased risk of injury when attaching and removing front attachments to or from
the machine.
• Switch off the forage harvester engine, remove the ignition key and take it with you.
• Secure the machine against rolling away with wheel chocks.
• Wait until all machine parts have come to a complete stop.
• Ensure that there is nobody between the forage harvester and front attachment.
• Ensure that nobody reaches into the clearance between the front attachment and machine.
• Before working under or on the raised front attachment, support the front attachment
securely.
• There must be nobody in the swivel range while the front attachment is being swivelled
from the transport into the working position and vice versa.
Only those front attachments may be attached which have been type tested by the
manufacturer and approved for use, see chapter Description of machine, "Technical data of the
machine".
When operating the forage harvester with a front attachment, read and follow the operating
instructions supplied with the front attachment before using it.
Prerequisites for mounting and removing a header:
– The header must be mounted and removed on a level load-bearing surface.
– There must be adequate room to manoeuvre the forage harvester.
– The lifting unit must be unlocked.
524
Start-up – Attaching and removing the front attachment
15.1
Adapting the adapter frame of the front attachment
The locating points of the different front attachments must be adapted to the locating points of
the pendulum frame before they are installed for the first time.
Fig. 475
•
Measure the axle base "a" between holding claw (1) and locking hook (2) on the pendulum
frame of the forage harvester.
Fig. 476
•
Measure the centre distance "a" between the locating bolts (1, 3) on the adapter frame on
the front attachment.
The distance "a" on the pendulum frame and adapter frame must be set to the same dimension:
• Loosen the screw connections (2) on the right/left and shift the pendulum frame holders (3)
to the correct distance.
• Tighten the screw connections (2).
525
Start-up – Attaching and removing the front attachment
15.2
Preparing the pendulum frame for installation of the front attachment
The front attachment can only be attached to the pendulum frame when the holding claws are
open.
The pendulum frame must also be locked so that it cannot swivel sideways when the front
attachment is attached.
Fig. 477
•
•
•
•
•
526
Lower the lifting unit (1) of the machine completely
Align the pendulum frame (1) of the lifting unit horizontally, see page 133.
The locking hooks (2) must be open. If necessary, open them with the locking lever (4).
Press the spring-mounted bar (3) to release the locking lever of the spring-mounted bar (3)
and swivel the lever upwards.
To lock the pendulum frame, slide the bolt (6) into the borehole of the pendulum frame by
means of a light rotating movement and secure it.
Start-up – Attaching and removing the front attachment
15.3

Mounting the front attachment
NOTE
Separate operating instructions for the respective front attachment are supplied, in which all
relevant work steps and safety regulations are described in detail.
The procedure for mounting the front attachment is explained using the example of the
EasyFlow 300.
The principle is identical for all KRONE front attachments.
Fig. 478
•
•
Place the cardan shaft supplied with the front attachment onto the PTO shaft (1) on the front
left of the machine and secure with the slider pin.
Place the cardan shaft onto the support / holder (2) provided.
Fig. 479
•
•
Approach the front attachment with the machine until the pendulum frame is positioned
parallel in front of the adapter frame (1). The holding claws (2) must be below the locating
surface of the locating bolts (3).
Raise the lifting unit until the locking hooks (4) are resting in the pendulum frame holder (5)
on the adapter frame.
527
Start-up – Attaching and removing the front attachment
Fig. 480
•
Shut down and safeguard the machine, see chapter Safety -> Safety routines, "Shutting
down and safeguarding the machine".
WARNING
Risk of injury from unexpected movement of the lifting unit!
When working on the lifting unit or when opening/closing the stop cocks on the lifting cylinders,
the lifting unit and the installed components may move unexpectedly. As a result, people may
be injured.
• To secure the lifting unit from unintentionally lowering, close the stop cocks.
• To reach the stop cocks safely, swivel open the tool box, go under the machine and actuate
the stop cocks.
Fig. 481
• Close two-way stopcock (1) and three-way stopcock (2), see information label.
528
Start-up – Attaching and removing the front attachment
Fig. 482
• Make sure that the adapter frame is correctly hooked into the locating bolts and the locking
hooks on both sides.
• Swivel the locking lever (1) downwards and secure with the spring lock (2).
• Slide the cardan shaft (3) onto the drive journal (4) of the main gearbox until the safety pin
engages.
529
Start-up – Attaching and removing the front attachment
WARNING
Risk of injury from escaping hydraulic oil.
The hydraulic system operates at very high pressure. Escaping hydraulic oil may seriously
injure skin, limbs and eyes.
Before connecting the hydraulic hoses to the forage harvester hydraulics, the hydraulic system
must be depressurised on both sides.
• Before uncoupling the hoses and before performing work on the hydraulic system,
depressurise the hydraulic system.
• Check hydraulic hose lines regularly and replace if there are any signs of damage or
ageing! The replacement lines must comply with the requirements of the device
manufacturer.
WARNING
Risk of injury from unexpected movements of the front attachment!
If the hydraulic hoses are interchanged when connecting them, the front attachment will not
function correctly.
• Identify the hydraulic connections (hose marks).
• Check that the hose connections are fitted correctly.
CAUTION
Damage to the machine due to soiling of the hydraulic system!
If dirt gets into the hydraulic circuit, the machine may be damaged.
• When connecting the quick couplings, ensure that they are clean and dry.
• Check the hydraulic hoses for abrasion and pinch point and replace if required.
530
Start-up – Attaching and removing the front attachment
Fig. 483
•
•
Turn the ignition key to position "II"
Switch the release switch road/field to field mode.
Prior to connecting the hydraulic hoses, depressurise the system on both sides
• Press the keys (1) and (2) (red) simultaneously (the first hydraulic circuit is depressurised).
• Press the keys (3) and (4) (blue) simultaneously (the second hydraulic circuit is
depressurised).
Fig. 484
•
•
Connect the hydraulic hoses (1) to the plug-in connections provided for this purpose on the
machine.
Close any plug-in connections that are not required with dust caps (2).
531
Start-up – Attaching and removing the front attachment
Occupancy of the connections
Fig. 485
The identification of hydraulic connections (I - IV) is also on the hydraulic hoses of the
front attachment.
Pick-up
I
Extend guide wheels
II Retract guide wheels
IV Roller crop guide
Maize header
I
Raise plant divider
II lower plant divider
III Fold out the maize header
IV Folding in the maize header
1
2
Maize header sensor connection
Lighting cable
•
•
Connect the sensor system connector cable to the socket (1).
Connect the lighting cable to the socket (2).
Fig. 486
For EasyCollect only:
• Open the stop cock (1) on the front attachment.
•
532
Unlock the pendulum frame by moving the locking pin (2) from position "I" to position "II".
Start-up – Attaching and removing the front attachment
Fig. 487
•
•
Swivel socket pin (3) of the parking supports (4) by 180° upward on both sides and pull
them out.
Push the parking supports (4) upward and secure them with socket pins (3) in bore hole (5).
Lock socket pin (3) downward by a rotation of 180°.
Fig. 488
• Open two-way stopcock (1) and three-way stopcock (2), refer to information label.
533
Start-up – Attaching and removing the front attachment
15.4
Removing EasyFlow
WARNING
Risk of injury from movement of the front attachment!
If people are in the area of the front attachment when it is being raised or lowered and folded in
or out, there is a risk that these people may be caught and injured by the front attachment or
the lifting unit.
• When the front attachment is moving, ensure that there is nobody in the area of the front
attachment or the lifting unit.

NOTE
Separate operating instructions for the respective front attachment are supplied, in which all
relevant work steps and safety regulations are described in detail.
•
Shut down and safeguard the machine, see chapter Safety -> Safety routines, "Shutting
down and safeguarding the machine".
Fig. 489
• Lock the pendulum frame by moving the locking pin (1) from position "II" to position "I".
Fig. 490
•
Unfold the supporting wheels and lower the Pick-up to the ground.
•
Swivel socket pin (3) of the parking supports (4) by 180° upward on both sides and pull
them out.
Pull out the parking supports (4) and lock them with socket pins (3) in the fifth hole from
below by a rotation of 180°.
•

NOTE
Always insert parking supports into the fifth hole from below.
534
Start-up – Attaching and removing the front attachment
Fig. 491
For EasyCollect only:
• Close the stop cock (1) on the front attachment.
•
•
Turn the ignition key to position "II"
Switch the release switch road/field to field mode.
Fig. 492
Prior to connecting the hydraulic hoses, depressurise the system on both sides
• Press the keys (1) and (2) (red) simultaneously (the first hydraulic circuit is depressurised).
• Press the keys (3) and (4) (blue) simultaneously (the second hydraulic circuit is
depressurised).
535
Start-up – Attaching and removing the front attachment
Fig. 493
•
Detach the hydraulic lines (1) from the hydraulic couplings and seal using dust caps (2).
Fig. 494
•
Opening the locking lever (1): Swivel the locking lever (3) upwards and secure with the
spring lock (2)
Lower the pendulum frame of the machine until the holding claws are below the locating
bolts
Retract the machine.
•
•
15.5
Switching off EasyFlow
3
2
1
2
EFL000045_2
Fig. 495
• Put down pick-up (1) with moved out parking supports (2) on level and solid ground and in a
dry and clean location.

NOTE
Always insert parking supports into the fifth hole from below.
536
Start-up – attaching the rear weight
Start-up – attaching the rear weight
16
WARNING
Risk of injury due to unexpected movements when operating the machine!
If the rear weight and the front-mounted EasyCollect front attachment are not coordinated with
each other, there is a risk that the machine may overturn when braked or when driving on
slopes.
• Do not drive the machine on the road or use it for work unless the rear weight, stipulated for
the combination of machine and fitted front attachment, has been attached.
WARNING
Risk of injury due to suspended load!
There is a danger for persons due to falling load.
• Pay attention to sufficient carrying load of the hoist.
• Do not stay under the suspended load.
• If work has to be performed under the load, securely support the load.

NOTE
The rear weight must only be attached when operating the forage harvester with an EasyCollect
front attachment.

NOTE
When driving with mounted rear weight and without attached header, the machine must only be
moved at walking speed (≤10 km/h).
Fig. 496
The basic weight (2) and the additional plates (1) together form the rear weight (3) that must be
attached to the machine. The additional plates are attached to the basic weight.
The number of basic weights and additional plates required depends on the machine type, the
permissible front axle load and the front attachment type, see the chapter Description of
machine, "Permissible total weights and axle loads".
537
Start-up – attaching the rear weight
Attaching the rear weight
For information on screw fastening material for assembly, refer to parts list in the accessories kit
instructions of rear weight.
Fig. 497
•
Unscrew the four screws (5) and remove the tow coupling (4).
Fig. 498
•
538
Mount the tow coupling (2) using the four screws provided (1) to the coupling carrier (3) of
the rear weight.
Start-up – attaching the rear weight
4
5
BX851030
Fig. 499
•
Using a suitable lifting device, attach the basic weight (1) to the rear bumper of the machine
in such a way that the connecting screws can be mounted.
Use
– the openings for a forklift (3),
– the stop points for a lifting beam (2)
•
Ensure that the lifting device chain hooks are correctly attached to the stop points.
•
Mount the rear weight (1) using the screw fasteners (4) and (5) below the rear of the
machine (for screw fastening material, see the parts list in the operating instructions for the
front attachment).
Fig. 500
•
•
•
Mount the rear weight using the screw fasteners (1) and (3) to the bumper (2) of the
machine (for screw fastening material, see the parts list in the operating instructions for the
front attachment).
Mount the additional weights (5) from below to the basic weight using the nuts (4) and
washers.
Measure the tyre pressure using a testing instrument and if required adjust to the stipulated
values, see page 78.
539
Driving and Transport
17
Driving and Transport
WARNING
Risk of injury when driving on public highways!
Due to the large dimensions of the machine, the unusual driving behaviour and the option of
riding on the outside of the machine while it is being driven, the risk of accidents for machine
personnel and third parties is increased.
• Swivel the front attachment into the transport position.
• Swivel the discharge chute into the transport position.
• When driving on public highways, observe the provisions of the Road Traffic Licensing
Regulations (lighting, identification).
• Ensure that nobody is riding on the machine.
• Always adapt the driving speed of the machine on road and field to the given conditions.
• When driving down hills, on inclines or through obstacles, adjust driving behaviour to the
ambient conditions.
• Note that the rear of the machine swings out when cornering.
540
Driving and Transport
17.1
Starting the engine
WARNING
Risk of poisoning from toxic exhaust gases!
If the forage harvester is operated in closed rooms without adequate ventilation, the pollutant
load increases in the air.
• Never allow the engine to run in closed rooms without an extraction system.
• Provide the room with adequate ventilation.
WARNING
Risk of people being struck and crushed in the vicinity of the machine due to the
movement of the forage harvester!
When the forage harvester moves, people nearby are at risk of being run over and crushed by
the forage harvester.
• Start the engine only from the driver's seat.
• Always ensure that there is nobody in the danger zone of the machine.
• Sound the horn.
WARNING
Risk of injury from engine noise while working!
If the driver is not protected from the engine noise while working, his hearing will be
permanently damaged.
• Ensure that the doors and windows of the cab are closed while working.
The following conditions must be met to start the engine:
– The main battery switch is closed.
– The parking brake is applied.
– The release switch traction drive is switched off.
541
Driving and Transport
Starting the engine
Fig. 501
•
Turn the ignition key (1) to position III, the engine starts. Do not actuate the starter too
briefly, but for no more than 20 seconds.
Release the ignition key (1) immediately after the engine catches. The ignition key jumps
back automatically to position II.
After the engine starts, the battery charging lamp (2) as well as the coolant temperature (3) and
engine oil pressure (4) control lamps light up briefly.
• Check whether the control lamps go out.
• If not, switch off the engine immediately and rectify the disturbance or call KRONE customer
service.
If the engine does not start within 20 seconds:
• Turn the ignition key to the "STOP" position.
• After a 1 minute delay repeat the starting process.
If the engine still does not start:
• Turn the ignition key to the "STOP" position.
• Eliminate the cause.
For additional information, refer to the other applicable operating and service
instructions of the engine manufacturer.
542
Driving and Transport
17.1.1
Observing indicator lamps
Fig. 502
As long as the diesel engine is running, the warning lights on the operation console must
be observed.
Charging warning light (1)
The charging warning light lights up permanently if the ignition key is turned to ignition stages I
or II and remains there.
The charging warning light lights up briefly when the ignition key is turned to ignition stages I
and II to start the engine.
After the diesel engine has been started up, the charging warning light must go out.
If the charging warning light does not light up permanently after the diesel engine has been
started, the output voltage of the alternator is not sufficient to charge the batteries.
Searching for the cause:
• Check the cables and connections on the alternator and on the batteries.
• Check the V-belt on the alternator.
Warning light coolant temperature (2)
CAUTION
Diesel engine will be damaged by excessively high coolant temperature!
If the "Coolant temperature" indicator lamp lights up, cooling of the engine is no longer ensured
and the engine may be damaged.
• Switch off the engine immediately.
• Rectify the fault.
•
•
•
•
Check the coolant level.
Check condition and fastening of coolant hoses and air intake hoses.
Check the cooling system for leaks.
Check the cooler for dirt and clean it, if necessary.
543
Driving and Transport
Warning light for engine oil pressure (3)
CAUTION
Diesel engine will be damaged by excessively low engine oil pressure!
If the "Engine oil pressure" indicator lamp lights up, lubrication of the diesel engine is no longer
ensured and the engine may be damaged.
• Switch off the engine immediately.
• Rectify the fault.
•
•
•
•
544
Check the engine oil level.
Check engine for leaks and damage.
Read the engine oil pressure in the diagnostics mask.
Contact the dealer or KRONE customer service.
Driving and Transport
17.2
Behaviour after the engine has stalled
CAUTION
Engine will be damaged by the heat accumulation after the engine has stalled!
If a warm engine stalls, the heat accumulation, caused by the lack of cooling, may damage the
engine.
• If a warm engine stalls, restart the engine immediately.
• Allow the engine to run at idling speed for at least 2 minutes before finally turning it off.
WARNING
Risk of injury due to exploding battery gas!
The improper connection of external voltage sources using charging or jumper cables can
cause damage to the electrical system and can lead to an explosion. Short circuiting or
overloading the battery can cause the formation of highly explosive electrolytic gas. People can
be seriously injured or killed as a result.
• To jump start the machine, pay particular attention to the correct voltage and polarity:
connect the positive pole to the positive pole and the negative pole to the negative pole.
Reversing the polarity will create a dangerous short circuit.
• When connecting a battery, always connect the negative pole last
• When disconnecting a battery, disconnect the negative pole first
• Avoid sparking, naked flames and hot or glowing objects in the vicinity of the batteries.
• Switch off charging devices when connecting to or disconnecting from a battery.
545
Driving and Transport
Fig. 503
The machine is equipped with 2 batteries (1) of 12 V (135 Ah) each, which are connected in
series (24 V) for starting.
A switching relay (2) is used to switch.

17.3
NOTICE
The operating voltage is only 12 V.
When bridging, ensure that only a voltage of 12 V is connected to each battery!
Starting with a back-up battery
To jump start the machine, connect a 12 V jump start voltage source in parallel to an installed
battery, ensuring that the polarity is correct. While connecting and disconnecting the jump start
voltage source, the battery charger must be set to “OFF”.
Connecting jump start voltage source
Fig. 504
• Remove the terminal protection caps from the positive terminals on both batteries.
• Connect the positive terminals of the battery and jump start voltage source in succession.
• Connect the negative terminals of the battery and jump start voltage source in succession.
Disconnecting jump start voltage source
• Disconnect the negative terminals of the battery and jump start voltage source in
succession.
• Disconnect the positive terminals of the battery and jump start voltage source in succession.
• Mount the terminal protection caps on the positive terminals on both batteries.
546
Driving and Transport
17.4
Starting up the machine
WARNING
Danger to life due to moving forage harvester!
People are at risk from the large moving forage harvester, unusual driving behaviour and the
option of riding on the outside of the machine while it is being driven.
• Ensure that there is no second person riding on the outside of the forage harvester while it
is being driven.
• Always adapt the driving speed of the machine on road and field to the given conditions.
• When driving down hills, on inclines or through obstacles, adjust driving behaviour to the
ambient conditions.
• Note that the machine swings out when cornering.
17.4.1
General on Driving
Fig. 505
Due to the size and to some extent the unusual driving behaviour of the machine, observe the
following when driving:
– Handling the machine requires a certain amount of practice because of the rear steering.
– Driving behaviour on the road and in the field differs.
– Driving behaviour is influenced by the high centre of gravity of the machine, the attached
front attachment and the terrain and ground conditions.
• If an error message is indicated on the terminal, immediately stop and eliminate the error. If
this is not possible, inform KRONE customer service or a KRONE dealer.
• Adapt driving behaviour to the particular terrain and ground conditions.
• Extreme caution is required when working and turning on slopes.
Emergency steering forces
The steering also operates when the engine has stopped. However, considerably more force
must be applied.
547
Driving and Transport
17.4.2
Switching on road travel mode
Prerequisite for road travel of the machine:
– The engine has been started.
– The lifting unit is in transport position
– The release switch "road/field" is switched to road travel.
– The release switch "traction drive" is switched on.
17.4.3
Driving forwards
Fig. 506
Starting forwards from standstill
The parking brake is automatically released when the machine moves off.
• Press and hold the activation key for traction drive (2).
• Move the multi-function lever (1) forwards, the machine starts to move forwards and
accelerates.
• If you release the multi-function lever (1), it returns automatically to the central position (0);
the speed remains constant.
• If you move the multi-function lever (1) backwards while driving, the machine decelerates
and is braked until it comes to a standstill.
548
Driving and Transport
17.4.4
Setting the acceleration behaviour
Fig. 507
Four different acceleration stages can be selected, even while driving, with the acceleration
stage switch (2) attached to the multi-function lever (1).
If the multi-function lever (1) is actuated constantly in one direction and at a constant engine
speed, the driving speed will increase slowest in acceleration stage I and fastest in acceleration
stage IV.
• Switch to the required acceleration stage using the acceleration stage switch (2).
The display shows the selected acceleration stage (3) working screen.
549
Driving and Transport
17.5
Reversing
Fig. 508
Starting in reverse from standstill

NOTE
An acoustic warning signal sounds when reversing.
The parking brake is automatically released when the machine moves off.
• Press and hold the activation key for traction drive (2).
• Move the multi-function lever (1) backwards; the machine starts to move in reverse and
accelerates.
• If you release the multi-function lever (1), it returns automatically to the central position (0);
the speed remains constant.
• If you move the multi-function lever (1) forwards while driving, the machine decelerates and
is braked until it comes to a standstill.
550
Driving and Transport
17.6
Cruise control
The cruise control can be activated only when travelling forwards. When cruise control is
activated, the machine is accelerated or decelerated with the set acceleration stage to the
speed saved for operation with the cruise control.
17.6.1
Saving speed for operation with cruise control
The speed is stored for the mode in which the machine is operating. A speed can be stored for
road travel and field mode.
Fig. 509
•
•
Accelerate the machine to the required speed.
While driving, press and hold down the activation button for the travelling gear (2), move the
multi-function lever (1) to the right and back to the central position.
The current driving speed is saved.
The display shows the stored speed (3) in the working screen.
551
Driving and Transport
17.6.2
Activating cruise control
Fig. 510
• While driving, push the multi-function lever (1) to the right without pressing the activation
key. The saved speed is approached. The display shows the icon
set speed.
17.6.3
with the value of the
Deactivating cruise control
Cruise control is deactivated by overriding the multi-function lever, actuating the operating brake
or switching off the travelling gear.
If the operating mode ("road travel" / "field mode") is changed, the display switches to the value
which is saved for the corresponding operating mode (road or field speed).
552
Driving and Transport
17.7
Stopping
The machine can be stopped either with the multi-function lever or with the foot brake.
17.7.1
Stopping with the multi-function lever
Fig. 511
Stopping from forward travel using the multi-function lever:
To decelerate the machine while driving forwards using the multi-function lever:
• Pull the multi-function lever (1) backwards while driving.
The machine decelerates until it stops.
Fig. 512
Stopping from reverse travel using the multi-function lever:
To decelerate the machine while reversing using the multi-function lever:
• Push the multi-function lever (1) forwards while driving.
The machine decelerates until it stops.
553
Driving and Transport
Quickly braking the machine using the multi-function lever
Fig. 513
• Move the multi-function lever (1) to the left while driving. The machine decelerates until it
comes to a standstill.
17.7.2
Stopping with the foot brake
WARNING
Risk of injury due to defective operating brake!
If the operating brake has a restricted function, the machine cannot be brought to a standstill in
time and people and material assets are at risk.
After panic braking:
• Shut down and safeguard the machine, see chapter Safety, "Shutting down and
safeguarding the machine".
• Have the foot brake function checked by a technician.
Fig. 514
Brake the machine slightly:
• Depress the foot brake slightly.
When the brake pedal is released, the machine continues moving at the reduced driving speed.
Brake the machine strongly (braking to avoid accident):
• Depress the foot brake forcefully.
The machine is stopped immediately.
554
Driving and Transport
17.8
Applying the parking brake
WARNING
Risk of injury due to the unsecured machine rolling away!
If the unsecured machine starts moving, there is a risk of people being struck or run over.
• After pressing the "Parking brake" key or when exiting the machine, check the status of the
parking brake in the display.

NOTE
If the "Parking brake" key is pressed while driving, the travelling gear is braked and, when the
machine has stopped, the parking brake is applied.
The parking brake is automatically released or applied under certain operating conditions and
can be manually actuated by pressing the "Parking brake" key, see page 130.
17.9
Switching off the engine
CAUTION
Engine will be damaged by heat accumulation!
If the engine is immediately switch off after operation under load, the heat accumulation,
caused by the lack of cooling, may damage the engine.
• Leave the engine running for three minutes at a low idling speed before switching off the
engine.
Fig. 515
•
•
Brake the machine to a standstill.
Actuate the key (2) to lower the front attachment fully to the ground.
•
•
Turn the ignition key (1) anti-clockwise to the
Switch off all release switches.
position.
555
Driving and Transport
17.10
Switching off the machine
WARNING
Risk of injury due to the unsecured machine rolling away!
If the machine is not secured against rolling away when it has been switched off, there is a risk
of people being injured by the machine rolling away in an uncontrolled manner.
• Park the machine safely and secure it against rolling away.
Fig. 516
To park the machine safely and secure it against rolling away:
• Stop the machine on a level, solid surface.
• Actuate the key (2) to lower the front attachment fully to the ground.
• Use the multi-function lever to move the spout into the parking position.
• To cool down the engine, leave the engine running for three minutes at a low idling speed.
• Turn the ignition key (1) anti-clockwise to the
position, remove it and take it with you.
• Fit both wheel chocks.
• Switch off all release switches.
The parking brake is automatically applied if the machine is exited.
556
Driving and Transport
17.11
Preparations for road travel
Prepare the machine for road travel:
• When using an approved front attachment, swivel the lifting unit with the front attachment
into the transport position, see chapter Driving and transportation, "Swivelling front
attachment into transport position".
• If provision is made for a front attachment for maize mode: mount the guard and lighting on
the front attachment, see the operating instructions on the front attachment.
• Ensure that the discharge chute is in the transport position, see chapter Driving and
transportation, "Swivelling discharge chute into transport position".
• Ensure that the wheel chocks are removed from the wheels and attached to the
supports/holders on the machine.
• Ensure that the area around the machine can be seen; if required adjust the inner, outer
and anti-collision mirrors.
• Ensure that there are no warning messages on the display.
• Set the release switch road/field to the "road travel" setting.
17.11.1
Transport position
Fig. 517
For road travel, the discharge chute (1) and the attached front attachment (2) must be in
transport position.
• Move the front attachment (2) into the transport position, see the operating instructions for
the front attachment.
• Move the discharge chute (1) into the transport position using the multi-function lever, see
chapter Driving and transportation, "Swivelling discharge chute into transport position".
•
In road traffic without a front attachment, set the lifting unit to the lower edge of the intake –
approx. 400 mm ±100 mm
557
Driving and Transport
17.11.2
Folding/raising the front attachment into the transport position
WARNING
Risk of injury from movement of the front attachment!
If people are in the area of the front attachment when it is being raised or lowered and folded in
or out, there is a risk that these people may be caught and injured by the front attachment or
the lifting unit.
• When the front attachment is moving, ensure that there is nobody in the area of the front
attachment or the lifting unit.
Prerequisites:
– The driver's seat is occupied.
– The diesel engine has been started.
– The release switch road/field is in the "field mode" setting.
– There is nobody in the area of the front attachment.
– The plant divider is fully raised (3-part)/lowered (2-part).
– The maize header is folded in (3-part)/folded on (2-part)
– The guide wheels of the EasyFlow are folded in.
– The holding-down clamp of the EasyFlow is all the way down.
– The guard cloths right/left are mounted.

NOTE
EasyCollect 1053 and XDisc may only be transported with transportation trailers.
During folding/raising, the lifting unit must be in a defined position. There must be sufficient
ground clearance and distance to the cabin roof. This position is approached automatically as
soon as the keys for folding/raising are pressed.
EasyFlow pick-up
For the EasyFlow pick-up, the lifting unit height must be min. 40% and max. 70%.
2
1
BX480274
BX480305
Fig. 518
To raise the EasyFlow pick-up (3):
• Press and hold down the "Manually raising lifting unit" key (1) on the multi-function lever.
The pick-up (3) is raised as long as the key is pressed.
•
558
For road travel, set the pick-up to the lower edge of the front attachment, approx. 450 mm
and fold in the supporting wheels.
Driving and Transport
EasyCollect
Fig. 519
To ensure that the maize header can be folded in, the plant divider must be swivelled up and
the pendulum frame horizontally aligned:
• To move the plant divider (1) to the transport position, hold down the key "Swivel up plant
divider" (2) on the membrane keypad until the plant divider is swivelled up.
Folding in the maize header
During folding, the lifting unit must have sufficient ground clearance and must be a sufficient
distance from the cabin roof. This position is approached automatically as soon as the key for
folding in is pressed.
• Hold down the key "Fold in maize header" (3) on the membrane keypad until the side parts
(4, 5) are fully folded in.
559
Driving and Transport
2
1
BX480274
Fig. 520
To raise the front attachment (3):
• Press and hold down the "Manually raising lifting unit" key (1) on the multi-function lever.
The front attachment (3) is raised as long as the key is pressed.
Front-attachment-dependent lifting height for folded in maize header:
• For EC 600-3, EC 750-3, EC 900-3, EC 603, EC 753 and EC 903, set the lower edge of the
front safety device on the front attachment to a height of 950 mm above the ground.
• For EC 600-2 and EC 6000, set the lower edge of the side skids on the front attachment to
a height of 350 mm above the ground.
• For EC 750-2 and EC 7500, set the lower edge of the side skids on the front attachment to
a height of 200 mm above the ground.
The attachment heights for the front attachments are identical for 2-axle and 3-axle
machines, irrespective of their permissible axle loads.
During road travel, active vibration damping operates continuously which is also active if the
operator button has not been pressed after the diesel engine has been switched on.
560
Driving and Transport
17.11.3
Swivelling the discharge chute into transport position
WARNING
Crush hazard due to the moving discharge chute!
People, who are near the drive sprocket of the discharge chute when the discharge chute is
being swivelled, may be injured.
• When swivelling the discharge chute, ensure that there is nobody near the drive sprocket.

NOTE
The spout extension (optional) must be folded in for road travel according to the highway code.
Prerequisites:
– The driver's seat is occupied.
– The diesel engine has been started.
– The release switch road/field is in the "field mode" setting.
– The main coupling is off.
Fig. 521
• To swivel the spout to the transport position, press the key "Spout in transport position" (1).
The discharge chute (2) moves automatically into the transport position.
•
•
Visually check the exact parking position of the spout (2) on the spout holder (3).
If the spout (2) does not rest centrally on the spout holder (3), raise the spout slightly and
move it exactly into position using the keys on the multi-function lever.
561
Driving and Transport
17.12

Behaviour when driving downhill
NOTE
The permissible maximum speed of 40 km/h must also be observed when driving downhill!
On a steep incline, the driver has the option of reducing the driving speed using the multifunction lever or by actuating the service brake.
In this case, the multi-function lever should be used first, as it triggers purely hydrostatic
braking.
The service brake initially uses hydrostatic braking but supplements this with mechanical
braking.
If braking is effected using the brake pedal only, there is a risk of overheating.
562
Driving and Transport
17.13
Towing
WARNING
Impact and crush hazard due to an out-of-control machine!
If the machine is towed over prolonged distances, there is a risk that the driver will lose control
of the machine due to the increased steering and braking forces.
• Tow the machine out of the danger zone only and never tow over prolonged distances.
• Note that steering and braking forces are increased when the diesel engine is stationary.
CAUTION
Damage to the machine due to incorrect operation!
If the machine is not towed correctly, power transmission components or the diesel engine may
be damaged.
• Do not tow the machine from the danger zone unless absolutely essential.
• Tow the machine by pushing it with the attached tow bar only.
• Tow the machine at maximum 8 km/h and for not longer than 45 min.
Notes on towing
• Move the lifting unit, front attachment and spout into the transport position.
• The machine is shut down and secured, see page 38.
• Pull out the fuses F90 and F91 on the relay circuit board console, which sets the hydraulic
motors for the traction drive in neutral position (no displacement).
• Switch the ignition to ignition stage II so that the flashing lights (hazard lights) and brake
lamps will work.
• Manually release the parking brake, see page 564.
• Switch the release switch "road/field" into the road travel position.
Increased steering and braking forces must be applied with the engine switched off.
Fig. 522
• Mount the tow bar exclusively on the tow coupling (1).
• The machine may only be pushed.
• The maximum towing speed is 8 km/h.
• The maximum towing duration is 45 minutes.
563
Driving and Transport
17.13.1
Releasing the holding brake manually
Securing the machine against rolling away:
• Shut down and safeguard the machine, see chapter Safety, "Shutting down and
safeguarding the machine".
• Place the wheel chocks on the right and left, in front of or behind (depending on slope) the
wheels of the front axle.
Preparation
Fig. 523
• The parts set (1) consists of the pump lever and the connecting hose.
• The parts are stored in the lower right compartment of the tool box.
Release parking brake
Fig. 524
• Connect the Minimess hose from the tool box to the Minimess connection (1).
• Open the lever (3).
• Close the stop cock (4) underneath the valve block.
• Operate the hand pump (2) until hydraulic oil escapes from the Minimess hose free of
bubbles.
• Connect the Minimess hose to the Minimess coupling (5).
• Operate the hand pump (2) until the parking brake is fully released.
After towing
• To restore the function of the brake, open the stop cock (4) underneath the valve block.
• Drain the system pressure by opening the drain valve on the hand pump.
• Unscrew the connecting hose from the release connection (4) (right-hand machine side).
• Place a protective cap on the screw coupling.
• Replace the parts set (hand lever and connecting hose) in the support/holder in the tool
box.
564
Driving and Transport
17.14
Preparing the machine for transport
WARNING
Danger to life due to movements of the forage harvester!
If the forage harvester is not properly lashed for transportation on a low loader, it may start
moving or even fall off the low loader and endanger people.
• Before transportation on a low loader, secure the forage harvester at the designated
lashing points using suitable lashing equipment.
Pre-condition
–
The spout is in parking position.
Fig. 525
To connect lashing equipment, appropriate lashing points are available on the axles and
bumper of the machine.
Item
Explanation
1
Front axle left
2
Front axle right
3
rear axle, left side
4
Rear axle right
5
Bumper left
6
Bumper right
565
Operation
18
Operation
18.1
Raising and lowering the front attachment
WARNING
Risk of injury from movement of the front attachment!
If people are in the area of the front attachment when it is being raised or lowered and folded in
or out, there is a risk that these people may be caught and injured by the front attachment or
the lifting unit.
• When the front attachment is moving, ensure that there is nobody in the area of the front
attachment or the lifting unit.
Prerequisites:
– The driver's seat is occupied.
– The diesel engine has been started.
– The main mode switch is in the "field mode" position.
– There is adequate space for folding in/out.
2
1
BX480274
BX480305
Fig. 526
To raise the front attachment (3):
• Press and hold down the "Manually raising lifting unit" key (1) on the multi-function lever.
The front attachment (3) is raised as long as the key is pressed.
When the pick-up is attached, the maximum height which can be reached is the upper position
of the lifting unit.
When the front attachment is folded in, the lifting height is limited to 60% of the maximum lifting
height.
To lower the front attachment (3):
• Press and hold down the "Manually lowering lifting unit" key (2) on the multi-function lever.
The front attachment (3) is lowered as long as the key is pressed.
Press the key on the multi-function lever to lower the front attachment slowly. Pressing harder
will cause the front attachment to lower more quickly.
566
Operation
18.2
Aligning the pendulum frame
Fig. 527
•
•
•
•
•
Lower the lifting unit (1) of the machine completely
Align the pendulum frame (1) of the lifting unit horizontally.
The locking hooks (2) must be open. If necessary, open them with the locking lever (4).
To release the lock on the locking lever (3), press the spring lock (3).
Swivel the locking lever (3) upwards.
The pendulum frame (1) must be locked and the locking pin (6) must be in position I
(locked).
567
Operation
18.3
Operating the machine with a trailer
WARNING
Risk of injury due to unauthorised trailer and incorrect connection!
The risk of accidents is increased by unauthorised trailers and incorrect connection.
• Only connect trailer which has its own brake.
• Connect trailer to the trailer coupling only.
Observe the specifications in the operating instructions for the machine and trailer.
• When connecting and disconnecting a trailer, proceed particularly carefully and prudently.
Fig. 528
Item
Designation
1
12 volt socket for lighting
2
Auxiliary hydraulics (optional)
3
Trailer coupling
4
Compressed air connections for two-line brake (optional)
The machine is equipped as standard with a tow coupling (3).
Only trailers which have their own brake system may be used.
• In road traffic, connect the lighting of the trailer to the power socket (1) and check that it
functions.
568
Operation
18.3.1
Connecting trailer
WARNING
Risk of injury due to non-roadworthy machine/trailer unit!
If the support, axle and trailer loads are exceeded during operation, the machine/trailer unit is
no longer roadworthy.
• When operating with the trailer, ensure that the permitted support, axle and trailer loads are
not exceeded.
WARNING
Risk of injury due to unexpected movements of machine and trailer!
If there are people between the machine and trailer during the coupling process and if the
uncoupled trailer moves in an uncontrolled manner, there is a risk of injury.
• When coupling, ensure that there is nobody between the machine and trailer.
• Secure the trailer against rolling away.
WARNING
Risk of injury due to insecurely locked trailer!
If the bolt (2) is not completely engaged, the trailer coupling is not locked and the trailer may
become detached from the trailer coupling and endanger people.
• After making the connection, ensure that the bolt (2) is completely engaged.
Fig. 529
To connect the trailer:
• Secure the trailer against rolling away.
• Adjust the towing ring of the trailer to the height of the trailer coupling.
• To open the trailer coupling, press the hand lever (1) upwards as far as the locking point.
• Clean the trailer coupling.
• Slowly reverse the machine until the towing ring engages in the trailer coupling.
• Check whether the control pin (3) locks flush with the surface of the housing.
• Connect the power supply plugs and check the lighting system of the trailer.
If the trailer has a supporting wheel:
• Raise the supporting wheel.
569
Operation
WARNING
Risk of injury due to incorrectly braked trailer!
Worn, damaged or incorrectly connected compressed air couplings will degrade the braking
performance of the trailer. This increase the braking distance of the machinery and puts people
at risk.
• Make certain the couplings are working properly and there are no leaks.
• Replace defective rubber seals immediately.
• Make certain all compressed air connections are properly seated.
• Replace the coupling heads depending on frequency of coupling, but at least once a year.
Fig. 530
•
•
570
Connect the compressed air hoses to the connections (1) if a compressed air connection is
available (optional).
Connect the hoses to the auxiliary hydraulics (optional).
Operation
18.3.2
Connecting trailer for Italy
WARNING
Risk of injury due to non-roadworthy machine/trailer unit!
If the support, axle and trailer loads are exceeded during operation, the machine/trailer unit is
no longer roadworthy.
• When operating with the trailer, ensure that the permitted support, axle and trailer loads are
not exceeded.
WARNING
Risk of injury due to unexpected movements of machine and trailer!
If there are people between the machine and trailer during the coupling process and if the
uncoupled trailer moves in an uncontrolled manner, there is a risk of injury.
• When coupling, ensure that there is nobody between the machine and trailer.
• Secure the trailer against rolling away.
WARNING
Risk of injury due to insecurely connected trailer!
If the bolt (2) is not secured with the split pin, it may become detached from the trailer coupling
and endanger people.
• After making the connection, ensure that the bolt (2) and the split pin (1) are secure.
Fig. 531
To connect the trailer:
• Secure the trailer against rolling away.
• Adjust the towing ring of the trailer to the height of the trailer coupling.
• Pull the split pin (1) out of the bolt (2) and remove the pin with the handle (3) upwards out of
the trailer coupling.
• Clean the trailer coupling.
• Slowly reverse the machine until the towing ring is located in the trailer coupling.
• Connect the towing ring and the trailer coupling to the bolt (2) and secure with the split pin
(1).
• Connect the power supply plugs and check the lighting system.
If the trailer has a supporting wheel:
• Raise the supporting wheel.
571
Operation
WARNING
Risk of injury due to incorrectly braked trailer!
Worn, damaged or incorrectly connected compressed air couplings will degrade the braking
performance of the trailer. This increase the braking distance of the machinery and puts people
at risk.
• Make certain the couplings are working properly and there are no leaks.
• Replace defective rubber seals immediately.
• Make certain all compressed air connections are properly seated.
• Replace the coupling heads depending on frequency of coupling, but at least once a year.
•
•
572
Connect the compressed air hoses if a compressed air connection is available (optional).
Connect the hoses to the auxiliary hydraulics (optional).
Operation
18.3.3
Disconnecting trailer
WARNING
Risk of injury due to unexpected movements of machine and trailer!
If there are people between the machine and trailer during the coupling process and if the
uncoupled trailer moves in an uncontrolled manner, there is a risk of injury.
• When coupling, ensure that there is nobody between the machine and trailer.
• Secure the trailer against rolling away.
WARNING
Risk of injury to limbs due to plummeting locking pin!
If the trigger lever (2) is actuated by hand, the locking pin will plummet abruptly and endanger
the limbs of the operator.
• Do not lock the trailer coupling by hand by actuating the trigger lever (2).
Fig. 532
•
•
•
•
Secure the trailer against rolling away.
Disconnect the compressed air hoses from the connections (1) if a compressed air
connection is available (optional).
Disconnect the hoses from for the auxiliary hydraulics (optional).
Remove the power supply plugs.
573
Operation
Fig. 533
If the trailer has a supporting wheel:
• Screw down the supporting wheel.
To disconnect the trailer:
• To open the trailer coupling, press the hand lever (1) upwards as far as the locking point.
• Slowly move the machine forwards until the towing ring is removed from the trailer coupling.
To protect the aperture of the locking pin from soiling:
• Lock the trailer coupling by pressing the hand lever (1) downwards.
574
Operation
18.3.4
Disconnecting trailer for Italy
WARNING
Risk of injury due to unexpected movements of machine and trailer!
If there are people between the machine and trailer during the coupling process and if the
uncoupled trailer moves in an uncontrolled manner, there is a risk of injury.
• When coupling, ensure that there is nobody between the machine and trailer.
• Secure the trailer against rolling away.
Fig. 534
• Secure the trailer against rolling away.
• Remove the power supply plugs.
• Disconnect the compressed air hoses if a compressed air connection is available (optional).
• Disconnect the hoses from for the auxiliary hydraulics (optional).
If the trailer has a supporting wheel:
• Screw down the supporting wheel.
To disconnect the trailer:
• Pull the split pin (1) out of the bolt (2) and remove the pin with the handle (3) upwards out of
the trailer coupling.
• Slowly move the machine forwards until the towing ring is removed from the trailer coupling.
• Insert the bolt (2) into the trailer coupling and secure with the split pin (1).
575
Operation
18.4
Additional axle (optional)
The additional axle must be mounted to ensure that the permissible axle load is not exceeded,
see page 515.
18.4.1
Maize operating mode
Road mode
If the machine is stopped while driving forwards or restarted, the additional axle remains
lowered. If the machine is reversed while driving on the road, the additional axle is raised
Field mode
The machine drives forwards or reverses in field mode, the additional axle is raised and remains
raised.
18.4.2
Grass mode
In "Grass" operating mode, control of the additional axle is not possible.
Diagnostics and maintenance of the additional axle is not possible. The automatic mode is also
deactivated.
In the "Grass" operating mode, the additional axle must be manually moved to the upper end
position, see page 290.
18.4.3
XDisc mode
In "XDisc" mode, control of the additional axle is not possible.
Diagnostics and maintenance of the additional axle is not possible. The automatic mode is also
deactivated.
In the "XDisc" operating mode, the additional axle must be manually moved to the upper end
position, see page 290.
576
Operation
18.4.4
Manual check of additional axle basic function
The manual check of the additional axle basic function, see chapter 4 "Menu 3-11 "Maintenance
additional axle" (optional)", see page 290.
18.4.5
Function test of additional axle automatic functions
Check automatic function "Lift additional axle":
Switching-on conditions:
– Operating mode = "Maize" (EasyCollect)
– Diesel engine = idling speed.
– Release switch "Road/field" = road mode.
– Release switch "traction drive" = ON
•
•
•
•
•
•
Manually lower the additional axle all the way.
Accelerate the machine slowly in the reverse direction. The additional axle must lift fully and
automatically.
Decelerate the machine to a standstill.
Switch the release switch "road/field " to field mode.
Manually lower the additional axle all the way.
Slowly accelerate the machine in the forward direction. The additional axle must lift fully and
automatically.
Check automatic function "Lower additional axle":
Switching-on conditions:
– Operating mode = "Maize" (EasyCollect)
– Release switch "Road/field" = road mode.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Read off the value of the parameter 25498 "Lower additional axle speed" on the terminal.
Manually lift the additional axle all the way.
On the terminal select menu 4-1-6 "Sensor test additional axle".
Switch on the release switch "traction drive".
Accelerate the machine in the forward direction to a speed that is greater than the read
off setting value (parameter 25498).
The additional axle must lower automatically and an error message may not appear in the
terminal.
Decelerate the machine to a standstill.
If an error occurs during the check, the error message appears in the display with an error code.
For the list of error messages, error descriptions, possible error reasons and error
correction, refer to the appendix – Error messages, see page 765.
577
Operation
18.5
Field mode
WARNING
Risk of injury due to movement of the machine or machine parts!
If people remain in or enter the danger zone of the machine during operation, there is an
increased risk of injury.
• Do not start the machine until all safety devices have been fitted and are in sound
condition.
• Ensure that there is nobody in the danger zone of the machine (safety distance: 3 m at the
side, 5 m behind the machine).
If people enter the danger zone:
• Stop the machine immediately.
• Switch off the PTO shaft.
• Instruct persons to leave the danger zone.
• Do not restart the machine until there is nobody in the danger zone.

NOTE
Special instructions on the use of the particular front attachment fitted can be found in the
operating instructions for the front attachment.
Additional settings such as operating mode, working width, intake/front attachment, silage
fodder addition, lifting unit, corn conditioner and customer data, see page 170.
Information about drive mode, see page 540.
578
Operation
18.5.1
Field mode on slopes
WARNING
Risk of injury due to the machine overturning!
When operating on a slope, the machine may overturn and endanger the driver and other
people.
• Do not work and drive on a slope unless the ground of the slope is flat and the adhesion of
the tyres to the ground is ensured.
• Only drive downhill at low speed and turn in a large arc.
• Do not use the machine when the inclination angle of the slope is greater than the
permitted inclination angle (see chapter Machine Description “Technical Data of the
Machine”).
• When driving up or down, always direct the header uphill.
• When driving up or down, keep the header as close to the ground as possible.
579
Operation
18.5.2

Fast change of direction of travel (fast reversing)
NOTE
Fast reversing is possible only in the field mode.
Fig. 535
During fast reversing, the machine decelerates to a standstill and accelerates in the opposite
direction to 70% of the previous driving speed.
To activate fast reversing:
• While driving, press and hold down the activation button for the travelling gear (2), move the
multi-function lever (1) to the left and back to the central position.
580
Operation
18.5.3
Emergency switching of the chopping drum
The chopping drum can only be connected in field mode if the software has detected an intake
unit at the machine.
The release takes place if:
• a metal sensor was detected on the CAN bus or
• a pressure was detected at the lifting unit or
• at least one sensor on the front attachment was detected free of errors.
If these conditions are not fulfilled, emergency switching of the main coupling is possible in
maintenance mode.
WARNING
Risk of injury from moving components of intake or front attachment!
During emergency switching of the chopping drum, no person is permitted in the vicinity of the
chopping drum and other components for crop flow.
• Ensure that there is nobody in the area of the front attachment, intake, chopping drum and
other components for crop flow.
Executing emergency switching:
• Switch on the "maintenance" release switch.
Fig. 536
• Press and hold the key (3) "Switch on main coupling" on the membrane keypad until
message "575 drum prepared for connection" appears in the display.
• Then release the key (3).
• Then press the key (3) for min. 2 seconds within the next 5 seconds, and the chopping
drum rotates.
The coastdown alarm is triggered during the entire emergency switching process.
581
Operation
18.5.4
Operating intake/front attachment
WARNING
Risk of injury from moving components of intake or front attachment!
When switching on, during operation and when reversing the intake and front attachment,
components move and endanger people.
• Ensure that there is nobody in the area of the front attachment, intake, cutting drum and
other components for crop flow.
Setting:
– The setpoint speed of the front attachment, see page 171.
– The chop length, see page 173.
Switching on intake/front attachment
Prerequisites:
– The driver's seat is occupied.
– The engine has been started.
– The release switch road/field is in the "field mode" setting.
– The release switch "maintenance" is switched off.
– The release switch "intake/header" is switched on.
– The main coupling is switched on.
– The quick-stop switch console is not actuated
– The quick-stop switch manual operation is not actuated
– The actuator test in menu 4-1-1 must not be active.
582
Operation

NOTE
When the intake and front attachment are switched on for the first time, the feed drive rollers
and the front attachment must be reversed by the driver to remove any soiling. Only then can
the intake and front attachment be switched on.
2
1
BX850961
Fig. 537
To switch on the intake/front attachment:
• Press the "Reverse intake/front attachment" key (2) on the multi-function lever.
Reverse the front attachment and the feed drive rollers.
• Press the "Intake/front attachment on/off" key (1) on the multi-function lever.
The front attachment and the feed drive rollers are switched on.
Switching off intake/front attachment:
• Press the "Intake/front attachment on/off" key (1) on the multi-function lever.
The front attachment and the feed drive rollers are switched off.
583
Operation
Reverse the intake/front attachment with chopping drum switched on
To remove blockages and faults in the crop flow, which occur during operation, the intake and
the front attachment can be reversed.
WARNING
Risk of injury from moving components of intake or front attachment!
When switching on, during operation and when reversing the intake and front attachment,
components move and endanger people.
• Ensure that there is nobody in the area of the front attachment, intake, cutting drum and
other components for crop flow.
2
1
BX850961
Fig. 538
If a crop blockage is detected:
• Stop the machine and reverse a short distance.
• Raise the front attachment slightly.
To reverse the intake/front attachment from the driver's seat:
• Press and hold down the "Reverse intake/front attachment" key (2) on the multi-function
lever.
The front attachment and the feed drive rollers will reverse for as long as the "Reverse
intake/front attachment" key (2) is pressed.
The "Reverse intake/front attachment" key (2) on the multi-function lever can be pressed even
when the intake/front attachment is switched on. Then the intake/front attachment must be
switched on again.
584
Operation
Reverse the intake/front attachment with chopping drum switched off
For larger blockages, the intake/front attachment must be reversed with the chopping drum
switched off. This prevents the drives from overloading. The main coupling can only be
connected after the entire crop flow has been checked and any blockages have been cleared.
Prerequisites:
– The driver's seat is occupied.
– The engine has been started.
– The release switch road/field is in the "field mode" setting.
– The release switch "maintenance" is switched off.
– The release switch "intake/header" is switched on.
– The main coupling is switched off.
– The quick-stop switch console is not actuated
– The quick-stop switch manual operation is not actuated
– The actuator test in menu 4-1-1 must not be active.
To reverse the intake/front attachment from the driver's seat:
• Press and hold down the "Reverse intake/front attachment" key (2) on the multi-function
lever.
The front attachment and the feed drive rollers will reverse for as long as the "Reverse
intake/front attachment" key (2) is pressed.
The "Reverse intake/front attachment" key (2) on the multi-function lever can be pressed even
when the intake/front attachment is switched on. Then the intake/front attachment must be
switched on again.
585
Operation
Switch on/reverse the intake/front attachment using manual operation
Prerequisites:
– The ignition is switched on.
– The release switch road/field is in the "field mode" setting.
– The release switch "maintenance" is switched off.
– The release switch "intake/header" is switched on.
– The release switch "traction drive" is switched off.
– The main coupling is switched on.
– The quick-stop switch console is not actuated.
– The quick-stop switch manual operation is not actuated.
– The actuator test in menu 4-1-1 must not be active.
Fig. 539
• Press and hold the key (1) to reverse the intake/front attachment.
18.5.5
Metal detection
When metal detection is triggered, the feed drive/front attachment stop instantaneously.
• Reset the error message.
• Stop the machine and reverse a short distance.
• Raise the front attachment slightly.
• Reverse feed drive/front attachment.
• Shut down and secure the machine, see page 38.
• Remove the metal.
18.5.6
RockProtect (option)
If a large foreign object (e.g. rock) is detected in the intake, the intake/front attachment stop
instantaneously.
• Reset the error message.
• Stop the machine and reverse a short distance.
• Raise the front attachment slightly.
• Reverse feed drive/front attachment.
• Shut down and secure the machine, see page 38.
• Remove the foreign object.
586
Operation
18.5.7
Lifting unit control
To optimise field mode, the position of the front attachment is regulated using the lifting unit on
the machine. To ensure the best conditions for the respective application, one of the three
following lifting unit controls are selected.
– Lifting unit position control
When the lifting unit position control is active, the control sets the height of the front
attachment to a constant value relative to the machine.
– Lifting unit ground pressure control
When the lifting unit ground pressure control is active, the control adjusts the pressure of
the front attachment on the ground to a constant value
– Lifting unit distance control (optional)
If lifting unit distance control is activated, the control function continuously regulates the
height of the front attachment relative to the ground by means of active pivoting.
Lifting unit distance control can only be activated in conjunction with a mounted maize front
attachment that is fitted with header contour sensors.
In field mode, the current lifting unit control is displayed in the drive data information section.
The actual height of the lifting unit and the corresponding setpoint pressure/setpoint height are
displayed in the settings information section in the lifting unit menu field.
587
Operation
Fig. 540
Settings for all lifting unit controls:
Pre-condition:
The required lifting unit control is set for:
– Grass/maize mode, see page 179
– With direct cutting system, see page 195
Changing and saving the setpoint height (working height)/setpoint pressure on the multifunction lever
• Use the "Raise lifting unit manually" (1) or "Lower lifting unit manually" (3) to move to the
new setpoint height/setpoint pressure.
• Press the "Raise lifting unit automatically" (2) key for approx. 3 seconds.
The new setpoint height/new setpoint pressure is saved.
The working screen of the info centre displays a corresponding information message, see page
175.
Setting and saving the headland position on the multi-function lever
• Press the "Raise lifting unit" (2) or "Lower lifting unit" (1) button to move to the lifting height.
• Press the "Lower lifting unit automatically" key (4) for approx. 3 seconds.
The new lifting height is saved.
The working screen of the info centre displays a corresponding information message, see page
175.
Raise the lifting unit to the set headland position
• Press the "Raise lifting unit automatically" key (4).
The lifting unit is raised to the set lifting height.
Activating the set lifting unit control
• Press the "Lower lifting unit automatically" key (2)
The lifting unit is raised or lowered to the set setpoint height/setpoint pressure.
The working screen of the info centre displays the icon of the set lifting unit control along with
the set setpoint height/setpoint pressure.
Deactivating the set lifting unit control
The set lifting unit control is deactivated:
– If the lifting unit is manually controlled with buttons (1) and (2).
– If the diagnostic electronics detect an error.
588
Operation
18.5.8

Setting discharge chute
NOTE
The spout extension (optional) must also be manually folded in for road travel according to the
highway code, see chapter Operating and display elements, "Multi-function lever".
The spout has been designed in such a way that it can be operated in trailer operation as well
as with loading or forager trailers driving in parallel alongside on the left and right.
The movements of the spout are controlled using operating elements on the multi-function lever
and the cross actuating lever.
Fig. 541
589
Operation
Item
Designation
Explanation
1
Key "Turn spout"
Turns the spout to the right side.
2
Key "Turn spout"
Turns the spout to the left side.
3
"Discharge chute flap down" key
Lowers the spout flap.
4
"Discharge chute flap up" key
Raises the spout flap.
5
"Reversing/parking discharge chute"
key
When the main coupling is switched on:
reverses the position of the spout.
When the main coupling is switched off:
swivels the spout into transport position
without folding in the spout extension.
6
Slide controller
Controls the rotating speed of the spout.
7
Cross actuating lever
Lowers the spout by moving to position I.
Raises the spout by moving to position II.
8
Key cross actuating lever
For operating the folding spout extension in
conjunction with the cross actuating lever.
Manual operation device for the spout for 12 and 14 row spout extension using the cross
actuating lever (7) and key (8)
Lowering the spout into transport position
• Press the key (8) and slide the cross actuating lever (7) forwards to position I. The spout
extension folds in, the spout swivels down into the transport position.
If the spout is automatically lowered with a raised spout flap, the operation is delayed by several
seconds because:
• the spout is first lowered,
• the spout flap is then aligned straight ahead
• the spout extension is then folded in.
Raising the spout to the working position
• Press the key (8) and slide the cross actuating lever (7) back to position II. The spout
extension folds out, the spout swivels up into the working position.
The speed at which the spout extension folds in and out can be set via a throttle valve, see
page 621.

NOTE
When the discharge chute flap is raised, the discharge chute extension folds in after a delay of
approx. 2 seconds, as the discharge chute flap is automatically lowered beforehand.
While the discharge chute extension is being folded in or out, the spout flap cannot be actuated.
590
Operation
18.5.9
Traction control system
The traction control system (TC) is used to prevent the wheelspin (slip) in specific situations. It
can be set at two levels.
TC I allows increased slip. This setting is usually used in maize mode to ensure adequate
forward drive even under difficult conditions.
TC II only allows limited slip.This setting is usually used in grass mode to protect the sward.
Turning on the ignition automatically switches on the traction control system.
Activating the traction control system and setting the sensitivity level
Fig. 542
• Repeatedly pressing the TC key (1) switches the traction control system off or on.
• Repeatedly pressing the "TC I/II" key (2) switches the sensitivity level.
The status of the traction control system is shown in the display, see page 167.
591
Operation
18.5.10
Automatic steering system
WARNING
Danger to life due to automatically controlled machine!
The forage harvester with activated autopilot is automatically controlled and is monitored only
by the driver while driving. This means that people near the machine and along the route of the
machine are in danger.
• Use the autopilot in open country exclusively for automatically guiding the forage harvester
on a row of thin-stemmed plants or with a GPS-based steering system.
• Do not use the machine with activated autopilot on public highways, in yard areas or near
people.
WARNING
Danger to life due to automatically controlled machine!
If the autopilot is incorrectly installed or if the components of the autopilot have been tampered
with, people near the forage harvester, which has an activated autopilot, are in danger, as the
machine may make unexpected movements.
• The autopilot may be installed by an authorised service centre only.
• Do not make any changes to the safety-relevant elements of the autopilot or to hydraulic,
electrical or electronic components of the autopilot.
WARNING
Danger to life due to automatically controlled machine!
Before starting up the autopilot, check that the controllable safety elements function.
• Check whether the autopilot switches off if the steering wheel is moved abruptly or if the
driver leaves the driver's seat.
Visually check that the row tracers, steering angle sensor as well as the visible hoses and
wiring are in full working order (i.e. free of mechanical damage and leaks).
592
Operation
WARNING
Danger to life due to automatically controlled machine!
When working with the autopilot activated, the driver must act particularly carefully and
prudently so that he can respond if people and material assets are at risk.
• Ensure that there is nobody within a radius of 50 m around the forage harvester.
• The driver must not leave the forage harvester cab while the autopilot is operating.
• While the autopilot is in operation, the driver must regularly check the direction in which the
machine is moving and its travel path to be able to take over manual control of the forage
harvester immediately in the event of a hazardous situation or if obstructions or
interruptions come up in the vehicle's path.
• After using the autopilot and before leaving the field, the autopilot must always be switched
off on the release switch autopilot.
The autopilot is an optional additional feature which automatically guides the forage harvester
on a row of thin-stemmed plants.
The autopilot is available only in maize mode with mounted EasyCollect maize header and
autopilot equipment (optional).
Prerequisites:
– The diesel engine is running.
– The driver's seat is occupied.
– Release switch "road/field" is set to field mode.
– Release switch "traction drive" is switched on.
– Release switch "Autopilot" is switched on.
During harvesting, preferably drive in the following modes:
• For front attachments with the row tracers in the outer tips in the "row tracer links or right"
mode.
• For front attachments with the row tracer in the centre in the "both row tracers" mode.
Now, the following modes can be used:
• Both row tracers
• Row tracer automatic
• Row tracer mirrored, automatic
Setting row tracer mode, see page 187.
593
Operation
Fig. 543
Activating the automatic steering system
Prerequisites:
– The machine drives parallel to the rows of plants with at least 0.7km/h.
– The sensor bracket is located in the row of plants.
Activate:
• Press the "Automatic steering system" key (1) on the multi-function lever.
• In the display, the icon (2) shows the current status of the automatic steering system and a
horn is sounded.
With the selected mode, the automatic steering system uses the row tracers on the maize
header to guide the machine along the row of plants, see page 187.
Deactivating the automatic steering system
WARNING
Danger to life due to uncontrolled machine!
When the autopilot has been deactivated, the driver must take control of the machine again,
otherwise the forage harvester is not controlled.
• After the autopilot has been deactivated, take control of the forage harvester with the
steering wheel.
The automatic steering system is deactivated if:
• The steering wheel is moved.
• The driver's seat is vacated (by means of the seat switch contact).
• The automatic steering system (1) key on the multi-function lever is pressed again.
• The release switch "automatic steering system" is switched off.
• The release switch "traction drive" is switched off.
• The release switch "road/field" is switched to road mode.
• One of the two quick-stop momentary switches is pressed.
• An error occurs in system components of the automatic steering system.
The deactivation of the autopilot is indicated by two horn sounds.
594
Operation
18.5.11
ConstantPower load limit control (optional)
The ConstantPower load limit control controls the travelling speed of the machine depending on
the diesel engine load and provides constant machine load at a lower fuel consumption. This
means that the machine travels automatically quicker for a weaker crop and automatically
slower for a stronger crop.
Load limit control is possible in field mode only.
Fig. 544
Activating the load limit control
• To activate the load limit control, tap the multi-function lever (1) 2x briefly to the right.
The green Symbol (2) on the display indicates that the load limit control is active and the driving
speed is automatically adjusted to the speed reduction of the motor.
Deactivating the load limit control
The load limit control is deactivated by:
• Actuating the multi-function lever (accelerate/decelerate)
• Switching off the release switch "traction drive".
• Switching the release switch "road/field" to field mode.
• Pressing the brake pedal.
• Accessing cruise control (pressing the multi-function lever to the right again).
Constant Power settings, see page 411.
595
Operation
18.5.12
AutoScan (optional)
The AutoScan system regulates the chop length depending on the degree of maturity of the
plants being harvested by the EasyCollect.
Using the AutoScan sensor in the central tip of the EasyCollect, the system detects the degree
of maturity of the maize plants and calculates the optimum chop length of the maize plants
based on the values input previously for the minimum and maximum chop length and controls
the speed of the pre-compression rollers accordingly.
The AutoScan system is available for maize mode only.
The AutoScan system controls according to four specifications:
– The minimum chop length
– The maximum chop length
– The degree of maturity at which the automatic chop length adjustment starts.
– The degree of maturity at which the automatic chop length adjustment ends.
To call up the AutoScan system, refer to the info centre, see page 191.
596
Operation
18.5.13
Adjusting the chop length
Two chop lengths can be saved on the multi-function lever.
These can be called up on the multi-function lever during operation.
Fig. 545
Save the chop length with the cross actuating lever
Item
Designation
Explanation
1
Memory key "M1"
Call up chop length 1 if the function is assigned to
the M1 key, see page 176.
2
Memory key "M2"
Call up chop length 2 if the function is assigned to
the M2 key, see page 176.
3
Cross actuating lever
Call up the chop length 1: move to position I.
Call up the chop length 2: move to position II.
4
Key cross actuating lever
Press to save the chop lengths in conjunction with
the cross actuating lever.
597
Operation
Saving two chop lengths
Saving chop length 1:
• Press key (4) and move the cross actuating lever (3) to position I to save chop length 1 set
in the info centre.
Saving chop length 2:
• Press key (4) and move the cross actuating lever (3) to position II to save chop length 2 set
in the info centre.
18.5.14
Adjusting the electrically adjustable discharge accelerator rear (optional)
Fig. 546
The adjusting motor (1) is used to swivel a deflector sheet into the crop flow. The resulting
deflection of the crop flow influences the discharge distance of the crops at the spout.
Step 1
Large distance to the discharge accelerator
= small discharge distance
Step 2
Medium distance to the discharge
accelerator
= medium discharge distance
Step 3
Smallest distance to the discharge
accelerator
= largest discharge distance
Setting the discharge distance
•
Press
to increase the discharge distance on the discharge chute incrementally.
•
Press
to reduce the discharge distance on the discharge chute incrementally.
The selected level is displayed in menu 4-1-12 "Work", on the "Diagnostics rear wall of
discharge accelerator" page and in the working screen.
598
Operation
18.5.15
Removing Crop Flow Blockages in the Area of the Crop Flow
WARNING
Danger of injury due to unexpected movement of the machine and moving parts!
There is an increased danger of injury when removing crop blockages.
• Shut down and safeguard the machine, refer to chapter Safety “Shutting Down and
Safeguarding the Machine“.
• Ensure that no one approaches the machine as long as the follow-up alarm sounds.
WARNING
Risk of injury due to turning parts in the crop flow!
After switching off the main drive, the chopping drum, the discharge accelerator and the corn
conditioner may coast down to a stop. If this is the case, an acoustic follow-up alarm can be
heard!
• For all tasks and when eliminating malfunctions, always be absolutely certain to wait until
the units have come to a complete stop.
Bringing the machine into a safe state
• Stop the machine in case of blockage.
2
1
BX850961
Fig. 547
•
•
•
•
•
To switch off intake drive, press “Intake/header” (1) key.
Move the machine back a little.
Lower header to the ground.
Switch off the engine, remove the ignition key in order to avoid unintended start.
Inform all persons that the crop flow is blocked and the inner parts of the machine will
continue to move as long as the follow-up alarm sounds.
• Wait until the follow-up alarm stops.
The blockage in the crop flow must only be removed after the mentioned work steps
have been performed and the follow-up alarm stops.
599
Operation
Reversing
Depending on the size of the blockage, the intake/front attachment can be reversed with the
chopping drum switched on or off in order to remove part of the blockage.
For blockages located in the area of the intake/front attachment, it is possible to reverse with the
chopping drum switched on, see page 584.
For bigger blockages, the intake/front attachment must be reversed with the chopping drum
switched off to prevent overloading the drives. The main coupling can only be connected if the
entire crop flow has been checked and any blockages have been removed, see page 585.
Removing blockages
WARNING
Risk of injury due to sharp parts!
When removing crop flow blockages, there is an increased risk of injury on the sharp parts of
the crop flow.
• Always wear safety gloves when removing blockages.
To remove the blockages in the crop flow, the maintenance openings in the transfer shaft/grass
channel, in the channel support and in the spout can be opened.
Prerequisites:
– The upper side flap on the right-hand side of the machine is open.
– The tool box is unlocked and swivelled out.
Removing crop blockages in the lower crop flow in grass mode
Maintenance flaps in the transfer shaft/grass channel
Fig. 548
•
•
•
•
•
•
600
Unscrew the nuts (1) on the maintenance flaps (2) and (3).
Fold down the maintenance flaps.
Manually remove blocked crops from the crop flow channel.
Completely remove built-up deposits on the inner walls of the crop flow channel using a
suitable tool.
Close the maintenance flaps (2) and (3) and screw on the nuts (1).
Swivel in the tool box and close the side flap at the front right.
Operation
Removing crop blockages in the lower crop flow in maize mode
Maintenance flap transfer shaft
Fig. 549
•
•
•
•
•
•
Unscrew the nuts (1) on the maintenance flap (2).
Fold down the maintenance flap (2).
Manually remove blocked crops from the crop flow channel.
Completely remove built-up deposits on the inner walls of the crop flow channel using a
suitable tool.
Close the maintenance flap (2) and screw on the nuts (1).
Swivel in the tool box and close the side flap at the front right.
601
Operation
Removing crop flow blockages in the upper crop flow in case of maize mode and grass
mode
Maintenance flap channel support
Fig. 550
•
•
•
Unscrew the hexagon nuts (2).
Remove the maintenance flap (1).
When the maintenance work is complete, attach the maintenance flap (2) and secure with
the hexagon nuts (2).
Maintenance flaps in the spout
WARNING
Risk of injury due to falling from a great height!
On the engine roof the operator is at a height from which a fall may cause serious injuries.
• Do not enter the engine roof until
– the discharge chute is in the central position and has been fully raised,
– the engine has been switched off, the ignition key removed and taken by the operator,
– the machine has been secured against rolling away,
– the engine roof is clean.
2
1
1
BX480183
Fig. 551
•
•
•
602
Swivel spout to the right and lower completely.
Loosen the hexagonal nuts (2) and remove the covers (1) from the maintenance openings.
When the maintenance work is complete, attach the covers (1) to the maintenance
openings and secure with the hexagonal nuts (2).
Operation
18.5.16
Blowing device for intake unit and grinding device
Fig. 552
The blowing device (1) cleans areas on the intake unit (2) and the grinding device (3).
This increases the functional safety of the machine.
Setting the blowing times
In menu 1-1 "Parameters" (driver level), in the
sub-menu 1-1-15 "Work"
, you can set the parameter 33651 (switch-off duration) and
parameter 33652 (switch-on duration) for the blowing device.
Recommended settings:
• Parameter 33651 (switch-off duration) = 30 s.
• Parameter 33652 (switch-on duration) = 3 s.
Function test
Switching-on conditions:
– The release switch "road/field" is switched on.
– The quick-stop switch must not be pressed.
– The lifting unit is in the working position.
– The machine is operating.
If the status line of the working screen displays the
• Check the set times.
icon, the blowing device is active.
603
Settings
19
Settings
WARNING
If the basic safety instructions are not followed, people may be seriously injured or
killed.
• To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions in the chapter Safety must have been read
and followed, see chapter Safety "Basic safety instructions".
WARNING
Risk of injury from sharp cutting blades!
When performing maintenance work on the chopping drum, there is a risk of the operators
being injured by the sharp chopping blades and screw bars.
• When working on the chopping drum, work particularly carefully and prudently.
• Always wear work gloves when working on the chopping drum.
• Turn the chopping drum clockwise on the belt pulley only and, when the correct position is
reached, lock with the locking bolt.
604
Settings
19.1
Optimising Crop Flow
How front attachment speed depends on chop length
If the front attachment speed is too low, it may be that the feed drive rollers are pulling the crops
in clumps from the front attachment and the crop flow is being severed.
The front attachment speeds depend to a great extent on e.g.: Crops, driving speed, crop mass,
degree of maturity of the crop. The speed should be set so that the crop flow is homogeneous.
If the speed of the EasyCollect is too high in maize mode, blockages will occur.
Fig. 553
Grass mode
– Guide value for the front attachment speed: 400 - 420 rpm
Depending on the application conditions, a front attachment speed of 300 rpm to 600 rpm may
also be advisable.
Maize operating mode
– Guide value for the front attachment speed: 380 - 420 rpm
The front attachment speed should be set as low as possible.
XDisc mode
– Front attachment speed: 700 rpm
605
Settings
19.2
Optimising discharge capacity of the machine
19.2.1
Adjusting overhang of the cutting blades
1
3
1
2
BX480430_1
BX480431_1
Fig. 554
The discharge capacity of the machine is determined by the chopping drum among other things.
Depending on how far the cutting blade (1) extends beyond the blade carrier (3), there will be
correspondingly more or less wind = discharge output.
Wear on the chopping blades as well as dirt below the chopping blades reduces the volume
responsible for the discharge capacity.
• Move the cutting blades (1) with the greatest possible overhang.
• Re-adjust the cutting blades now and then, see chapter Maintenance-Supply system,
"Re-adjusting cutting blades".
• Clean the area between the chopping blades (1) and blade carriers (3).
606
Settings
19.2.2

Setting Drum Base
NOTE
An incorrectly set drum base will result in increased fuel consumption as well as an increased
wear of machine components.
Fig. 555
Another way to improve the discharge capacity is to fine-tune the setting of the drum base (1)
using the setting screw (2).
The drum base is adjusted in the factory.
- The distance from the blades (4) to the drum base at the rear (3) is a = 6-7 mm.
The nature of the crop (for example, a dry crop) may require readjustment of the drum base.
Measuring the distance between the drum base and blade
Prerequisites:
– Lifting unit is fully raised.
– The machine is shut down and secured, see page 38.
Work steps:
• Walk under the machine.
• At the rear edge of the drum base (3), use a hexagon wrench (5) to check along the entire
length that the distance to the blades (4) is the dimension a = 6-7 mm.
607
Settings
Setting the distance between the drum base and cutter
Fig. 556

NOTE
The drum base must be equally set on both sides.
Reducing the gap dimension between the drum base and blades:
• Release the counter nut (2).
• Unscrew the setting screw (1), which reduces the distance between the drum base and the
drum.
• Tighten the counter nut (2).
Increasing the gap dimension between the drum base and blades:
• Release the counter nut (2).
• Screw in the setting screw (1), which increases the distance between the drum base and
the drum.
• Tighten the counter nut (2).
•
608
After setting the drum base, check the dimension "a" and set to 46 mm if required.
Settings
19.2.3
Setting the Discharge Accelerator Rear Wall
•
•
19.2.3.1
Remove the ignition key and secure the forage harvester against accidental start-up and
against rolling away.
Wait until all units have come to a complete stop
Settings on the installed grass channel
Fig. 557
1 Distance between rear wall to the channel support, adjustable via rubber buffer
2 Rubber buffer
3 Moving the rear wall when adjusting the rubber buffers
4 Hinge pin of the rear wall
5 Rear wall pivot on top above the rubber buffer
6 Adjusting setting screw grass channel
7 Movement of the rear wall and grass channel when adjusting the setting screws
8 Raising and lowering of the rear wall when adjusting the setting screws
9 Grass channel hinge pin on the transfer shaft
609
Settings
Fig. 558

NOTE
An incorrectly set distance between the discharge accelerator and the rear wall will result in
increased fuel consumption and wear of machine components.
•
The point of impact (1) of the chopping crops at the top of the channel support should be as
far as possible behind the middle
Setting the distance from the discharge accelerator to the upper rear wall
Fig. 559
1 Channel support
2 Wear plate on rear wall of discharge accelerator
3 Rubber buffer
•
610
The rear wall of discharge accelerator should be set so that the distance (a) between the
rear wall wear plate (2) and the channel support (1) is approx. 15 mm but min. 12 mm
Settings
Fig. 560
• Loosen the nut (1)
• Set this distance with the two rubber buffers (2) left and right at the rear wall of discharge
accelerator
• Ensure that the distance from the wear plate to the rotor of the discharge accelerator is as
uniform as possible
• Readjustment using the left or right rubber buffer (2) may be necessary
• Tighten the nut (1)
611
Settings
Adjusting the distance between the discharge accelerator and rear wall at bottom
Fig. 561
• Check distance "a" between the rear wall (1) and discharge scoop (2) at the narrowest point
between the discharge scoop and the rear wall

NOTE
Reducing or increasing the distance (a) between the discharge scoops (2) and the rear wall (1)
may influence the discharge capacity depending on the crops.
Factory basic setting:
• Dimension "a": 3 mm (grass)
Fig. 562

NOTE
The setting must be uniform on both adjusting screws (3) right and left.
If necessary, set the distance as follows:
• Loosen the counter nut (5)
• Unscrew the stop screw (3)
• Set the distance from the rear wall (2) to the discharge accelerator (1) by means of screw (4)
• Readjust the stop screw (3)
• Tighten the counter nut (5)
• Tighten the screw (4)
612
Settings
Setting the spring force of the rear wall
Fig. 563
• Loosen the nut (3)
• To reduce the spring force, slightly unscrew the hexagon head screws (1) on the rear wall the spring (2) is relieved
• To increase the spring force, slightly tighten the hexagon head screws (1) on the rear wall the spring (2) is tensioned
• Tighten the nut (3)
Fig. 564
• The pretension must be selected to achieve spring travel (a) of min. 10 mm and
max. 12 mm.
• On completion of the setting, check whether a stacking edge is created with respect to the
channel support when the rear wall is fully sprung back. It may be necessary to correct the
rear wall setting once more using the rubber buffer, to readjust the pretension length of the
spring, and to check the distance between the discharge scoops and the wear plate on the
rear wall
613
Settings
Checking the locating lug
Fig. 565
• If the locating lug (2) of the rear wall of discharge accelerator is not resting exactly on the
locating bolt (3) of the grass channel (1), the position of the grass channel must be set to
the corresponding side.
Setting the additional ventilation slots on the discharge accelerator for use with the
grass channel
Fig. 566
Factory basic setting for use with grass channel: completely closed
• Open max. 50 % left and right. (When the additional ventilation slots are wide open, too
much air is directed against the flow of air in the chopping drum and the discharge capacity
is reduced)
Setting the additional ventilation slots:
• Loosen the wing nuts (1)
• Pull the wear plate (2) to the centre to the required position
• Tighten the wing nuts (1)
614
Settings
19.2.3.2
Settings if a corn conditioner is installed
Distance from stop discharge accelerator – corn conditioner
Fig. 567
• When installing the corn conditioner, set distance "a" between the stop on the discharge
accelerator housing and the corn conditioner to a dimension of 60 mm
Fig. 568
• Check distance "a" between the rear wall (1) and discharge scoop (2) at the narrowest point
between the discharge accelerator scoop and the rear wall
615
Settings
Fig. 569
• Loosen the nut (1)
• Set the distance of 2 mm with the two rubber buffers (2) left and right at the rear wall of
discharge accelerator
• Ensure that the distance of the wear plate to the discharge scoops is as uniform as possible
• Readjustment using the left or right rubber buffer (2) may be necessary
• Tighten the nut (1)

NOTE
The transition from the corn conditioner to the rear wall of discharge accelerator must be
checked. There must be no stacking edges. This means that the deflector sheet of the corn
conditioner must be higher than the rear wall of discharge accelerator. If this is not the case, a
different deflector sheet must be mounted (repair kit: 150435086, spare part no. deflector
sheet: 202265610).
616
Settings
Checking the belt distance in the corn conditioner
Fig. 570
• Check the distance between the belt pulley (3) and the belt (2)
• Dimension "a": min. 6 mm
• If dimension "a" is less than 6 mm, the corn conditioner must be pulled up higher in the crop
flow (1)

NOTE
If the corn conditioner has been pulled up higher, check the distance between the rear wall of
discharge accelerator and the discharge accelerator and correct using the rubber buffer if
required.
617
Settings
Setting the spring force of the rear wall
Fig. 571
1 Channel support
2 Wear plate on rear wall of discharge accelerator
3 Rubber buffer
•
By setting the rear wall (2) to the rotor, you can derive the dimension (a) for the transition to
the channel support (1)
Fig. 572
• The pretension must be selected to achieve spring travel (a) of max. 10 mm.
• On completion of the setting, check whether a stacking edge is created with respect to the
channel support when the rear wall is fully sprung back. It may be necessary to correct the
rear wall setting once more using the rubber buffer, to readjust the pretension length of the
spring, and to check the distance between the discharge scoops and the wear plate on the
rear wall
618
Settings
Fig. 573
• Loosen the nut (3)
• To reduce the spring force, slightly unscrew the hexagon head screws (1) on the rear wall the spring (2) is relieved
• To increase the spring force, slightly tighten the hexagon head screws (1) on the rear wall the spring (2) is tensioned
• Tighten the nut (3)
Checking the locating lug
Fig. 574
• If the locating lug (2) of the rear wall of discharge accelerator is not resting exactly on the
locating bolt (3) of the corn conditioner (1), the position of the corn conditioner must be set
to the corresponding side.
619
Settings
Setting the additional ventilation slots on the discharge accelerator for use with the corn
conditioner
Fig. 575
•
Factory basic setting for use with corn conditioner fully open
(With maize, no air passes up through the corn conditioner to the discharge accelerator. If
the additional ventilation slots are not open wide enough, too little air is fed and the
discharge capacity is reduced.)
Setting the additional ventilation slots:
• Loosen the wing nuts (1)
• Pull the wear plate (2) to the centre to the required position or remove it completely
• Tighten the wing nuts (1)

NOTE
If the discharge capacity is insufficient despite all these steps, an additional distance sheet can
be mounted between the wear plate and the rear wall of discharge accelerator. This alters the
crop flow and the discharge capacity can increase.
620
Settings
19.2.4
Setting the throttle valves
Adjustable throttle valves
Fig. 576
Item
Valve
Item
Valve
1a
Throttle check valve grinding stone
"left"
2b
"Lower" spout throttle valve
1b
Throttle check valve grinding stone
"right"
2a
"Raise" throttle check valve spout flap
3a
"Raise" throttle valve spout
3b
"Lower" throttle check valve spout flap
The throttle valves are set according to the times specified in the table. The specification is the
KRONE factory setting of the time in which the respective component starting from one end
position must reach the other end position.

Function
Time
Lift spout
9s
Lower spout
7s
Lift discharge chute flap
4s
Lower discharge chute flap
4s
Retract the grinding stone left
5s
Retract the grinding stone right
5s
Note
Up to and including year of manufacture 2012.
From year of manufacture 2013 two throttle
discs have also been integrated in the
hydraulic cylinder.
NOTE
Only set throttle valves when the engine has reached operating temperature.
621
Maintenance
20
Maintenance
WARNING
If the basic safety instructions are not followed, people may be seriously injured or
killed.
• To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions in the chapter Safety must have been read
and followed, see chapter Safety "Basic safety instructions".
20.1
Tightening torques
20.1.1
Metric Thread Screws with Control Thread

NOTE
The table does not apply to countersunk screws with hexagonal socket in case the countersunk
screw is tightened by hexagonal socket.
A = thread size
(stability class can be seen on screw head)
Tightening torque in Nm (unless
otherwise stated)
Stability class
A
5,6
8,8
10,9
12,9
Tightening torque (Nm)
622
M4
3.0
4.4
5.1
M5
5.9
8.7
10
M6
10
15
18
M8
25
36
43
M10
29
49
72
84
M12
42
85
125
145
M14
135
200
235
M16
210
310
365
M20
425
610
710
M22
571
832
972
M24
730
1050
1220
M27
1100
1550
1800
M30
1450
2100
2450
Maintenance
20.1.2
Metric Thread Screws with Fine Thread
A = thread size
(stability class can be seen on screw head)
Tightening torque in Nm (unless
otherwise stated)
Stability class
A
5.6
8.8
10.9
12.9
Tightening torque (Nm)
20.1.3

M12 x 1.5
88
130
152
M14 x 1.5
145
213
249
M16 x 1.5
222
327
382
M18 x 1.5
368
525
614
M20 x 1.5
465
662
775
M24 x 2
787
1121
1312
M27 x 2
1148
1635
1914
M30 x 1.5
800
2100
2650
Metric Thread Screws with Countersunk Head and Hexagonal Socket
NOTE
The table applies only to countersunk screws with hexagonal socket and metric thread which
are tightened by the hexagonal socket.
A = thread size
(stability class can be seen on screw head)
Tightening torque in Nm (unless
otherwise stated)
Stability class
A
5,6
8,8
10,9
12,9
Tightening torque (Nm)
M4
2.5
3.5
4.1
M5
4.7
7
8
M6
8
12
15
M8
20
29
35
M10
23
39
58
67
M12
34
68
100
116
M14
108
160
188
M16
168
248
292
M20
340
488
568
A
BM 400 0234
623
Maintenance
20.2
Maintenance table

NOTICE
Work on the engine not listed in this chapter may be performed only by a qualified specialist
workshop. Only use the maintenance and repair manuals and the consumables specifications
(https://mmrepro.mn.man.de/bs) approved by MAN.
A qualified service centre has the required technical knowledge, qualifications and tools to
perform the required work on the engine in a proper manner. This applies in particular to safetyrelevant work.
Always have the following work performed by a qualified service centre:
– Safety-relevant work
– Service and maintenance work
– Repair work
– Modifications as well as installations and conversions
– Working on electronic components
624
Maintenance
Once after 1 hour
Tyres
Retighten wheel nuts on the front/rear wheels
Table 65
Once after 4 hours
Drive belts
Check belt tension of all drive belts
Table 66
Once after 10 hours
Components for crop flow
Retighten the fastening screws on the chopping blades
Retighten the fastening screws on the discharge scoops
Tighten screws
Check fastening screws of the steering cylinder
Check fastening screws on the track rod
Central lubrication
Check that the lines are firmly attached
Table 67
625
Maintenance
6 times after every 10 hours
Tyres
Retighten wheel nuts on the front/rear wheels
Table 68
Once after 50 hours
Oil change in gearbox
Wheel hub gearbox at front/rear
Engine
Check the coolant hoses for leaks.
Fuel system (engine)
Check fuel lines for leaks
Check that detachable connecting elements (screws, hose clamps, pipe connections, hoses) are tight and
retighten if required
Cooling system (engine)
Concentration of anti-freeze and anti-corrosion agent
Check
Check the coolant hoses for leaks.
Check that connecting elements (screws,
hose clamps, pipe connections, hoses)
are tight and re-tighten if necessary
Table 69
Once after 1000 km
Rear axle for front wheel drive
Check hub bearings for wear and play
Table 70
626
Maintenance
Before the beginning of the season
Hydraulic system
Check hydraulic oil tank level
brake
Brake function test
Oil level check gearbox
Power take-off gear
Transfer gearbox
Roller gearbox at bottom left
Angular gearbox
Upper right roller gearbox
Worm drive spout
Wheel hub gearbox at front/rear
Components for crop flow
Check corn conditioner (wear)
Check conveyor bars on the pre-compression roller
Check intake unit tension springs.
Check counterblade (damage, wear)
Check chopping blades (damage, wear)
Check discharge scoops (damage, wear)
Check discharge accelerator scraper
Check grinding stone (damage)
Engine
Check engine for oil leaks
Cooling system
Checking the coolant level
Check the coolant hoses for leaks
Clean/replace air filter
Check that connecting elements (screws,
hose clamps, pipe connections, hoses)
are tight and re-tighten if necessary
General maintenance work
Check all wear plates
Electrical system
Cleaning the battery
Tyres
Visually inspect tyres for cuts and breaks, and check the tyre pressure
Table 71
627
Maintenance
Every 10 hours, at least daily
Hydraulic system
Check hydraulic oil tank level
brake
Brake function test
Components for crop flow
Check counterblade (damage, wear)
Check chopping blades (damage, wear)
Check discharge scoops (damage, wear)
Check grinding stone (damage)
Engine
Check the coolant hoses for leaks
Clean engine compartment
Check engine oil level
Fuel system
Drain condensation water from the fuel prefilter with water separator.
Drain condensation water from the fuel
filter (main filter)
To be performed exclusively by a qualified service centre.
Refer to the engine operating instructions, "Venting and
draining the fuel system".
Check fuel level
Cooling system (engine)
Checking the coolant level
Clean/replace air filter
Clean cooler, cooler compartment and sieve drum
Cabin
Clean fresh air filter
Top up windscreen washer system
Check pilot lamps
Check lighting function
Air conditioning / heating
Cleaning the capacitor
Central lubrication
Check filling level of the reservoir
General maintenance work
Clean machine "completely"
Manually lubricate according to lubrication chart
Silage additive system
Clean silage additive system
Tyres
Visually inspect tyres for cuts and breaks, and check the tyre pressure
Rear axle for front axle drive
Check hub covers for damage and that they are secure
Table 72
628
Maintenance
Weekly
Oil level check gearbox
Wheel hub gearbox at front/rear
Tyres
Measure tyre pressure with testing instrument
Compressed air system
Drain condensation water from compressed air storage tank
Main drive brake
Check brake pads for soiling, if required clean with high-pressure cleaner
Table 73
Every 50 hours
Tyres
Retighten wheel nuts on the front/rear wheels
Oil level check gearbox
Power take-off gear
Transfer gearbox
Roller gearbox at bottom left
Angular gearbox
Upper right roller gearbox
Worm drive spout
Wheel hub gearbox at front/rear
Table 74
Every 100 hours
Cabin
Clean circulation filter
Air conditioning/heating
Check refrigerant condition and filling quantity (dryer)
General maintenance work
Manually lubricate according to lubrication chart
Table 75
629
Maintenance
Every 250 hours
Drive belts
Check main drive belt
Check sieve drum belt
Check belts on the corn conditioner
Components for crop flow
Check flat roller scraper (wear, distance dimension)
Check discharge accelerator scraper
Tighten screws
Check fastening screws of the steering cylinders
Check fastening screws on the track rod
Air conditioning/heating
Check receiver
General maintenance work
Manually lubricate according to lubrication chart
Check wear plate on the tow coupling
Check coupling bolt on the tow coupling
Check that connecting jaw can turn
Check tow coupling Italy (option)
Table 76
630
Maintenance
Every 500 hours
Hydraulic system
Change the hydraulic oil in the hydraulic tank
Change return suction filter
Change hydraulic oil filter (high-pressure filter) work hydraulics
brake
Check function of the foot brake
Oil change in gearbox
Wheel hub gearbox at front/rear
Cooling system (engine)
Check concentration of anti-freeze and anti-corrosion agent
Check pipework in the air intake and charge air for leaks
Check the coolant hoses for leaks.
Check that detachable connecting elements (screws, hose clamps, pipe connections, hoses) are tight
Fuel system (engine)
Drain condensation water from the fuel prefilter with water separator.
Replace fuel prefilter with water separator
Check fuel lines for leaks
Check that detachable connecting elements (screws, hose clamps, pipe connections, hoses) are tight
Cabin
Replace fresh air filter
Replace circulation filter
Check functions of the driver's seat
Electrical system
Cleaning the battery
Drive belts
Check belt tension of all drive belts
Belt pulleys
Check all belt pulleys
General maintenance work
Check fire extinguisher
Rear axle for front axle drive
Check hub covers for damage and that they are secure
Table 77
631
Maintenance
Every 1000 hours, at least after the season
Hydraulic system
Change oil filter in the gearbox oil cooling
Oil change in gearbox
Power take-off gear
Transfer gearbox
Roller gearbox at bottom left
Angular gearbox
Upper right roller gearbox
Worm drive spout
Engine
Check all lines, hoses and electric cables for chafe marks
Cooling system
Clean/replace air filter
Rear axle for front axle drive
Check hub bearings for wear and play
Table 78
Every 3 years
Cooling system
Change coolant
Replace safety cartridge air filter
Table 79
Every 6 years
Components
Replace hydraulic hoses
Table 80
632
Maintenance
As required
Hydraulic system
Change return suction filter
Change hydraulic oil filter (high-pressure filter) work hydraulics
brake
Check function of the foot brake
Components for crop flow
Check corn conditioner (wear)
Check conveyor bars on the pre-compression roller
Check intake unit tension springs.
Check counterblade (damage, wear)
Check chopping blades (damage, wear)
Check discharge scoops (damage, wear)
Check discharge accelerator scraper
Check grinding stone (damage)
Engine
Clean cooler, cooler compartment and sieve drum
Clean engine compartment
Fuel system (engine)
Drain condensation water from the fuel prefilter with water separator.
Vent the fuel system
Drain condensation water from the fuel
filter (on the engine side)
To be performed exclusively by a qualified service centre. Refer
to the engine operating instructions, "Venting and draining the
fuel system".
Cooling system (engine)
Check the coolant hoses for leaks.
Check that detachable connecting elements (screws, hose clamps, pipe connections, hoses) are tight and
retighten if required
Clean/replace air filter
Replace safety cartridge air filter
Drive belts
Change main drive belt
Change sieve drum belt
Change corn conditioner belt
Table 81
633
Maintenance
As required
Cabin
Top up windscreen washer system
Clean fresh air filter
Clean circulation filter
Air conditioning/heating
Cleaning the capacitor
Central lubrication
Check filling level of the reservoir
Electrical system
Cleaning the battery
General maintenance work
Check all wear plates
Check fire extinguisher
Table 82
634
Maintenance
20.3
General maintenance work
20.3.1
Fire extinguisher
Fig. 577
The operational readiness of the fire extinguisher (1) must be checked. The date of manufacture
or the date of the final inspection on the fire extinguisher applies.
Have the fire extinguisher registered. Only then can you be sure that the required
inspections (every two years in Germany) will be carried out.
The inspection intervals may differ in other countries. In this case, the instructions of the
respective countries shall apply.
• Observe regulations of the respective countries.
635
Maintenance
20.3.2
Cleaning the machine completely
WARNING
Eye damage due to flying dirt particles!
When performing cleaning work with compressed air, dirt particles are slung away at high
speed.
• Keep people away from the working area.
• Wear appropriate work clothes (e.g. eye protection) when performing cleaning work with
compressed air.
The machine must be cleaned to ensure reliable operation.
• Clean the machine – in particular the intake, the cutting drum, the radiator compartment and
the radiator – with compressed air or a high-pressure cleaner.
To avoid damage to the machine, only carry out cleaning at low pressure and do not aim the
water jet directly at the following components:
– Electrics/electronics (e.g. plug connections, control units)
– Seals
– Bearings
– Cabin
– Engine compartment
636
Maintenance – Basic Machine
21
Maintenance – Basic Machine
21.1
Windscreen washer system
Fig. 578
The reservoir (1) for the windscreen washer system is located in the cooler compartment.

NOTE
•
•
To achieve a better cleaning effect under extreme crop and road conditions, add
windscreen cleaner/anti-freeze.
In winter drain the washer system or fill with special anti-freeze.
• Check the level of the windscreen washer system daily.
If the cleaning fluid can be seen in the reservoir, the fluid level is correct.
If no cleaning fluid can be seen in the reservoir, refill:
• Open the cover (2) and add cleaning fluid.
• Close the cover (2).
637
Maintenance – Basic Machine
21.2
Maintenance - air conditioning system and heating
WARNING
Risk of injury from touching refrigerant!
During repair, upkeep, maintenance and cleaning work on the refrigerant circuit, refrigerant may
be emitted; refrigerant may be emitted in liquid or gaseous form and is hazardous to people and
the environment. Take suitable protective measures (wear protective goggles and protective
gloves).
• Switch off the engine, remove the ignition key and take it with you.
• Secure the machine against rolling away.
• Repair, upkeep, maintenance and cleaning work may be carried out by authorised
specialists only.
• In the case of refrigerant burns, always seek medical attention. Bring the datasheet with
you (see chapter "Refrigerant Data Sheet R 134a (excerpt)).
• Provide adequate ventilation when working on the refrigerating system.
• During filling or repair work, do not allow refrigerant to escape but dispose of in a recycling
container.
• Spare parts which are used must correspond to the technical requirements of the machine
manufacturer. For this reason, use KRONE original spare parts only.
• Extreme caution is advised when welding close to the air conditioning system.
21.2.1
638
Components of the air conditioning system
Component
Explanation
compressor
On the engine on the right side at the back, driven via V-belt.
Capacitor
Behind the sieve drum, accessible from the right
drier/collector
Behind the sieve drum, bottom right.
Evaporator
in the cabin roof
pressure switch
On the dryer
Switch off the air conditioning in the event of over or
underpressure.
Expansion valve
At the evaporator inlet
Climatronic control panel
In the cab, roof panel.
Maintenance – Basic Machine
21.2.2
Refrigerant
CAUTION
Environmental damage due to chemicals!
The air conditioning system is operated with refrigerant R134a (tetrafluorethane). This
substance contains no chlorine atoms, and thus is not harmful to the ozone in the atmosphere
of the world. Nonetheless, the refrigerant must not be drained; it must be collected at a
recycling plant.
• Collect the refrigerant with a recycling plant.
• Thus do NOT separate the connecting pipes beforehand.
• Have all maintenance and repair work on the air conditioning system carried out only by
your KRONE dealer with a suitable disposal and recycling equipment.
21.2.3
Collector / dryer
BMII-134
Fig. 579
Since the refrigerant collector is pressurised, it is subject to the pressurised container
regulations during production and testing.
According to this regulation the pressurised tank is classified as test group II in accordance with
the permissible overpressure p in bar, the volume l in litres and the pressure product p x l.
According to Section 10 of the Pressurised Vessel Regulations these pressurised containers
must be subjected to recurring tests by an expert in accordance with section 32. In this case the
recurring tests consist, as a rule, of external inspections of the tank in use. In combination with
the inspection the refrigerant collector must be subjected to a visual inspection twice a year.
Special attention shall be given to corrosion and mechanical damage. If the container is not in a
correct state, for safety reasons it must be replaced to ensure sufficient protection to the user
and third parties due to the hazard which may be caused in handling or operating pressurised
containers.

NOTE
The ambient temperature must exceed the temperature set at the thermostat (generally +1°
Celsius) for the compressor to switch on.
639
Maintenance – Basic Machine
21.2.4
Filling Quantities of Consumables Air Conditioning System
For information on filling quantities of refrigerant and oil for refrigerant pump, refer to chapter
Machine Description, “Consumables”.
21.2.5
Checking Refrigerant Condition and Filling Quantity
Fig. 580
Checking the filling quantity
The refrigerant quantity is checked on the viewing glass (2) via the white float ball (5).
Interval for refrigerant level check : refer to chapter Maintenance - Basic Machine
“Maintenance Table”.
 Start the engine.
 Switch on the air conditioning system and set it to the highest action.
If the white float ball (5) is at the top, the refrigerant level is OK.
If the white float ball (5) is at the bottom, the refrigerant must be filled by a specialist workshop.
Checking the refrigerant condition
The refrigerant condition (moisture saturation) is checked on the viewing glass (2) by the orange
indicator pearl (3)
Check the interval for refrigerant condition: refer to chapter Maintenance-Basic Machine
“Maintenance Table”.
If the indicator perl (3) is orange, the refrigerant condition is OK.
If the indicator perl (3) has turned colourless, the dryer-receiver-unit must be changed by a
specialist workshop.
Note
Observe the label (4) on the dryer (1).
640
Maintenance – Basic Machine
21.2.6
Changing / cleaning the fresh air filter
2
1
4
3
BX480530
Fig. 581

NOTE
If filters are not properly maintained, the fresh air filter may become very soiled and it can no
longer be guaranteed that adequate fresh air will flow into the cab.
A fresh air filter (4) in the form of a wedge filter cell is located in the upper cab area behind the
gill screen (2) on the left hand side in direction of travel. The fresh air filter protects the driver in
the cab against airborne contamination outside the cab. Always check the fresh air filter before
starting to drive the machine.
• Open the closing device (1) by turning it 90° clockwise and remove the gill screen (2).
• To release the filter, move the locking lever (3) to the left.
• Pull out the fresh air filter (4), check for soiling and clean if required.
Shake out the fresh air filter (4); never use compressed air. If heavily soiled, replace the fresh
air filter (4).
• Re-insert the fresh air filter (4).
• Lock the fresh air filter with the locking lever (3).
• Insert the gill screen (2) and close via the closing device (1).
641
Maintenance – Basic Machine
21.2.7
Changing / cleaning the circulation filter
Abb. 582
Fig. 583
•
•
•
•

To clean the circulation filter, loosen the screws (2) land remove the gill screen (1) together
with the filter element.
Clean the filter element with compressed air or replace if required.
Attach the gill screen (1) together with the filter element, ensuring that the filter element is
correctly inserted.
Press in the screws (2).
NOTE
If the filters are not adequately maintained, the circulation filter may become heavily soiled and
cause a reduction in the output of the air conditioning system and the heating.
•
•
•
•
642
To clean the circulation filter, loosen the screws (2) land remove the gill screen (1) together
with the filter element.
Clean the filter element with compressed air or replace if required.
Attach the gill screen (1) together with the filter element, ensuring that the filter element is
correctly inserted.
Press in the screws (2).
Maintenance – Basic Machine
Clean evaporator filter
Fig. 584
• Unscrew the hexagonal socket head screws (1) and remove the service cover.
Fig. 585
• Remove the housing cover (1).
• Clean the filter (2) with compressed air.
643
Maintenance – Basic Machine
21.3
Cleaning the Radiator and the Radiator Compartment
CAUTION
Damage to the machine caused by water from a high-pressure washing device!
If the water jet from a high-pressure cleaner is aimed directly at bearings and
electrical/electronic components, these components may be damaged.
• Do not aim the water jet from a high-pressure cleaner at bearings or electrical/electronic
components.
The right side flap is used to access the cooler, the maintenance flaps of the crop flow and the
right side of the engine compartment:
• Open the flap (1) and enter the cooler compartment via the right ladder (2).
•
•
To protect against the danger of fire, clean the dirt in the area of the engine compartment
and radiator as well as the surrounding area once a day and wipe away oil residue if
required
If there is a lot of dust or the crop is very dry, clean the spots listed above more frequently
Fig. 586
1
Sieve drum
2
Quick release fasteners
3
Cooling fins on the coolers
4
Capacitor
The water cooler, oil cooler, charging air cooler and capacitor are located behind the sieve drum
in the engine compartment.
Preferably clean the radiator and the capacitor while the engine is cold.
• Undo the quick release fasteners on the sieve drum and open the sieve drum.
• Blow out the radiators with compressed air from the engine compartment in the direction of
travel. Ensure that the blades are not damaged.
• Blow out the capacitor with compressed air from the radiator compartment against the
direction of travel. Ensure that the blades are not damaged.
• Close the sieve drum and lock with the quick release fasteners.
644
Maintenance – Basic Machine
21.4
Maintenance of brake (Bosch)
WARNING
Risk of injury due to an inoperable brake!
People may be seriously injured or killed by an inoperable
brake.
• Bring the machine to a complete stop.
• Switch off the engine, remove the ignition key and take it with you.
• Secure the machine against rolling using wheel chocks.
• Contact KRONE customer service.

NOTE
Also follow the operating instructions for the vehicle.
Daily or when moving off
• Check the function of the service brake each time before moving off. To do this, drive the
vehicle on a level surface with max. torque against the activated service brake.
 If the vehicle cannot be moved while the service brake is activated, the service brake is
functioning properly.
 If the vehicle can be moved even though the service brake is applied, the proper
function of the service brake is no longer guaranteed.
• If the proper function of the service brake is not guaranteed, immediately shut down the
vehicle and contact KRONE customer service.
Checking within the limits of the national regulations
• Check the function of the service brake on a regular basis in accordance with national
regulations. This check can take place as part of a TÜV inspection of the vehicle, for
example. In this case, have a brake deceleration measurement performed. The target value
must match the vehicle specification.
After emergency braking
Irrespective of the maintenance intervals, the brake must be completely inspected following
emergency braking when the hydrostats have failed.
• To do this, carry out an visual inspection of the discs, springs and sealing elements while
the multi-disc brake is dismounted. Contact KRONE customer service.
645
Maintenance – Basic Machine
21.5
Belt drives
21.5.1
Checking the belt pulley
1
1
BX480492
Fig. 587

NOTE
If worn or soiled, the complete power transmission of the power belt and belt pulley is not
guaranteed.

NOTE
In case of longer standstill times outdoors (e.g. outside the season), water can collect between
the belt pulley and the power belt which could lead to heavy rust formation.
In order to prevent this, it is recommended to dismount the power belt.
•
•
•
21.5.2
Check the edges of the belt pulleys (1) for wear and replace if required.
Check the belt pulley for damage and replace if required.
Check the belt pulley for soiling (oil, grease) and clean if required.
Checking the power belt
1
2
BX480491
Fig. 588

NOTE
If worn or soiled, the complete power transmission of the power belt and belt pulley is not
guaranteed.
646
Maintenance – Basic Machine
•
•
21.5.3
Visually check the power belts on the inside (1) and outside (2) for wear and damage (e.g.
tears, stones) and replace if required.
Check the power belts for soiling (oil, grease) and clean or replace if required.
Sieve drum drive
Fig. 589
•
Check that the belt tension of the sieve drum drive over the spring-loaded tension roll (2) is
still correctly set.
647
Maintenance – Basic Machine
21.6
Tyres
21.6.1
Checking and maintaining tyres
WARNING
Risk of injury due to reduced driving stability!
If the pressure of the tyres on the machine is too low, people are at risk due to reduced driving
safety.
• Never operate the machine at the tyre pressure usual for transportation of the tyres.
• Keep the valve caps screwed on the valves to keep dirt out.
• Check the tyre pressure daily and correct if required.
BX480389
Fig. 590
Every day check the tyres for damage and obviously low pressure, as the service life of the
tyres depends greatly on the air pressure.
• Immediately repair any cuts or breaks in the tyres or change the tyres.
• Do not expose tyres to oil, grease, fuel, or chemicals or leave them too long in the sunlight.
• Drive carefully; avoid driving over sharp stones or edges.
• Check the tyre pressure at least once a week using an accurate testing instrument and
correct the air pressure if required, see chapter Description of machine, "Technical data of
the machine".
648
Maintenance – Basic Machine
21.6.2
Wheel mounting
16
1
16
10
8
5
14
11
4
510 Nm /
376 lbf ft
13
6
9 2
7
15
10
5
14
11
4
3
12
1
8
1)
1h
2) - 7) 10h
8)....
50h
3
12
13
6
9 2
15
BX480526
Fig. 591 Front axle
•
•
•
270 Nm /
199 lbf ft
7
1)
1h
2) - 7) 10h
8)....
50h
BX480527
Rear axle
Retighten the wheel mounting bolts in the illustrated sequence.
Retighten the wheel mounting bolts on the front axle to 510 Nm.
Retighten the wheel mounting bolts on the rear axle to 270 Nm.
The interval after which the wheel mounting bolts must be retightened:
– The 1st time after one operating hour
– The 2nd to the 7th time after every 10 operating hours
– Then every 50 operating hours
21.6.3

Running direction of the tyres
NOTE
If machines have front wheel drive only, the left and right tyres on the rear axle are deliberately
interchanged for reasons of traction. (The left wheel is fitted on the right and the right wheel is
fitted on the left.)
21.6.4

Changing the tyre size
NOTE
Before switching the tyre size when changing the tyres, check with KRONE customer service
that the new tyre size is permitted for the vehicle.
649
Maintenance – Basic Machine
21.6.5
Servicing the trailer coupling
a
4
2
5
1
3
BX480385
BX480386
Fig. 592
Maintenance work on the trailer coupling:
• Check the thickness of the wearing plate (1).
If the wearing plate is thinner than 6 mm:
• Have the wearing plate changed by a service centre.
• Check the diameter of the coupling pin at the thickest point.
If the diameter of the coupling pin is less than 37 mm:
• Have the coupling pin changed by a service centre.
• Check the degree of wear of the coupling gap.
If the coupling gap is worn by more than 1.5 mm or the gap (a) between the coupling jaw (3)
and coupling carrier (4) is greater than 3 mm at any point:
• Replace the trailer coupling.
6
BX480387
Fig. 593
• Check the turning capacity of the coupling jaw (3).
If the coupling jaw (3) is stiff:
• Loosen the screw (5).
• Lubricate the grease nipple (6).
• Turn the coupling jaw (3) by one turn and tighten the screw (5) to a torque of 35 – 50 Nm.
650
Maintenance – Basic Machine
21.6.6
Servicing the trailer coupling for Italy
1
2
BX480549
Fig. 594
Maintenance work on the trailer coupling for Italy:
• Check the diameter of the 30 mm coupling pin (1) at the thinnest point.
If the diameter of the coupling pin is less than 28 mm:
• Replace the coupling pin.
• Check the diameter of the bolt holders (2) in the trailer coupling.
If the holes in the bolt holder (2) are larger than 32 mm (oval):
• Replace the trailer coupling.
651
Maintenance – Basic Machine
21.6.7

Clean silage additive system
NOTE
The silage additive residue and the rinsing water must be disposed of properly (see information
in the operating instructions of the silage additive manufacturer).
The silage additive system must be cleaned after each use:
• Empty the silage agent tank and fill it with 10 litres of clear water.
• Afterwards, pump out the water from the silage additive system, see page 462

NOTE
The silage agent system must be stored in such a way that it is protected against frost damage
in winter or filled with antifreezing agent.
For operating and setting the silage additive system, see page 458.
Always adhere to the following cleaning intervals to prevent damage to the silage additive
system:
21.7
Silage additives
Cleaning interval
Aqueous solution with bacterial additive
monthly
Acidic solution
weekly
Solution containing airborne particles
After each use.
Dosing quantity of the silage additive system
Silage additive system with flow sensor
CAUTION
Damage to the flow sensor due to incorrect cleaning.
If the flow sensor is cleaned with compressed air, components may be damaged.
• Do not clean flow sensor with compressed air.
In case of poor flow rates, the pipe filter insert and the nozzle filter must be cleaned.
Silage additive system without flow sensor
The dosing quantity (l/min) can be regulated by using different nozzles.
652
spare part number
Colour coding
Dosing quantity at 1.8 bar
940 512 0
Orange nozzle
0.66 l/min
940 515 0
Red nozzle
0.93 l/min
940 517 0
Blue nozzle
1.88 l/min
Maintenance – Basic Machine
21.8
Cable winch
Fig. 595
• Check the rope of the cable winch
– The rope must not be bent.
– Check the rope pressure unit to ensure the rope is wound up correctly (windings next to
each other).
– Make sure no individual wires are broken.
– Check the rope is attached to the hook correctly (terminal).
– Make sure the hook is in correct working order (lock).
– Make sure the fastening bolts of the cable winch are tight.
• If the rope on the cable winch shows signs of damage, have it replaced at an authorised
service centre.
653
Maintenance – Engine
Maintenance – Engine
22

NOTE
Work on the engine not listed in this chapter may be performed only by a qualified service
centre which has access to the Workshop Information System (WIS).
A qualified service centre has the required technical knowledge, qualifications and tools to
perform the required work on the engine in a proper manner. This applies in particular to safetyrelevant work.
Always have the following work performed by a qualified service centre:
– Safety-relevant work
– Service and maintenance work
– Repair work
– Modifications as well as installations and conversions
– Working on electronic components
WARNING
If the basic safety instructions are not followed, people may be seriously injured or
killed.
• To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions in the chapter Safety must have been read
and followed, see chapter Safety "Basic safety instructions".
654
Maintenance – Engine
22.1
Contamination in the engine compartment
WARNING
Risk of fire due to dirt deposits in the engine compartment!
A mixture of dust, oil and plant residue inside the engine compartment is a source of fire and
presents an increased fire hazard.
• Always keep the engine compartment clean.
22.2
Cleaning the Engine Compartment with Compressed Air
WARNING
Eye damaged caused by flying dirt particles!
When cleaning with compressed air, dirt particles are ejected at high speed.
• Keep people away from the working area.
• Wear suitable work clothes when performing cleaning work with compressed air (e.g. eye
protection).
When necessary, blow away the dirt and contamination and wipe off oil deposits.
655
Maintenance – Engine
22.3
Engine oil level
CAUTION
Engine damage due to excessively low or high oil level!
If the oil level is too low, the amount of oil in the engine is too low, the lubrication points in the
engine are not adequately supplied and there is a risk of engine damage.
If the oil level is too high, the engine or the exhaust gas after-treatment system may be
damaged
• Check oil level according to engine maintenance table, see chapter Maintenance-engine
"Maintenance table-engine".
• Check oil level only when machine is in a horizontal position.
• Do not start the engine if the oil level is below the bottom mark (min. mark) of the oil
dipstick.
• Drain or extract oil which has been topped up too much.
656
Maintenance – Engine
22.3.1
Checking Engine Oil Level
Fig. 596
Check engine oil level
Check the engine oil level 5 to 10 minutes after switching off the engine.
Clean the oil dip stick with a lint-free cloth.
• Clean thoroughly around the oil dip stick.
• Pull out the oil dip stick, clean and push in completely.
• Pull out the oil dip stick and check the engine oil level.
If the engine oil level is indicated between the "min." and "max." marks, the engine oil level is
correct.
• Push in the oil dip stick.
• If the engine oil level is indicated below the "min" mark, fill with engine oil.
Filling with engine oil
Do not refill with engine oil while the engine is hot.
• Remove the cover.
• Top up the engine oil via the oil filling pipe up to the "max." mark.
• Screw on the cover.
• Run the engine at a low idling speed for a short time and switch off the engine.
• After approx. 5 to 10 minutes check the oil level, see chapter Checking engine oil level.

NOTE
For further information, refer to the provided documents “Operating instructions” and “Fuel
specification” of engine manufacturer, chapter Engine Oil.
657
Maintenance – Engine
22.4
Fuel system
22.5
Refuelling
CAUTION
If refuelling with unauthorised or contaminated fuel or with fuel which has a high sulphur
content, the engine and the exhaust gas after-treatment system will be damaged.
• Refuel only with standard, sulphur-free diesel fuel, diesel fuel EN 590.
• Do not refuel with contaminated fuel.
• See also the operating instructions of the engine manufacturer, chapter "Refuelling".
The following fuels are not permitted:
• Fuels containing more than 0.005% (50ppm) sulphur
• Marine diesel fuel
• Aviation turbine fuel
• Heating oil
• Fatty acid methyl ester FAME (bio-diesel fuels)

NOTE
To prevent the formation of condensation water and freezing in cold conditions, refuel daily at
the end of operation.

NOTE
Observe the information in the following, supplied documents:
• Engine operating instructions, chapter "Refuelling".
Fig. 597
Filling quantity: See chapter Description of machine "Consumables".
•
•
•
•
•
658
Shut down and safeguard the machine, see chapter Safety, "Shutting down and
safeguarding the machine".
Clean around the filler neck (1).
Unscrew the tank cap.
Fill the fuel tank with fuel.
Close the tank cap tight.
Maintenance – Engine
22.5.1
Replacing fuel prefilter with water separator – Drain condensation water
Fig. 598
Replacing fuel prefilter
The intermediate tank must be drained, as it will otherwise run empty.
• Attach the hose to the intermediate tank's drain cock and feed the other end into a collecting
vessel.
• Open the drain cock and empty the intermediate tank.
• Close the drain cock.
• Dismount the filter pan (2) and the filter cartridge (1).
• Clean the filter pan.
• Check the seal rings and replace them, if necessary.
• Wet the seal rings with fuel and insert them.
• Mount the filter cartridge (1) loosely with a new seal until the seal is positioned correctly.
• Tighten the filter cartridge (1) manually a three quarter turn.
• Mount the filter pan (2) with a new seal (tightening torque = 20 Nm).
• After assembly, fill the fuel system via hand pump.
• Vent the fuel system, see MAN maintenance instructions → “Venting fuel system”.
Draining condensation water
• Unscrew the drain screw (3).
• Allow the collected water to drain into a suitable container.
• Close the drain screw (3).
659
Maintenance – Engine
22.5.2
Replacing the fuel prefilter hand pump
Fig. 599
Fig. 600
Two hand pumps with fuel prefilter are mounted on the machine. The procedure for the
maintenance work is identical for both hand pumps.

NOTE
After carrying out maintenance work, the handwheel should always be at the bottom and thus
screwed in. Otherwise the fuel supply is not guaranteed.
The intermediate tank must be drained, as it will otherwise run empty.
• Attach the hose to the intermediate tank's drain cock and feed the other end into a collecting
vessel.
• Open the drain cock and empty the intermediate tank.
• Close the drain cock.
• Loosen the screw (4) at the bottom on the filter housing (3).
• Dismount the filter housing (3).
• Clean the filter housing (3) and the gauze filter, replace the gauze filter if it is heavily soiled
or damaged.
• Check the seal ring for the filter housing and replace it if necessary.
• Wet the seal ring with fuel and insert it.
• Insert the gauze filter in the filter housing (3).
• Mount the filter housing (3) (tightening torque = 10 Nm).
• To vent, perform pump movements with the handwheel (1) until the overflow valve audibly
opens.
• Screw the handwheel (1) in again.
660
Maintenance – Engine
22.5.3
Replacing the fuel filter insert
Fig. 601
BiG X 600-2/700 -2/770-2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
22.5.4
BiG X 850-2/1100-2
Open drain plug underneath on filter.
Allow the fuel to run out into a suitable vessel.
Close drain plug again.
Unscrew and clean the filter cover with round sealing ring.
Remove the filter insert.
Insert new filter insert into housing.
Install new round sealing ring on filter cover.
Screw in and tighten filter cover. Tightening torque is 25 Nm.
Vent the fuel system.
Venting the fuel system
The fuel system may have to be vented,
– after the filter element on the fuel prefilter was changed.
– after prolonged shutdown of the machine.
– after filling the previously drained fuel system.
See also the "engine manufacturer’s" operating instructions included with the delivery
(chapter on venting the fuel system).
661
Maintenance – Engine
22.6
Maintenance cooling system (engine)
WARNING
Risk of fire from anti-freeze!
If anti-freeze comes into contact with hot components in the warm engine compartment, it may
ignite. There is a risk of fire and injuries.
• Leave the engine to cool down before filling with anti-freeze.
• Keep anti-freeze away from the filler neck.
• Before starting the engine, thoroughly clean components contaminated with anti-freeze.
WARNING
Danger of injury due to scalding!
The engine cooling system is under pressure, especially when the engine is warm. If the cover
is opened when the engine is warm, hot coolant may spray out. There is risk of injury.
• Leave the engine to cool down before opening the cover.
• When opening the cover, wear suitable gloves and goggles.
• To relieve the pressure, open the cover by a half turn.
22.6.1

Coolant
NOTE
For the specified types of coolant, please refer to the consumable specifications!
https://mmrepro.mn.man.de/bstwebapp/BSTServlet. Use coolants according to company
standard 324 NF.
The engine cooling system is filled ex works with corrosion-inhibiting frost protection
agent/water. The coolant consists of 50% corrosion protection and antifreeze and 50% water.
The anti-freeze safety feature is guaranteed up to approx. -37°C.
•
Before the beginning of winter, always check the consistency of the anti-freeze.
If no coolant is available, then depending on the season, you should use a mixture of 50%
ethylene glycol antifreeze/anti-corrosion agent and 50% clear, soft water. This mixture also
offers corrosion protection and protection against freezing to -37°C.

NOTE
Cooling system density additives may not be used.
662
Maintenance – Engine
Checking coolant level
Fig. 602
• Check the coolant level in the compensation tank (1) in the viewing pane (2).
 The coolant must reach up to the middle of the viewing pane (2) ; refill coolant if
necessary.
Refilling coolant
• Turn the cover (3) on the filler neck of the compensation tank (1) to the right catch point and
allow residual pressure to escape slowly.
• Fully open the cover (3).
• Fill with coolant up to the middle of the viewing pane (2).
• Close the cover (3) on the filler neck of the overflow container.
• Check the coolant level again after running the engine for a few minutes.
Draining/replacing coolant
Fig. 603
The drain plug (1) for the coolant is located on the coolant pipe on the right side behind
the cooler.
• Provide a suitable collecting vessel (approx. 60 litres).
• Open the cover on the filler neck of the overflow container.
• Fit a hose onto the drain valve and place the other end in the collecting vessel.
• Open the drain plug (1) and drain the coolant.
• Close the drain plug (1).
• Remove the hose from the drain valve.
• Close the cover on the filler neck of the expansion reservoir.
663
Maintenance – Engine
Draining coolant at the engine
Fig. 604
A further drain plug (1) for coolant is located on the engine.
• Provide a suitable collecting vessel (approx. 60 litres).
• Open the cover on the filler neck of the overflow container.
• Dismount the cover on the drain valve (1). This allows the coolant to drain.
• Fit a hose (2) onto the drain valve and place the other end into the collecting vessel.
• Drain the coolant.
• Dismount the hose (2) from the drain valve.
• Mount the cover on the drain valve (1).
• Close the cover on the filler neck of the overflow container.

NOTE
Repeat this procedure on the opposite side.
664
Maintenance – Engine
22.7
Checking the engine pipework
Check pipework in the heating system
Fig. 605
• Check all hoses and hose connections for leaks and condition and replace if required.
665
Maintenance – Engine
Check pipework in the engine cooling system
Fig. 606
I
•
•
•
•
BiG X 600, 700
II
BiG X 850, 1100
Check all lines, hoses and sleeves for leaks and condition and replace if required.
The joint pin hose clamps are attached during the initial installation with a tightening torque
of 9 Nm.
Warm up the machine.
Retighten the joint pin hose clamps to a tightening torque of 10-11 Nm.
Check pipework in the clean air and charge air
Fig. 607
I
•
•
666
BiG X 600, 700
II
BiG X 850, 1100
Check all lines, hoses and sleeves for leaks and condition and replace if required.
Attach the joint pin hose clamps with a tightening torque of 10-12 Nm.
Maintenance – Engine
22.8
Air filter
CAUTION
If the machine is operated with a soiled or damaged air filter or safety cartridge, the
engine may be damaged.
• Clean or replace the air filter and the safety cartridge according to the maintenance table,
see chapter Maintenance – Engine "Maintenance table".
• Immediately replace a damaged air filter or a damaged safety cartridge.
• The safety cartridge must not be cleaned or re-used!
22.8.1.1
Cleaning air filter (BiG X 600-2, BiG X 700-2, BiG X 770-2)
Fig. 608
• Unscrew the nut (1) and remove the cover (2).
• Dismount the nut (3) and carefully remove the filter insert (4).
• Clean the interior and the sealing surfaces of the filter housing.
• Blow out the filter insert with compressed air (max. 5 bar) from the inside to the outside.
• Replace excessively soiled or damaged filter inserts as well as filter inserts that were
installed 4 or more years ago.
• Re-install the filter insert (4) and mount the nut (3).
• Mount the cover (2) and mount the nut (1).
667
Maintenance – Engine
22.8.1.2
Cleaning air filter (BiG X 850-2, BiG X 1100-2)
Fig. 609
• Release the clamps (2) and remove the cover (1).
• Remove the filter insert (3) by gently turning it.
• Clean the interior and the sealing surfaces of the filter housing.
• Blow out the filter insert with compressed air (max. 5 bar) from the inside to the outside.
• Replace excessively soiled or damaged filter inserts as well as filter inserts that were
installed 4 or more years ago.
• Re-install the filter insert (3).
• Install the cover (1) and lock the clamps (2).
Replacing safety cartridge(BiG X 600-2, BiG X 700-2, BiG X 770-2)
Note
Safety cartridges must not be cleaned and reused.
Fig. 610
• Dismount the nut (1) and remove the cover (2).
• Dismount the nut (3) and carefully remove the filter insert (4).
• Dismount the nut (5) and carefully remove the safety cartridge (6).
• Clean the interior and the sealing surfaces of the filter housing.
• Install new safety cartridge.
• Install cleaned or new filter element (4).
• Mount the cover (2) using nuts (1).
668
Maintenance – Engine
22.8.1.3
Replacing safety cartridge (BiG X 850-2,BiG X 1100-2)
Note
Safety cartridges must not be cleaned and reused.
Fig. 611
• Unlock clamps (2) and remove the cover (1).
• Remove the filter element (3).
• Pull out the safety cartridge (4) by gently turning it.
• Clean the interior and the sealing surfaces of the filter housing.
• Install the new safety cartridge (4).
• Install the cleaned or new filter element (3).
• Mount the cover (1) and secure with clamps (2).
669
Maintenance – compressed air system
23
Maintenance – compressed air system
WARNING
Risk of injury from escaping compressed air.
The compressed air system is under high pressure. Escaping compressed air may seriously
injure skin, limbs and eyes.
• Shut down and safeguard the machine, see chapter Safety, "Shutting down and
safeguarding the machine".
• Relieve the pressure in the compressed air system.
670
Maintenance – compressed air system
23.1
Compressed-air reservoir
WARNING
Risk of injury from corroded or damaged compressed air reservoirs.
Damaged or corroded pressure vessels may burst and cause serious injuries.
• Observe the inspection intervals according to the maintenance table, see chapter
Maintenance-Engine "Maintenance table".
• Have damaged or corroded compressed air reservoirs replaced immediately by a service
centre.
Fig. 612
BiG X 600-2/700-2/770-2
BiG X 850-2/1100-2
Condensation forms in the compressed air storage tank (1). The condensation water can lead to
malfunctions.
Drain condensation water
• Switch off diesel engine.
• Depressurise the compressed air storage tank (via a blow-out gun).
• Use the drain valve (2) to drain the condensation water collected in the compressed air
storage tank (1) into a suitable container.
Checking the compressed air reservoir
Have the interior area of the compressed air reservoir checked in accordance with national
requirements. A check is recommended at intervals of 2 years.
• Check the tensioning straps on the compressed air storage tank are secure. If necessary,
tighten using the nuts.
23.1.1
Checking the drain valve
•
•
•
Switch off and secure the machine
Open the drain valve and allow the condensation water to run out
Check the drain valve, clean it and screw it in again
671
Maintenance – supply system
24
Maintenance – supply system
24.1
Feed Attachment
24.1.1
Remove the feed attachment with front attachment
The intake can be removed with the front attachment mounted; it must be folded down in the
case of the 2-part EasyCollect.

NOTE
Install and remove the intake on a level surface with load bearing ground.
Sufficient space must be available at the side for manoeuvring the machine.
•
•
Place the intake with front attachment on the ground
Switch off the engine
Preparation
Fig. 613
•
Ignition on Level I, do not start diesel engine and press red momentary switch
blue momentary switch
front attachment.
•
•
672
and
(2) simultaneously to depressurise the hydraulic lines of the
Press both momentary switches for the pendulum frame
and
(1) simultaneously
to depressurise the hydraulic lines of the pendulum frame. This is necessary if a hydraulic
cylinder is mounted (EasyCollect)
Shut down and secure the machine, see page 38.
Maintenance – supply system
WARNING
Risk of injury when working on the lifting unit!
When working on the lifting unit or when opening/closing the stop cocks on the lifting cylinders,
the lifting unit and attached components may perform unexpected movements. As a result,
people may be injured.
• To secure the lifting unit from unintentionally lowering, close the stop cocks.
• To reach the stop cocks safely, swivel open the tool box, go under the machine and actuate
the stop cocks.
Fig. 614
• Close two-way stopcock (1) and three-way stopcock (2), see information label.
Fig. 615
• Check whether the pendulum frame holder (2) of the front attachment is located correctly in
the holder (1) of the pendulum frame and the locking hook (3) is correctly closed.
• Lock the pendulum frame with bolt (4) and secure with spring locking pin.
673
Maintenance – supply system
Fig. 616

NOTE
The connections of the hydraulic lines are located at front left, optionally a cylinder can be
installed for the pendulum frame, the connections (4) for this are located at front right.
The system must be depressurised when removing the hydraulic lines (3, 4).
• Disconnect the hydraulic lines (3, 4) on the hydraulic couplings and close off with dust caps.
• Remove the lighting cable plug (2) and the connection line plug of the front attachment
sensors (1) and close off with dust caps.
Fig. 617
• Pull off the universal shaft (2) for the front attachment drive
• Pull off the universal shaft (1) for the intake drive
674
Maintenance – supply system
Fig. 618
• Pull off the compressed air line from the blowing device (1).
• Loosen the plug for the RockProtect and CropControl (2) options.
• Pull off the connection lines for the central lubrication (3).
• Pull off the connector cable to the chopping drum unit (4).
Fig. 619
• Pull off the plug (1) on the connector cable for the metal detection sensor and pendulum
frame.
• Open the two-way stopcock and three-way stopcock.
• Start the engine.
• Move the traction drive release switch to position "off".
• Move the field release switch to position "on".
Fig. 620
• Loosen the coupling rods (2) by pulling the bolt (1). Use the keys (3) to relieve the coupling
rods.
• Lower the lifting unit completely using the keys (3).
• Switch off the engine.
675
Maintenance – supply system
Fig. 621
• Loosen the counter nut (1) and screw of the interlocking claws (2) and open interlocking
claws.
• Start the engine.
• Raise the lifting unit until the distance between the intake and chopping drum housing is
approx. 200 mm.
• Switch off the engine.
Fig. 622
• Close two-way stopcock (3) and three-way stopcock (4), see information label.
Fig. 623
• Dismount the spring locking pin (2) on the support jacks (1). Pull out the support jacks (1)
down to the ground and secure with spring locking pins (2).
676
Maintenance – supply system
Fig. 624
• Unscrew the fastening screw (1) on the lock on the left-hand side of the machine.
• Open the lock (2).
Fig. 625
• Move three-way stopcock (2) to "Maize" position, see information label.
• Open the two-way stopcock (1), see the information label
• Start the engine.
• Continue lowering the lifting unit with the keys (3) until the intake is free.
• Switch the release switch traction drive to the "on" position.
• Carefully reverse the machine.
• Ensure that no lines or cables are trapped.
677
Maintenance – supply system
24.1.2
Attaching the feed attachment with front attachment
Fig. 626
• Move three-way stopcock (1) to "Maize" position, see information label
Fig. 627
• Check the locating points at the intake and the machine for contamination and clean them if
necessary.
• Ensure that no lines or cables become jammed.
• Move the machine up to the intake.
• Raise the lifting unit using the keys (3) until the intake is correctly received by the retainer
hooks of the chopping drum housing.
• Raise the lifting unit slightly until the support jacks are free.
Fig. 628
• Switch off the engine.
• Close two-way stopcock (1) and three-way stopcock (2), see information label.
678
Maintenance – supply system
Fig. 629
• Close the lock (2) on the left side of the machine.
• Mount the screw (1).
Fig. 630
• Push up the support jacks (1) of the intake and secure with spring locking pins (2) or
unscrew the support jacks completely.
Fig. 631
• Open two-way stopcock (3) and three-way stopcock (4), see information label
• Start the engine.
• Move the traction drive release switch to position "off".
• Move the field release switch to position "on".
679
Maintenance – supply system
Fig. 632
• Lower the lifting unit completely using the keys (3).
• Ensure that no lines or cables become jammed.
• Switch off the engine.
Fig. 633
• Close the interlocking claws (2). To prevent the screws from becoming loose during
subsequent operation, the screws must be seated in the recesses in the frame.
• Tighten screws and secure with counter nut (1)
• Start the engine.
• Using the keys (5), move the lifting unit to the correct position
• Attach coupling rods (4) to the pendulum frame with bolts (3) and secure with linch pin.
• Switch off the engine.
680
Maintenance – supply system
Fig. 634
• Connect the hose of the compressed air line blowing device (1).
• Connect plug of the RockProtect and CropControl (2) options.
• Connect the connection lines to the central lubrication (3), ensuring that the lines are
installed and attached correctly.
• Connect the connector cable to the chopping drum unit (4).
Fig. 635

NOTE
The connections of the hydraulic lines are located at front left, optionally a cylinder can be
installed for the pendulum frame, the connections (4) for this are located at front right.
The system must be depressurised when removing the hydraulic lines (3, 4).
• Disconnect the hydraulic lines (3, 4) on the hydraulic couplings and close off with dust caps.
• Remove the lighting cable plug (2) and the connection line plug of the front attachment
sensors (1) and close off with dust caps.
681
Maintenance – supply system
Fig. 636
• Connect the connector cable plug (1) for the metal detection sensor and pendulum frame.
Fig. 637
• Connect the universal shaft (1) for the intake drive.
• Connect the universal shaft (2) for the front attachment drive.
• Move the three-way stopcock (3) into the required working position.
682
Maintenance – supply system
24.1.3
Remove the feed attachment with installation cart
WARNING
Risk of injury when working on the lifting unit!
When working on the lifting unit or when opening/closing the stop cocks on the lifting cylinders,
the lifting unit and attached components may perform unexpected movements. As a result,
people may be injured.
• To secure the lifting unit from unintentionally lowering, close the stop cocks.
• To reach the stop cocks safely, swivel open the tool box, go under the machine and actuate
the stop cocks.
Prerequisites:
– The front attachment is removed, see the separate operating instructions for the front
attachment.
Fig. 638
• Move three-way stopcock (1) to "Maize" position, see information label.
• Start the engine.
• Move the traction drive release switch to position "off".
• Move the field release switch to position "on".
• Move lifting unit all the way up.
• Switch off the engine.
683
Maintenance – supply system
Fig. 639
• Close two-way stopcock (1) and three-way stopcock (2), see information label.
Fig. 640
• Remove universal shaft (1) for the drive of the intake.

NOTE
Parking jacks of the intake must be fitted and pushed in all the way.
Depending on the tyre size, it may be necessary to adjust the support jacks.
•
•
Open two-way stopcock and three-way stopcock, see information label.
Start the engine.
Fig. 641
• Fold in the support jacks of the installation cart.
• Push the installation cart (1) under the intake.
• Lower the lifting unit using the keys (3).
• Hook the installation cart (1) into the header locking and lock
684
Maintenance – supply system
Fig. 642
• Loosen the coupling rods (2) by pulling the bolts (1), the Raise/lower lifting unit pushbuttons
can be used to relieve the coupling rods.
• Lower the lifting unit completely.
• Switch off the engine.
Fig. 643
• Pull off the compressed air line from the blowing device (1).
• Loosen the plug for the RockProtect and CropControl (2) options.
• Pull off the connection lines for the central lubrication (3).
• Pull off the connector cable to the chopping drum unit (4).
Fig. 644

NOTE
Optionally a cylinder can be installed for the pendulum frame, the connections (1) for this are
located at front right.
The system must be depressurised when removing the hydraulic lines.
• Disconnect the hydraulic lines (1) on the hydraulic couplings and close off with dust caps.
685
Maintenance – supply system
Fig. 645
• Pull off the plug (1) on the connector cable for the metal detection sensor and pendulum
frame.
Fig. 646
• Loosen counter nut (1) and screw of the interlocking claws (2) and open interlocking claws.
Fig. 647
• Start the engine
• Raise lifting unit and fold up and secure the supports of the installation cart (1)

NOTE
Depending on the tyre size, it may be necessary to adjust the parking jacks of the intake.
•
•
686
Lower lifting unit until the supports of the intake are almost positioned on the installation
cart.
Switch off the engine.
Maintenance – supply system
Fig. 648
• Close two-way stopcock (1) and three-way stopcock (2), see information label.
Fig. 649
• Unscrew the screw (3).
• Open the lock (4).
• Move three-way stopcock (2) to "Maize" position, see information label.
• Open two-way stopcock (1), see information label.
• Start the engine.
• Continue lowering the lifting unit until the intake is free.

NOTE
Ensure that the parking jacks of the intake are positioned correctly on the supports of the
installation cart.
•
•
Pull the intake forwards.
Ensure that no lines or cables are trapped.
687
Maintenance – supply system
24.1.4
Attaching the feed attachment with installation cart
Fig. 650
• Move three-way stopcock (1) to "Maize" position, see information label.
• Start the engine.
• Move the traction drive release switch to position "off".
• Move the field release switch to position "on".
Fig. 651
• Move intake up to the machine and raise lifting unit using the keys (3) until the intake is
correctly received by the holder of the cutting drum frame.
• Ensure that no lines or cables become trapped.
• Raise the lifting unit slightly until the support jacks are free.
688
Maintenance – supply system
Fig. 652
• Switch off the engine.
• Close two-way stopcock (1) and three-way stopcock (2), see information label.
Fig. 653
• Switch the lock (4)
• Mount the screw (3)
• Fold in the supports on the installation cart if they have been adjusted.
• Fully insert the supports of the intake.
• Open two-way stopcock (1) and three-way stopcock (2), see information label.
• Start the engine
• Lower the lifting unit completely.
• Switch off the engine.
689
Maintenance – supply system
Fig. 654
• Close the interlocking claws (2).
• Tighten screws and secure with counter nut (1). To prevent the screws from becoming
loose, the screws must be seated in the recesses in the frame.
• Attach coupling rods (4) to the pendulum frame with bolts (3) and secure with linch pin
• Take installation cart out of the lock and push away.
Fig. 655
• Connect the hose of the compressed air line blowing device (1).
• Connect plug of the RockProtect and CropControl (2) options.
• Connect the connection lines to the central lubrication (3), ensuring that the lines are
installed and attached correctly. Ensure that the line for the chopping drum is connected at
the top and the line for the intake is connected at the bottom.
• Connect the connector cable to the chopping drum unit (4).
690
Maintenance – supply system
Fig. 656
• Connect the lines (1) of the pendulum frame (if installed).
Fig. 657
• Connect the connector cable plug (1) for the metal detection sensor and pendulum frame.
• Start the engine.
Fig. 658
• Using the keys (3), move the lifting unit to the top.
• Switch off the engine.
691
Maintenance – supply system
Fig. 659
• Close two-way stopcock (1) and three-way stopcock (2), see information label.
Fig. 660
• Connect universal shaft for the drive of the intake (1).
Fig. 661
• Move three-way stopcock (2) to the required position, see information label.
• Open two-way stopcock (1), see information label.
692
Maintenance – supply system
24.2
Grinding the cutting blade
WARNING
Risk of injury from exposed, rotating cutting drum!
The cutting blades can be ground only when the cutting drum is rotating. During the grinding
process not all rotating parts of the cutting drum and drive can be completely encased. This
means there is an increased risk of injury.
• During the grinding process ensure that all other safety devices are in the protective
position and that all maintenance openings are closed.
• During the grinding process the operator must be either on the driver's seat in the cab or in
the area of the grinding control unit on the left next to the platform.
• During the grinding process ensure that nobody is in the area of the cutting drum or
reaches into the rotating cutting blades.
WARNING
Risk of injury from sharp cutting blades!
When performing maintenance work on the cutting drum, there is a risk of the operators being
injured by the sharp cutting blades.
• When working on the cutting drum, work particularly carefully and prudently.
• Always wear work gloves when working on the cutting drum.
WARNING
Risk of fire due to deposits in the grinding channel!
A mixture of dust, grass and chaff in the grinding channel is a source of fire and means an
increased fire risk during the grinding process.
• Before grinding the cutting blades, check the automatic re-adjustment of the grinding stone
and clean the grinding channel.
CAUTION
Damage to the grinding stone due to water retention!
The grinding stone must not become wet, as water retention in freezing temperatures will cause
the grinding stone to break during the grinding process.
• Do not wet the grinding stone with water.
• Open the cover hood for maintenance work only, otherwise keep it closed.
693
Maintenance – supply system
Dull cutting blades and too great a distance between the cutting blade and the counterblade will
result in an unnecessarily high power demand, poor chop quality and high wear on the cutting
elements.
Therefore the worn cutting blades must be ground with the grinding device of the forage
harvester and then the counterblade must be re-adjusted.
The frequency and the duration of the grinding process depend on the application conditions.
In principle, short grinding intervals with a short grinding duration and corresponding
counterblade adjustment are recommended.
– To ensure that the cutting blades for the maize operation achieve a very good selfsharpening effect, they must not be "fully ground", i.e. the blade should not be ground down
to the cutting edge. This will cause the base material to wear more quickly than the coating
and an aggressive cutting edge will be formed, the so-called "mouse tooth".
– On account of the application conditions, the self-sharpening effect of the cutting blades for
grass operation is difficult to achieve, as is the case with the cutting blades for maize
operation. The blades must therefore be "fully ground", i.e. the blade should be ground
down to the cutting edge.
Before grinding the cutting blades, check the automatic re-adjustment of the grinding stone and
clean the grinding channel.
694
Maintenance – supply system
Preparing to grind using manual operation
Prerequisites:
– The machine is secured from rolling away with wheel chocks.
– The engine is started and is idling.
– The parking brake is applied.
– The main coupling is switched on.
– The release switch traction drive (2) is in the "off" position.
– The release switch road/field (1) is in the "field mode" position.
Fig. 662
The front attachment must be on the ground for the grinding process.
• Press the "Manually lower lifting unit" key (1) on the control lever until the front attachment
is on the ground.
• Switch the maintenance release switch to the "on" position,
Main menu 3 "Maintenance" appears in the display of the info centre.
If the lifting unit is not resting completely on the ground, the information message "546 Lifting
unit too high" appears.
Adjusting the number of grinding cycles
(Factory setting 20)
See the info centre, menu 3-2 "Changing the number of grinding cycles", see page 253.
695
Maintenance – supply system
Running the grinding process
Fig. 663
• Activate the "Open grinding flap" key (4).
The grinding flap opens.
• Activate the "Automatic grinding operation" key (6).
The pre-set number of grinding cycles is performed. After the end of the grinding process, the
grinding stone moves to its parking position (the right side of the grinding device).
• Activate the "Close grinding flap" key (3).
The grinding flap closes.
Readjusting the counterblade
When the grinding process is complete, the counterblade must be re-adjusted while the
chopping drum is running.
• Very briefly press alternately the "Move counterblade right to chopping drum" key (1) and
the "Move counterblade left to chopping drum" key (2).
• If there is a noise when readjusting one side (right/left) (blades striking the counterblade!),
release the key immediately and very briefly press the appropriate key "Move counterblade
away from chopping drum" (7 or 8).
• Follow the same procedure to block the counterblade on the other side.
After you have readjusted the counterblade, the chopping drum must run without making
any noise.
• Lift the front attachment.

NOTE
If there is no noise while the counterblade is being re-adjusted, the blades must be re-adjusted
or worn blades and blades which can no longer be re-adjusted must be replaced, see chapter
Maintenance, "Re-adjusting or replacing cutting blades".
696
Maintenance – supply system
24.3
Re-adjusting or replacing the grinding stone
WARNING
Risk of injury due to rotating cutting drum!
If the flap of the grinding device is opened while the cutting drum is rotating, there is a risk of
injury from the sharp, rotating cutting blades.
• Do not open the flap of the grinding device until the cutting drum has come to a standstill.
WARNING
Risk of fire due to deposits in the grinding channel!
A mixture of dust, grass and chaff in the grinding channel is a source of fire and means an
increased fire risk during the grinding process.
• Before grinding the cutting blades, check the automatic re-adjustment of the grinding stone
and clean the grinding channel.
The grinding stone of the grinding device is automatically re-adjusted during the grinding
process.
If automatic re-adjustment no longer occurs, the grinding stone must be re-adjusted.
The grinding stone can be re-adjusted 3 – 4 times, then the grinding stone must be replaced.

NOTE
Check the grinding stone for damage and wear and replace if required. These may cause the
grinding stone to run noisily, resulting in an uneven grinding pattern.
697
Maintenance – supply system
24.3.1
Checking the grinding stone
Fig. 664
•
Shut down and safeguard the machine, see chapter Safety, "Shutting down and
safeguarding the machine".
•
Open the flap (1) of the grinding device (2).
• Clean the grinding channel (1) (e.g. blow out with compressed air).
• Measure the visible thread length of the grinding device (dimension a).
If dimension a is ≥ 5 mm, the grinding stone setting is correct and the grinding process can be
started.
• Close the flap of the grinding device again.
If dimension a < 5 mm, the grinding stone must be re-adjusted or replaced, see chapter
Maintenance-Supply system, "Re-adjusting or replacing the grinding stone".
698
Maintenance – supply system
24.3.2
Re-adjusting the grinding stone
CAUTION
Damage to cutting drum and grinding device due to incorrect operation!
If there is no free travel to the cutting drum when the grinding stone has been re-adjusted, there
is a risk of collision between the grinding stone and cutting blade.
• After re-adjusting the grinding stone, check and observe dimension b – 2 from the lower
edge of the grinding stone to the lower edge of the grinding slide.
CAUTION
Damage to the grinding device due to incorrect operation!
If the detent pin is not removed again when the grinding stone has been re-adjusted, it will be
damaged during the next automatic grinding process.
• After re-adjusting the grinding stone, always lift the detent pin and rotate it by 90°.
Fig. 665
• If dimension "a" is less than 5 mm, the grinding stone must be readjusted or replaced.

NOTE
If the dimension "a" is less than 5 mm and further grinding is performed, the ratchet wheel runs
against the stop (fixed).
•
•
Unscrew the screw (1).
Remove the pawl (2).
699
Maintenance – supply system
Fig. 666
• Determine the distance "b" from the lower edge of the grinding stone to the lower edge of
the grinding slide.
• Allow the detent pin (1) to lock into place by turning it 90° degrees.
• Measure the distance "z" (upper edge of grinding stone to upper edge of hexagon nut on
the ratchet wheel) through the nut.
• Turn back the ratchet wheel (2) until the detent pin (1) engages.
• Turn the ratchet wheel (2) further back until the detent pin (1) has completely engaged and
the grinding stone adjustment is locked in place.
• Continue turning the ratchet wheel to loosen the grinding stone clamp.
• Press the grinding stone from above to the previously determined dimension "b" -2 mm.
• Tension the grinding stone with the ratchet wheel (tightening torque 180 Nm).
• Check the dimension "b" (- 2 mm).
• Check whether the dimension "z" is less than 100 mm. If not, replace the grinding stone is it
will not hold in the clamp.
• Mount the pawl.
• Reset the grinding cycle counter in the info centre.

700
NOTE
The grinding stone should always be higher than the chopping blade – risk of collision!
Maintenance – supply system
24.3.3
Replacing the grinding stone
If the grinding stone (1) is worn to such an extent that it can no longer be re-adjusted, the
grinding stone must be replaced.
If the grinding stone (1) is replaced, the clamping rings (3) must also be replaced.
Fig. 667
• Every time you replace the grinding stone, replace the clamping rings (3).

NOTE
Every time a new grinding stone (1) is installed, make sure the components are correctly
arranged.
The clamping rings (3), intermediate ring (4) and sleeve (5) must be mounted as shown above.
The chamfers of the intermediate ring (4) and the sleeve (5) must be pointing downwards.
Fig. 668
• Unscrew the screw (3).
• Remove the pawl (2).
• Determine the distance "b" from the lower edge of the grinding stone to the lower edge of
the grinding slide.
• Allow the detent pin (4) to lock into place by turning it 90° degrees.
• Turn back the ratchet wheel (1) until the detent pin (4) engages.
• Turn the ratchet wheel (1) further back until the detent pin (4) has completely engaged and
the grinding stone adjustment is locked in place.
• To loosen the grinding stone clamp, continue turning the ratchet wheel (1).
• Remove the ratchet wheel (1).
• Pull out and remove the grinding stone from below.
701
Maintenance – supply system
Fig. 669
• Insert the new grinding stone (2) with new clamping rings from above.
• Set the grinding stone to the previously determined dimension "b" - 2 mm.
• Tension the grinding stone with the ratchet wheel (tightening torque 180 Nm).
• Unscrew the detent pin (3), rotate it 90° and lock it in this position.
• Mount the adjustment sheet (1).
• Close the sharpening device side guard.
• Check again whether the dimension "b" - is 2 mm.

NOTE
The grinding stone should always be higher than the chopping blade – risk of collision!
•
702
Reset the grinding cycle counter in the info centre.
Maintenance – supply system
24.4
Re-adjusting or changing the cutting blades
WARNING
Risk of injury from sharp cutting blades!
When performing maintenance work on the cutting drum, there is a risk of the operators being
injured by the sharp cutting blades.
• When working on the cutting drum, work particularly carefully and prudently.
• Always wear work gloves when working on the cutting drum.
• Turn the cutting drum clockwise on the belt pulley only and, when the correct position is
reached, lock with the locking bolt.
Prerequisites:
– The feed attachment is removed, see page 672.
– The machine is shut down and secured, see page 38.
Abb. 670
Worn cutting blades may result in an unsatisfactory chop quality. To keep wear as low as
possible, the cutting blades must be ground correctly and regularly and the distance between
the counterblade and the cutting blades (cutting gap) must be adjusted correctly and regularly,
see chapter Maintenance-Supply system, "Grinding cutting blades".
The cutting blades must be replaced if they can no longer be re-adjusted and the coating (a)
under the cutting blade is worn. In the original state the coating "a"=19 mm.
The cutting drum operates particularly efficiently if the maximum cutting radius and conveying
space can be used. Therefore the cutting blades should be re-adjusted if
dimension "a"<10-12 mm.
703
Maintenance – supply system
24.4.1
Rotating the chopping drum
Relieving the power belt for the main belt drive
To make the chopping drum easier to rotate, the power belt for the main belt drive must be
relieved.
• Briefly start up the machine to fill the accumulator.
• Shut down and secure the machine, see page 38.
Fig. 671
The separating box (1) is located behind the side flap at the front left.
Fig. 672
• To expose the openings on the right in the separating box, rotate the two spring-loaded
swivelling covers (1) away.
• Simultaneously actuate the valves in the openings with finger pressure. Press the upper
block down and the lower valve block up.
The power belt is relieved and the chopping drum can be rotated.
• Close off the openings in the separating box with the swivelling covers.

NOTE
When you restart the machine, the power belt for the main belt drive is tensioned again.
704
Maintenance – supply system
Rotating the chopping drum
Fig. 673
• Move the chopping drum (1) with a suitable tool. In this case, use the counterblade as a
holding surface.
24.4.2
Re-adjusting or changing the chopping blades on chopping drums with 20, 28, 36 blades
Locking the cutting drum
The locking device is on the right side of the cutting drum.
1
2
BX750036
Fig. 674
The cutting drum (1) has a locking hole (2) for each working position.
2
1
2
BX750048
BX750049
Fig. 675
•
•
•
•
Rotate the chopping drum (1) to the desired working position.
The lever (3) is located on the right-hand side above the connector plug for the intake unit,
push it on the locking bolt (2).
Pull out spring cotter pin (4).
Push the locking bolt (2) all the way towards the chopping drum by using the lever (3) and
rotate it one quarter turn clockwise.
705
Maintenance – supply system
Readjusting the cutting blades
CAUTION
Damage to the machine due to screwing in defective screws!
If the old fastening bolts are screwed in after changing the cutting blades, there is a risk that
these bolts may be damaged and fail during operation, possibly damaging the machine.
• Whenever blades are changed, use new screws to attach the cutting blades.
To sharpen the cutting blades with as few grinding cycles as possible, the cutting blades must
be adjusted to the grinding device.
1
2
BX750037
Fig. 676
•
•
Grind the chopping blades (1) with the grinding device, see page 693.
Using manual operation, set the counterblade (2) parallel to the ground area of the blade,
see page 696.
2
a
6
90°
3
BX750038
Fig. 677
•
•
•
•
706
Measure the distance from the counterblade (3) to the drum shell (6) on the right and left
side of the chopping drum.
Determine the differential between the two measurements and taken into account in the
following adjustment of the counterblade (3).
Adjust the counterblade so that there is a maximum distance of a = 87-89 mm between the
counterblade (3) and the drum body (6).
Unscrew all hexagonal head screws (2) on one blade.
Maintenance – supply system
Fig. 678
• Re-adjust the blade (1) to the counterblade (3):
– Screw on a 17 mm ring spanner (7) with a screw and disc on the eccentric (8).
– Insert the eccentric into the borehole (4) of the blade carrier (5) and adjust the
counterblade on both sides by turning the ring spanner until the distance dimension of
0.1 mm between the blade and counterblade is reached.
• Tighten all hexagonal head screws on the blade using a spanner (torque 280 Nm).
• Loosen the locking device on the chopping drum, rotate the chopping drum by one row of
knives and lock again.
• Re-adjust the blades on the next row of knives.
• Continue in this manner until all rows of knives on the chopping drum have been readjusted evenly.
• Loosen the locking device on the chopping drum.
• Set the grinding stone so that there is a distance of 0.5 mm between the blade back and the
grinding stone, see page 697.
• Move the counterblade (3) on both sides back slightly, evenly on the left and right.
• Attach the feed attachment, see page 672.
• Grind the chopping blades, see page 693.
• Block the counterblade, see page 696.
707
Maintenance – supply system
Replacing the cutting blades
Worn and damaged cutting blades must be replaced.
CAUTION
Damage to the machine due to installation of dirty components!
If dirty cutting blades and screw-on strips are installed, there is a risk of the cutting blades
becoming detached from the blade drum and damaging components of the machine.
• Clean all parts before installing them.
CAUTION
Damage to the machine due to screwing in defective screws!
If the old fastening bolts are screwed in after changing the cutting blades, there is a risk that
these bolts may be damaged and fail during operation, possibly damaging the machine.
• Whenever blades are changed, use new screws to attach the cutting blades.
WARNING
Risk of injury due to sharp parts!
There is a danger of injury when working on the chopping drum as the edges of the screw-on
strips are very sharp.
• Always wear safety gloves when working in the area of the screw-on strips.
14
13
12
4
11
5
10
6
9
8
Fig. 679

NOTE
To avoid imbalances of the chopping drum:
• The chopping blades and screw-on strips must always be replaced in pairs.
Replace both blades and both screw-on strips each which are located on the chopping
drum offset by 180°
(e.g. blade 1 and blade 6 in case of a chopping drum with 20 blades,
Blade 1 and blade 8 in case of a chopping drum with 28 blades,
Blade 1 and blade 10 in case of a chopping drum with 36 blades).
The blades and screw-on strips which form a pair depend on the total number of
blades.
• Mount a set of dismounted screw-on strips in the same order as before disassembly on
the chopping drum again.
708
Maintenance – supply system
7
7
7
2
9
1
BX750041
BX750042
2
a
6
90°
3
BX750038
Fig. 680
To replace the chopping blade:
• Grind chopping blades (1), refer to chapter Operation “Grinding the Chopping Blades”.
• Block counterblade (3) via manual operation on the platform in parallel to the dimension
a = 87 – 89 mm to the drum shell (6), (dimension measured in parallel to the upper edge of
the counterblades), refer to chapter Operation “Blocking the Counterblade”.
• Screw out hexagon head screws (2).
• Pull out chopping blade to the front.
• Clean blade carrier (7) and screw-on strip (9).
• Check screw-on strip (9) for damage and wear and replace it, if necessary.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Loosen the locking device on the chopping drum, rotate the chopping drum by one row of
knives and lock again.
Re-adjust the blades on the next row of knives.
Continue in this manner until all rows of knives on the chopping drum have been readjusted evenly.
Loosen the locking device on the chopping drum.
Set the grinding stone so that there is a distance of 0.5 mm between the blade back and the
grinding stone, see page 697.
Attach the feed attachment, see page 672.
Grind the chopping blades, see page 693.
Re-adjust the counterblade, see page 696.
709
Maintenance – supply system
2c
2a
7
2b
1
1
9
2
BX480592
3
BX750043
Fig. 681
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
710
When inserting blind blades (1), mind the installation position, the notch (2) must be located
outside and front, in the direction of travel. The further fastening is identical to the assembly
of the chopping blades, as described below.
Insert a new chopping blade with new screws (2).
The centre screw (2a) must remain released.
Screw a ring spanner (W/F 17) with screw and disc on the eccentric included with delivery.
The eccentric is located in direction of travel left on the chopping drum housing, also refer to
Maintenance - Feed System “Readjusting the Chopping Blade”.
Insert the eccentric in the bore hole of the blade carrier (7).
Tighten the outer screws (2b, 2c) until the blade can be brought into position without play by
turning the eccentric.
Adjust the blade by moving the ring spanner.
Set the distance from blade to counterblade (3) to a dimension of 0.1 mm.
Tighten the screws in the sequence 2a, 2b, 2c (from inside to outside) with a torque of 280
Nm.
Loosen the locking device on the chopping drum, rotate the chopping drum by one row of
knives and lock again.
Re-adjust the blades on the next row of knives.
Continue in this manner until all rows of knives on the chopping drum have been readjusted evenly.
Loosen the locking device on the chopping drum.
Set the grinding stone so that there is a distance of 0.5 mm between the blade back and the
grinding stone, see page 697.
Attach the feed attachment,see page 672.
Grind the chopping blades, see page 693.
Re-adjust the counterblade, see page 696.
Maintenance – supply system
24.4.3
Re-adjusting or changing the chopping blades on chopping drums with 40, 48 blades
24.4.3.1
Locking the chopping drum
The locking device is located on the right side of the chopping drum.
Fig. 682
The cutting drum (1) has a locking hole (2) for each working position.
Fig. 683
•
•
•
Rotate the chopping drum to the required working position.
Slide the locking bolt (1) into the borehole on the chopping drum.
Secure the position by turning the locking bolt with the clamping sleeve.
711
Maintenance – supply system
24.4.3.2
Readjusting the Cutting Blades
Fig. 684
•
Loosen the spring assembly (1) to make the counterblade support tension-free. Then
tighten the spring assembly again with a torque of 65-75 Nm.
Fig. 685
To sharpen the cutting blades with as few grinding cycles as possible, the cutting blades must
be adjusted to the grinding device.
•
•
712
Grind the chopping blades (1) with the grinding device, see page 693.
Using manual operation, set the counterblade (2) parallel to the ground area of the blade,
see page 696.
Maintenance – supply system
Fig. 686
•
•
•
Measure the distance (a) from the counterblade (2) to the drum shell on the right and left
side of the chopping drum.
Determine the differential between the two measurements and taken into account in the
following adjustment of the counterblade (2).
Adjust the counterblade so that there is a maximum distance of a = 80-82 mm between the
counterblade (2) and the drum body.
Fig. 687
•
•
•
•
•

Tighten all hexagon head screws (2) using a torque wrench in the sequence 3a; 3b; 3c; 2a;
2b (tightening torque 280 Nm).
Loosen the chopping drum locking mechanism, turn the chopping drum one row of knives
further and lock again.
Re-adjust the next row of knives.
Continue in this manner until all rows of knives on the chopping drum have been readjusted evenly.
Loosen the chopping drum locking mechanism.
NOTE
The grinding stone will be destroyed if it is not adjusted in line with the re-adjusted cutter
blades.
•
•
•
•
Set the grinding stone so that there is a distance of 0.5 mm between the blade back and the
grinding stone, see page 697.
Attach the feed attachment, see page 672.
Grind the chopping blades, see page 693.
Re-adjust the counterblade, see page 696.
713
Maintenance – supply system
24.4.3.3
Changing Cutting Blades
CAUTION
Damage to the machine due to installation of dirty components!
If dirty cutting blades and screw-on strips are installed, there is a risk of the cutting blades
becoming detached from the blade drum and damaging components of the machine.
• Clean all parts before installing them.
CAUTION
Damage to the machine due to screwing in defective screws!
If the old fastening bolts are screwed in after changing the cutting blades, there is a risk that
these bolts may be damaged and fail during operation, possibly damaging the machine.
• Whenever blades are changed, use new screws to attach the cutting blades.
WARNING
Risk of injury due to sharp parts!
There is a danger of injury when working on the chopping drum as the edges of the screw-on
strips are very sharp.
• Always wear safety gloves when working in the area of the screw-on strips.
14
13
12
4
11
5
10
6
9
8
Fig. 688

NOTE
To avoid imbalances of the chopping drum:
• The chopping blades and screw-on strips must always be replaced in pairs.
Replace both blades and both screw-on strips each which are located on the chopping
drum offset by 180°
(e.g. blade 1 and blade 6 in case of a chopping drum with 20 blades,
Blade 1 and blade 8 in case of a chopping drum with 28 blades,
Blade 1 and blade 10 in case of a chopping drum with 36 blades).
The blades and screw-on strips which form a pair depend on the total number of
blades.
• Mount a set of dismounted screw-on strips in the same order as before disassembly on
the chopping drum again.
714
Maintenance – supply system
Removing the chopping blade
Fig. 689
•
•
•
Measure the distance (a) from the counterblade (2) to the drum shell on the right and left
side of the chopping drum.
Determine the differential between the two measurements and taken into account in the
following adjustment of the counterblade (2).
Adjust the counterblade so that there is a maximum distance of a = 80-82 mm between the
counterblade (2) and the drum body.
Abb. 690
•
•
•
•
Unscrew the hexagonal head screws (1).
Remove the chopping blade (2), the perforated plate (4) and the screw bar (3).
Clean the blade carrier (5) and the screw bar (3).
Check the screw bar (3) for damage and wear, and replace it if necessary.
715
Maintenance – supply system
Inserting Cutting Blades
WARNING
Risk of injury due to incorrectly attached components!
Components that are not attached may become detached, causing series injuries to people or
damage to the machine.
• Whenever you change a blade, clean the blade carriers, perforated plates and the blades.
• Whenever you change a blade, you must use new screws and perforated plates.
• After mounting the blades, check the tightening torque of the screws and re-tighten if
necessary.
Fig. 691
• Insert new chopping blades in pairs.
• When installing the blades, observe the installation position of the tapped strips (1). The
surface (a) with the rounded corner must be placed on the blade drum (2), the surface (b)
must be turned away from the blade drum (2).
716
Maintenance – supply system
Adjusting the cutting blades
Fig. 692
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
24.5
Set the new blades (2) evenly to the counterblade (3).
Check the dimension on both sides by using a feeler gauge (4) (nominal dimension
0.1 mm).
Tighten all screws (1) from the inside to the outside (tightening torque 270 Nm).
Insert the second blade pair in the same way.
Loosen the locking of the cutting drum, turn the cutting drum one row of blades further and
lock it in place again.
Continue in this manner until all rows of blades of the chopping drum are changed.
Loosen the locking of the chopping drum.
– Check if the chopping drum can be turned easily and make certain that the blades do
not touch anything (e.g. counterblade, drum base).
Readjust blades, if necessary.
Adjust the grinding stone so that there is a distance of 0.5 mm between blade back and
grinding stone.
Fit intake housing.
Grind cutting blades.
Readjust the counterblade so that no contact noise can be heard.
Working with half the number of cutting blades
The speed of the intake and the number of cutting blades determine the cutting length.
If the adjustable cutting length range is inadequate and the chopping length is still too short, the
number of cutting blades can be reduced to half.
• Remove every second blade from both sides of the chopping drum.
• To protect the blade carrier, mount the dummy blades (accessories) provided chopping
drums with 20, 28, 36 blades, see page 705, chopping drums with 40, 48 blades, see page
711Re-adjusting or changing chopping blades on chopping drums with 40, 48 blades.
• In the info centre, set the corresponding number of blades, see page 180.
717
Maintenance – supply system
24.6
Turning or replacing the counterblade
WARNING
Risk of injury from sharp cutting blades!
When performing maintenance work on the cutting drum, there is a risk of the operators being
injured by the sharp cutting blades.
• When working on the cutting drum, work particularly carefully and prudently.
• Always wear work gloves when working on the cutting drum.
• Turn the cutting drum clockwise on the belt pulley only and, when the correct position is
reached, lock with the locking bolt.

NOTE
The counterblade and the counterblade support must be clean and flat. If required, replace the
components.
1
1a
1b
BX750044
Fig. 693
Both sides of the counterblade (1) can be used. The counterblade must be turned or replaced if
one or both sides (1a, 1b) of the counterblade are worn.
A worn counterblade (cutting edge round) can be detected by the fact that the cutting quality is
not satisfactory. The distance from counterblade to chopping blades (kerf) must be set correctly
in order to minimse wear, refer to chapter Operation “Grinding the Chopping Blades”.
Furthermore the chopping blades must be ground correctly, refer to chapter Maintenance
“Readjusting or Changing the Cutting Blades”.
718
Maintenance – supply system
Prerequisites:
– The feed attachment is removed, see page 672.
2,3,4
1
2,3,4
2,3
BX480593
Fig. 694
Turning/changing counterblade
• Grind chopping blades by using grinding device, refer to chapter Operation “Grinding the
Chopping Blades”.
• Set the counterblade (1) via manual operation on the platform in parallel to the ground
surface of the blades, refer to chapter Operation “Blocking the Counterblade”.
• Unscrew hexagon head screws (2), detent edged washers (3) and washers (4).
• Pull counterblade (1) to the front out of the support.
• Clean skid surface area and bottom side of the counterblade.
• Turn counterblade or mount the new counterblade.
719
Maintenance – supply system
1
!
!
a
2
90°
3,4,5
1
BX750047
3,4
350Nm 180Nm
3,4,5
350Nm
BX750046_1
Fig. 695
CAUTION
Damage to machine parts due to loose components!
If the counterblade is not securely attached, it may become detached and damage the blades
on the cutting drum or the entire cutting drum.
•
Secure the screw connections identified by
medium strength LOCTITE.
! on the right and left of the machine with
Mounting the new counterblade
• Place the new counterblade (1) on the counterblade support and mount hand-tight by using
hexagon head screws (3), detent edged washers (4) and washers (5) centre bottom.
• Check the distance from counterblade to drum shell (2) and set the dimension a = 87 89 mm by using the adjusting spindle, if necessary.
• Align the counterblade (1) in parallel to the ground backs of the blades on the counterblade
support.
• Tighten all three screw connections of the counterblade with the specified torque, refer to
figure BX750046.
• Fit intake unit.
• Set counterblade (1) via manual operation on the platform in parallel with the ground
surface of the blades, refer to chapter Operation “Blocking the Counterblade”.
720
Maintenance – supply system
24.7
Turning or changing the conveyor bars on the pre-compression roller
The pre-compression roller (1) is fitted with conveyor bars which have a smooth and a serrated
side. The conveyor bars can be attached in such a way that either the smooth or the serrated
side is used.
From experience the smooth side obtains the best results for grass operation and the serrated
side for maize operation.

NOTE
The conveyor bars must be changed if the wear is so great that the conveyor bars are no longer
higher than the crossbars on the pre-compression and feed roller.
Turning the conveyor bars on the pre-compression roller
Fig. 696
•
•
•
•

Remove the intake unit, see chapter Maintenance - Supply system, "Removing intake unit".
Shut down and safeguard the machine, see chapter Safety, "Shutting down and
safeguarding the machine".
Remove the fastening bolts (3) from the conveyor bar (2).
Turn the conveyor bar (2) and attach (tightening torque 35 Nm).
NOTE
Because of metal detection, only fastening materials made of anti-magnetic steel may be used.
The screws must not be tightened with an impact wrench because of the magnetising effect.
721
Maintenance – supply system
Changing the conveyor bars on the feed roller
Fig. 697
The bottom feed roller (4) can also be fitted with conveyor bars.
These conveyor bars are used to protect the feed roller against wear and cannot be turned.
722
Maintenance – supply system
24.8
Adjusting the distance between the scraper and flat roller
CAUTION
Damage to scraper and flat roller due to overheating!
If the gap between the scraper and flat roller is too small, the scraper will exert pressure on the
flat roller and both components may be damaged.
• Adjust the gap between the scraper and the flat roller using tension springs and counter
nuts until the scraper does not exert any pressure on the flat roller.
Prerequisites:
– The feed attachment is removed, see page 672.
Fig. 698
Relieving tension springs:
• To relieve the tension springs (1), loosen the counter nuts (2) and unscrew the screws (3).
723
Maintenance – supply system
Fig. 699
Preparatory work
• Check the flat roller for wear (leaching). If there is a high level of wear, the function of the
scraper cannot be guaranteed.
• Check the scraper and replace it if the thickness falls below 26 mm.
The scraper must be adjusted, preferably with no gap, over the entire width of the flat roller.
The gap between the scraper and flat roller must be 0 to 0.3 mm.
Adjusting the distance between the scraper and flat roller
• Loosen the hexagon nuts (4).
• Press the compression roller (1) upward with a mounting lever (3).
• Check the distance between the scraper (5) and the flat roller (6) using a feeler gauge.
The distance between the scraper and flat roller must be 0.1 mm to 0.3 mm.
• If the distance exceeds 0.3 mm, reduce the distance by tapping gently across the entire
width.
If the distance is less than 0.1 mm:
• Screw in two M12 hexagon head screws into the forcing bores (2), thereby setting the
distance of the scraper to the required dimension evenly across the entire width.
• Use a feeler gauge to measure the distance and re-adjust if necessary.
• Remove both hexagonal head screws M12 from the forcing bores (2).
• Tighten the hexagon nuts (4).
• Pretension the tension springs on both sides of the feed attachment, see page 726.
724
Maintenance – supply system
24.9
Adjusting the gap between the baling roller and scraper
Prerequisites:
– The feed attachment is removed, see page 672.
– The tension springs (1) on the rear right and left at the intake housing are correctly set, see
page 726.
Preparatory work
• Check the flat roller for wear (leaching). If there is a high level of wear, the function of the
scraper cannot be guaranteed.
• Check the scraper (b) and replace it if the thickness falls below 26 mm.
Fig. 700
Adjusting the gap between the compression roller and scraper
The distance (a) between the compression roller (1) and the scraper (2) must be 6-7 mm.
• Measure the distance (a) between the compression roller (1) and the scraper (2).
If distance (a) is less than 6 mm or greater than 7 mm:
• Loosen the tension springs on the feed attachment, see page 723.
• Insert or remove discs under the bump stop (3) of the feed attachment to set the distance
(a) evenly across the entire width.
• Pretension the tension springs on both sides of the feed attachment, see page 726.
725
Maintenance – supply system
24.10
Setting the tension springs on the feed attachment
Fig. 701
• The rear tension springs (3) must be pretensioned to the dimension a = 450 mm. Adjust the
threaded piece (1) to do this.
The front springs (4) are not pretensioned because they have an internal stop (2) on which the
roller unit is supported when at rest.
• If the upper roller unit is not parallel to the lower feed roller, set the spring length (b) of the
tension springs (4) using the threaded piece (1).
726
Maintenance - hydraulic system
25
Maintenance - hydraulic system
WARNING
If the basic safety instructions are not followed, people may be seriously injured or
killed.
• To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions in the chapter Safety must have been read
and followed, see chapter Safety "Basic safety instructions".
CAUTION
Damage to the machine due to soiling of the hydraulic system!
If foreign objects or liquids get into the hydraulic system, the hydraulic system may be severely
damaged.
• Clean hydraulic connections and components before removal.
• Seal open hydraulic connections with protective caps.
• Ensure that foreign objects or liquids do not get into the hydraulic system.
CAUTION
Disposing and storing oil and used oil filters
If oil and used oil filters are not stored and disposed of properly, the environment may be
damaged.
• Store or dispose of used oil and oil filters according to statutory regulations.
25.1

Over-pressure valves
NOTE
Over-pressure valves preset in the factory.
Work on the over-pressure valve may be carried out by KRONE customer service only.
The valve blocks have been equipped with over-pressure valves. These valves were preset in
the factory and must not be changed.
25.2
Hydraulic oil
CAUTION
If non-approved hydraulic oils or a mixture of different oils are used, the hydraulic
system may be damaged.
• Never mix different types of oil.
• Never use engine oil.
• Use approved hydraulic oils only.
Filling quantities and types of oil: See chapter Description of machine "Consumables".
727
Maintenance - hydraulic system
25.3
Hydraulic tank
25.3.1
Oil level check and oil change on the hydraulic tank
Prerequisites:
– The machine is parked on level ground.
– The lifting unit is fully lowered, see page 134.
– The spout is in parking position, see page 134.
– The machine is shut down and secured, see page 38.
Fig. 702
To check the oil level:
• Perform a visual inspection to check that the hydraulic oil is up to the middle of the
inspection glass (1).
• If this is not the case, top up hydraulic oil via the oil filler pipe, see page 729.
728
Maintenance - hydraulic system
Changing the oil in the hydraulic tank
Fig. 703
Oil change:
• Provide a collecting vessel (approx. 150 litres).
• Clean thoroughly around the oil drainage pipe (2).
• Place the end of the oil drain hose (included with the machine) into the collecting vessel.
Mount the other end of the hose onto the oil drain plug (2) of the hydraulic tank (1). This
automatically opens the oil drainage valve and the hydraulic oil drains into the collecting
vessel.
• Remove the drain hose.
• Top up the hydraulic tank with hydraulic oil via the oil filler pipe (2) up to the middle of the
inspection glass. Quantity and specification, see page 97.
• Run the diesel engine at a low idle speed for approx. 10 seconds.
• Switch off the diesel engine.
• Check the oil level in the hydraulic tank; top up the hydraulic oil if required.
• Repeat the process until the oil level no longer drops.
729
Maintenance - hydraulic system
25.3.2
Change return suction filter
Fig. 704
Prerequisites:
– The machine is shut down and secured, see page 38.
– The oil filler pipe on the hydraulic tank is open (tank depressurised) and cleaned.
Changing the filter:
• Loosen and remove the four screws (2) on the cover (1) with the hexagon key.
• Remove the cover (1).
• Raise the filter insert (2) and allow hydraulic oil to drip out.
• Remove the filter insert and dispose of it properly.
• Moisten the sealing surface of the new filter insert with oil and set it in place.
• Screw on the screw cover manually. Do not fasten it too tightly.
• Run the engine at a low idle speed for approx. 10 seconds.
• Shut down the engine.
• Check the hydraulic oil filter for leaks.
• Put on the cover (1) and secure with the four screws (2).
730
Maintenance - hydraulic system
25.4
High-pressure filter
Fig. 705
The high-pressure filters (1) for the working and steering hydraulics are equipped with an visual
contamination indicator (2). The contamination indicator (2) provides visual information about
the degree of contamination of the filter. During start-ups in the cold state, the button of the
contamination indicator (2) can jump out.
• Push the button back in once the operating temperature has been reached.
• If it pops out again immediately, the filter insert must be replaced.
• Check the contamination indicator each time before operating it. If necessary, replace the
contaminated filter insert. If the contamination indicator does not respond, replace the filter
insert once annually or with every oil change.
Change filter element in the high-pressure filter
Fig. 706
• Switch off the diesel engine.
• Depressurise the hydraulic system.
• Remove and clean the filter housing (3).
• Remove the filter insert (2) and replace with a new one.
• Check the O-rings (1) for damage and replace if required.
• Wet the thread and the sealing surfaces with hydraulic oil.
• Mount the filter housing (3) up to the stop, then turn back a quarter turn.
• Charge the hydraulic system with pressure and check for leaks.
731
Maintenance - Gearbox
26
Maintenance - Gearbox
WARNING
Risk of burns and scalding due to hot parts of the machine and hot liquids!
Unprotected body parts will be injured if they come into contact with hot parts of the machine or
hot liquids.
• Never open the cover (1) on the coolant reservoir when the engine is hot.
• Switch off the engine and wait until the engine has cooled down.
• Wear suitable protective clothing.
26.1
Overview of the drives
Fig. 707
1
2
732
Upper roller gearbox
Angular gearbox
3
4
Lower roller gearbox
Transfer gearbox
5
Power take-off gear
Maintenance - Gearbox
26.1.1
Maintenance of power take-off gear
Oil level check
Fig. 708
• The oil level of the power take-off gear (1) must reach up to 1/2 the inspection glass (2), if
necessary top up gear oil.
Oil change
Fig. 709
• Bring the machine up to operating temperature.
• Thoroughly clean the area surrounding the locking cap at the drain sleeve (1) and the oil
filler plug (3).
• Dismount the locking cap at the drain sleeve (1).
• Provide a collecting vessel (approx. 30 litres).
• Place the end of the drain hose (included with the machine) into the collecting vessel.
Mount the other end of the hose onto the drain sleeve (1). This automatically opens the
drain valve and the oil drains into the collecting vessel.
• Remove the drain hose.
• Mount the locking cap at the drain sleeve (1).
733
Maintenance - Gearbox
Fig. 710
• Dismount the hoses (22, 35, 43, 65, 61) at the pump and the gearbox (top and bottom) and
drain them into the collecting vessel.
• Dismount the filter container (38).
• Remove the filter insert from the filter container (38) and clean the filter container.
• Clean the cooling coils and hoses from the cooler to the gearbox/pump with compressed air
(note non-return valve (21)). Only apply compressed air from the pump in the direction of
the cooler and collect the oil in a suitable container.
• Mount the hoses (22, 35, 43, 65, 61) at the pump and the gearbox (top and bottom).
• Place a new filter insert in the filter container (38).
• Mount the filter container (38).
734
Maintenance - Gearbox
Fig. 711
• Dismount the oil filler plug (3).
CAUTION! Damage to the gearbox! The gearbox may be damaged if a mixture of different oils
is used.
• Add the gear oil. Type of oil and filling quantity, see page 97.
• Mount the oil filler plug (3).
• Allow the machine to run for a short while, subsequently check the oil level.
Change the oil filter in the gearbox circular lubrication

NOTE
Always change the filter when you change the gear oil.
Fig. 712
• Thoroughly clean the area around the filter housing.
• Dismount the filter housing (1).
• Remove the filter insert.
• Clean the filter housing.
• Install a new filter insert.
• Mount the filter housing (1) with a new seal.
735
Maintenance - Gearbox
26.1.2
Maintenance of transfer gearbox
Oil level check
Fig. 713
• Thoroughly clean the area around the oil level inspection screw (1).
• Dismount the oil level inspection screw (1) at the transfer gearbox.
• Oil level must reach the inspection bore, if necessary, top up oil (see Oil change).
• Mount the oil level inspection screw (1).
Oil change
• Provide a collecting vessel (approx. 10 litres).
• Thoroughly clean the area around the oil drain plug (2) and the screw plug with ventilation
filter (3).
• Dismount the oil drain plug (2) and drain the oil.
• Dismount the screw plug with ventilation filter (3).
• Mount the oil drain plug (2).
CAUTION! Damage to the gearbox! The gearbox may be damaged if a mixture of different oils
is used.
• Add the oil. Type of oil and filling quantity, see page 97.
• Mount the screw plug with ventilation filter (3).
736
Maintenance - Gearbox
26.1.3

Maintenance of lower roller gearbox
NOTE
Check oil level and change the oil when the feed drive housing cover is in a horizontal position.
Ölstandskontrolle
Abb. 714
• Den Ölstand am Schauglas (3) ablesen.
• Der Ölstand muss bis zur Mitte des Schauglases reichen, bei Bedarf Öl nachfüllen (siehe
Ölwechsel).
Ölwechsel
• Einen Auffangbehälter (mindestens 10 Liter) bereitstellen.
• Die Umgebung Ölablassschraube (2) und der Verschlussschraube mit Entlüftungsfilter (1)
gründlich säubern.
• Die Ölablassschraube (2) demontieren und das Öl ablassen.
• Die Verschlussschraube mit Entlüftungsfilter (1) demontieren.
• Die Ölablassschraube (2) montieren.
• Das Öl einfüllen. Ölsorte und Füllmenge, see page 97.
• Die Verschlussschraube mit Entlüftungsfilter (1) montieren.
737
Maintenance - Gearbox
26.1.4

Maintenance of angular gearbox
NOTE
Check oil level and change the oil when the feed drive housing cover is in a horizontal position.
Oil level check
Machi ne no. 833001-879999 Oil level chec k
Fig. 715
• Thoroughly clean the area around the oil dip stick (1).
• Unscrew the oil dip stick (1) and remove any oil residue using a lint-free, clean cloth.
• Screw in the oil dip stick (1) and unscrew it again.
• Read the oil level.
• The oil level must be between the markings "MIN" and "MAX", if necessary top up oil
(see Oil change).
• Screw in the oil dip stick again.
Oil change
• Provide a collecting vessel (approx. 5 litres).
• Thoroughly clean the area around the oil drain plug (2).
• Dismount the oil drain plug (2) and drain the oil.
• Unscrew the oil dip stick.
• Re-attach the oil drain plug (2).
• Add the oil. Type of oil and filling quantity, see page 97.
• Screw in the oil dip stick again.
738
Maintenance - Gearbox
26.1.5

Maintenance upper roller gearbox
NOTE
Check oil level and change the oil when the feed drive housing cover is in a horizontal position.
Oil level check
Fig. 716
• Thoroughly clean the area around the oil level inspection screw (1).
• Dismount the oil level inspection screw (1).
• Oil level must reach the inspection bore, if necessary, top up oil (see Oil change).
Oil change
• Provide a collecting vessel (approx. 10 litres).
• Thoroughly clean the area around the oil drain plug (2) and the locking screw with breather
filter (3).
• Dismount the oil drain plug (2) and drain the oil.
• Dismount the locking screw (3).
• Mount the oil drain plug (2) again.
• Add the oil. Type of oil and filling quantity, see page 97.
• Mount the locking screw (3).
739
Maintenance - Gearbox
26.1.6
Maintenance worm drive
Oil level check
Fig. 717
• Thoroughly clean the area around the oil level inspection screw (4).
• Dismount the oil level inspection screw (4).
• Oil level must reach the inspection bore, if necessary, top up oil (see Oil change).
• Re-mount the oil level inspection screw (4).
Oil change
• Remove the cover plate (1).
• Thoroughly clean the area around the oil drain plug (2) and the ventilation filter (3).
• Dismount the ventilation filter (3).
• Provide a collecting vessel (10 litres).
• Dismount the oil drain plug (2) and drain the oil.
• Re-attach the oil drain plug (2).
CAUTION! Damage to the gearbox! The gearbox may be damaged if a mixture of different oils
is used.
• Add the oil. Type of oil and filling quantity, see page 97.
• Mount the ventilation filter (3).
• Attach the cover plate (1).
740
Maintenance - Gearbox
26.1.7

Wheel hub gearbox maintenance
NOTE
Use SHELL SPIRAX S4 CX 50 gear oil only.
Front wheel hub gearbox
Oil level check
Fig. 718
• Position the wheel ensuring the oil filler plug (1) is at the top.
• Thoroughly clean the area around the oil filler plug (1) and the oil level inspection screw (2).
WARNING! Risk of scalding by hot gear oil escaping under pressure.
• To reduce the pressure, carefully open the oil filler plug (1) from a lateral position.
• Mount the oil filler plug (1).
• Position the wheel ensuring the oil filler plug (1) is horizontal to the hub.
• Dismount the oil level inspection screw (2).
• Oil level must reach the inspection bore, if necessary, top up oil (see Oil change).
• Re-mount the oil level inspection screw (2).
Oil change
• Provide a collecting vessel (10 litres).
• Thoroughly clean the area around the oil filler plug (1) and the oil level inspection screw (2).
• Position the wheel ensuring the oil filler plug (1) is at the top.
WARNING! Risk of scalding by hot gear oil escaping under pressure.
• To reduce the pressure, carefully open the oil filler plug (1) from a lateral position.
• Mount the oil filler plug (1).
• Position the wheel ensuring the oil drain plug (3) is vertical relative to the hub.
• Dismount the oil drain plug (3) and drain the oil.
• Dismount the oil filler plug (1).
• Mount the oil drain plug (3).
• Add the oil. Type of oil and filling quantity, see page 97.
• Mount the oil filler plug (1).
741
Maintenance - Gearbox
Rear wheel hub gearbox
Oil level check
Fig. 719
• Position the wheel ensuring the oil filler plug (1) is at the top.
• Thoroughly clean the area around the oil filler plug (1).
WARNING! Risk of scalding by hot gear oil escaping under pressure.
• To reduce the pressure, carefully open the oil filler plug (1) from a lateral position.
• Mount the oil filler plug (1).
• Position the wheel ensuring that the lower edge of the filler plug (1) is approx. 40 mm below
the centre of the hub. To do this, position a spirit level horizontally in the centre of the hub
and use a measuring tape to measure the 40 mm.
• Thoroughly clean the area around the oil filler plug (1).
• Dismount the oil filler plug (1).
• Oil level must reach the oil filler plug, if necessary top up oil (see Oil change).
• Re-mount the oil filler plug (1).
742
Maintenance - Gearbox
Oil change
• Position the wheel ensuring the oil filler plug (1) is at the top.
• Thoroughly clean the area around the oil drain plug (2).
WARNING! Risk of scalding by hot gear oil escaping under pressure.
• To reduce the pressure, carefully open the oil filler plug (1) from a lateral position.
• Mount the oil filler plug (1).
• Position the wheel ensuring the oil drain plug (2) is vertical relative to the hub.
• Provide a collecting vessel (10 litres).
• Thoroughly clean the area around the oil drain plug (2).
• Dismount the oil drain plug (2) and drain the oil.
• Re-attach the oil drain plug (2).
• Position the wheel ensuring that the lower edge of the filler plug (1) is approx. 40 mm below
the centre of the hub. To do this, position a spirit level horizontally in the centre of the hub
and use a measuring tape to measure the 40 mm.
• Dismount the oil filler plug (1).
• Add the oil. Type of oil and filling quantity, see page 97.
• Mount the oil filler plug (1).
743
Maintenance – electrical system
Maintenance – electrical system
27
WARNING
If the basic safety instructions are not followed, people may be seriously injured or
killed.
• To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions in the chapter Safety must have been read
and followed, see chapter Safety "Basic safety instructions".
WARNING
Danger to life due to exploding battery gas!
Highly explosive battery gas may escape from the battery.
• Keep ignition sources and naked flames away from the battery.
• Observe the correct polarity when connecting and disconnecting the battery.
CAUTION
Damage to the electrical system due to incorrect polarity of the battery!
Non-observance of the correct polarity between the battery and three-phase generator may
severely damage the electrical system.
• First connect the positive terminal of the battery.
• Then connect the negative terminal of the battery.
CAUTION
Damage to electronic components due to voltage peaks or overheating!
If the vehicle power supply is interrupted on the main battery switch while the engine is running,
voltage peaks or overheating may occur and possibly damage the electronic components in the
vehicle.
• Actuate the main battery switch only when the engine is switched off.

NOTE
An overview of all control unit circuit boards and fuses is in the circuit diagram which is
enclosed with every machine.
744
Maintenance – electrical system
27.1
Battery
Abb. 720
The battery compartment is located on the left-hand machine side behind the cover (1).
Opening the battery compartment
Pre-condition:
– The side flap at the front left is open.
•
•
Open the lock (2) on both sides.
Unhook and remove the cover (1) including the battery cover.
745
Maintenance – electrical system
27.1.1
Removing and Installing Battery
Prerequisite:
– The main battery switch is in the "0" position, see page 54.
Fig. 721
The machine is equipped with 2 batteries (1) of 12 V (135 Ah, 1000 A) each, which are
connected in series (24 V) for starting.
A switching relay (2) is used to switch.
The operating voltage is only 12 V!
Disconnecting the batteries
Fig. 722

NOTE
To avoid a short circuit, do not touch any parts of the machine when working on the battery with
metal tools.
•
•
•
•
•
746
Loosen the screws (1) on the pole terminals on the negative terminals (2) on the batteries.
Disconnect and isolate the negative terminals on the batteries in sequence.
Dismount the terminal caps (3) from the positive terminals on the batteries.
Loosen the screws (4) on the pole terminals (5) on the positive terminals on the batteries.
Disconnect and isolate the positive terminals on the batteries in sequence.
Maintenance – electrical system
Removing batteries
Replacement of the batteries is the same for both batteries. Removal of the upper battery is
described below.
Prerequisite:
– The battery is disconnected.
Fig. 723
• Unscrew the screws (1) from the fastening rails (2) and remove the rails.
• Remove the battery.
Installing batteries
• Insert the battery.
• Mount the fastening rails (2).
Fig. 724
• Connect the battery connecting terminals (1) to the battery. Connect the negative cable first
and then the positive cable.
27.1.2
Servicing the battery
•
•
•
•
•
Keep the battery surface clean and dry, clean with a damp or anti-static cloth only.
Protect the battery terminals and connecting terminals from corrosion by applying terminal
grease to the battery terminals and connecting terminals.
Use a brush to remove any oxidation from the terminal posts.
When batteries are removed and placed in storage, regularly check the charge state or use
a charge maintenance device. If the open-circuit voltage is below 12.3 V, recharge the
battery.
Keep removed batteries cool, dry and charged.
747
Maintenance – electrical system
27.2
Three-phase generator
CAUTION
Damage due to improper handling.
When installing / removing the batteries, an improper procedure may cause a short circuit. As a
result, electronic components may be damaged.
• Interrupt the circuit using the main battery switch and secure to prevent it from being
switched on again.
• Protect the cable contact of the positive lead from accidentally touching components of the
machine.
Fig. 725
Checking/tensioning/replacing V-belt of alternator
Information on the procedure can be found in the enclosed operating and maintenance manual
of MAN company.
If the three-phase generator fails or does not work properly, determine the cause of the
damage. If the suggestions below do not repair the damage, ask your KRONE dealer.
Malfunction
Cause, remedy
–
The batteries are inadequately charged.
• Charge the batteries.
The batteries are defective.
• Replace the batteries (in pairs)
The output voltage of the alternator is too low
• Have the alternator checked by a qualified specialist
workshop.
The connection cable to the alternator is loose.
• Tighten the cable connections to the corresponding
tightening torque (see maintenance or repair
instructions).
The cable connections are corroded.
• Clean the cable connections on alternator and battery.
–
748
Charging warning light
lights up.
Error messages
Undervoltage / overvoltage
Maintenance – electrical system
27.3
Starter
CAUTION
Damage due to improper handling.
When installing / removing the batteries, an improper procedure may cause a short circuit. As a
result, electronic components may be damaged.
• Interrupt the circuit using the main battery switch and secure to prevent it from being
switched on again.
• Protect the cable contact of the positive lead from accidentally touching components of the
machine.
Fig. 726
The starter (1) is on the diesel engine, on the side facing the cooler.
If the starter fails or does not work properly, determine the cause of the damage. If the
suggestions below do not repair the damage, ask your KRONE dealer.
Disturbance
Cause, remedy
Starter fails or does not work
properly
The batteries are inadequately charged.
• Charge the batteries.
The connection cable to the starter is loose.
• Tighten the cable connections firmly
The cable connections are corroded.
• Clean the cable connections on the starter and batteries.
The solenoid switch of the starter is defective.
• Have the starter checked by a qualified service centre.
749
Maintenance – lubrication
Maintenance – lubrication
28
WARNING
If the basic safety instructions are not followed, people may be seriously injured or
killed.
• To avoid accidents, the basic safety instructions in the chapter Safety must have been read
and followed, see chapter Safety "Basic safety instructions".
CAUTION
Environmental damage caused by lubricants!
If lubricants are not stored and disposed of properly, they may escape into the environment. As
a result, the environment will be damaged, even by small quantities.
• Store the lubricants in suitable containers according to the statutory regulations.
• Dispose of used lubricants according to the statutory regulations.
Soft, supple NLGI Class 2 lithium soap greases with EP additives should be used as lubricants
in accordance with DIN 51825. We advise against using lubricants with any other base material.

NOTE
Do not use greases containing graphite!
Problems may occur if different greases are mixed together.
The lubrication points on the machine that are not supplied by central lubrication must be
lubricated regularly. The position of the lubrication points and the lubrication intervals can be
seen in the lubrication charts in the operating instructions. Remove the grease that comes out of
the bearing points after lubrication.
750
Maintenance – lubrication
28.1
Manual lubrication chart
Fig. 727
751
Maintenance – lubrication
Lubrication points
• Lubricate the lubrication points mentioned after the number of operating hours specified in
the lubrication chart.
752
Item
Component
Number of
lubrication
points
Lubrication interval
operating hours
1
PTO shaft W 2500 (VS)
3
100 h
2
Cardan shaft W 2500 (ZW)
3
100 h
3
Flange-mounted bearing cooling
system
1
250 h
4
Universal shaft supply system
4
100 h
5
Lifting cylinder
4
250 h
6
Pendulum frame
1
250 h
7
Tension springs: top and bottom
front, top rear
6
50 h
8
Tension anchor counterblade
adjustment
2
250 h
9
Rocker arm
2
250 h
10
Coupling rods
4
250 h
11
Carriage for grinding device
2
250 h
12
Grinding stone grinding device
1
250 h
13
Trailer coupling
1
250 h
Maintenance – central lubrication system
Maintenance – central lubrication system
29
CAUTION
Damage to the machine due to the use of incorrect and contaminated lubricants!
Unauthorised or contaminated lubricants in the central lubrication system will cause faults in the
central lubrication and damage the bearing positions.
• When working on the central lubrication system, use clean and suitable tools.
• Use authorised lubricants only.
• Ensure that dirt or dirty lubricant cannot get into the central lubrication system.
29.1

Overview of the distributor blocks of the central lubrication system
NOTE
The distributor blocks have one grease nipple each (red cap) for lubrication with a grease gun if
required.
753
Maintenance – central lubrication system
Fig. 728
754
Item
Component
1
Main distributor
2
Auxiliary distributor, steering axle
3
Auxiliary distributor for discharge system and drive
4
Auxiliary distributor, right chopper unit
5
Auxiliary distributor, feed system
Maintenance – central lubrication system
Overview of lubrication points of the central lubrication system
Fig. 729
755
Maintenance – central lubrication system
Emergency lubrication points

NOTE
Thoroughly clean the lubrication points prior to use.
With the exception of the auxiliary distributor on the supply system, each other auxiliary
distributor features an emergency lubricating point (grease nipple at the connecting piece of the
line) which can be manually lubricated if the central lubrication fails.
These lubrication points can also be used for diagnostic purposes in order to localise blockages.
29.2
Lubricant filling
29.2.1
Visual filling level control
Fig. 730
• Perform a visual check of the filling level of the lubricant tank (1). The lubricant level must
be above the min. mark.
• Top up with lubricant if necessary.
756
Maintenance – central lubrication system
29.2.2

Topping up lubricant
NOTE
Add only clean lubricant using a suitable tool.
Dirty lubricants result in serious system faults.
Hydraulic-type lubricating nipple
Fig. 731
• The lubricant is filled through the hydraulic-type lubricating nipple (1) by means of a
commercially available grease gun.
Fill coupling
Fig. 732
The lubricant is filled via a quick coupling plug.
• Dismount the conical grease nipple (1) and mount the coupling plug 27 001 594 0 (2)
instead. Alternatively, you can also mount the coupling plug (2) on the side of the reservoir.
• Fit the coupling box 27 001 595 0 (4) to the filling pump (3).
757
Maintenance – central lubrication system
Filling cylinder
Fig. 733
The lubricant is filled via a filling cylinder.
• Dismount the screw plug M20 x 1.5 (1) and mount the filling socket 940 392 0 (2).
• For filling, remove the protective caps on the socket (2) and the filling cylinder 940 393 0 (3)
Operational sequence
Fig. 734
• Switch on the ignition.
 The green (2) and red (1) LEDs light up for approx. 1.5 s (independently of the set
programme) and indicate that the control of the lubrication system is operational.
• Subsequently, both LEDs extinguish again.
The central lubrication operates automatically. The machine only provides the power supply and
displays a general fault message.
The lubrication intervals are set at the control unit of the lubrication system.
The actual error is displayed via various signal statuses of both LEDs.

NOTE
If the ignition is interrupted while lubrication is taking place or during the cycle time, the time is
stopped and saved to the data memory. After the ignition is turned on again, the remaining
lubrication period or cycle time is read from the memory and the operational sequence
continues from the point at which it was interrupted.
758
Maintenance – central lubrication system
29.2.3
Signal displays
Fig. 735
The functions of the pump are indicated by two control LEDs, red (1) / green (2) in the viewing
window (3) for the motor half shell of the pump.
Explanation of the display
LED
Explanation
LED continuously lit
LED flashes every 1 s
LED is lit for 1.5 s
LED is not lit
Description of the signal displays
LED red
LED
green
Explanation
Display of functional readiness
The LEDs are lit simultaneously.
1.5 s
1.5 s
Program run of a lubrication process
The green LED is lit throughout the lubrication process.
Cycle error on the progressive distributor
The LEDs flash in identical cycles.
1s
1s
Error grease level; grease level too low
The LED is lit until the lubricant tank is topped up.
Error pump motor speed
1s
Error CPU/memory
0.5 s
759
Maintenance – central lubrication system
29.2.4
Fault
Fig. 736

NOTE
The red LED (1) always displays a fault in the programme sequence.
If a central lubrication system error message appears in the machine display, the precise fault
must be read at the operation unit of the lubrication system.
• If you press the intermediate lubrication key (3), the pump starts another lubrication process
despite the fact that an error is pending. This is only a short-term solution until the problem
has been solved.
Blocking of a lubricant distributor

NOTE
If a grease distributor becomes blocked, contact an authorized Beka-Max representative.
760
Placing in Storage
30
Placing in Storage
30.1
At the End of the Harvest Season
Placing the machine in storage at the end of the harvest season is the best possible way to
preserve the machine.
• Park the machine in a dry place protected from the elements where no commercial
fertilisers are stored.
• Support the machine on blocks so that the entire weight is not resting on the wheels.
• Thoroughly clean the inside of the machine through the maintenance openings and the
outside. Chaff and dirt attract moisture which causes steel parts to start rusting.
CAUTION
Damage to the machine caused by water from a high-pressure washing device!
If the water jet from a high-pressure cleaner is aimed directly at bearings and
electrical/electronic components, these components may be damaged.
• Do not aim the water jet from a high-pressure cleaner at bearings or electrical/electronic
components.
•
Lubricate the machine according to the lubrication chart. Grease the threadings of adjusting
screws and similar items; relieve springs.
• Lower the intake as far as possible.
• Lubricate the uncoated piston rods of all hydraulic cylinders liberally and insert as far as
possible.
• Wet all lever joints and bearing positions, which cannot be lubricated, with oil.
Write down all repair jobs which must be performed by the next harvest and arrange for them to
be done with sufficient lead time. Your KRONE dealer is better able to perform maintenance
service and any required repairs outside of harvest season.
•

Before wintering the machine, charge the batteries and re-charge them every six weeks or
have them serviced at a battery service station.
NOTE
The silage additive system must be stored in such a way that it is protected against frost
damage in winter or filled with anti-freezing agent.

NOTE
For more detailed information about storing the engine when not in use and restarting the
engine, refer to the service instructions supplied by the engine manufacturer.
761
Placing in Storage
30.2
Before the Start of the New Season
Before the start of the new harvest season, inspect the machine thoroughly.
Keeping the machine in a perfect technical condition will significantly reduce costly running
problems during harvest time.
If this was not already done after the last harvest, the machine must be thoroughly cleaned
inside and out.
• Refit any belts and V-belts which were removed and check belt tension.
• If engine openings were covered, remove the covers.
• Lubricate the machine completely according to the lubrication chart.
• Check that all bolts have been tightened and that all split pins are in place.
• Check all seals and the filling quantity of the cooling system. Antifreeze and anticorrosion
agent must remain in the cooling system even during summer months, since they protect
the system against corrosion.
• Check the charge state of the batteries; recharge the batteries if required.
• Check the tyre pressure, see chapter Description of machine, "Technical data of the
machine".
• After completing these tasks, let the machine run for about one hour at half speed. Then
check all bearings for overheating.
762
Disposal of the machine
31
Disposal of the machine
31.1
Disposal of the machine
After the service life of the machine has expired, the individual components of the machine must
be disposed of properly. The applicable country-specific, current waste disposal guidelines and
the legal laws must be observed.
Metal parts
All metal parts must be brought to a metal recycling centre.
The components must be freed from operating fluids and lubricants (gear oil, oil from hydraulic
system, ...) before being scrapped.
The operating fluids and lubricants must be brought separately to an environmentally friendly
disposal point or recycling centre.
Operating fluids and lubricants
Operating fluids and lubricants (diesel fuel, coolant, gear oil, oil from hydraulic system, ...) must
be brought to a disposal point for waste oil.
Synthetic materials
All synthetic materials must be brought to a recycling centre for synthetic materials.
Rubber
Rubber parts (hoses, tyres, …) must be brought to a rubber recycling centre.
Electronic scrap
Electronic parts must be brought to a disposal point for electronic scrap.
763
Appendix
32
Appendix
32.1
Parameter List
764
Com pared with 150 200 104-37
Color red = m odified
Color green = new
Color blue = deleted
Color black = not modified
rw = read/write
r = read only
Legend:
Software-Version: 150 200 104-38
DRIVER EN_US
Dated:Di Feb 23 2016
Parameter BiG X 600/I,600-2, 700/I, 700-2, 750C, 770-2,
850/I, 850-2, 1100/I, 1100-2
Designation
rw
0
Rights Min.
Software-Version: 150 200 104-38
33480 Discharge chute check
driver park. pos. active 0=OFF,
1=Road operation, 2=
Main coupling OFF, 3 MC
off and v> 0km /h
No.
2
Max.
1
Default Unit
Reduce
Chute
Parameter BiG X 600/I,600-2, 700/I, 700-2, 750C, 770-2, 850/I, 850-2, 1100/I, 1100-2
Increase
Chute
Check to determ ine whether the upper discharge
chute is in the parking position when switching to road
operation.
0=No check
1=Check in road operation only
2=Check if m ain coupling is switched off.
3=Check if m ain coupling is OFF and m achine m oves
(independently of release switch field and release
switch travelling gear)
Description
Designation
rw
0
Rights Min.
Software-Version: 150 200 104-38
25227 Joystick turn discharge
driver chute m ode 2nd stage
0=Joystick, 1=Param eter
25215
No.
1
Max.
1
Default Unit
Reduce
Joystick
Parameter BiG X 600/I,600-2, 700/I, 700-2, 750C, 770-2, 850/I, 850-2, 1100/I, 1100-2
Increase
Joystick
Setting how the second level on the joystick for
rotating the upper discharge chute is to be treated. 0
= The speed in both levels is specified by the lever on
the joystick. 1 = The speed for the second level is
specified via the param eter 25215.
Description
rw
25628 Maize value reduce
driver speed feed drive drive in/
out
Software-Version: 150 200 104-38
rw
25627 Maize reduce speed feed
driver drive tim e drive out
50
0
0
Rights Min.
rw
Designation
25626 Maize reduce speed feed
driver drive path drive in
No.
100
60
100
Max.
100
3
0
%
s
m
Default Unit
The distance for the
speed reduction
becom es less.
The duration for the
speed reduction
becom es less.
The speed is
reduced less.
Reduce
Feed drive
Parameter BiG X 600/I,600-2, 700/I, 700-2, 750C, 770-2, 850/I, 850-2, 1100/I, 1100-2
The distance for the
speed reduction
becom es greater
The duration for the
speed reduction
becom es greater
The speed is
reduced m ore
Increase
Feed drive
The value at which the speed of the feed drive is
reduced when driving in/out.
The tim e for which the speed of the feed drive is
reduced when driving out of the m aize crop.
The distance for which the speed of the feed drive is
reduced when driving into the m aize crop.
Description
rw
rw
25478 Front attachm ent rpm
driver dynam ic active 0=OFF,
1=m aize, 2=Grass/Xdisx,
3=All
25634 Front attachm ent forward
driver only XDisc 1=Front
attachm ent reversing not
possible
Software-Version: 150 200 104-38
rw
25477 Front attachm ent rpm
driver dynam ic rpm differenz per
km /h
1
0
0
0
Rights Min.
rw
Designation
25476 Mininm al rpm front
driver attachem ent dynam ic
No.
2
3
750
1000
Max.
2
0
30
200
RPM
RPM
Default Unit
Description
The attachm ent
The attachm ent speed is adjusted to the driving
speed increases if
speed. "Min. spd. dynam ic front attachm ent" is the
speed > set speed in front attachm ent speed at 0 km /h. If the speed set in
the term inal
the term inal is greater, the speed set at the term inal is
actuated.
Increase
front attachm ent
The "Reverse front attachm ent" function is not run,
instead "Front attachm ent forwards" is actuated.
(Only in XDisc m ode)
1 = "Reverse front attachm ent" not possible ("Front
attachm ent forwards" is actuated.)
2 = Norm al operation, the front attachm ent can also
be reversed in the usual way.
The speed change The speed change For every 1 km /h the attachm ent speed increases by
per km /h is
per km /h is
the set value. If the speed set in the term inal is
decreased if speed > increased if speed > greater, the speed set at the term inal is actuated.
set speed in the
set speed in the
term inal
term inal
The dyn. front attachm ent speed actuation function
can be activated/deactivated. Deactivated m eans that
the speed set on the term inal is set.
0 = Dyn. front attachm ent speed deactivated
1 = Dyn. front attachm ent speed activated for m aize
only
2 = Dyn. front attachm ent speed activated for grass/
XDisc only
3 = Dyn. front attachm ent speed activated for grass/
XDisc and for m aize.
The attachm ent
speed decreases if
speed > set speed in
the term inal
Reduce
front attachment
Parameter BiG X 600/I,600-2, 700/I, 700-2, 750C, 770-2, 850/I, 850-2, 1100/I, 1100-2
0
0
0
0
rw
rw
rw
20
0
0
rw
Software-Version: 150 200 104-38
34065 Manual speed 1 raise
driver lifting gear 1=slow,
20=fast
34066 Manual speed 2 raise
driver lifting gear 1=slow,
20=fast
34067 Manual speed 1 lower
driver lifting gear 1=slow,
20=fast
34068 Manual speed 2 lower
driver lifting gear 1=slow,
20=fast
driver
34051 Lifting gear Position W ork
rw
rw
33501 Reduce hold-down tim e
driver
rw
33500 Reduce hold-down offset
driver tim e
1
Rights Min.
rw
Designation
33482 Holding-dwn dev.
driver autom atic 1=On, 2=OFF
No.
20
20
20
20
70
30
30
2
Max.
9
5
20
5
40
10
0
1
%
s
s
Default Unit
The speed of the
lifting gear becom es
less
The speed of the
lifting gear becom es
less
The speed of the
lifting gear becom es
less
The speed of the
lifting gear becom es
less
The m axim um
working position is
decreased.
The tim e up to
lowering is
decreased.
The duration of
lowering is
decreased.
Reduce
The speed of the
lifting gear becom es
greater
The speed of the
lifting gear becom es
greater
The speed of the
lifting gear becom es
greater
The speed of the
lifting gear becom es
greater
The m axim um
working position is
increased.
The tim e up to
lowering is
increased.
The duration of
lowering is
increased.
Increase
Grass mode / EasyFlow
Parameter BiG X 600/I,600-2, 700/I, 700-2, 750C, 770-2, 850/I, 850-2, 1100/I, 1100-2
Grass m ode / EasyFlow
Speed to lower lifting gear 2nd level
Speed to lower lifting gear 1st level
Speed to lift lifting gear 2nd level
Speed to lift lifting gear 1st level
If the lifting unit is below this position (in percentage
term s), it m eans that the m achine is cutting. This is
used for the autom atic silage m aterial unit and the
hectare counter.
The ram p tim e for which the holding-down device is
lowered when autom atic is switched on. Setting 0
deactivates autom atic
The delay tim e until the holding-down device is
autom atically lowered.
The autom atic lift setting for the holding-down device
on the pick-up when reversing the feed drive and
front attachm ent:
1=Autom atic switched on
2=Autom atic switched off.
Description
Software-Version: 150 200 104-38
rw
0
rw
34079 Active lateral levelling
driver deact. 1=deactiv, 2=active
over ground tracer
0
rw
34077 Pendulum fram e
driver horizontal autom atic with
lifting gear to top
1=Autom atic
34078 Front attachm ent fold
driver autom atic 1=Autom atic,
0=Manual
1
0
rw
34076 Pendulum fram e float
driver position auto with header
contour 1=Autom atic
0
Rights Min.
rw
Designation
34075 Raise lifting gear when
driver reversing travelling gear
autom atic 1=ON
No.
2
1
1
1
1
Max.
1
0
0
1
0
Default Unit
Reduce
Parameter BiG X 600/I,600-2, 700/I, 700-2, 750C, 770-2, 850/I, 850-2, 1100/I, 1100-2
Increase
Grass m ode / EasyFlow
Setting as to whether active lateral levelling is active
when sensor hooks are connected.
1 = Lateral levelling not active (lateral levelling
passive via float position)
2 = Lateral levelling active (lateral levelling via the
sensor hooks)
Setting as to whether the front attachm ent can be
retracted autom atically or not.
1=Autom atic possible
0=Autom atic not possible
Setting as to whether the pendulum fram e is
autom atically set to horizontal position when the
"Lifting gear to up" function is triggered.
Setting as to whether the pendulum fram e is
autom atically enabled when the "header contour"
function is activated. (Is switched on and off by
sim ultaneously pressing the "Lateral levelling left" and
"Right" buttons or by m anual override.)
Setting as to whether the lifting gear is to be lifted
autom atically during reversal of the travelling gear.
1 = Lifting gear is lifted autom atically during reversing
2 = Lifting gear is not lifted autom atically
Description
Designation
0
rw
Software-Version: 150 200 104-38
0
rw
34277 Pendulum fram e
driver horizontal autom atic with
lifting gear to top
1=Autom atic
34278 Front attachm ent fold
driver autom atic 1=Autom atic,
0=Manual
0
rw
34276 Pendulum fram e float
driver position auto with header
contour 1=Autom atic
0
20
rw
rw
Rights Min.
34275 Raise lifting gear when
driver reversing travelling gear
autom atic 1=ON
driver
34251 Lifting gear Position W ork
No.
1
1
1
1
70
Max.
1
1
1
0
40
%
Default Unit
The m axim um
working position is
decreased.
Reduce
The m axim um
working position is
increased.
Increase
Maize mode / EasyCollect
Parameter BiG X 600/I,600-2, 700/I, 700-2, 750C, 770-2, 850/I, 850-2, 1100/I, 1100-2
Maize m ode / EasyCollect
Setting as to whether the front attachm ent can be
retracted autom atically or not.
1=Autom atic possible
0=Autom atic not possible
Setting as to whether the pendulum fram e is
autom atically set to horizontal position when the
"Lifting gear to up" function is triggered.
Setting as to whether the pendulum fram e is
autom atically enabled when the "header contour"
function is activated. (Is switched on and off by
sim ultaneously pressing the "Lateral levelling left" and
"Right" buttons or by m anual override.)
Setting as to whether the lifting gear is to be lifted
autom atically during reversal of the travelling gear.
1 = Lifting gear is lifted autom atically during reversing
0 = Lifting gear is not lifted autom atically
If the lifting unit is below this position (in percentage
term s), it m eans that the m achine is cutting. This is
used for the autom atic silage m aterial unit and the
hectare counter.
Description
Designation
rw
1
Rights Min.
Software-Version: 150 200 104-38
34279 Active lateral levelling
driver deact. 1=deactiv, 2=active
over ground tracer
No.
2
Max.
1
Default Unit
Reduce
Parameter BiG X 600/I,600-2, 700/I, 700-2, 750C, 770-2, 850/I, 850-2, 1100/I, 1100-2
Increase
Maize m ode / EasyCollect
Setting as to whether active lateral levelling is active
when sensor hooks are connected.
1 = Lateral levelling not active (lateral levelling
passive via float position)
2 = Lateral levelling active (lateral levelling via the
sensor hooks)
Description
Designation
0
rw
Software-Version: 150 200 104-38
0
rw
34477 Pendulum fram e
driver horizontal autom atic with
lifting gear to top
1=Autom atic
34478 Front attachm ent fold
driver autom atic 1=Autom atic,
0=Manual
0
rw
34476 Pendulum fram e float
driver position auto with header
contour 1=Autom atic
0
20
rw
rw
Rights Min.
34475 Raise lifting gear when
driver reversing travelling gear
autom atic 1=ON
driver
34451 Lifting gear Position W ork
No.
1
1
1
1
70
Max.
0
0
1
0
40
%
Default Unit
The m axim um
working position is
decreased.
Reduce
XDisc mode
Parameter BiG X 600/I,600-2, 700/I, 700-2, 750C, 770-2, 850/I, 850-2, 1100/I, 1100-2
The m axim um
working position is
increased.
Increase
XDisc mode
Setting as to whether the front attachm ent can be
retracted autom atically or not.
1=Autom atic possible
0=Autom atic not possible
Setting as to whether the pendulum fram e is
autom atically set to horizontal position when the
"Lifting gear to up" function is triggered.
Setting as to whether the pendulum fram e is
autom atically enabled when the "header contour"
function is activated. (Is switched on and off by
sim ultaneously pressing the "Lateral levelling left" and
"Right" buttons or by m anual override.)
Setting as to whether the lifting gear is to be lifted
autom atically during reversal of the travelling gear.
1 = Lifting gear is lifted autom atically during reversing
0 = Lifting gear is not lifted autom atically
If the lifting unit is below this position (in percentage
term s), it m eans that the m achine is cutting. This is
used for the autom atic silage m aterial unit and the
hectare counter.
Description
Designation
rw
1
Rights Min.
Software-Version: 150 200 104-38
34479 Active lateral levelling
driver deact. 1=deactiv, 2=active
over ground tracer
No.
2
Max.
1
Default Unit
Reduce
Parameter BiG X 600/I,600-2, 700/I, 700-2, 750C, 770-2, 850/I, 850-2, 1100/I, 1100-2
Increase
XDisc mode
Setting as to whether active lateral levelling is active
when sensor hooks are connected.
1 = Lateral levelling not active (lateral levelling
passive via float position)
2 = Lateral levelling active (lateral levelling via the
sensor hooks)
Description
rw
33446 Offset correction speed
driver road
Software-Version: 150 200 104-38
rw
33443 Offset correction speed
driver 4whl
0
0
0
Rights Min.
rw
Designation
33440 Offset correction speed
driver 2whl
No.
20
20
20
Max.
0
1
4
Default Unit
Reduce
Main Drive
Parameter BiG X 600/I,600-2, 700/I, 700-2, 750C, 770-2, 850/I, 850-2, 1100/I, 1100-2
Increase
Main Drive
Correction of travelling speed. The specified offset is
deducted from the calculated travelling speed
(efficiency level extrapolated) of the Sm artDrive. Valid
in road operation.
Correction of travelling speed. The specified offset is
deducted from the calculated travelling speed
(efficiency level extrapolated) of the Sm artDrive. Valid
in 4-wheel field m ode
Correction of travelling speed. The specified offset is
deducted from the calculated travelling speed
(efficiency level extrapolated) of the Sm artDrive. Valid
in 2-wheel field m ode
Description
rw
Software-Version: 150 200 104-38
34005 Info m essages 1=all ON,
driver 2=All OFF, 3=im portant
info ON
driver
33766 Blow valve engine off tim e
rw
rw
33765 Blow valve engine on tim e
driver
rw
33652 Blow valve Feed drive on
driver tim e
1
1
0
0
1
Rights Min.
rw
Designation
33651 Blow valve Feed drive off
driver tim e
No.
3
3600
600
600
3600
Max.
1
30
3
3
30
s
s
s
s
Default Unit
Reduce
Increase
Common w orking functions
Parameter BiG X 600/I,600-2, 700/I, 700-2, 750C, 770-2, 850/I, 850-2, 1100/I, 1100-2
Comm on working functions
Setting as to whether all inform ation m essages are to
be shown:
1=Show all inform ation m essages (operating error,
inform ation, etc.)
2=Do not show unim portant inform ation
3=Show only the m ost im portant inform ation (e.g.
inform ation about com pleted calibrations).
The length of tim e the blow-off valve Y109 (engine
com partm ent cleaning com pressed air) is switched
off.
The length of tim e the blow-off valve Y109 (engine
com partm ent cleaning com pressed air) is switched
on.
The duration the valve Y73 (engine com partm ent/
feed drive cleaning com pressed air) is actuated.
The tim e interval during which the blow-off valve Y73
(engine com partm ent/feed drive cleaning
com pressed air) is actuated.
Description
Software-Version: 150 200 104-38
rw
34016 Autopilot row tracer to
driver central tip 1=central tip
(EasyCollect 2-part)
0
0
Rights Min.
rw
Designation
26025 Flexible row sensor
driver available
No.
1
1
Max.
0
0
Default Unit
Reduce
Autopilot
Parameter BiG X 600/I,600-2, 700/I, 700-2, 750C, 770-2, 850/I, 850-2, 1100/I, 1100-2
Increase
Autopilot
Setting as to whether the touch sensors for the
autopilot are installed in the central tip or in the
outside tips. Param eter is used only for the display on
the term inal and does not apply to the autopilot
control.
0 = Touch sensor in the outside tips
1 = Central tip
From SW version 150200029-07 of the autopilot:
"Flexible row tracer installed" ==>
Setting denoting whether a flexible row tracer is
installed instead of the norm al bracket sensors.
0=norm al bracket sensor (default)
1=flexible row tracer
Up to SW version 150200029-06 of the autopilot:
"AnteilMittenvaufLenkw2" ==> control param eter
autopilot (default = 0)
Description
Designation
rw
rw
0
0
Rights Min.
Software-Version: 150 200 104-38
34019 Type of hum idity
driver m easurem ent (0= no
sensor or Harvest Tec,
2=NIR)
driver
30044 Crop type
No.
2
255
Max.
0
16
Default Unit
Reduce
Increase
Moisture measurement
Parameter BiG X 600/I,600-2, 700/I, 700-2, 750C, 770-2, 850/I, 850-2, 1100/I, 1100-2
Moisture m easurem ent
Hardware type of the m oisture m easuring system .
0=Harvesttech, 2=NIR
The setting that determ ines which crop type or
param eter set will be used. 16 = m aize, 32 = grass, 0
= user-defined crop
Description
Designation
rw
0
Rights Min.
Software-Version: 150 200 104-38
34020 AutoScan settings in
driver term inal expert m ode
1=Expert, 0=Norm al
display
No.
1
Max.
0
Default Unit
Reduce
AutoScan
Parameter BiG X 600/I,600-2, 700/I, 700-2, 750C, 770-2, 850/I, 850-2, 1100/I, 1100-2
Increase
AutoScan
Setting as to whether the extended settings are to be
available in the AutoScan m ask.
Description
r
rw
rw
rw
rw
33504 Max.rpm m aintenance
driver 10-20 blades
33515 Power m ode diesel engine
driver road (2=X-Power 3=
EcoPower)
33516 Auto PowerSplit (0 = off, 1
driver = on)
33517 Power m ode diesel engine
driver m aize/X-Disc (2=X-Power
3= EcoPower)
33518 Power m ode diesel engine
driver grass (2=X-Power 3=
EcoPower)
Software-Version: 150 200 104-38
r
33499 Max.rpm m aintenance 28
driver blades
2
2
0
2
1100
1100
1100
Rights Min.
r
Designation
33495 Maxim um rpm
driver m aintenance 40-36
blades
No.
3
3
1
3
1700
1700
1700
Max.
3
2
0
3
1100
1100
1100
RPM
RPM
RPM
Default Unit
Increase
The m axim um
The m axim um
speed is decreased speed is increased
The m axim um
The m axim um
speed is decreased speed is increased
The m axim um
The m axim um
speed is decreased speed is increased
Reduce
Diesel engine
Parameter BiG X 600/I,600-2, 700/I, 700-2, 750C, 770-2, 850/I, 850-2, 1100/I, 1100-2
Diesel engine
Setting with which param eter set the interm ediate
speed controller is to be operated for the MAN
engine. 2=X-Power ==> full power in road operation.
3=EcoPower ==> reduced power
Setting with which param eter set the interm ediate
speed controller is to be operated for the MAN
engine. 2=X-Power ==> full power in m aize/XDisc
m ode.3=EcoPower ==> reduced power
Autom atic adjustm ent of the diesel engine power
m ode. Setting of the term inal in the "Settings of diesel
engine" m ask
Setting with which param eter set the interm ediate
speed controller is to be operated for the MAN
engine. 2=X-Power ==> full power in road operation.
3=EcoPower ==> reduced power
The m axim um speed of the diesel engine that can be
set in field m ode and with the m aintenance switch on
can be with a 10-20 blade drum .
The m axim um speed of the diesel engine that can be
set in field m ode and with the m aintenance switch on
can be with a 28 blade drum .
The m axim um speed of the diesel engine that can be
set in field m ode and with the m aintenance switch on
can be with a 40-36 blade drum .
Description
Software-Version: 150 200 104-38
rw
33573 Increm ent RPM Field
driver Maize
1
1
Rights Min.
rw
Designation
33543 Increm ent RPM Field
driver Grass
No.
200
200
Max.
50
50
RPM
RPM
Default Unit
The step width is
decreased
The step width is
decreased
Reduce
Parameter BiG X 600/I,600-2, 700/I, 700-2, 750C, 770-2, 850/I, 850-2, 1100/I, 1100-2
The step width is
increased
The step width is
increased
Increase
Diesel engine
The change to rpm in the diesel engine when the
RPM- or RPM+ buttons are pressed in field m ode
m aize.
The change to rpm in the diesel engine when the
RPM- or RPM+ buttons are pressed in field m ode
grass.
Description
rw
33657 Grinding stone adaption
Software-Version: 150 200 104-38
34014 Grinding stone adaption
driver num ber teeth
rw
r
33504 Max.rpm m aintenance
driver 10-20 blades
driver
r
33499 Max.rpm m aintenance 28
driver blades
1
1
1100
1100
1100
Rights Min.
r
Designation
33495 Maxim um rpm
driver m aintenance 40-36
blades
No.
100
2
1700
1700
1700
Max.
32
1
1100
1100
1100
RPM
RPM
RPM
Default Unit
Increase
The m axim um
The m axim um
speed is decreased speed is increased
The m axim um
The m axim um
speed is decreased speed is increased
The m axim um
The m axim um
speed is decreased speed is increased
Reduce
Grinding
Parameter BiG X 600/I,600-2, 700/I, 700-2, 750C, 770-2, 850/I, 850-2, 1100/I, 1100-2
Grinding
The num ber of teeth on the grinding stone adjuster:
24 teeth ==> m achines m anufactured up to 2007
32 teeth ==> m achines m anufactured since 2007
The num ber of tim es the grinding stone is regulated
by the ratchet m echanism s in one com plete grinding
cycle. A grinding cycle m eans grinding stone once left
and once right until the grinding stone is back in its
original position.
The m axim um speed of the diesel engine that can be
set in field m ode and with the m aintenance switch on
can be with a 10-20 blade drum .
The m axim um speed of the diesel engine that can be
set in field m ode and with the m aintenance switch on
can be with a 28 blade drum .
The m axim um speed of the diesel engine that can be
set in field m ode and with the m aintenance switch on
can be with a 40-36 blade drum .
Description
Designation
rw
0
Rights Min.
Software-Version: 150 200 104-38
33611 Tim e control horn with
driver m etal/stone recog.
No.
20
Max.
5
s
Default Unit
Increase
Description
Metal detection
The actuation of the The actuation of the The tim e in seconds that the horn is actuated when
horn on m etal alarm horn on m etal alarm the m etal detection system locates "Metal in the feed
is shortened
is lengthened
drive".
Reduce
Metal detection
Parameter BiG X 600/I,600-2, 700/I, 700-2, 750C, 770-2, 850/I, 850-2, 1100/I, 1100-2
rw
rw
rw
33617 PW M Motor counterblade
driver left up
33618 PW M Motor counterblade
driver right down
33619 PW M Motor counterblade
driver right up
Software-Version: 150 200 104-38
rw
33616 PW M Motor counterblade
driver left down
200
200
200
200
0
Rights Min.
rw
Designation
33614 Mot. counterblade tim e
driver 2nd speed
No.
1000
1000
1000
1000
200
Max.
1000
1000
1000
1000
2
0,001
0,001
0,001
0,001
s
Default Unit
The speed of the
counterblade in the
1st level is
decreased
The speed of the
counterblade in the
1st level is
decreased
The speed of the
counterblade in the
1st level is
decreased
The speed of the
counterblade in the
1st level is
decreased
The tim e when the
counterblade
switches to the 2nd
speed level is
shortened.
Reduce
Shearbar
Parameter BiG X 600/I,600-2, 700/I, 700-2, 750C, 770-2, 850/I, 850-2, 1100/I, 1100-2
Setting denoting after what tim e in sec. the
counterblade engine changes from the reduced
speed to the 2nd Speed level ( 100% ) changes. The
speed of the 2nd level cannot currently be set. The
speed of the 1st level is set with the param eters
33616 - 33619.
Description
Shearbar
The speed of the
Setting denoting which voltage of the counterblade
counterblade in the m otor is to be actuated in the 1st level.
1st level is increased 0% ==> 0 volts
100 % ==> 12-14 volts (m ax. speed)
The speed of the
Setting denoting which voltage of the counterblade
counterblade in the m otor is to be actuated in the 1st level.
1st level is increased 0% ==> 0 volts
100 % ==> 12-14 volts (m ax. speed)
The speed of the
Setting denoting which voltage of the counterblade
counterblade in the m otor is to be actuated in the 1st level.
1st level is increased 0% ==> 0 volts
100 % ==> 12-14 volts (m ax. speed)
The speed of the
Setting denoting which voltage of the counterblade
counterblade in the m otor is to be actuated in the 1st level.
1st level is increased 0% ==> 0 volts
100 % ==> 12-14 volts (m ax. speed)
The tim e when the
counterblade
switches to the 2nd
speed level is
extended.
Increase
Designation
Rights Min.
Software-Version: 150 200 104-38
No.
Max.
Default Unit
Reduce
Deleted
Parameter BiG X 600/I,600-2, 700/I, 700-2, 750C, 770-2, 850/I, 850-2, 1100/I, 1100-2
Increase
Description
Deleted
32.2
Error Messages
765
2 undervoltage - SmartDrive
2
Status: 29.08.2016
1 overvoltage - SmartDrive
Description
Possible Reason
Error: SmartDrive power supply
voltage too low
Check battery acid
Measure battery voltage
Battery dead
Turn Page please!
Charge battery, change battery
Replace cabling
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Check the cables.
Check fuse +22-F60
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Wiring defective
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Replace SmartDrive
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
Replace battery change-over
relay
Check fuse +22-F77
Test function of the relays
according to circuit diagram
Battery change-over relay
defective (500, 800, and 1000)
Replace the dynamo
Replace the dynamo
Remedial measure
SmartDrive power supply voltage LED +22-LD31 not lit
too low
Check the dynamo
While engine is running,
measure on batteries. Voltage
must not be over 14.8V
Recommend Check
Dynamo defective
Error: SmartDrive supply voltage The controller of the dynamo is
too high.
defective
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
1
Error No.
Page No. 1/228
Description
See Remedial action
Measure battery voltage Check
battery acid
Check wiring to the 12V sensors
Check 12V sensors
See Remedial action
Battery dead
Short circuit in the wiring to a
12V sensor
Short circuit in a 12V sensor
Internal SmartDrive error
Replace SmartDrive
Change 12V sensor
Replace cabling
Charge battery Change battery
Replace cabling
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Check the cables.
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Wiring defective
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check fuse +22-F77
Replace SmartDrive
Replace cabling
Check the cables.
Internal SmartDrive error
Change charge indicator lamp
Check charge indicator lamp
Charge indicator lamp defective
Replace the dynamo
Remedial measure
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Recommend Check
Dynamo defective
Possible Reason
Error: 12 V sensor supply voltage 12-sensors power supply too low LED +22-LD31 not lit
too low
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
3 Malfunction sensor volt 12V SmartDrive
Status: 29.08.2016
3
Error No.
Page No. 2/228
8 Malfunction speed wheel rear
right - SmartDrive
8
Status: 29.08.2016
4 Malfunction sensor volt 5V SmartDrive
Description
From the speed sensor in the
hydraulic engine rear right, no
signals can be detected
Error: 5 V sensor supply voltage
too low
Meaning
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
No speed sensor is installed in
Maker certain a wheel sensor is
the hydraulic engine rear right.
installed rear right on the
However, a number of pulses is
machine.
indicated as parameter 22049
\\\"number of pulses per
revolution of the rear wheel\\\". If
0 pulses are indicated, this
means that no wheel sensor is
installed.
Change 5V sensors
Check 5V sensors
Short circuit in a 5V sensor
Turn Page please!
If no sensor is installed, the
value 0 must be entered in the
parameter 22049.
Replace SmartDrive
Replace wiring to the 5V sensors
Change battery
Check battery acid
Short circuit in the wiring to a 5V Check wiring to the 5V sensors
sensor
Charge battery
Measure battery voltage
Battery dead
Replace cabling
Check the cables.
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Wiring defective
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check fuse +22-F77
Remedial measure
LED +22-LD31 not lit
Recommend Check
5-sensors power supply too low
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
4
Error No.
Page No. 3/228
Status: 29.08.2016
Error No.
Page No. 4/228
Description
Meaning
Sensor supply voltage from the
wheel sensor defective
Cable harness defective
Possible Reason
Remedial measure
Remedy the fault in the wiring or
replace the wiring
Check / measure the wiring of
the sensor supply voltage for
cable break / short circuit
Turn Page please!
If OK, replace the appropriate
sensor that is responsible for the
short circuit.
Disconntect all further sensors
which are supplied via this
sensor supply voltage and
measure the sensor supply
voltage directly on the control
unit (pull the plug on the
respective sensor).
The following sensors are
supplied via this supply voltage:
-Service brake pressure (B16)
-High pressure of front axle
(B13)
-Service brake switch (B40)
Measure the power supply from Check the following steps; if
the sensor directly on the control these steps are OK, replace
unit Voltage must be greater
control unit SmartDrive
than 11 V
Check the wiring between sensor Remedy the fault in the wiring or
and control unit SmartDrive
replace the cable harness
Check the power supply from the Check the following steps; if they
sensor. To do this, measure the are not OK, replace the cable
voltage in plug XB90 from sensor harness
B90 speed wheel with a
multimeter. Contact 1 = + 12 V,
contact 3 = earth.
Voltage must be greater than 11
V.
Recommend Check
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
17 parameter value
impermissible - SmartDrive
17
Status: 29.08.2016
16 parameter set invalid SmartDrive
Description
Error: MIN/MAX parameters
Error: EEPROM checksum
Meaning
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
EEPROM defective
Internal SmartDrive error
Check parameter file
Check parameters
Incorrect values in EEPROM
Incorrect parameter file
downloaded
Check software version
No update of new parameters
performed
Install replacement SmartDrive
Sensor input in SmartDrive
defective
Turn Page please!
Transfer parameter file onto
Smart Drive
Replace SmartDrive
Replace SmartDrive
Load parameter file in
SmartDrive
Load parameter file in
SmartDrive
Install new SmartDrive
Install new sensor
Remedy the fault in the wiring or
replace the cable harness
Measure signal line in the cable
harness between control unit
and sensor for cable break /
short circuit
Install replacement sensor
Remedial measure
Recommend Check
Sensor defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
16
Error No.
Page No. 5/228
21 internal Malfunction SmartDrive
30 Malfunction control loop front Error: Control loop for drive
axis pump 1 - SmartDrive
pump 1 front axle - Maximum
speed of remaining pump
possible
21
30
Status: 29.08.2016
20 internal Malfunction SmartDrive
20
Error: I2C Bus
Error: EV DAC
Error: Digital Pot
19 internal Malfunction SmartDrive
19
Error: EEPROM
Meaning
18 internal Malfunction SmartDrive
Description
Check wiring to pump valves
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
Coil for solenoid valves defective Test coil
Short circuit/broken cable in
wiring for pump valves
Internal SmartDrive error
Internal SmartDrive error
Internal SmartDrive error
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
EEPROM defective
EEPROM defective
Check parameters
Recommend Check
Incorrect values in EEPROM
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
18
Error No.
Page No. 6/228
Turn Page please!
Replace the solenoid valve
Replace wiring
Replace SmartDrive
Replace SmartDrive
Replace SmartDrive
Replace SmartDrive
Replace SmartDrive
Replace SmartDrive
Replace SmartDrive
Transfer parameter file onto
Smart Drive
Remedial measure
31 Malfunction control loop rear
axis pump 2 - SmartDrive
31
Status: 29.08.2016
Description
Error: Control loop for drive
pump 2 rear axle - Maximum
speed of remaining pump
possible
Meaning
Check valve plug
Valve plug defective
Replace the solenoid valve
See Remedial action
Check charge pressure
See Remedial action
Solenoid valve defective
The charge pressure is too low
The drive pump 2 is defective
Turn Page please!
Replace the drive pump 2
Change charge pressure valve
(30+/-3bar)
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring to pump valves
Replace valve plug
Replace SmartDrive
Replace the drive pump 1
Change charge pressure valve
(30+/-3bar)
Change adjusting unit
Remedial measure
Coil for solenoid valves defective Test coil
Check valve plug
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
Valve plug defective
Test function of drive pump
The drive pump 1 is defective
Check wiring to pump valves
Check charge pressure
The charge pressure is too low
Short circuit/broken cable in
wiring for pump valves
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Adjusting unit defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
Error No.
Page No. 7/228
32 Malfunction swivel angle
sensor B39 pump rear axis Smart Drive
33
Status: 29.08.2016
32 Malfunction swivel angle
sensor B38 pump front axis
SmartDrive
Description
Error: Pivoting angle of drive
pump 2 rear axle - Signal out of
range - Maximum speed of
remaining pump possible
Error: Pivoting angle of drive
pump 1 front axle - Signal out of
range - Maximum speed of
remaining pump possible
Meaning
Test voltage on the sensor
Pivoting angle sensor defective
Measure voltage on the sensor
Check sensor plugs
Sensor plug for pivoting angle
defective
Calibration of the pivoting angle
sensor not correct
Check the wiring to the sensors
for the pivoting angle
Short circuit/broken cable in
wiring for pivoting angle sensors
Run travelling gear diagnostics
Remeasure voltage in neutral
position
Calibration of the pivoting angle
sensor not correct
Values incorrectly set
Run travelling gear diagnostics
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Values incorrectly set
Internal SmartDrive error
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
32
Error No.
Page No. 8/228
Turn Page please!
Set the sensor pivoting angle.
There must be a signal of
approx. 2.5 volts present in
neutral position
Correctly set voltage values
Replace and adjust the sensor
pivoting angle. There must be a
signal of approx. 2.5 volts
present in neutral position
Replace sensor plug
Replace wiring to the pivoting
angle sensors
Set the sensor pivoting angle.
There must be a signal of
approx. 2.5 volts present in
neutral position
Correctly set voltage values
Replace SmartDrive
Remedial measure
Description
Error: Pivoting angle of drive
pump 1 front axle - Pivoting
angle is changing too quickly Maximum speed of remaining
pump possible
Meaning
Check hydraulics for
contamination
Measure voltage in neutral
position
Check the wiring to the sensors
for the pivoting angle
Check sensor plugs
Measure voltage on the sensor
Calibration of the pivoting angle
sensor not correct
Short circuit/broken cable in
wiring for pivoting angle sensors
Sensor plug for pivoting angle
defective
Pivoting angle sensor defective
Measure voltage on the sensor
Pivoting angle sensor defective
Dirt in the hydraulics (actuator
valves, for example)
Check sensor plugs
Sensor plug for pivoting angle
defective
Run travelling gear diagnostics
Check the wiring to the sensors
for the pivoting angle
Short circuit/broken cable in
wiring for pivoting angle sensors
Values incorrectly set
Recommend Check
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
34 swivel angle sensor B38
pump front axis signal change
implausible - SmartDrive
Status: 29.08.2016
34
Error No.
Page No. 9/228
Turn Page please!
Replace sensor plug
Replace wiring to the pivoting
angle sensors
Set the sensor pivoting angle.
There must be a signal of
approx. 2.5 volts present in
neutral position
Remove dirt
Correctly set voltage values
Replace and adjust the sensor
pivoting angle. There must be a
signal of approx. 2.5 volts
present in neutral position
Replace sensor plug
Replace wiring to the pivoting
angle sensors
Remedial measure
36 brake pressure sensor B16
and brake pedal switch B40
signal change implausible SmartDrive
36
Status: 29.08.2016
35 swivel angle sensor B39
pump rear axis signal change
implausible - SmartDrive
Description
Possible Reason
Error: Brake pressure sensor For road travel: Maximum speed
/4
Measure voltage on the sensor
Pivoting angle sensor defective
Run travelling gear diagnostics
Check sensor plugs
Sensor plug for pivoting angle
defective
Values incorrectly set
Check the wiring to the sensors
for the pivoting angle
Short circuit/broken cable in
wiring for pivoting angle sensors
Turn Page please!
Correctly set voltage values
Replace and adjust the sensor
pivoting angle. There must be a
signal of approx. 2.5 volts
present in neutral position
Replace sensor plug
Replace wiring to the pivoting
angle sensors
Set the sensor pivoting angle.
There must be a signal of
approx. 2.5 volts present in
neutral position
Remove dirt
Check hydraulics (e.g. actuator
valves) for contamination
Measure voltage in neutral
position
Correctly set voltage values
Replace and adjust the sensor
pivoting angle. There must be a
signal of approx. 2.5 volts
present in neutral position
Remedial measure
Run travelling gear diagnostics
Recommend Check
Calibration of the pivoting angle
sensor not correct
Error: Pivoting angle of drive
Values incorrectly set
pump 2 rear axle - Pivoting angle
is changing too quickly Maximum speed of remaining
Dirt in the hydraulics (actuator
pump possible
valves, for example)
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
35
Error No.
Page No. 10/228
Status: 29.08.2016
Error No.
Page No. 11/228
Description
Meaning
See Remedial action
Test function of sensor
Check brake pressure
See Remedial action
Brake pedal switch defective
Brake pressure sensor defective
Brake pressure defective
Internal SmartDrive error
Replace SmartDrive
Set brake pressure
Replace the brake pressure
sensor
Change and adjust brake pedal
switch so that the switching of
the brake pedal switch is within
a range of 70 - 90 bar brake
pressure; observe installation
distance!
Replace sensor plug
Check sensor plugs
Sensor plug for brake pressure
sensor, brake pedal switch
defective
Adjust brake pedal switch so that
the switching of the brake pedal
switch is within a range of 70 90 bar brake pressure; observe
installation distance!
Remedial measure
Replace wiring to the sensors for
the brake pressure sensor and
brake pedal switch
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Short circuit / broken cable in
Check the wiring to the sensors
wiring for brake pressure sensor, for the brake pedal sensor and
brake pedal switch
brake pedal switch
Brake pedal switch not adjusted
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
38 brake tank pressure B18 too
low - SmartDrive
38
Status: 29.08.2016
37 pump speed/diesel motor
speed too low - SmartDrive
Description
Pump speed too slow
Error: Brake tank pressure too
low - For road travel: Maximum
speed / 4
Error:
Meaning
Run travelling gear diagnostics
Check valve
See Remedial action
Check the wiring to the brake
tank pressure sensor
Check sensor plugs
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
Values incorrectly set
Accumulator charging valve
defective
Accumulator defective
Short circuit/broken cable in
wiring for brake tank pressure
sensor
Sensor plug for brake tank
pressure defective
Sensor for brake tank pressure
defective
Internal SmartDrive error
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC3
The brake tank pressure is too
low
Check engine speed
Recommend Check
Engine speed too low
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
37
Error No.
Page No. 12/228
Replace SmartDrive
Replace brake tank pressure
sensor
Replace sensor plug
Replace wiring to the brake tank
pressure sensor
Replace accumulator
Replace accumulator charging
valve
Correctly set voltage values
Start diesel engine so that the
accumulator is filled
Replace SmartDrive
Replace the KMC3
Set engine speed
Remedial measure
Description
Error: CAN bus communication
Meaning
LED +22-LD44 not lit
See Remedial action
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Internal SmartDrive error
Check fuse +22-F44
LED +22-LD62 not lit
KMC3 power supply defective
See Remedial action
Check fuse +22-F92
See Remedial action
Internal joystick error
Internal error KMC3
Check fuse +22-F62
Check fuse +22-F65
Joystick power supply defective
Replace SmartDrive
Replace the KMC3
Replace joystick
Replace fuse +22-F65
Replace terminating resistors
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
CAN1 terminating resistors
defective
Replace wiring
Check wiring
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN1 bus
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check fuse +22-F77
Remedial measure
LED +22-LD31 not lit
Recommend Check
SmartDrive power supply
defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
39 Malfunction CAN1
communication - SmartDrive
Status: 29.08.2016
39
Error No.
Page No. 13/228
Status: 29.08.2016
Error: Attempt to move against
the parking brake
42 park brake active SmartDrive
42
Meaning
40 Malfunction high press.sensor Error: High pressure sensor B13 - SmartDrive
signal out of range
Description
Replace SmartDrive
Remeasure whether switch
actuates
Parking brake switch defective
Broken cable in the wiring bridge Check wiring bridge at the
of the parking brake pressure
parking brake pressure input
input at the SmartDrive
Check the wiring to the parking
brake switch
Short circuit in the wiring of the
switch
Turn Page please!
Replace wiring bridge at the
parking brake pressure input
Replace parking brake switch
Replace wiring to the parking
brake switch
Replace fuse +22-F72.1
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
If required, re-adjust high
pressure
Check fuse +22-F72.1
Check high pressure (420 bar)
High pressure incorrect
Replace high-pressure sensor
Switch off the parking brake
switch
Measure voltage on the sensor
High pressure sensor defective
Replace sensor plug
Replace wiring to high pressure
sensor
Remedial measure
Check whether parking brake is
actuated
Check sensor plugs
Sensor plug, high pressure defective
Parking brake switch is actuated
Check wiring to high pressure
sensor
Recommend Check
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the high pressure
sensor
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
40
Error No.
Page No. 14/228
Status: 29.08.2016
44 oil temp too high B14 - Smart Error: Oil temperature too high Drive
For road travel: Maximum speed
/ 1,5
44
Internal SmartDrive error
Possible Reason
Check flush valve temperature
sensor
Flush valve temperature sensor
defective
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
Check the wiring for the
temperature sensor flush valve
Check the wiring for the
temperature sensor flush valve
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the supply pressure
sensor
Short circuit/broken cable in
wiring for the temperature
sensor flush valve
Test function of charge pressure
valve
Supply pressure valve defective
Check that radiator is clean
Test charge pressure
Supply pump defective
Hydraulic oil too hot
Check hydraulics for leaks
Check engine speed
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Hydraulic leakage
Error: The charge pressure is too No engine speed or speed too
low
slow
Meaning
43 charge pressure too low SmartDrive
Description
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
43
Error No.
Page No. 15/228
Turn Page please!
Replace the temperature sensor
flush valve
Replace wiring for the flush valve
temperature sensor
Clean the radiator
Replace SmartDrive
Replace wiring for the flush valve
temperature sensor
Replace the supply pressure
valve
Change charge pump
(30+/-3bar)
Repair the leakage
Start engine or increase speed
Replace SmartDrive
Remedial measure
46 Valve coil Y1 Malfunction
pump 1 front axis - SmartDrive
47 Valve coil Y2 Malfunction
pump 1 front axis - SmartDrive
46
47
Status: 29.08.2016
45 release travelling gear S3
missing - SmartDrive
Description
Error: Coil 1, pump 2
Error: Coil 1, pump 1
Error: Attempt to move without
travelling gear release Maximum speed possible
Meaning
Check wiring to valve
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
Short circuit/broken cable in
wiring for coil
Check coil
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
Coil defective
Check the LED +22-LD43 on the
relay board
Release travelling gear switch
defective
Check wiring to valve
Check the wiring to the release
travelling gear switch
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring of the switch
Short circuit/broken cable in
wiring for coil
Check travelling gear release
switch
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Release travelling gear switch is
not actuated
Internal SmartDrive error
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
45
Error No.
Page No. 16/228
Turn Page please!
Replace wiring to valve
Replace SmartDrive
Replace coil
Replace wiring to valve
Replace SmartDrive
Replace release travelling gear
switch
Replace wiring to the travelling
gear release switch
Perform operating panel
diagnostics
Switch on the travelling gear
switch
Replace SmartDrive
Remedial measure
49 Valve coil Y4 Malfunction
pump 2 rear axis - SmartDrive
50 Malfunction joystick SmartDrive Joystick error
49
50
Status: 29.08.2016
48 Valve coil Y3 Malfunction
pump 2 rear axis - SmartDrive
Description
Error: Driving lever - Signal
incorrect/faulty - Maximum
speed / 4
Error: Coil 2, pump 2
Error: Coil 1, pump 2
Meaning
Central electrical power supply
defective.
Turn Page please!
Check fuse +22-F63
Replace fuse +22-F65
Check fuse +22-F65
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Replace fuse +22-F57
Replace SmartDrive
Replace coil
Replace wiring to valve
Replace SmartDrive
Replace coil
Replace wiring to valve
Replace SmartDrive
Replace coil
Remedial measure
Check fuse +22-F57
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
Joystick power supply defective
Test coil
Coil defective
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
Check wiring to valve
Test coil
Coil defective
Short circuit/broken cable in
wiring for coil
Check the cables.
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
Short circuit/broken cable in
wiring for coil
Test coil
Recommend Check
Coil defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
48
Error No.
Page No. 17/228
61 Valve coil Y2 current
implaus.pump 1 front axis SmartDrive
61
Status: 29.08.2016
60 Valve coil Y1 current
implaus.pump 1 front axis SmartDrive
Description
Error: actuator valve 2 drive
pump 1 - Maximum speed of
remaining pump possible
Error: actuator valve 1 drive
pump 1 - Maximum speed of
remaining pump possible
Meaning
Replace valve plug
Replace SmartDrive
Internal SmartDrive error
Replace valve plug
Valve plug defective
Replace SmartDrive
Internal SmartDrive error
See Remedial action
Replace coil
Coil for solenoid valves defective Test coil
Check valve plug
Replace wiring to actuator valve
2 pump 1
Short circuit/broken cable in the Check wiring to actuator valve 2
wiring for actuator valve 2 pump pump 1
1
See Remedial action
Replace coil
Coil for solenoid valves defective Test coil
Check valve plug
Valve plug defective
Replace SmartDrive
Replace wiring to actuator valve
1 pump 1
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
Replace driving lever
Check fuse +22-F92
Remedial measure
Short circuit/broken cable in the Check wiring to actuator valve 1
wiring for actuator valve 1 pump pump 1
1
Test functions of the driving
lever
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Recommend Check
Driving lever defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
60
Error No.
Page No. 18/228
63 Valve coil Y3 current
implausible pump 2 rear axis SmartDrive
64 Valve coil Y4 current
implausible pump 2 rear axis SmartDrive
63
64
Status: 29.08.2016
62 Malfunction valve coil Y69
stop valve pump 1 front axis SmartDrive
Description
Error: actuator valve 2 drive
pump 2 - Maximum speed of
remaining pump possible
Error: actuator valve 1 drive
pump 2 - Maximum speed of
remaining pump possible
Error: Stop valve for drive pump
1 - Front axle - Maximum speed
of remaining pump possible
Meaning
Replace SmartDrive
Replace SmartDrive
Internal SmartDrive error
Turn Page please!
Replace valve plug
Valve plug defective
Check valve plug
Replace wiring to actuator valve
2 pump 2
Short circuit/broken cable in the Check wiring to actuator valve 2
wiring for actuator valve 2 pump pump 2
2
See Remedial action
Replace coil
Coil for solenoid valves defective Test coil
Check valve plug
Replace valve plug
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
Replace coil
Valve plug defective
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring to actuator valve
1 pump 2
Check valve plug
Valve plug defective
Replace wiring to stop valve for
pump 1
Remedial measure
Short circuit/broken cable in the Check wiring to actuator valve 1
wiring for actuator valve 1 pump pump 2
2
Check wiring to stop valve for
pump 1
Recommend Check
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for stop valve pump 1
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
62
Error No.
Page No. 19/228
Description
Error: Stop valve for drive pump
2 - Rear axle - Maximum speed
of remaining pump possible
Meaning
Check wiring to stop valve for
pump 2
Check valve plug
Test coil
See Remedial action
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for stop valve pump 2
Valve plug defective
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Internal SmartDrive error
Replace SmartDrive
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring to stop valve for
pump 2
Replace SmartDrive
See Remedial action
Internal SmartDrive error
Remedial measure
Replace coil
Recommend Check
Coil for solenoid valves defective Test coil
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
65 Malfunction valve coil Y70
stop valve pump 2 rear axis SmartDrive
Status: 29.08.2016
65
Error No.
Page No. 20/228
Description
The control unit for the traction
drive (SmartDrive) has detected
a cable break or a short circuit
on the diagnostics-capable seat
switch. If the voltage from seat
switch is between 0 - 1.2 volts, a
cable break is detected. If the
voltage from seat switch is
between 3.8 - 5 volts, a short
circuit is detected. The faulty
voltage must be present for at
least 0.5 seconds before the
error message is displayed.
Voltage between 1.2 volts - 2.2.
Volts ==> Driver on the seat
Voltage between 2.8 - 3.8 volts
==> No driver on the seat
Voltage between 2.2 volts - 2.8
volts ==> Undefined area
If the fault has occured, the
traction drive changes to Limp
mode and only limited driving is
possible
Road operation max. 25 km/h
Field mode max. 5 km/h.<br
/The diagnostics-capable seat
switch is installed on BiG X 700,
850 and 1100.
Meaning
Wiring to the seat switch
defective
See next check
Replace wiring
Replace seat switch
Turn Page please!
Measure wiring from seat switch Remedy the fault in the wiring or
to control unit from traction drive replace the cable harness
and KMC3 with multimeter for
cable break and short circuit
Check seat switch with
diagnostics in the terminal
Measure resistance from seat
switch witch multimeter on the
plug from seat between contact
21X1.12 (earth) and 21X1.11
(+5 V).
Driver on the seat = seat switch
closed = 1.5 kiloohm
No driver on the seat = seat
switch open = 3 kiloohm
Replace seat switch and/or
wiring in the seat
Measure the resistance from the
seat switch with multimeter
Replace wiring in the seat
See next check
Check the seat switch in the
diagnostics of the terminal
Seat switch defective
Remedial measure
Check parameter 33659 \"Seat Adapt the parameter
switch hardware\" in the
accordingly.
parameter group \"General work.
Note: On machine with a new
cabine, a diagnostics-capable
seat switch is installed.
Recommend Check
Parameter for the setting for the
seat switch installed is wrongly
indicated
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
70 Malfunction seat switch SmartDrive
Status: 29.08.2016
70
Error No.
Page No. 21/228
Description
Meaning
Check parameter 33659 \\\"Seat
switch hardware\\\" in the
parameter group \\\”General
work.
Note: On machines with new
cab, a diagnostics-capable seat
switch is installed.
0 = closer
1 = diagnostics-capable 5 volts
(new cab Poclain traction drive)
2 = diagnostics-capable 10 volts
(new cab Bosch traction drive)
Measure wiring of the seat
switch to SmartDrive and KMC3
with multimeter for cable break
and short circuit
Wiring defective
Install replacement KMC3
KMC3 defective
The parameter 33659 \\\\\\\"Seat
switch hardware\\\\\\\" for the
setting for the seat switch
installed is wrongly indicated.
Install replacement SmartDrive
Recommend Check
SmartDrive defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
71 Seat switch value implausible The seat switch is parallely
- SmartDrive
evaluated by the control unit for
the traction drive (SmartDrive)
and by the control unit KMC3.
These two states are compared
by the traction drive. If the state
is not the same for more than 3
seconds, this fault is shown.
If the error has occured, the
traction drive changes to Limp
mode and only limited driving is
possible
Road operation max. 25 km/h
Field operation max. 5 km/h.
Status: 29.08.2016
71
Error No.
Page No. 22/228
Turn Page please!
Remedy the fault in the wiring or
replace the cable harness
Adapt the parameter
accordingly.
Install new KMC3
Replace SmartDrive
Remedial measure
96 Malfunction CAN1 between
terminal and SmartDrive / DRC
96
Status: 29.08.2016
95 foot brake permanent
activated / Malfunction brake
pressure sensor B16 SmartDrive
Description
Error: CAN bus communication SmartDrive to terminal.
Error: Brake valve
Meaning
Perform CAN diagnostics.
In the menu - Info software
versions - check the software
version of the control units
LED +22-LD31 not lit
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Determine via the terminal
Control unit not programmed
SmartDrive power supply
defective
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Turn Page please!
Check fuse +22-F63
Check fuse +22-F77
Program control unit
Replace SmartDrive
Internal SmartDrive error
See Remedial action
Replacing the Brake Valve
Remove foot from the brake
Install new KMC3
Install new SmartDrive
Remedial measure
Brake valve defective or jammed Check brake valve
See Remedial action
Install replacement KMC3
KMC3 defective
Brake was applied continuously
(for example braking pressure
greater than 10 bar and longer
than 3 min; terminal version
150200104-13 or later: braking
pressure greater than 5 bar)
Install replacement SmartDrive
Recommend Check
SmartDrive defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
95
Error No.
Page No. 23/228
Status: 29.08.2016
Error No.
Page No. 24/228
Description
Meaning
If required, replace wiring and
terminating resistors
Load current software version.
If necessary, update the
software version of the autopilot
Check wiring
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
See Remedial action
CAN1 terminating resistors
defective
Old software version on KMC3.
Have software versions
Up to KMC3 software version 150 displayed on the terminal and
200 103 - 08 the error 96 can be compare.
caused by an error in the KMC3
software.
If the serial number of the
hardware autopilot is greater
than 13.154157.1022 the
autpilot software version must
be at least 150200029-20
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN1 bus
In some cases an incorrect CAN
configuration from the autopilot
may be the cause. The hardware
does not match the autopilot
autopilot software and
sporadically causes this and /or
other CAN error messages
Internal SmartDrive error
Replace SmartDrive
Replace wiring
Check the SmartDrive power
supply and check wiring
LED +22-LD116 not flashing
Life signal from SmartDrive
faulty
Check the safety output of KMC3
(output is always active with
engine shut off) and check wiring
Check fuse +22-F92
Remedial measure
LED+22-LD102 not lit
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Recommend Check
Safety output for travelling gear
of KMC3 defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
98 Unknown error - SmartDrive
113 Undervoltage 12V - joystick
98
113
Status: 29.08.2016
Description
Error: 12 V supply voltage too
low
Error: Internal error in
SmartDrive
Meaning
Check charge indicator lamp
Check the cables.
Test dynamo
See Remedial action
Charge indicator lamp defective
Dynamo defective
Internal joystick error
Replace joystick
Replace the dynamo
Replace charge indicator lamp,
renew cabling
Check battery acid Check battery Charge battery Change battery
voltage
Battery dead
Replace cabling
Check the cables.
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Wiring defective
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Replace fuse +22-F65
Check fuse +22-F65
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Replace fuse +22-F57
Check fuse +22-F57
Joystick power supply voltage
too low
Replace SmartDrive
Remedial measure
Perform joystick diagnostics
See Remedy
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Internal error in SmartDrive
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
Error No.
Page No. 25/228
115 Undervoltage 8V - joystick
115
Status: 29.08.2016
114 Overvoltage 12V - joystick
Description
Error: 8.5 V joystick supply
voltage too low
Error: 12 V supply voltage too
high
Meaning
Battery dead
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Turn Page please!
Check battery acid Check battery Charge battery Change battery
voltage
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Replace fuse +22-F65
Check fuse +22-F65
Replace joystick
Replace fuse +22-F57
See Remedial action
Internal joystick error
Replace battery change-over
relay
Check fuse +22-F57
Test function of the relays
according to circuit diagram
Battery change-over relay
defective (500, 800, and 1000)
Replace the dynamo
Joystick power supply voltage
too low
Check the dynamo
Dynamo defective
Replace the dynamo
Perform joystick diagnostics
While engine is running,
measure on batteries. Voltage
must not be over 14.8V
The controller of the dynamo is
defective
Remedial measure
Determine via the terminal
Perform joystick diagnostics
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
114
Error No.
Page No. 26/228
116 Malfunction Button voltage
12V - joystick
117 Malfunction Voltage supply
LED - joystick
116
117
Status: 29.08.2016
Description
See Remedial action
Internal joystick error
Check charge indicator lamp
Check the cables.
Charge indicator lamp defective
Turn Page please!
If required, replace charge
indicator lamp and/or Replace
cabling
Check battery acid Check battery Charge battery Change battery
voltage
Replace joystick
Replace the dynamo
Battery dead
Perform joystick diagnostics
Test dynamo
Dynamo defective
If required, replace charge
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Check charge indicator lamp
Check the cables.
Replace joystick
Charge indicator lamp defective
See Remedial action
Internal joystick error
Replace the dynamo
Check battery acid Check battery Charge battery Change battery
voltage
Test dynamo
Dynamo defective
If required, replace charge
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Remedial measure
Battery dead
Check charge indicator lamp
Check the cables.
Recommend Check
Charge indicator lamp defective
Possible Reason
Error: 12 volt supply voltage LED Determine via the terminal
out of range
Error: 12 volt button voltage voltage out of range
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
Error No.
Page No. 27/228
118 Malfunction Voltage supply
outputs - joystick
119 Internal Malfunction joystick
120 Internal Malfunction joystick
118
119
120
Status: 29.08.2016
Description
Error: FLASH checksum
Error: Min/Max parameters
Error: 12 volt supply voltage for
outputs - voltage out of range
Meaning
See Remedial action
Internal joystick error
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
EEPROM defective
Download was interrupted
See Remedial action
EEPROM defective
Incorrect values in EEPROM
Test dynamo
Dynamo defective
Turn Page please!
Repeat download
Replace joystick
Replace joystick
Replace joystick
Replace the dynamo
If required, replace charge
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Check charge indicator lamp,
Check the cables.
Charge indicator lamp defective
Replace joystick
Check battery acid Check battery Charge battery Change battery
voltage
See Remedial action
Internal joystick error
Replace the dynamo
Remedial measure
Battery dead
Test dynamo
Recommend Check
Dynamo defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
Error No.
Page No. 28/228
Description
Error: Internal fault in the
joystick
Meaning
Fehlercode: 0000 0200: ==>
CAN BusOff
Fehlercode: 0000 0200: ==>
Uebertemperatur. Die interne
Temperatur im Joystick ist >
80°C
Joystick tauschen
Siehe Abhilfe
Turn Page please!
CAN-Verkabelung kontrollieren
Maschine neustarten
Es sind
Die Umgebungstemperatur ist
auch > 75° C ==> Kabine
abkuehlen lassen und Maschine
neu starten
Es wurde KEINE Taste vom
Fahrer betaetigt, die
Fehlermeldung erscheint jedoch
nach jedem Neustart der
Maschine ==> Fahrhebel
tauschen
Replace joystick
Replace joystick
Replace joystick
Remedial measure
See Remedy
See Remedial action
Internal joystick error
Internal fault in the joystick
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
FLASH defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
121 Internal Malfunction joystick
Status: 29.08.2016
121
Error No.
Page No. 29/228
Description
Error: 12 V supply voltage too
low
Meaning
Perform operating panel
diagnostics
Fehlercode: 0000 2000: ==>
Restart durch Watchdog ==>
Joystick wurde nicht
ordnungsgemaess
ausgeschaltet. Z.B. bei
eingeschalteter Zuendung den
Batteriehauptschalter
ausgeschaltet.
Recommend Check
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check fuse +22-F64
LED +22-LD64 not lit
Turn Page please!
Check fuse +22-F62
Replace fuse +22-F48.1
Replace fuse +22-F47
Interner Fehler im Joystick ==>
Joystick tauschen
Wackelkontakt in der
Spannungsversorgung vom
Joystick ==> Verkabelung und
Spannungsversorgung vom
Joystick kontrollieren
Bei eingeschalteter Zuendung
wurde der Batteriehauptschalter
ausgeschaltet ==> Neustart der
Maschine
Joystick tauschen
Remedial measure
LED +22-LD62 not lit
Check fuse +22-F48.1
Power supply for operating panel Check fuse +22-F47
too low
Determine via the terminal
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
124 Undervoltage 12V - CU
Status: 29.08.2016
124
Error No.
Page No. 30/228
Description
Error: 12 V supply voltage too
high
Meaning
While engine is running,
measure on batteries. Voltage
must not be over 14.8V
Check the dynamo
Test function of the relays
according to circuit diagram
See Remedial action
The controller of the dynamo is
defective
Dynamo defective
Battery change-over relay
defective (500, 800, and 1000)
Internal error, operating panel
See Remedial action
Internal error, operating panel
Perform operating panel
diagnostics
Check the dynamo
Dynamo defective
Determine via the terminal
Check the charge indicator lamp, Replace charge indicator lamp, if
check the wiring
required also replace cabling
Charge indicator lamp defective
Replace operating panel
Replace battery change-over
relay
Replace the dynamo
Replace the dynamo
Replace operating panel
Replace the dynamo
Check battery acid Check battery Charge battery Replace battery
charge
Battery dead
Replace cabling
Remedial measure
Check the cables.
Recommend Check
Wiring defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
125 Overvoltage 12V - CU
Status: 29.08.2016
125
Error No.
Page No. 31/228
Status: 29.08.2016
127 Overvoltage 5V electronics - Error: 5 V electronics supply
CU
voltage too high
127
Meaning
126 Undervoltage 5V electronics Error: 5 V electronics supply
- CU
voltage too low
Description
While engine is running,
measure on batteries. Voltage
must not be over 14.8V
Check the dynamo
Test function of the relays
according to circuit diagram
See Remedial action
The controller of the dynamo is
defective
Dynamo defective
Battery change-over relay
defective (500, 800, and 1000)
Internal error, operating panel
See Remedial action
Internal error, operating panel
Perform operating panel
diagnostics
Check the dynamo
Dynamo defective
Determine via the terminal
Check the charge indicator lamp, Replace charge indicator lamp
check the wiring
Charge indicator lamp defective
Replace operating panel
Replace battery change-over
relay
Replace the dynamo
Replace the dynamo
Replace operating panel
Replace the dynamo
Check battery acid Check battery Charge battery Change battery
voltage
Battery dead
Remedial measure
Perform operating panel
diagnostics
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
126
Error No.
Page No. 32/228
129 Voltage 12V LEDs too high CU
130 Parameter value imperm. CU
131 Internal Malfunction - CU
129
130
131
Status: 29.08.2016
Description
Error: FLASH checksum
Error: Min/Max parameters
Error: 12 V LED supply voltage
too high
Meaning
Check whether the download is
complete
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
FLASH defective
Internal error, operating panel
See Remedial action
Internal error, operating panel
Download was interrupted
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
Internal error, operating panel
EEPROM defective
Test function of the relays
according to circuit diagram
Battery change-over relay
defective (500, 800, and 1000)
Check parameters
While engine is running,
measure on batteries. Voltage
must not be over 14.8V
The controller of the dynamo is
defective
Incorrect values in EEPROM
Perform operating panel
diagnostics
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
Error No.
Page No. 33/228
Replace operating panel
Replace CU
Repeat download
Replace operating panel
Replace CU
Set parameters
Replace operating panel
Replace battery change-over
relay
Replace the dynamo
Remedial measure
135 Undervoltage 12V - manual
operation
135
Status: 29.08.2016
132 Key actuated / Malfunction
keyboard console - CU
Description
Possible Reason
Error: 12 V supply voltage too
low
See Remedial action
at least one key is pressed
continuously
Recommend Check
Check the charge indicator lamp, If required, replace charge
check the wiring
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Test dynamo
See Remedial action
Charge indicator lamp defective
Dynamo defective
Internal error, manual operation
Replace manual operation
Replace the dynamo
Check battery acid Check battery Charge battery Change battery
voltage
Battery dead
Replace cabling
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Check the cables.
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Check fuse +4-F33
Change fuse +22-F56
Replace operating panel
Replace keyboard
Remedial measure
Wiring defective
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
LED +4-LD33 not lit
Power supply voltage for manual Check fuse +22-F56
operation too low
Internal error, operating panel
Error: Keyboard error (at least
Keyboard defective
one key is pressed continuously)
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
132
Error No.
Page No. 34/228
Status: 29.08.2016
137 Internal voltage 5V too low - Error: 5 V voltage too low
manual operation
137
Error: 12 V supply voltage too
high
Meaning
136 Overvoltage 12V - manual
operation
Description
Test dynamo
See Remedial action
Dynamo defective
Internal error, manual operation
Replace manual operation
Replace the dynamo
If required, replace charge
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Check charge indicator lamp
Check the cables.
Charge indicator lamp defective
Replace manual operation
Check battery acid Check battery Charge battery Change battery
voltage
See Remedial action
Internal error, manual operation
Replace battery change-over
relay
Battery dead
Test function of the relays
according to circuit diagram
Battery change-over relay
defective (500, 800, and 1000)
Replace the dynamo
Perform diagnostics for manual
operation
Test dynamo
Dynamo defective
Replace the dynamo
Remedial measure
Determine via the terminal
While engine is running,
measure on batteries. Voltage
must not be over 14.8V
Recommend Check
The controller of the dynamo is
defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
136
Error No.
Page No. 35/228
Status: 29.08.2016
139 Supply voltage LEDs too low Error: 12 V voltage for LEDs too
- manual operation
low
139
Error: 5 V voltage too high
138 Internal voltage 5V too high
- manual operation
138
Meaning
Description
Battery dead
Wiring defective
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Replace manual operation
Turn Page please!
Replace cabling
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Check the cables.
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Check fuse +4-F33
See Remedial action
Internal error, manual operation
Replace battery change-over
relay
LED +4-LD33 not lit
Test function of the relays
according to circuit diagram
Battery change-over relay
defective (500, 800, and 1000)
Replace the dynamo
Change fuse +22-F56
Test dynamo
Dynamo defective
Replace the dynamo
Remedial measure
Check fuse +22-F56
While engine is running,
measure on batteries. Voltage
must not be over 14.8V
The controller of the dynamo is
defective
Power supply voltage for 12 V
LEDs too low
Perform diagnostics for manual
operation
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
Error No.
Page No. 36/228
141 Parameter value
impermissible - manual
operation
141
Status: 29.08.2016
140 Supply voltage LEDs too
high - manual operation
Description
Error: Min/Max parameters
Error: 12 volt voltage for LEDs
too high
Meaning
Remedial measure
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
Internal error, manual operation
EEPROM defective
Test function of the relays
according to circuit diagram
Battery change-over relay
defective (500, 800, and 1000)
Check parameters
Test dynamo
Dynamo defective
Incorrect values in EEPROM
While engine is running,
measure on batteries. Voltage
must not be over 14.8V
See Remedial action
Internal error, manual operation
The controller of the dynamo is
defective
Test dynamo
Dynamo defective
Turn Page please!
Replace manual operation
Update parameters
Replace manual operation
Replace battery change-over
relay
Replace the dynamo
Replace the dynamo
Replace manual operation
Replace the dynamo
Check the charge indicator lamp, If required, replace charge
check the wiring
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Check battery acid Check battery Charge battery Change battery
voltage
Recommend Check
Charge indicator lamp defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
140
Error No.
Page No. 37/228
143 Key actuated / Malfunction
keyboard or external key manual operation
150 Button pressed / keyboard
malfunction - Joystick
143
150
Status: 29.08.2016
142 Internal Malfunction manuel operation
Description
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
FLASH defective
Internal error, manual operation
Key sticks mechanically or a
short circuit from the key is
internally available
When switching on the ignition, a The driver has accidentally
keypress has been detected on
pressed a key on the joystick.
the joystick.
Internal error, manual operation
Check each key from the joystick
in the terminal in the joystick
diagnostics to make certain
whether the key changes the
status in the display when
pressing.
Restart the machine without a
key being activated by the
driver.
See Remedial action
Check keyboard
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Download was interrupted
Internal error, manual operation
Possible Reason
Error: Keyboard error (at least
Keyboard defective
one key is pressed continuously)
Error: FLASH checksum
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
142
Error No.
Page No. 38/228
Replace the joystick if a button
has always the status ON and if
this status does not change
when it is activated.
Restart the machine
Replace manual operation
Replace manual operation
Replace manual operation
Replace manual operation
Repeat download
Replace manual operation
Remedial measure
151 Overtemperature - Joystick
152 CAN bus malfunction Joystick
153 LIN bus malfunction Joystick
151
152
153
Status: 29.08.2016
Description
Possible Reason
The joystick has detected an
error on the internal LIN bus.
The joystick has detected an
error on CAN bus
Check wiring
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
If the serial number of the
hardware autopilot is greater
than 13.154157.1022 the
autpilot software version must
be at least 150200029-20
See remedy
Short circuit/cable break in the
wiring CAN1 bus
CAN1 terminating resistors
defective
In some cases an incorrect CAN
configuration from the autopilot
may be the cause. The hardware
does not match the autopilot
autopilot software and
sporadically causes this and /or
other CAN error messages
Internal error joystick
LIN bus communication internally
in the joystick is defective
Perform CAN and joystick
diagnostics
See remedy
Recommend Check
Determination via terminal
The internal temperature from
Overheating of the joystick due
the joystick was higher than
to direct sunlight.
80°C for 5 seconds. The error will
be reset if the temperature is
below 78°.
Internal error joystick
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
Error No.
Page No. 39/228
Turn Page please!
Restart the machine
Replace joystick
If necessary, update the
software version of the autopilot
Replace wiring and/or
terminating resistors, if
necessary
Replace the wiring
Replace joystick
Cool off the joystick and restart
the machine
Remedial measure
Status: 29.08.2016
Instantaneous stop switch
console
502
The according switch has a
wrong position in order to start
the desired function. In case the
switch is activated, it must not
be activated to start the
function. In case the switch is
not activated, it must be
accordingly activated.
155 Joystick restart by Watchdog The joystick has been switched
off unexpectedly, e. g. by
switching off the machine with
switched on ignition or due to an
internal error in the joystick
155
Der Joystick hat einen internen
Fehler im Joystick erkannt
Meaning
154 Internal malfunction Joystick
Description
Replace joystick
Install the current software for
the joystick again
Internal fault in the joystick
Joystick tauschen
Joystick tauschen
Maschine neu starten
Replace joystick
Remedial measure
Switch off and switch on the
machine via ignition lock
Recommend Check
Machine has been switched off
by the main battery switch as
well as by ignition stage 1 or 2
turned on
Interne Stoerung im Joystick
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
154
Error No.
Page No. 40/228
Release switch Maintenance
Release switch Road/Field!
508
511
Status: 29.08.2016
Instantaneous stop switch
manuell controll
Description
The according switch has a
wrong position in order to start
the desired function. In case the
switch is activated, it must not
be activated to start the
function. In case the switch is
not activated, it must be
accordingly activated.
The according switch has a
wrong position in order to start
the desired function. In case the
switch is activated, it must not
be activated to start the
function. In case the switch is
not activated, it must be
accordingly activated.
The according switch has a
wrong position in order to start
the desired function. In case the
switch is activated, it must not
be activated to start the
function. In case the switch is
not activated, it must be
accordingly activated.
Meaning
Possible Reason
Recommend Check
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
505
Error No.
Page No. 41/228
Remedial measure
Release switch feed drive / front
attachment!
Release switch Transmission!
Release switch AutoPilot!
512
514
517
Status: 29.08.2016
Description
The according switch has a
wrong position in order to start
the desired function. In case the
switch is activated, it must not
be activated to start the
function. In case the switch is
not activated, it must be
accordingly activated.
The according switch has a
wrong position in order to start
the desired function. In case the
switch is activated, it must not
be activated to start the
function. In case the switch is
not activated, it must be
accordingly activated.
The according switch has a
wrong position in order to start
the desired function. In case the
switch is activated, it must not
be activated to start the
function. In case the switch is
not activated, it must be
accordingly activated.
Meaning
Possible Reason
Recommend Check
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
Error No.
Page No. 42/228
Remedial measure
Release switch all-wheel!
Release switch 2nd Diesel
engine!
521
522
Status: 29.08.2016
Switch axis seperation!
Description
The according switch has a
wrong position in order to start
the desired function. In case the
switch is activated, it must not
be activated to start the
function. In case the switch is
not activated, it must be
accordingly activated.
The according switch has a
wrong position in order to start
the desired function. In case the
switch is activated, it must not
be activated to start the
function. In case the switch is
not activated, it must be
accordingly activated.
The according switch has a
wrong position in order to start
the desired function. In case the
switch is activated, it must not
be activated to start the
function. In case the switch is
not activated, it must be
accordingly activated.
Meaning
Possible Reason
Recommend Check
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
520
Error No.
Page No. 43/228
Remedial measure
Machine driving!
Cruise control active!
Driver NOT on seat!
524
526
527
Status: 29.08.2016
release switch Parking brake!
Description
The seat switch has a wrong
position in order to start the
desired function. In case the
switch is activated (driver on the
seat), it must not be activated to
start the function. In case the
switch is not activated (driver
not on the seat), it must be
accordingly activated.
The vehicle is moving or
standing. In order to start the
desired function the machine
must, however, stand when it is
still driving, or drive when it is
still standing.
The according switch has a
wrong position in order to start
the desired function. In case the
switch is activated, it must not
be activated to start the
function. In case the switch is
not activated, it must be
accordingly activated.
Meaning
Possible Reason
Recommend Check
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
523
Error No.
Page No. 44/228
Remedial measure
Door OPEN!
Motor speed too low!
529
530
Status: 29.08.2016
Press break pedal!
Description
Possible Reason
During cutting process, the
engine speed has fallen below
1200 rpm. Feed drive / front
attachment are switched off
The accordant switch (door
switch) has a wrong position in
order to start the desired
function. In case the switch is
activated (door closed), it must
not be activated to start the
function (door open). In case the
switch is not activated (door
open), it must accordingly be
activated (door closed).
Load of the engine is too strong
Reduce engine load
Measure voltage on sensor (B40) Replace operating brake sensor
(B40)
Operating brake sensor (B40)
faulty
Press the brake pedal
Remedial measure
Check setting of the sensor (B40) Make adjustment
See Remedy
Recommend Check
Operating brake sensor (B40)
not adjusted
The brake pedal must be pressed Brake pedal not pressed
for the requested function!
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
528
Error No.
Page No. 45/228
Engine running!
Engine NOT low idle!
532
533
Status: 29.08.2016
Engine NOT running!
Description
For starting the desired function
the diesel engine must run with
idle speed.
The diesel engine is operating or
not operating. In order to start
the desired function the diesel
engine must not be in operation
or must be in operation. When
diesel engine is turning, it must
not be turning. When diesel
engine is not turning, it must be
turning.
The diesel engine is operating or
not operating. In order to start
the desired function the diesel
engine must not be in operation
or must be in operation. When
diesel engine is turning, it must
not be turning. When diesel
engine is not turning, it must be
turning.
Meaning
Possible Reason
Recommend Check
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
531
Error No.
Page No. 46/228
Remedial measure
Value out of range - set to
minimum!
Value out of range - set to
maximum!
Engine speed too high!
535
536
537
Status: 29.08.2016
Engine does not have any
nominal rpm
Description
To start the desired function the
engine speed is too high, so it
can not be started.
The changed parameter or
setting value has been set under
the minimum value. Therefore,
the parameter or setting value
has automatically been adjusted
to the minimum limit value.
The changed parameter or
setting value has been set under
the minimum value. Therefore,
the parameter or setting value
has automatically been adjusted
to the minimum limit value.
In order to start the desired
function the diesel engine must
run with nominal speed
(standard 2000 rpm).
Meaning
Possible Reason
Recommend Check
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
534
Error No.
Page No. 47/228
Remedial measure
Reset active faults!
front attachment Control NOT
Active
EMR Adjustment 1 (bottom
position) OK
539
540
541
Status: 29.08.2016
Position Saved
Description
The adjustment/calibration 1
(position below) of the lifting
gear has been successfully
completed.
It has been tried to move the
lifting gear manually or
automatically. But the steering
of the lifting gear (EMR) is not
active, since the diesel engine is
not running.
An initialize operation was
carried out (no significance for
driver)
The desired position or value
(e.g. cutting length #1 and #2
on the small joystick) has been
saved.
Meaning
The error message appears
despite the diesel engine
running and a software update
has been accomplished before.
Possible Reason
see remedy
Recommend Check
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
538
Error No.
Page No. 48/228
Lift the lifting gear manually.
Restart the machine
Remedial measure
EMR Adjustment 3 (top position)
OK
Auto lifting gear Active
Distance Mode EMR active
Lifting gear too high
543
544
545
546
Status: 29.08.2016
EMR Adjustment 2 (Pressure
lifting gear) OK
Description
In order to start the desired
function the position of the lifting
gear is too high.
for the future
for the future
The adjustment/calibration 3 (top
position) of lifting gear has been
successfully accomplished.
The adjustment/calibration 2
(pressure lifting gear when lifting
gear is floating freely) of the
lifting gear has been successfully
accomplished for weight
determination.
Meaning
Possible Reason
Recommend Check
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
542
Error No.
Page No. 49/228
Remedial measure
Distance Mode EMR deactivate
Lifting gear position saved
548
549
Status: 29.08.2016
Lifting gear too low
Description
The position of the lifting gear
(top position, ground pressure,
position below with position
control or header contour) has
been successfully saved and can
afterwards be recalled.
An error has been detected on
the sensors of the header
contour \\\"B47 and/or B48) or a
front attachment without ground
skids has been installed.
Therefore, the function
\\\”Header contour\\\" can not be
started from the lifting gear. In
order that the errors are not
being displayed anymore, the
other control function (pressure
regulation or position control)
must be selected from the lifting
gear.
For starting the desired function
the position of the lifting gear is
too low
Meaning
Possible Reason
Recommend Check
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
547
Error No.
Page No. 50/228
Remedial measure
Cutting drum turning!
Check EMR adjustment!
Invalid sensor/actuator value
551
552
553
Status: 29.08.2016
Cutting drum stopped!
Description
The value of the sensor or one
actuator are inadmissible
Void values are saved for the
calibration of the set front
attachment.
For starting the desired function
the cutting drum must be at
standstill, but it is still running.
For starting the desired function
the cutting drum must be
running, but there was no speed
detected on the cutting drum.
Meaning
see remedy
Recommend Check
When calibrating the row sensor
or the steering axle this note
appears
Accomplish adjustment 1 - 3 of
the lifting gear with new front
attachment
Accomplish the adjustment 1 - 3
of the lifting gear again
Remedial measure
Turn Page please!
The accordant sensor is
Install the sensor according to
displayed in the mask calibration the installation instructions and
autopilot of which the sensor
connect it electrically
value is inadmissible, because it
has for example been installed in
a wrong way.
Front attachment exchanged and see remedy
there has not been an
adjustment for the new front
attachment
EMR control unit exchanged
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
550
Error No.
Page No. 51/228
Main clutch protection mode
active!
557
Status: 29.08.2016
Engine protection mode active!
556
For the future
Diesel engine is in protective
mode - speed is reduced
Lifting gear position saved, set to for the future
maximum value!
555
Meaning
Lifting gear position saved, set to for the future
minimum value!
Description
Perform engine diagnostics
Run diagnostics using the engine Consult KRONE Service
diagnostic device
Determined via the terminal
Engine parameters not OK
Consult KRONE Service
Perform engine diagnostics
The oil pressure is too low
Refill engine oil
Exchange plugs on the sensors
Remedial measure
Check engine oil level
The sensors of the row sensor
left and right are interchanged
connected to the cable harness
Recommend Check
The engine oil level is too low
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
554
Error No.
Page No. 52/228
Begin reversing feed drive/front
attachment
Overrun not yet complete!
558
559
Status: 29.08.2016
Description
After the function \”Reversing
feed drive/front attachment
without the cutting drum being
activated\" has been exited, this
function cannot be started again
for 7 seconds. If the driver starts
this function again, this
information message is
displayed. Wait for 7 seconds
and start the function once
again.
Information for the driver:
reversing of feed drive and front
attachment will start in a few
seconds as the main belt must
previously be released and the
main coupling must be
connected. Message is only
displayed if the feed drive or the
front attachment is reversed
without cutting drum being
activated.
Reversing without cutting drum
being activated is possible on
machines with Bosch traction
drive from YOM 2012.
Meaning
Possible Reason
Recommend Check
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
Error No.
Page No. 53/228
Remedial measure
Status: 29.08.2016
Lifting gear Raised!
562
In order to start the desired
function the front attachment
must be below or on top. In case
the front attachment is below,
the front attachment must be on
top. In case the front attachment
is on top, it must be located
below.
In order to start the desired
function the front attachment
must be folded out, but it is
folded in
Front attachment NOT Folded
OUT!
561
Meaning
Front attachment NOT Folded IN! To start the desired function the
front attachment must be folded
in, but it is folded out
Description
Fold in front attachment
Remedial measure
The sensors B25 front
Reset the distance of the sensor,
attachment right and B55 front
change sensor if necessary
attachment left are defective or
not properly adjusted so that the
position can not be detected in a
correct way. Check the
conditions of the sensors in the
diagnostics
see remedy
Recommend Check
The sensors B25 front
Reset the distance of the sensor,
attachment right and B55 front
change sensor if necessary
attachment left are defective or
not properly adjusted so that the
position can not be detected in a
correct way. Check the
conditions of the sensors in the
diagnostics
The front attachment is folded in The front attachment is folded in Fold out front attachment
The front attachment is folded
out
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
560
Error No.
Page No. 54/228
Front attachment NOT Turning!
front attachment IS Turning!
564
565
Status: 29.08.2016
Front attachment Lowered!
Description
To start the desired function the
front attachment must be
running or at standstill. When
the front attachment is at
standstill, the front attachment
must run in order to start the
function. When the front
attachment is running, the front
attachment must be at standstill
in order to start the function.
To start the desired function the
front attachment must be
running or at standstill. When
the front attachment is at
standstill, the front attachment
must run in order to start the
function. When the front
attachment is running, the front
attachment must be at standstill
in order to start the function.
In order to start the desired
function the front attachment
must be below or on top. In case
the front attachment is below,
the front attachment must be on
top. In case the front attachment
is on top, it must be located
below.
Meaning
Possible Reason
Recommend Check
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
563
Error No.
Page No. 55/228
Remedial measure
Status: 29.08.2016
Pendulum Frame NOT Horizontal For starting the desired function
the pendulum frame must be
horizontal, but the pendulum
frame is not yet horizontal.
568
For starting the desired function
the feed drive must be running
or at a standstill. When the feed
drive is at a standstill, the feed
drive must be running in order to
start the function. When the feed
drive is running, the feed drive
must be at standstill in order to
start the function.
Feed drive IS Turning!
567
To start the desired function the
front attachment must be
running or at standstill. When
the front attachment is at
standstill, the front attachment
must run in order to start the
function. When the front
attachment is running, the front
attachment must be at standstill
in order to start the function.
Meaning
Feed drive NOT Turning!
Description
The pendulum frame is not
horizontal
Possible Reason
Accomplish calibration of
pendulum frame
Check the calibration of the
position \\\”Pendulum frame
horizontal\\\"
Turn Page please!
Position the pendulum frame
horizontally
Remedial measure
Position the pendulum frame
horizontally
Recommend Check
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
566
Error No.
Page No. 56/228
Speed diesel engines not
synchron.
570
Status: 29.08.2016
Calibrate feed drive/front
attachment!
Description
When switching on the 2. diesel
engine the speeds of engine1
and engine2 are identical,
therefore the control unit was
also not able to switch on the
engine coupling
Feed drive and/or front
attachment must be calibrated
Meaning
The KMC3 unit has been
exchanged and the pendulum
frame has not been calibrated
Check sensors
Recommend Check
ADM of engine 1 or engine 2
defective
Check, if the speed of engine 1
can be readjusted?
An overspeed has been detected see error 2408
on the front attachment. Thus
the front attachment must be
recalibrated.
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
569
Error No.
Page No. 57/228
Turn Page please!
Change ADM of engine 1.
Check parameter of ADM or
install again. ADM engine 1 and
ADM engine 2 have separate
parameters and can not be
interchanged.
Check CAN connection from
control unit KMC3 to ADM of
engine 1
Check the power supply of the
ADM1 of engine 1
Carry out front attachment drive
calibration
Set sensor correctly and
accomplish calibration
Exchange sensor
Set sensor correctly and
accomplish calibration
Remedial measure
Status: 29.08.2016
Error No.
Page No. 58/228
Description
Meaning
Possible Reason
Check, if the speed of engine 2
can be readjusted?
Recommend Check
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
Turn Page please!
Change PLD of engine 2.
Change ADM of engine 2.
Check parameter of ADM or
install again. ADM engine 1 and
ADM engine 2 have separate
parameters and can not be
interchanged.
Check CAN connection from ADM
of engine 2 to the PLD of engine
2
Check CAN connection from
control unit KMC3 to ADM of
engine 2.
Check the power supply of the
ADM1 of engine 2
Check CAN connection from ADM
of engine 2 to the PLD of engine
2
Change PLD of engine 1.
Remedial measure
Status: 29.08.2016
For starting the desired function
the diesel engine 2 must be
coupled or uncoupled. When
diesel engine 2 is coupled, it
must be uncoupled in order to
start the function. When diesel
engine 2 is uncoupled, it must be
coupled in order to start the
function.
Engine clutch 2
572
Meaning
Check feed drive wiring! (Power Feed drive wiring is not ok.
suppression cutting drum active) Switch-on suppressor
mechanism for blade drum is
active!
Description
See error 2600 "CAN to KMC2
CAN connection KMC3 to KMC2
Internal error KMC2/3
See Remedy
KMC 3 has no CAN connection to See error 9924 "CAN to metal
metal sensor
detection”
Check cables for metal detection Replace cables for metal
detection
Cables for metal detection not
connected
Replace KMC2/3
Replace plug for feed drive
Check plug for feed drive
Plug for feed drive faulty
Connect cables for feed drive
Remedial measure
Check wiring for feed drive
Check parameter for the
actuation of the diesel engine
Recommend Check
Cables for feed drive
not/incorrectly connected
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
571
Error No.
Page No. 59/228
Status: 29.08.2016
Discharge chute in park position
580
For starting the desired function
the current position of the
discharge chute is faulty.
Terminal Software inconsistent!!! The software versions of the
single control units on the
machine do not fit together.
Malfunctions cannot be
excluded.
574
The control unit for the lifting
gear control will be re-flashed.
There is currently no download
taking place on the EMR.
Meaning
Download to EMR!
Description
The discharge chute is parked,
but must not be in parking
position
A software version of a control
unit is not up to date. Example:
Software version 150 200 104-12
is on the terminal and version
150 200 102-10 is on control unit
KMC2 and the version is on
control unit KMC3. But the
terminal expects in the terminal
software version 150 200 104-12
the version 150 200 102-11 of
KMC2 or 150 200 103-11 of
KMC3.
Possible Reason
The wrong software version of a
control unit will be marked red.
Flash the control unit with the
according software version.
Remedial measure
Check sensor B29 in the mask
\\\”Diagnostics discharge
chute\\\"
Check sensor B29 \\\”Discharge
chute position below\\\"
Turn Page please!
Move discharge chute to central
position and put it all the way
down
Check if discharge chute is in
parking position.
Check if the discharge chute is in Lift the discharge chute all the
parking position.
way up so that it is no longer
parking position.
Have the single software
versions of the control units
displayed in the mask \\\"Info
Software-Versionen\\\"
Recommend Check
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
573
Error No.
Page No. 60/228
Description
For starting the desired function
the current position of the
discharge chute is faulty.
Meaning
The discharge chute is parked,
but must not be in parking
position
Possible Reason
Exchange control unit KMC2
Exchange sensor
Check the sensor electrically
Set the sensor mechanically
correct
Remedial measure
Check sensor B29 in mask
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\”Diagnostics discharge
chute\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\"
Check sensor B29
\\\\\\\”Discharge chute position
below\\\\\\\"
Turn Page please!
Check the sensor electrically
Set the sensor mechanically
correct
Move discharge chute to central
position and put it all the way
down
Check if discharge chute is in
parking position.
Check if the discharge chute is in Lift the discharge chute all the
parking position.
way up so that it is no longer
parking position.
Recommend Check
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
Discharge chute not parked!
Status: 29.08.2016
581
Error No.
Page No. 61/228
Shearbar Auto OK!
590
Status: 29.08.2016
Discharge chute not at top!
Description
For the future
For starting the desired function
the current position of the
discharge chute is faulty.
Meaning
The discharge chute is parked,
but must not be in parking
position
Possible Reason
Exchange control unit KMC2
Exchange sensor
Remedial measure
Check sensor B29 in the mask
\\\”Diagnostics discharge
chute\\\"
Check sensor B29 \\\”Discharge
chute position below\\\"
Exchange control unit KMC2
Exchange sensor
Check the sensor electrically
Move discharge chute to central
position and put it all the way
down
Check if discharge chute is in
parking position.
Check if the discharge chute is in Lift the discharge chute all the
parking position.
way up so that it is no longer
parking position.
Recommend Check
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
582
Error No.
Page No. 62/228
Shearbar Adj. in operation
Cracker motor in Zero Pos.
Sharpen flap CLOSED
Sharpen flap or service flap
OPEN
Sharpening in operation!
592
593
594
595
596
Status: 29.08.2016
Shearbar OK!
Description
The grinding flap is closed or
open. In order to start the
desired function the grinding flap
must have the accordant other
position.
The grinding flap is closed, but
must be opened to start the
function
Possible Reason
For starting the desired function, The function \\\”Grinding\\\" is
the function \\\”Grinding\\\" must active.
not be active.
In order to start the desired
function the grinding flap has a
wrong position.
In order to start the desired
function the grinding flap has a
wrong position.
For the future
For the future
For the future
Meaning
In order to start the other
desired function the function
\\\”Grinding\\\" must be cancelled
or closed.
Open the grinding flap
Check, if the grinding flap is
open.
see remedy
Close the grinding flap
Open the grinding flap
Check, if the grinding flap is
open.
Check, if the grinding flap is
closed.
Close the grinding flap
Remedial measure
Check, if the grinding flap is
closed.
Recommend Check
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
591
Error No.
Page No. 63/228
Caution: adjust grindstone!
600 Internal error - DRC
601 Malfunction valve coil Y101
pump forwards - DRC
602 Malfunction valve coil Y102
pump backwards - DRC
598
600
601
602
Status: 29.08.2016
Sharpening stone parked!
Description
The max number of total
grinding cycles is reached. The
grinding stone must be
readjusted and the grinding
cycle counter in the terminal
must be reset
Possible Reason
Fault on valve Y102 pump
backwardEffects:- Short circuit
on valve Y102- Interruption Faulty magnet
Fault on valve Y101 pump
forward
- Short circuit- Interruption Faulty magnet
Short circuit on valve Y101
Internal error in DRC control unit DRC control unit faulty
The max number of total
grinding cycles is reached. The
grinding stone must be
readjusted and the grinding
cycle counter in the terminal
must be reset
In order to start the desired
function \\\”Grinding\\\" the
function must be active
Meaning
- Check cable harness- Check
magnet
Check cable harnessCheck
magnet
Effect:- Vehicle stop via error
mode #1- Sending error
message (shown on display)Emergency mode #1
Readjust the grinding stone and
check the number of grinding
cycles in the terminal
Recommend Check
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
597
Error No.
Page No. 64/228
- Replace cable harness- Replace
magnet
Replace cable harnessReplace
magnet
Replace DRC control unit
- Contact Krone service - Replace
control unit
Reset the number of grinding
cycles in the terminal.
Remedial measure
603 Malfunction valve coil Y106
rear axis right - DRC
604 Malfunction valve coil Y105
rear axis left - DRC
605 Malfunction valve coil Y104
front axis right - DRC
606 Malfunction valve coil Y103
front axis left - DRC
603
604
605
606
Status: 29.08.2016
Description
Possible Reason
DRC fault on valve Y103 front
- Short circuit- Interruption axle leftEffects:- Vehicle stop via Faulty magnet
error mode #2b - Sending error
message (shown on display)Emergency mode #2
DRC fault on valve Y104 front
- Short circuit- Interruption axle rightEffects:- Vehicle
Faulty magnet
deceleration via error mode #2b
- Sending error message (shown
on display)- Emergency mode #2
DRC fault on valve Y105 Rear
- Short circuit- Interruption axle leftEffects:- Vehicle
Faulty magnet
deceleration via error mode #2bSending error message (shown
on display)- Emergency mode #2
DRC fault on valve Y106 Rear
- Short circuit on valve Y106axle rightEffects:- Vehicle
Interruption - Faulty magnet
deceleration via error mode #2bSending error message (shown
on display)- Emergency mode #2
Meaning
- Check cable harness- Check
magnet
- Check cable harness- Check
magnet
- Check cable harness- Check
magnet
- Check cable harness- Check
magnet
Recommend Check
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
Error No.
Page No. 65/228
- Replace cable harness- Replace
magnet
- Replace cable harness- Replace
magnet
- Replace cable harness- Replace
magnet
- Replace cable harness- Replace
magnet
Remedial measure
608 Malfunction joystick - DRC
609 Malfunction pressure sensor
B101 - DRC
610 Malfunction pressure sensor
B102 - DRC
608
609
610
Status: 29.08.2016
607 Malfunction valve coil Y18
parking brake - DRC
Description
- Check cable harness
- Check multi-function lever
- CAN bus interruption
Multi-function lever/joystick
defective
DRC fault on pressure sensor
B102
Sensor voltage too high or too
low
- Check cable harness- Check
sensor B102
- Check cable harness- Check
sensor
See error message 121
- Check cable harness
- Check magnet
Recommend Check
Fault in the multifunction
joystick. At the same time, the
error message appears
Short circuit on the valve Y18
Interruption
Defective magnet
Possible Reason
DRC fault on pressure sensor
Sensor voltage too high or too
B101Effects:- Vehicle
low
deceleration via error mode #2bSending error message (shown
on display)- Emergency mode #2
DRC malfunction on the joystick
Effects:
Standstill of the vehicle via stop
ramp
Current to the valve Y18 is
defective
Effects: limited operation
(emergency mode)
Plausibility check control of the
parking brake deactivated
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
607
Error No.
Page No. 66/228
- Replace cable harness
-Replace magnet
Remedial measure
612 Overvoltage - DRC
613 Check rel.switch travelling
gear and quick stop - DRC
614 Malfunction speed sensor
B106 rear axis right - DRC
612
613
614
Status: 29.08.2016
611 Undervoltage - DRC
Description
Possible Reason
Travelling gear release missing
DRC fault speed sensor B106
Speed 0 although travel
rear axle rightEffects:- Vehicle
condition fulfilled
deceleration via error mode #2cSending error message (shown
on display)- Emergency mode
#3- ASR (Traction Control)
disabled- ABS disabled
DRC check FS (release switch)
Travelling gear and emergency
stopEffects:- Vehicle stop via
error mode #1 - Sending error
message (shown on display)Emergency mode #2
DRC overvoltageEffects:- Vehicle Battery voltage too high (above
stop via error mode #2a17V)
Sending error message (shown
on display)- Emergency mode #1
DRC undervoltageEffects:- Battery voltage too low (below
Vehicle stop via error mode #2a- 7V). - Take starting phase of
Sending error message (shown
Diesel engine into account.
on display)- Emergency mode #1
Meaning
- Check cable harness- Check
sensor
- Activate Travelling gear
release- Deactivate emergency
stop panel
- Check cable harness- Check
battery voltage
- Check cable harness- Check
battery voltage- Take starting
phase of Diesel engine into
account
Recommend Check
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
611
Error No.
Page No. 67/228
Remedial measure
616 Malfunction speed sensor
B104 front axis right - DRC
617 Malfunction speed sensor
B103 front axis left - DRC
618 CAN3 communication to
diesel engine - DRC
616
617
618
Status: 29.08.2016
615 Malfunction speed sensor
B105 rear axis left - DRC
Description
Possible Reason
DRC faultEffects:
DRC fault on speed sensor B103
front axle leftEffects:- Vehicle
deceleration via error mode #2c
- Sending error message (shown
on display)- Emergency mode
#3- ASR (Traction Control)
disabled- ABS disabled
Speed 0 although travel
condition fulfilled
Fault on speed sensor B104 front Speed 0 although travel
axle rightEffects:- Vehicle
condition fulfilled
deceleration via error mode #2c
- Sending error message (shown
on display)- Emergency mode
#3- ASR (Traction Control)
disabled- ABS disabled
DRC fault speed sensor B105
Speed 0 although travel
rear axle leftEffects:- Vehicle
condition fulfilled
deceleration via error mode #2cSending error message (shown
on display)- Emergency mode
#3- ASR (Traction Control)
disabled- ABS disabled
Meaning
- Check cable harness- Check
sensor B103
- Check cable harness- Check
sensor B104
- Check cable harness- Check
sensor B105
Recommend Check
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
615
Error No.
Page No. 68/228
Turn Page please!
Remedial measure
Status: 29.08.2016
620 CAN1 communication to CU - DRC Fault CAN Timeout control
DRC
unit console switchEffects:Vehicle deceleration via error
mode #2b- Sending error
message (shown on display)Emergency mode #2- Road
mode only
620
DRC Fault CAN Timeout driving
lever Multifunction
joystickEffects:- Vehicle stop via
error mode #2a- Sending error
message (shown on display)Emergency mode #1
Meaning
619 CAN1 communication to
joystick - DRC
Description
- Check cable harness- Check
diesel control unit
Recommend Check
- Check cable harness- Check
control unit console
If the serial number of the
hardware autopilot is greater
than 13.154157.1022 the
autpilot software version must
be at least 150200029-20
In some cases an incorrect CAN
configuration from the autopilot
may be the cause. The hardware
does not match the autopilot
autopilot software and
sporadically causes this and /or
other CAN error messages
If the serial number of the
hardware autopilot is greater
than 13.154157.1022 the
autpilot software version must
be at least 150200029-20
- CAN bus interruption- Control
unit console faulty
In some cases an incorrect CAN
configuration from the autopilot
may be the cause. The hardware
does not match the autopilot
autopilot software and
sporadically causes this and /or
other CAN error messages
- CAN bus interruption- KKC
- Check cable harness- Check
(Krone Console Controller) faulty driving lever Multifunction
joystick
- CAN bus interruption- Diesel
control unit faulty
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
619
Error No.
Page No. 69/228
If necessary, update the
software version of the autopilot
If necessary, update the
software version of the autopilot
Remedial measure
622 Malfunction outputs - DRC
623 Malfunction steering angle
sensor B107 - DRC
622
623
Status: 29.08.2016
621 CAN1 communication to
KMC3 - DRC
Description
DRC Fault on the steering angle
sensor B107Effect:- Sending
error message (shown on
display)- ASR (Traction Control)
function restricted- ABS function
restricted
DRC Fault outputs supplied
externallyEffect:- Vehicle stop
via error mode #1- Sending error
message (shown on display)Emergency mode #1
DRC Fault KMC communication
CAN Timeout Effect:- Vehicle
stop via error mode #2aSending error message (shown
on display)In case of KMC
Timeout and if KSM message
(engine speed control) is missing
as well the travelling gear needs
to take over control of the Diesel
engine. Only in emergency mode
#2 with a reduced characteristic
line of the engine
Meaning
If the serial number of the
hardware autopilot is greater
than 13.154157.1022 the
autpilot software version must
be at least 150200029-20
In some cases an incorrect CAN
configuration from the autopilot
may be the cause. The hardware
does not match the autopilot
autopilot software and
sporadically causes this and /or
other CAN error messages
Sensor voltage too high or too
low
- Check cable harness- Check
sensor
One or more outputs are
Check cable harness
supplied externally (before
switching on the main switch one
of the outputs is energized from
the battery)
- Check cable harness- Check
KMC
Recommend Check
- CAN bus interruption- KMC
faulty
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
621
Error No.
Page No. 70/228
If necessary, update the
software version of the autopilot
Remedial measure
626 Internal error - DRC
627 Malfunction brake
press.sensor B16 - DRC
626
627
Status: 29.08.2016
625 Seat switch open (driver has DRC Fault seat switch open
left seat) - DRC
625
DRC Fault on brake pressure
sensor B16Effect:- Vehicle
deceleration via error mode #2bSending error message (shown
on display)- Error
acknowledgement followed by
emergency mode #2
DRC Hardware Fault monitor
emergency modeEffect:- Vehicle
stop via error mode #2- Sending
error message (shown on
display)- Error acknowledgement
followed by emergency mode #1
DRC Fault on the seat switch
sensorEffect: - Vehicle stop via
error mode #2b- Sending error
message (shown on display)Emergency mode #2
624 Malfunction seat switch S69
- DRC
624
Meaning
Description
Recommend Check
- Sensor voltage too high or too - Check cable harness- Check
low- Plausibility check with angle sensor B16
sensor of foot brake pedal (angle
present but no pressure)
- Short circuit on sensor - Broken No check possible
cable
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
Error No.
Page No. 71/228
Remedial measure
629 Sensors brake pedal
B16/B109 not plausible - DRC
630 Malfunction swivel angle
sensor B108 - DRC
631 Malfunction brake tank
pressure B18 - DRC
632 Malfunction output
revers.signal K29 - DRC
633 Malfunction output brake
light sig.K30 - DRC
629
630
631
632
633
Status: 29.08.2016
628 Malfunction brake pedal
sensor B109 - DRC
Description
Recommend Check
Sensor voltage too high or too
low
Brake pedal not plausible
compared to brake pressure
- Check cable harness- Check
sensor
No check possible
- Sensor voltage too high or too - Check cable harness- Check
low- Plausibility check with angle sensor
sensor of foot brake pedal
(pressure present but no angle)
Possible Reason
DRC malfunction output brake
light
Effect: Send the error message
(shown in the display)
DRC malfunction reversing light
Effect:
Send the error message (shown
in the display)
Short circuit, interruption brake
light
Short circuit, interruption
reversing light
Check cable harness
Check brake light
Check cable harness
Check reversing light
DRC Fault on manometric switch - Manometric switch for brake
- Check cable harness- Check
for brake tank pressure Effect:tank pressure faulty - Brake tank sensor- Check pressure
Sending error message (shown
faulty
accumulator
on display)
DRC Fault on pivoting angle
sensorEffect:- Vehicle stop via
error mode #2c- Sending error
message (shown on display)Emergency mode #3
DRC Fault on brake pedal not
plausibleEffect:- Error message
via CAN
DRC Fault on foot brake pedal
sensor B109Effect:- Vehicle
deceleration via error mode #2bSending error message (shown
on display)- Emergency mode #2
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
628
Error No.
Page No. 72/228
Replace cable harness,
brakelight
Replace cable harness, reversing
light
Remedial measure
634 Malfunction pressure sensor
B110 parking brake - DRC
635 Control parking brake not
plausible - DRC
636 Pump control not plausible DRC Malfunction
637 Malfunction reserve DRC
638 Malfunction reserve DRC
639 Malfunction reserve DRC
634
635
636
637
638
639
Status: 29.08.2016
Description
Reserve
Reserve
Reserve
Pump control not plausible
Effect:
Standstill of the vehicle
(switching off the outputs)
DRC malfunction control of the
parking brake is not plausible
Effect:
Limited operation (emergency
mode)
DRC malfunction of parking
brake manometric switch
Effect:
Limited operation (emergency
mode)
Meaning
The signal of the pivoting angle
sensor does not match the
actual control of the pump via
solenoid valves.
Control of the parking brake not
plausible
Manometric switch of parking
brake defective
Possible Reason
Check pump, pivoting angle
sensor, cable harness
Check parking brake,
manometric switch, cable
harness
Check parking brake,
manometric switch, cable
harness
Recommend Check
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
Error No.
Page No. 73/228
Replace pump, pivoting angle
sensor or cable harness
Replace parking brake,
manometric switch, cable
harness
Replace parking brake,
manometric switch or cable
harness
Remedial measure
641 Unintentional release of
parking brake - DRC
642 Malfunction reserve DRC
643 Malfunction reserve DRC
644 Malfunction reserve DRC
645 Malfunction reserve DRC
641
642
643
644
645
Status: 29.08.2016
640 Unexpected movement of
machine - DRC
Description
Reserve
Reserve
Reserve
Reserve
Parking brake of the manometric
switch indicates pressure
although the parking brake valve
is not controlled
Effects: Standstill of the vehicle
(switching-off the outputs)
SR1 unexpected start-up: The
pivoting angle sensor on the
drive pump has detected that
the pump is not in neutral
position. Effects: Standstill of the
vehicle (switching-off the
outputs)
Meaning
Recommend Check
Manometric switch of the parking
brake is defective, valve of the
parking brake is defective, short
circuit wiring manometric switch
Check manometric switch of
parking brake, check parking
brake valve, check short circuit
wiring manometric switch
SR1 unexpected start-up:
Measure high-pressures MA and
Hydraulic pump defective
MB
(swivels out actually) pump is
controlled by mistake (swivels
out actually)
Wiring of pivoting angle sensor is
defective
Pivoting angle sensor defective
Pivoting angle sensor defective
Input on DRC defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
640
Error No.
Page No. 74/228
Contact KRONE customer service
Remedial measure
647 Malfunction reserve DRC
648 Driving lever not in neutral
position - DRC
649 Internal Malfunction - DRC
650 Malfunction output pump
forwards - DRC
651 Malfunction output pump
backwards - DRC
652 Internal Malfunction - DRC
647
648
649
650
651
652
Status: 29.08.2016
646 Malfunction reserve DRC
Description
Reaction to another fault
(see possible cause)
Effects: Standstill of the vehicle
Reaction to another fault
(see possible cause)
Effects: Standstill of the vehicle
Reaction to another fault
(see possible cause)
Effects: Standstill of the vehicle
Reaction to another fault
(see possible cause)
Effects: Standstill of the vehicle
Start condition not met
Effects: Standstill of the vehicle
Reserve
Reserve
Meaning
Fault 608 and/or further faults
active
Fault 602 active
Fault 601 active
Refer to the respective fault
Refer to the respective fault
Refer to the respective fault
Refer to the respective fault
See remedy
Internal fault driving lever
Fault 600 or 622 active
Check the position of the control
lever
Recommend Check
Control lever not in neutral
position
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
646
Error No.
Page No. 75/228
Refer to the respective fault
Refer to the respective fault
Refer to the respective fault
Refer to the respective fault
Replace control lever
Move control lever to neutral
position
Remedial measure
653 Internal Malfunction - DRC
654 Release travelling gear DRC
655 Requested speed too high DRC
656 No driver on seat - DRC
653
654
655
656
Status: 29.08.2016
Description
Fault: When starting, no driver
on the seat
Maximum pump speed has been
exceeded
Start condition is not fulfilled
<br> Effects: limited operation,
emergency mode active
Reaction to another fault
(see possible cause)
Effects: Standstill of the
vehicle/limited operation
Meaning
Seat switch not actuated
Replace seat switch wiring
Replace seat switch
Check seat switch wiring
Check seat switch
Speed of the diesel engine is too See remedy
high
Contact KRONE customer service
\"Replace traction drive release
switch
\"
\"Traction drive release switch
defective\"
\"Check the shifting behavior of
the switch via pass-through
measurement
\"
Replace wiring to switch
Traction drive release
\"Carry out operating console
diagnostics
\"
Determination via terminal
Actuate release traction drive
switch
Refer to the respective fault
Remedial measure
Short circuit / broken cable in the \”Check wiring to switch
wiring of the switch
Traction drive release\"
Check release traction drive
switch
Refer to the respective fault
Recommend Check
Release travelling gear not met
Fault 603 and/or further faults
active
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
Error No.
Page No. 76/228
1300 Malfunction valve coil Y32
raise lifting gear
1301 Malfunction valve coil Y33
lower lifting gear
1300
1301
Status: 29.08.2016
Description
Error: Lower lifting gear valve
Error: Raise lifting gear valve
Meaning
Check work pressure (0 - 200
bar)
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
Work pressure defective
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Internal EMR error
Check the function using manual Replace lifting gear valve
operation on the hydraulic block
valve. Ensure easy motion and
no noises in the lifting gear!
Check work pressure (0 - 200
bar)
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
Function to lower lifting gear
valve defective
Work pressure defective
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Internal EMR error
Replace the EMR
Replace the EMR
Set work pressure
Perform lifting gear diagnostics
Determine via the terminal
Replace the EMR
Replace the EMR
Set work pressure
Check the function using manual Replace lifting gear valve
operation on the hydraulic block
valve. Ensure easy motion and
no noises in the lifting gear!
Function to raise lifting gear
valve defective
Remedial measure
Perform lifting gear diagnostics
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
Error No.
Page No. 77/228
1303 electronics EMR not
active!!!
1303
Status: 29.08.2016
1302 Malfunction EMR voltage
Description
Error: EMR has not received any
CAN messages for at least 1
minute, or it has been
deactivated
Error: Supply voltage too low
(less than 10V)
Meaning
Charge battery
Change battery
Check battery acid
Check battery voltage
Battery dead
See Remedial action
LED +22-LD63 not lit
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Internal EMR error
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check plugs are secure
Check fuse +22-F92
Check wiring
Short circuit in the wiring to an
EMR sensor
The KMC3 control has been
switched off manually (e.g. plug
has been removed)
Check fuse +22-F63
Check the dynamo
Dynamo defective
Turn Page please!
Place the plug and switch the
ignition off and on again
Replace the EMR
Replace wiring
Replace the dynamo
Replace cabling
Check the cables.
Dynamo defective
Replace charge indicator lamp
Check charge indicator lamp
Charge indicator lamp defective
Replace cabling
Check the cables.
Wiring defective
Check fuse +22-F52
Remedial measure
LED +22-LD52 not lit
Recommend Check
Power supply voltage for EMR
too low
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
1302
Error No.
Page No. 78/228
Description
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
KMC3 was restarted but not the
EMR
Internal error KMC3
Internal EMR error
Check wiring to the lifting gear
position sensor
Check sensor plugs
Short circuit / broken cable in
wiring for lifting gear position
sensor
Lifting gear position sensor plug
defective
Turn Page please!
Replace sensor plug
Replace wiring to the lifting gear
position sensor
Perform lifting gear diagnostics
Make adjustment
Replace the EMR
Replace the KMC3
Switch the ignition off and on
again
If required, rewire or replace
terminating resistors
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
CAN3 terminating resistors
defective
Switch off the maintenance
switch
Remedial measure
Replace wiring
Check whether switch is
switched on
Recommend Check
Short circuit / broken cable in the Check wiring
wiring for the CAN3 bus
The maintenance switch has
been switched on
Possible Reason
Error: Sensor position lifting gear Sensor position of lifting gear not Specify position of the sensor
- wrong signal
adjusted
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
1304 Malfunction lifting gear
position sensor B50
Status: 29.08.2016
1304
Error No.
Page No. 79/228
1306 Malfunction sensor B47
header contour left
1306
Status: 29.08.2016
1305 Malfunction lifting gear
pressure sensor B49
Description
Error: Height of left lifting gear
sensor - wrong signal
Error: Pressure sensor for lifting
gear - wrong signal
Meaning
See Remedial action
Internal EMR error
Replace sensor plug
Replace lifting gear pressure
sensor
Lifting gear pressure sensor plug Check sensor plugs
defective
Measure voltage on the sensor
Check wiring
See Remedial action
Lifting gear pressure sensor
defective
Short circuit in the wiring to
another EMR sensor
Internal EMR error
Turn Page please!
Replace the EMR
Replace wiring
Replace wiring to lifting gear
pressure sensor
Replace the EMR
Replace wiring
Replace lifting gear position
sensor
Remedial measure
Short circuit / broken cable in the Check wiring to lifting gear
wiring for the lifting gear
pressure sensor
pressure sensor
Perform lifting gear diagnostics
Check wiring
Short circuit in the wiring to
another EMR sensor
Determine via the terminal
Measure voltage on the sensor
Recommend Check
Lifting gear position sensor
defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
1305
Error No.
Page No. 80/228
Description
Error: Height of right lifting gear
sensor - wrong signal
Meaning
Check the front attachment plug
Check setting of the sensor
Front attachment plug not
inserted
Height of left lifting gear sensor
not adjusted
Make adjustment
Plug in front attachment plugs
Deactivate the distance
adjustment if no skids are fitted,
or switch the machine to maize
operation on the display, if the
ground skids are fitted
Remedial measure
Check wiring
See Remedial action
Short circuit in the wiring to
another EMR sensor
Internal EMR error
See Remedial action
Measure voltage on the sensor
Height of the left lifting gear
sensor defective
The height of right lifting gear
sensor has not been fitted,
because the grass pick-up has
been fitted, or corn operation
has been set, but no skids are
present
Check sensor plugs
Height of the left lifting gear
sensor plug defective
Turn Page please!
Deactivate the distance
adjustment if no skids are fitted,
or switch the machine to maize
operation on the display, if the
ground skids are fitted.
Replace EMR.
Replace wiring
Replace height of lifting gear left
sensor
Replace sensor plug
Short circuit / broken cable in
Check wiring to sensor for height Replace wiring to sensor for
wiring for height of the left lifting of left lifting gear
height of left lifting gear
gear sensor
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
The height of left lifting gear
sensor has not been fitted,
because the grass pick-up has
been fitted, or corn operation
has been set, but no skids are
present
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
1307 Malfunction sensor B48
header contour right
Status: 29.08.2016
1307
Error No.
Page No. 81/228
Description
Error: Turn pendulum frame to
the left valve
Meaning
Check wiring to sensor for height Replace wiring to sensor for
of right lifting gear
height of right lifting gear
Short circuit / broken cable in
wiring for height of right lifting
gear sensor
See Remedial action
Internal EMR error
Replace valve plug
Check valve plug
Test coil
Valve plug defective
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Turn Page please!
Replace coil
Replace wiring to valve
Broken cable in the wiring for the Check wiring to valve
valve
Perform lifting gear diagnostics
Replace wiring
Check wiring
Short circuit in the wiring to
another EMR sensor
Determine via the terminal
Replace height of right lifting
gear sensor defective
Height of right lifting gear sensor Measure voltage on the sensor
defective
Replace the EMR
Replace sensor plug
Height of right lifting gear sensor Check sensor plugs
plug defective
Make adjustment
Check position of the sensor
Height of the right lifting gear
sensor not adjusted
Plug in front attachment plugs
Remedial measure
Check the front attachment plug
Recommend Check
Front attachment plug not
inserted
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
1308 Left pendulum valve coil
Y37 current too low
Status: 29.08.2016
1308
Error No.
Page No. 82/228
1309 Right pendulum valve coil
Y38 current too low
1310 Malfunction Valve coil Y37
pendulum left
1309
1310
Status: 29.08.2016
Description
Error: Turn pendulum frame
valve left - current too high
Error: Turn pendulum frame
valve clockwise
Meaning
Test coil
See Remedial action
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Internal EMR error
Check wiring to valve
Test coil
Short circuit in the wiring for the
valve
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Turn Page please!
Replace coil
Replace wiring to valve
Check the function using manual Change pendulum frame valve
operation on the hydraulic block
valve. Ensure easy motion and
no noises in the pendulum
frame!
Turning function of left
pendulum frame valve defective
Perform lifting gear diagnostics
Perform lifting gear diagnostics
Determine via the terminal
Replace the EMR
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Check valve plug
Valve plug defective
Replace the EMR
Remedial measure
Replace wiring to the valve
Perform lifting gear diagnostics
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Broken cable in the wiring for the Check wiring to the valve
valve
Determine via the terminal
Internal EMR error
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
Error No.
Page No. 83/228
1311 Malfunction Valve coil Y38
pendulum right
2101 Electronics undervoltage KMC2
1311
2101
Status: 29.08.2016
Description
Error: Electronics voltage KMC2
too low
Error: Turn pendulum frame
valve right - current too high
Meaning
Check wiring to valve
Test coil
See Remedial action
Short circuit in the wiring for the
valve
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Internal EMR error
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD60 not lit
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Turn Page please!
Check fuse 22-F60
LED +22-LD61 not lit
Power supply voltage of KMC2
too low
Check fuse +22-F61
Run electronics diagnostics
Determine via the terminal
Replace the EMR
Replace coil
Replace wiring to valve
Check the function using manual Change pendulum frame valve
operation on the hydraulic block
valve. Ensure easy motion and
no noises in the pendulum
frame!
Turning function of right
pendulum frame valve defective
Replace the EMR
Remedial measure
Perform lifting gear diagnostics
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Internal EMR error
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
Error No.
Page No. 84/228
Description
Error: Electronics voltage KMC2
too high
Meaning
While engine is running,
measure on batteries. Voltage
must not be over 14.8V
Check the dynamo
Test function of the relays
according to circuit diagram
Dynamo defective
Battery change-over relay
defective (500, 800, and 1000)
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
The controller of the dynamo is
defective
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Dynamo defective
Run electronics diagnostics
Check the charge indicator lamp, If required, replace charge
check the wiring
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Charge indicator lamp defective
Determine via the terminal
Check battery acid Check battery Charge battery Change battery
voltage
Battery dead
Turn Page please!
Replace battery change-over
relay
Replace the dynamo
Replace the dynamo
Replace KMC2
Replace the dynamo
Replace wiring
Check wiring
Short circuit in the wiring to a
12V sensor
Replace cabling
Remedial measure
Check the cables.
Recommend Check
Wiring defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
2102 Electronics overvoltage KMC2
Status: 29.08.2016
2102
Error No.
Page No. 85/228
Description
Internal error KMC2
Possible Reason
Check wiring
Test function of the release
switch
Check release logic
Wiring of release switch
defective
Release switch defective
GAL component release logic
wrong (wrong GAL component)
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Check fuse F13 in KMC2
Check fuse +22-F60
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Fuse F13 in KMC2 defective
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Turn Page please!
Replace GAL component
Replace release switch
Replace cabling
Replace fuse F13 in KMC2
Replace fuse -22F72
Check fuse -22F72
voltage V1 KMC2 optional
defective (possible with
additional cutting drum brake)
Check fuse +22-F87
Replace KMC2
Remedial measure
LED +22-LD40 not lit
Run electronics diagnostics
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Output voltage of V1 defective
Error: KMC2 output voltage of V1 Determine via the terminal
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
2103 Malfunction Voltage V1 KMC2
Status: 29.08.2016
2103
Error No.
Page No. 86/228
Description
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
See Remedial action
Dynamo defective
Internal error KMC2
Check wiring
Wiring of release switch
defective
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Turn Page please!
Replace cabling
Replace fuse F6 in KMC2
Check fuse +22-F60
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Check fuse F6 in KMC2
Check fuse +22-F63
Replace KMC2
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Fuse F6 in KMC2 defective
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Run electronics diagnostics
Check the charge indicator lamp, If required, replace charge
check the wiring
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Charge indicator lamp defective
Replace the dynamo
Check battery acid Check battery Charge battery Change battery
voltage
Battery dead
Replace GAL component
Remedial measure
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
GAL component defective
Possible Reason
Error: KMC2 output voltage of V2 Determine via the terminal
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
2104 Malfunction Voltage V2 KMC2
Status: 29.08.2016
2104
Error No.
Page No. 87/228
Description
Check battery acid Check battery Charge battery Change battery
voltage
Check the charge indicator lamp, If required, replace charge
check the wiring
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
See Remedial action
LED +22-LD38 not lit
Battery dead
Charge indicator lamp defective
Dynamo defective
Internal error KMC2
Output voltage of V2 defective.
LED +22-LD37 not lit
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Output voltage of V3 defective.
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Run electronics diagnostics
See Remedial action
GAL component defective
Turn Page please!
Check fuse +22 F63
Check fuse +22-F85
Check fuse +22-F86
Replace KMC2
Replace the dynamo
Replace GAL component
If required, change GAL
component
Check release logic
GAL component release logic
wrong (wrong GAL component)
Replace release switch
Remedial measure
Check release switch
Recommend Check
Release switch defective
Possible Reason
Error: KMC2 output voltage of V3 Determine via the terminal
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
2105 Malfunction Voltage V3 KMC2
Status: 29.08.2016
2105
Error No.
Page No. 88/228
Status: 29.08.2016
Error No.
Page No. 89/228
Description
Meaning
Test function of the release
switch
Check release logic
See Remedial action
Check battery acid Check battery Charge battery Change battery
voltage
Check the charge indicator lamp, If required, replace charge
check the wiring
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
See Remedial action
Release switch defective
GAL component release logic
wrong (wrong GAL component)
GAL component defective
Battery dead
Charge indicator lamp defective
Dynamo defective
Internal error KMC2
Replace KMC2
Replace the dynamo
Replace GAL component
If required, change GAL
component
Replace release switch
Replace cabling
Check wiring
Wiring of release switch
defective
Replace fuse F12 in KMC2
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Check fuse F12 in KMC2
Check fuse +22-F60
Remedial measure
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Recommend Check
Fuse F12 in KMC2 defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
Description
Possible Reason
Test function of the release
switch
Check release logic
See Remedial action
Check battery acid Check battery Charge battery Change battery
voltage
Check the charge indicator lamp, If required, replace charge
check the wiring
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Release switch defective
GAL component release logic
wrong (wrong GAL component)
GAL component defective
Battery dead
Charge indicator lamp defective
Turn Page please!
Replace GAL component
If required, change GAL
component
Replace release switch
Replace cabling
Check wiring
Wiring of release switch
defective
Replace fuse F2 in KMC2
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Check fuse F2 in KMC2
Check fuse +22-F60
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Fuse F2 in KMC2 defective
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check fuse +22-F84
Remedial measure
LED +22-LD36 not lit
Run electronics diagnostics
Recommend Check
Output voltage of V4 defective
Error: KMC2 output voltage of V4 Determine via the terminal
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
2106 Malfunction Voltage V4 KMC2
Status: 29.08.2016
2106
Error No.
Page No. 90/228
2108 Malfunction Voltage 8V
digital sensors - KMC2
2108
Status: 29.08.2016
2107 Malfunction Voltage 12V
digital sensors - KMC2
Description
Error: 8V voltage of digital
sensors
Error: 12V voltage of digital
sensors
Meaning
Charge battery
Change battery
Check battery acid
Check battery voltage
Battery dead
Check wiring
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Short circuit in the wiring to a
digital sensor
Check the excitation voltage,
check the wiring, replace the
dynamo
Dynamo defective
Turn Page please!
Replace wiring
Replace KMC2
Replace the dynamo
Check the charge indicator lamp, If required, replace charge
check the wiring
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Charge indicator lamp defective
Replace sensors
Test function of the sensors
Digital sensor defective
Replace wiring
Replace KMC2
Check wiring
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Replace the dynamo
Remedial measure
Short circuit in the wiring to a
digital sensor
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Recommend Check
Dynamo defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
2107
Error No.
Page No. 91/228
Description
Error: 8 V voltage of analogue
sensors
Meaning
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2.
Check charge indicator lamp,
check wiring.
Change battery
Check battery voltage
Charge indicator lamp defective
Charge battery
Check battery acid
Battery dead
Turn Page please!
If required, change charge
indicator lamp and/or replace
cabling.
Replace the sensor
Test function of the sensor
Analogue sensor defective
Replace wiring
Check wiring
Short circuit in the wiring to an
analogue sensor
Replace KMC2.
Replace dynamo.
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Dynamo defective.
Change battery
Check battery voltage
If required, replace charge
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling.
Charge battery
Replace the sensor
Remedial measure
Check battery acid
Test function of the sensor
Digital sensor defective
Recommend Check
Charge indicator lamp defective. Check charge indicator lamp,
check wiring.
Battery dead
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
2109 Malfunction Voltage 8V
analogue sensors - KMC2
Status: 29.08.2016
2109
Error No.
Page No. 92/228
2110 Voltage battery 3V too low
- KMC2
2111 Malfunction Voltage V1 KMC2
2110
2111
Status: 29.08.2016
Description
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2.
The actual present voltage V1 for
the control unit KMC2 does not
correspond to the logic for
voltage V1
The logic for V1 is without
cutting drum brake:
- Release Switch Field ON
- Release Switch Maintenance
OFF
- both Instantaneous stop switch
OFF
- Release Switch feed drive
safety output ON
- Release Switch feed drive/front
attachment ON
22LD40 is lit even though logic is Replace console relay circuit
not fulfilled
board
See remedy
Check wiring
Relay 22K40 defective
GAL component defective
Wiring of release switch
defective
Replace the wiring
Replace GAL component
Replace GAL component
Check release logic
GAL component release logic
wrong (wrong GAL component)
Replace release switch
Check the required position of
the release switches according
to logic table
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2.
Replace dynamo.
Replace backup battery in KMC2
Replace KMC2
Remedial measure
Release switch defective
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Dynamo defective.
Check voltage of the battery
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Recommend Check
Dynamo defective.
Possible Reason
Error: Backup battery voltage 3 Discharge the backup battery
V too low
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
Error No.
Page No. 93/228
2201 Valve coil Y5 feed drive in
front current too low
2202 Valve coil Y6 feed drive
backwards current too low
2201
2202
Status: 29.08.2016
2112 RAM initialised (Check 3V
battery) - KMC2
Description
Error: Minimum current feed
drive backward valve has fallen
below the normal level
Error: Minimum current feed
drive forward valve has fallen
below the normal level
Error: Re-initialization of the
battery backup RAM in KMC2
Meaning
Check valve plugs and contacts
Valve plug defective
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Check wiring
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Broken cable in the wiring for
feed drive backward valve
Check valve plugs and contacts
Valve plug defective
Perform feed drive diagnostics
Check wiring
Broken cable in the wiring for
feed drive forward valve
Determine via the terminal
Perform feed drive diagnostics
Determine via the terminal
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Turn Page please!
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring
Replace KMC2
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Replace cabling
Internal error KMC2
Replace backup battery in KMC2
Measure voltage on the battery
3V backup battery voltage too
low
Remedial measure
none
Recommend Check
Job computer KMC2 was replaced none
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
2112
Error No.
Page No. 94/228
Status: 29.08.2016
Error: Minimum current front
attachment forward valve has
fallen below the normal level
2204 Valve coil Y7 front
attachment in front current too
low
2204
Meaning
2203 Valve coils Y5/Y6 feed drive Error: Maximum current of the
current too high
feed drive forward or feed drive
backward valves has been
exceeded
Description
Check valve plugs and contacts
Test coil
Valve plug defective
Coil for solenoid valve defective
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Check wiring
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Broken cable in the wiring for
front attachment forward valve
Check valve plugs and contacts
Valve plug defective
Perform feed drive diagnostics
Check wiring
Short circuit in the wiring for
feed drive forward/feed drive
backward valve
Determine via the terminal
Perform feed drive diagnostics
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Determine via the terminal
Test coil
Recommend Check
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
2203
Error No.
Page No. 95/228
Turn Page please!
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring
Replace KMC2
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring
Replace KMC2
Replace coil
Remedial measure
2206 Valve coils Y7/Y8 front
attachment current too high
2206
Status: 29.08.2016
2205 Valve coil Y8 front
attachment backwards current
too low
Description
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Check valve plugs and contacts
Test coil
Valve plug defective
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Check wiring
Perform front attachment
diagnostics
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Turn Page please!
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring
Replace KMC2
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Check valve plugs and contacts
Valve plug defective
Replace KMC2
Remedial measure
Replace wiring
Perform front attachment
diagnostics
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Broken cable in the wiring for
Check wiring
front attachment backward valve
Determine via the terminal
Internal error KMC2
Possible Reason
Error: Maximum current of the
Determine via the terminal
front attachment forward or front
attachment backward valves has
fallen below the normal level
Short circuit in the wiring for
front attachment forward/front
attachment valve backward
Error: Minimum current front
attachment backward valve has
fallen below the normal level
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
2205
Error No.
Page No. 96/228
2208 Reserve alarm - KMC2
2209 Valve coil Y21 rotate
discharge chute on right current
too low
2208
2209
Status: 29.08.2016
2207 Reserve alarm - KMC2
Description
Error: Minimum current turn
discharge chute to the right
valve has fallen below the
normal level
Meaning
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
Check wiring
Check valve plugs and contacts
Test coil
See Remedial action
Broken cable in wiring to turn
discharge chute valve right
Valve plug defective
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Internal error KMC2
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Internal error KMC2
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
2207
Error No.
Page No. 97/228
Replace KMC2
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring
Replace KMC2
Remedial measure
2210 Valve coil Y63 precontrol A
current too low
2211 Valve coil Y64 precontrol B
current too low
2210
2211
Status: 29.08.2016
Description
Determined via the terminal
Error: Current for pilot control
discharge chute valve left or lift
(Y63) has fallen below minimum
level (Hydac valve block)
Meaning
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
Check wiring
Check valve plug and contacts
Check coil
See Remedy
Broken cable in the wiringPilot
control discharge chute valve
right or lower (Y64)
Valve plug defective
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Internal error KMC2
See Remedy
Internal error KMC2
Determined via the terminal
Check coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Replace KMC2
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring
Replace KMC2
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Check valve plug and contacts
Valve plug defective
Remedial measure
Replace wiring
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
Recommend Check
Broken cable in the wiringPilot
Check wiring
control discharge chute valve left
or lift (Y63)
Determined via the terminal
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
Error No.
Page No. 98/228
2301 Valve coil Y21 rotate
discharge chute on right current
too high
2302 Valve coil Y20 rotate
discharge chute on left current
too low
2301
2302
Status: 29.08.2016
Description
Check wiring
Check valve plugs and contacts
Test coil
See Remedial action
Short circuit in wiring to turn
discharge chute valve right
Valve plug defective
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Internal error KMC2
Check wiring
Check valve plugs and contacts
Test coil
See Remedial action
Broken cable in wiring to turn
discharge chute valve left
Valve plug defective
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Internal error KMC2
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Possible Reason
Error: Minimum current turn
Determine via the terminal
discharge chute to the left valve
has fallen below the normal level
Error: Maximum current to turn
discharge chute valve to the
right exceeded
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
Error No.
Page No. 99/228
Replace KMC2
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring
Replace KMC2
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring
Remedial measure
2304 Malfunction Valve coil Y24
raise discharge chute
2304
Status: 29.08.2016
2303 Valve coil Y20 rotate
discharge chute on left current
too high
Description
Error: Lift discharge chute valve
Error: Maximum current to turn
discharge chute valve to the left
exceeded
Meaning
Check valve plugs and contacts
Test coil
See Remedial action
Valve plug defective
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Internal error KMC2
Replace KMC2
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring
Remedial measure
Check wiring to valve
Check valve plugs and contacts
Test coil
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the valve
Valve plug defective
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Turn Page please!
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring to valve
Function to raise discharge chute Check the function using manual Change lift discharge chute
valve defective
operation on the hydraulic block valve
valve. Ensure easy motion and
no noises in the discharge chute!
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
Check wiring
Broken cable in wiring to turn
discharge chute valve left
Determine via the terminal
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
2303
Error No.
Page No. 100/228
2305 Malfunction Valve coil Y25
lower discharge chute
2306 Malfunction Valve coil Y22
raise ejector flap
2305
2306
Status: 29.08.2016
Description
Check valve plugs and contacts
Test coil
Test function of solenoid valve
See Remedial action
Valve plug defective
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Solenoid valve defective
Internal error KMC2
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
Check wiring to valve
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the valve
Turn Page please!
Replace KMC2
Replace the solenoid valve
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring to valve
Check the function using manual Change lower discharge chute
operation on the hydraulic block valve
valve. Ensure easy motion and
no noises in the discharge chute!
Function to lower discharge
chute valve defective
Replace KMC2
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Replace the solenoid valve
Remedial measure
Determine via the terminal
Test function of solenoid valve
Recommend Check
Solenoid valve defective
Possible Reason
Error: Raise discharge chute flap Determine via the terminal
valve
Error: Lower discharge chute
valve
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
Error No.
Page No. 101/228
2307 Malfunction Valve coil Y23
lower ejector flap
2307
Status: 29.08.2016
Description
Recommend Check
Remedial measure
Check valve plugs and contacts
Test coil
Test function of solenoid valve
See Remedial action
Valve plug defective
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Solenoid valve defective
Internal error KMC2
Check wiring to valve
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the valve
Turn Page please!
Replace wiring to valve
Check the function using manual Replace lower discharge chute
operation on the hydraulic block flap valve
valve. Ensure easy motion and
no noises in the discharge chute
flap!
Replace KMC2
Replace the solenoid valve
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring to valve
Function to lower discharge
chute flap valve defective
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
Check wiring to valve
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the valve
Function to raise discharge chute Check the function using manual Change lift discharge chute flap
flap valve defective
operation on the hydraulic block valve
valve. Ensure easy motion and
no noises in the discharge chute
flap!
Possible Reason
Error: Lower discharge chute flap Determine via the terminal
valve
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
Error No.
Page No. 102/228
2308 Discharge chute not at top
2308
Status: 29.08.2016
Description
Error: Discharge chute not up
Meaning
Replace the sensor
Sensor for discharge chute
centre position or discharge
chute lower position defective
Turn Page please!
Replace cabling and plugs
Wiring to one of the sensors
Check wiring and plug
discharge chute centre position
or discharge chute lower position
defective
Measure voltage on the sensors
Correct setting of the sensors
Lift discharge chute
Replace KMC2
Replace the solenoid valve
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Remedial measure
Discharge chute centre position Check setting of the sensors
or discharge chute lower position
sensor not adjusted correctly
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Determine via the terminal
Test function of solenoid valve
Solenoid valve defective
Check position of the discharge
chute
Check coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Discharge chute is not up
Check valve plugs and contacts
Recommend Check
Valve plug defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
Error No.
Page No. 103/228
2401 Sensor B28 discharge
chute centre signal too low
2401
Status: 29.08.2016
2400 discharge chute not in
parking position
Description
Error: Broken cable - discharge
chute centre position sensor
Error: Discharge chute not In
parking position
Meaning
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
Check wiring and plug
Broken cable in the wiring to the
discharge chute centre position
sensor
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Determine via the terminal
Replace the sensor
Measure voltage on the sensors
Sensor for discharge chute
centre position or discharge
chute lower position defective
Turn Page please!
Replace wiring and plugs
Replace KMC2
Replace cabling and plugs
Wiring to one of the sensors
Check wiring and plug
discharge chute centre position
or discharge chute lower position
defective
Replace KMC2
Remedial measure
Correct setting of the sensors
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Discharge chute centre position Check setting of the sensors
or discharge chute lower position
sensor not adjusted correctly
Determine via the terminal
Internal error KMC2
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
2400
Error No.
Page No. 104/228
2403 Sensor B29 discharge
chute top signal too low
2403
Status: 29.08.2016
2402 Sensor B28 discharge
chute centre signal too large
Description
Error: Broken cable - discharge
chute top position sensor
Error: Short circuit - discharge
chute centre position sensor
Meaning
Check wiring and plug
Measure voltage on the sensor
See Remedial action
Discharge chute top position
sensor defective
Internal error KMC2
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Broken cable in the wiring to the
discharge chute top position
sensor
Measure voltage on the sensor
Discharge chute centre position
sensor defective
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
Check wiring and plug
Short circuit in the wiring to the
discharge chute centre position
sensor
Determine via the terminal
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Determine via the terminal
Measure voltage on the sensor
Recommend Check
Discharge chute centre position
sensor defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
2402
Error No.
Page No. 105/228
Replace KMC2
Replace the sensor
Replace wiring and plugs
Replace KMC2
Replace the sensor
Replace wiring and plugs
Replace KMC2
Replace the sensor
Remedial measure
2405 Sensor B30 discharge
chute impulse signal too low
2406 Sensor B30 discharge
chute impulse signal too large
2405
2406
Status: 29.08.2016
2404 Sensor B29 discharge
chute top signal too large
Description
Error: Short circuit discharge
chute moments of momentum
sensor
Error: Broken cable discharge
chute moments of momentum
sensor
Error: Short circuit - discharge
chute top position sensor
Meaning
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
Measure voltage on the sensor
Discharge chute moments of
momentum sensor defective
Determine via the terminal
Check wiring and plug
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Broken cable in the wiring to the
discharge chute moments of
momentum sensor
Measure voltage on the sensor
Discharge chute top position
sensor defective
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
Check wiring and plug
Short circuit in the wiring to the
discharge chute top position
sensor
Determine via the terminal
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
2404
Error No.
Page No. 106/228
Turn Page please!
Replace KMC2
Replace the sensor
Replace wiring and plugs
Replace KMC2
Replace the sensor
Replace wiring and plugs
Remedial measure
Description
Error: Feed drive speed
Meaning
Measure voltage on the sensor
See Remedial action
Discharge chute moments of
momentum sensor defective
Internal error KMC2
Check parameters for feed drive
Check wiring and plug
Check the sensor setting and
correct if necessary
Measure voltage on the sensor
Check pump, engine, and valves
of feed drive and stop valve of
metal detection. Note any
noises!
Parameters for feed drive
incorrect
The cables to the feed drive
speed sensor are defective
Feed drive speed sensor is not
adjusted properly
Feed drive speed sensor
defective
Feed drive is not running,
although the feed drive is turned
on, and the diesel engine is
running
Current is flowing through the
Perform feed drive diagnostics
feed drive forward valve and the
diesel engine is running, but the
feed drive is not running
Check wiring and plug
Recommend Check
Short circuit in the wiring to the
discharge chute moments of
momentum sensor
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
2407 Fault feed drive speed
Status: 29.08.2016
2407
Error No.
Page No. 107/228
Turn Page please!
When checking, eliminate
detected faults
Replace the sensor
Turn the sensor up to stop and
then turn back by approx. half a
turn and counter
Replace cabling and plugs
Correct parameters for feed
drive
Replace KMC2
Replace the sensor
Replace wiring and plugs
Remedial measure
Description
Error: Front attachment speed
Meaning
Check wiring and plug
Check parameters 25260 and
25270 for no-load speeds front
attachment
The cables to the front
attachment speed sensor are
defective
Parameters defective after
software update
Current is flowing through the
Perform front attachment
front attachment forward valve
diagnostics
and the diesel engine is running,
but the front attachment is not
running
Check parameters for front
attachment
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Parameters for front attachment
incorrect
Check high pressure for feed
drive (420 bar)
High pressure for feed drive
incorrect
Turn Page please!
Set parameters 25260 and
25270 for no-load speeds front
attachment to standard value 80
Replace cabling and plugs
Set parameters for front
attachment
Replace KMC2
Set high pressure for feed drive
Set charge pressure for feed
drive
Check charge pressure for feed
drive (30+/-3 bar)
Charge pressure for the feed
drive incorrect
Remedial measure
Check feed drive valves forwards Clean or change feed drive
and feed drive valves backwards valves forwards and feed drive
defective
valves backwards
Recommend Check
Feed drive forward and feed
drive backward valves defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
2408 Fault front attchachment
speed
Status: 29.08.2016
2408
Error No.
Page No. 108/228
Description
Error: Cutting drum speed
Meaning
Check charge pressure for front
attachment (30+/-3 bar)
Check high pressure for front
attachment (420 bar)
See Remedial action
Charge pressure for front
attachment too low
High pressure for front
attachment incorrect
Internal error KMC2
Perform work diagnostics
Check front attachment valves
forwards and front attachment
valves backwards
Front attachment forward and
front attachment backward
valves defective
Determine via the terminal
Check pump, engine, and valves When checking, eliminate
of the front attachment, and stop detected faults
valve of metal detection. Note
any noises!
Feed drive is not running even
though the front attachment is
turned on and the diesel engine
is running
Turn Page please!
Replace KMC2
Set high pressure for front
attachment
Set charge pressure for front
attachment
Clean or change front
attachment valves forwards and
front attachment valves
backwards.
Replace the sensor
Measure voltage on the sensor
Front attachment speed sensor
defective
Turn the sensor up to stop and
then turn back by approx. half a
turn and counter
Remedial measure
Check the sensor setting and
correct if necessary
Recommend Check
Front attachment speed sensor
not adjusted properly
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
2409 Fault cutting drum speed
Status: 29.08.2016
2409
Error No.
Page No. 109/228
2411 Sensor B58 cutting drum
signal too large
2411
Status: 29.08.2016
2410 Sensor B58 cutting drum
signal too low
Description
Measure voltage on the sensor
Check main belt
Check main coupling
See Remedial action
Cutting drum attachment speed
sensor defective
Main belt for cutting drum
defective
Main coupling defective
Internal error KMC2
Error: Short circuit cutting drum
speed sensor
Check wiring and plug
Short circuit in the wiring to the
cutting drum speed sensor
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Perform work diagnostics.
Measure voltage on the sensor
Cutting drum attachment speed
sensor defective
Determine via the terminal
Check wiring and plug
Broken cable in the wiring to the
cutting drum speed sensor
Perform work diagnostics
Check setting of the sensor
Recommend Check
Cutting drum speed sensor not
adjusted properly
Possible Reason
Error: Broken cable cutting drum Determine via the terminal
speed sensor
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
2410
Error No.
Page No. 110/228
Turn Page please!
Replace wiring and plugs
Replace KMC2
Replace the sensor
Replace wiring and plugs
Replace KMC2
Replace main coupling
Change main belt
Replace the sensor
Correct setting of the sensor
Remedial measure
2413 Malfunction sensor B28
discharge chute centre
2413
Status: 29.08.2016
2412 Malfunction metal det.
Description
Error: Time exceeded when
parking or mirroring the
discharge chute up to which
discharge chute centre position
sensor should have been alive
Error: Metal detection defective
Meaning
Check discharge chute
Correct discharge chute
parameter max pulses left and
parameter max pulses left and
discharge chute max pulses right discharge chute max pulses right
More pulses to one side were
counted than permitted
Turn Page please!
Replace the sensor
Measure voltage on the sensor
Discharge chute centre position
sensor defective
Replace wiring and plugs
Replace KMC2
Check wiring and plug
See Remedial action
KMC2 input defective
Replace the metal detection
system
Wiring to the discharge chute
centre position sensor defective
Test function of metal detection
Metal detection output defective
Perform test stop in metal
detection diagnostics display
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
Check wiring between the metal
detection and the KMC2
Conditions output metal
detection, and input KMC2
deviate from each other
Replace KMC2.
Replace sensor.
Remedial measure
Determine via the terminal
Perform metal detection
diagnostics
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Incorrect default setting
Measure voltage on the sensor
Recommend Check
Cutting drum attachment speed
sensor defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
2412
Error No.
Page No. 111/228
2415 Malfunction sensor B30
discharge chute impulse
2500 Sensor B55 front
attachment left signal too low
2415
2500
Status: 29.08.2016
2414 Malfunction sensor B29
discharge chute top
Description
Error: Broken cable front
attachment left sensor
Error: Sensor, discharge chute,
moments of momentum
Error: Discharge chute not up
when attempting to park or
mirror
Meaning
Check setting of the sensors
See Remedial action
Discharge chute top position
sensor is not adjusted properly
Internal error KMC2
Replace the sensor
Measure voltage on the sensor
See Remedial action
Discharge chute moments of
momentum sensor defective
Internal error KMC2
Turn Page please!
Replace KMC2
Replace wiring and plugs
Replace KMC2
Correct setting of the sensors
Lift discharge chute
Replace KMC2
Remedial measure
Short circuit / broken cable in the Check wiring and plug
wiring to the discharge chute
moments of momentum sensor
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
Determine via the terminal
Determine via the terminal
Check position of the discharge
chute
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Discharge chute is not up
Internal error KMC2
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
2414
Error No.
Page No. 112/228
2501 Sensor B55 front
attachment left signal too large
2502 Sensor B25 front
attachment right signal too low
2501
2502
Status: 29.08.2016
Description
Error: Broken cable front
attachment right sensor
Error: Short circuit front
attachment left sensor
Meaning
Check setting on the display
Check wiring and plug
Broken cable in the wiring to the
front attachment right sensor
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
The setting of the front
attachment in the display does
not agree with the actually
mounted front attachment
Measure voltage on the sensor
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Front attachment left sensor
defective
Measure voltage on the sensor
Front attachment left sensor
defective
Check wiring and plug
Check wiring and plug
Broken cable in the wiring to the
front attachment left sensor
Short circuit in the wiring to the
front attachment left sensor
Check setting on the display
Recommend Check
The setting of the front
attachment in the display does
not agree with the actually
mounted front attachment
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
Error No.
Page No. 113/228
Turn Page please!
Replace wiring and plugs
Correct setting on the display
Replace KMC2
Replace the sensor
Replace wiring and plugs
Replace KMC2
Replace the sensor
Replace wiring and plugs
Correct setting on the display
Remedial measure
Status: 29.08.2016
2506 Release switch S1 field OFF Error: Action cannot be
- KMC2
performed, or was terminated,
because the field release switch
is, or was, turned off
2506
Error: Short circuit front
attachment right sensor
Meaning
2503 Sensor B25 front
attachment right signal too
large
Description
Perform operating panel
diagnostics
Check wiring
Test function of release switch.
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
Determine via the terminal
Field release switch wiring
defective
Field release switch defective
Internal error, operating panel
Internal error KMC2
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Check switching position of field
release switch
Measure voltage on the sensor
Front attachment right sensor
defective
Field release switch is, or was,
turned off
Check wiring and plug
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Short circuit in the wiring to the
front attachment right sensor
Measure voltage on the sensor
Recommend Check
Front attachment right sensor
defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
2503
Error No.
Page No. 114/228
Replace KMC2
Replace operating panel
Replace field release switch
Replace wiring
Switch on field release switch
Replace KMC2
Replace the sensor
Replace wiring and plugs
Replace KMC2
Replace the sensor
Remedial measure
Status: 29.08.2016
Check wiring
Test function of the release
switch
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
Wiring of maintenance release
switch defective
Maintenance release switch
defective
Internal error, operating panel
Internal error KMC2
Check wiring
Test function of switch
See Remedial action
Wiring of the quick stop switch
defective
Quick stop switch defective
Internal error, operating panel
Perform operating panel
diagnostics
Check switching position of the
quick stop switch
Perform operating panel
diagnostics
Determine via the terminal
2508 Quick stop S90 or S91 ON - Error: Action cannot be
Quick stop switch is, or was,
KMC2
performed, or was terminated,
turned on
because the quick stop switch is,
or was, turned on
Determine via the terminal
Recommend Check
Maintenance release switch is, or Check switching position of
was, turned on
maintenance release switch
Possible Reason
2508
Error: Action cannot be
performed, or was terminated,
because the maintenance
release switch is, or was, turned
on
Meaning
2507 Release switch S5
maintenance OFF - KMC2
Description
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
2507
Error No.
Page No. 115/228
Turn Page please!
Replace operating panel
Replace quick stop switch
Replace wiring
Turn quick stop switch off
Replace KMC2
Replace operating panel
Replace maintenance release
switch
Replace wiring
Switch maintenance release
switch off
Remedial measure
Status: 29.08.2016
Check valve plug and contacts
Check coil
See Remedy
Valve plug defective
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Internal computer error additional axle control
See Remedy
Internal computer error additional axle control
2510 Lower additional axle valve Error: Current to lower additional Determined via the terminal
Run travelling gear diagnostics
coil Y81 current too low
axle valve is below minimum
value (Y81)
Broken cable in the wiring for the Check wiring
additional axle valve (Y81)
Check coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Replace additional axle control
computer
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring
Replace additional axle control
computer
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Check valve plug and contacts
Valve plug defective
Replace KMC2
Remedial measure
Replace wiring
Run travelling gear diagnostics
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Broken cable in the
Check wiring
wiringAdditional axle valve (Y80)
Determined via the terminal
Internal error KMC2
Possible Reason
2510
Error: Current to lift additional
axle valve is below minimum
value (Y80)
Meaning
2509 Lift additional axle valve
coil Y80 current too low
Description
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
2509
Error No.
Page No. 116/228
Status: 29.08.2016
2513 Malfunction CAN2 between Error: CAN bus communication
add.axis and KMC2
from additional axle control
computer to the terminal
2513
An error occurred while lowering
the additional axle! Stop
machine immediately and
eliminate the error!
2512 Malfunction during
lowering of add. axis
2512
Possible Reason
See Remedy
Additional axle set but not
available
See Remedy
Internal computer error additional axle control
Run CAN and travelling gear
diagnostics
Check wiring and plug
Broken cable/short circuit in
wiring for the additional axle
Determined via the terminal
Switch off the machine and
check the additional axle
Fault in the additional axle area
See Remedy
Internal computer error additional axle control
Run travelling gear diagnostics
Measure sensor supply voltage
Additional axle sensor (B80)
faulty
Determined via the terminal
Check wiring and plug
Run travelling gear diagnostics
Recommend Check
Broken cable in the wiring to the
additional axle sensor (B80)
Error: Broken cable for additional Determined via the terminal
axle pressure sensor (B80)
Meaning
2511 Pressure sensor B80
add.axis signal too low
Description
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
2511
Error No.
Page No. 117/228
Turn Page please!
Check the travelling gear
settings
Replace additional axle control
computer
Replace wiring and plugs
Switch off the machine and
remedy the fault
Replace additional axle control
computer
Replace the sensor
Replace wiring and plugs
Remedial measure
2514 Malfunction voltage 12V add.axis
2514
Status: 29.08.2016
Description
See Remedy
Internal computer error additional axle control
Internal computer error additional axle control
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Replace additional axle control
computer
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
See Remedy
Check/replace fuse +22-F60
Replace fuse +22-F51
Replace additional axle control
computer
Replace wiring
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Check fuse +22-F51
Run travelling gear diagnostics
Check wiring
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN2 bus
Check/replace fuse +22-F60
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Replace fuse +22-F51
Remedial measure
Check fuse +22-F51
Recommend Check
Power supply voltage for
additional axle control computer
faulty
Possible Reason
Error: Power supply voltage for
Determined via the terminal
additional axle computer too low
/ too high
Power supply voltage for
additional axle control computer
faulty
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
Error No.
Page No. 118/228
Status: 29.08.2016
2600 Malfunction CAN1 between Error: CAN bus communication terminal and KMC2
KMC2 to terminal
2600
Error: Switching voltage of
additional axle too low/too high
Meaning
2515 Malfunction voltage 5V add.axis
Description
Check wiring
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
CAN1 terminating resistors
defective
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit.
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN1 bus
Check fuse +22-F60
LED +22-LD60 not lit.
Central electrical power supply
defective.
Turn Page please!
If required, replace wiring and/or
terminating resistors
Replace wiring
Check fuse +22-F61
LED +22-LD61 not lit.
KMC2 power supply defective
Program control unit
In the menu - Info software
versions - check the software
version of the control units
Control unit not programmed
Replace additional axle control
computer
Perform CAN diagnostics
See Remedy
Internal computer error additional axle control
Remedial measure
Determine via the terminal
Run travelling gear diagnostics
Recommend Check
Determined via the terminal
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
2515
Error No.
Page No. 119/228
2602 sensor B91 leak oil
pressure signal too large
2602
Status: 29.08.2016
2601 sensor B91 leak oil
pressure signal too low
Description
Error: Leakage oil pressure
sensor (B91) has short circuit
Error: Leakage oil pressure
sensor (B91) has broken cable
Meaning
Check wiring and plug
Measure sensor supply voltage
See Remedy
Sensor for leakage oil pressure
(B91) faulty
Internal error KMC2
See Remedy
Internal error KMC2
Short circuit in the wiring to the
sensor (B91)
Measure sensor supply voltage
Sensor for leakage oil pressure
(B91) faulty
Run travelling gear diagnostics
Check wiring and plug
Broken cable in the wiring to the
sensor (B91)
Determined via the terminal
Run travelling gear diagnostics
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC2
Determined via the terminal
If the serial number of the
hardware autopilot is greater
than 13.154157.1022 the
autpilot software version must
be at least 150200029-20
Recommend Check
In some cases an incorrect CAN
configuration from the autopilot
may be the cause. The hardware
does not match the autopilot
autopilot software and
sporadically causes this and /or
other CAN error messages
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
2601
Error No.
Page No. 120/228
Replace KMC2
Replace the sensor
Replace wiring and plugs
Replace KMC2
Replace the sensor
Replace wiring and plugs
Replace KMC2
If necessary, update the
software version of the autopilot
Remedial measure
2604 leak oil filter very soiled
2605 Foot switch malfunction
S15/S16 - KMC2
2604
2605
Status: 29.08.2016
2603 leak oil filter soiled
Description
Restart the machine without a
key being activated by the
driver.
See Remedy
Internal error KMC2
Turn Page please!
Restart the machine
Replace KMC2
Consult KRONE Service
Check wheel motors
Wheel motors faulty
Replace the sensor
Replace wiring to the leakage oil
filter sensor (B91)
Measure sensor supply voltage
Sensor for leakage oil pressure
(B91) faulty
Replace leakage oil filter if
necessary
Short circuit/broken cable in
Check wiring to the leakage oil
wiring for leakage oil filter sensor filter sensor (B91)
(B91)
Clean leakage oil filter
Leakage oil filter dirty
See Remedy
Internal error KMC2
Replace KMC2
Replace the sensor
Measure sensor supply voltage
Sensor for leakage oil pressure
(B91) faulty
Replace leakage oil filter if
necessary
Remedial measure
Replace wiring to the leakage oil
filter sensor (B91)
Clean leakage oil filter
Recommend Check
Short circuit/broken cable in
Check wiring to the leakage oil
wiring for leakage oil filter sensor filter sensor (B91)
(B91)
Leakage oil filter dirty
Possible Reason
When switching on the machine, The driver has accidentally
a keypress has been detected by pressed a foot switch.
the foot switch.
Error: Wheel motors faulty
Error: Leakage oil filter dirty
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
2603
Error No.
Page No. 121/228
Description
The maximum permissible front
attachment speed has been
exceeded
Meaning
Check installed hydraulic
component
Make certain the parameter
Replace the sensor and carry out
25492 \"Engine front
front attachment drive
attachment” is correctly set and calibration again
compare the speed by using a
speed measuring instrument on
universal shaft of the front
attachment drive with the
display in the front attachment
diagnostics in the machine
terminal.
Mixed installation from 75ccm
hydraulic pump with 55ccm
hydraulic engine of front
attachment drive
Front attachment speed sensor
defective
Turn Page please!
Replace hydraulic engine or
hydraulic pump of the front
attachment drive and carry out
front attachment calibration
again
Set the parameter appropriately
and carry out the front
attachment drive calibration
again
\"Check parameter 25492
“Engine front attachment” in the
parameter group “Front
attachment” to the installed
hydraulic engine.
0 = Sauer engines
1 = Linde engines with 55ccm
2 = Linde engines with 75ccm\"
Sensor type from front
attachment speed sensor
wrongly indicated in the machine
terminal (parameter 25492
engine front attachment)
Replace switch or wiring
Remedial measure
Carry out front attachment drive
calibration again
Check the switch and the wiring
Recommend Check
Front attachment calibration is
defective
Switch sticks mechanically or a
short circuit from the switch is
internally available
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
2606 Front attachment speed
too high - KMC2
Status: 29.08.2016
2606
Error No.
Page No. 122/228
Status: 29.08.2016
Check valve plug
Test coil
Valve plug defective
Solenoid valve coil defective
Check wiring to valve
Check valve plug
Test coil
Short circuit in the wiring to
valve Y77
Valve plug defective
Solenoid valve coil defective
Perform front attachment
diagnostics
Check wiring to valve
Cable break in the wiring to
valve Y77
2608 Valve Coil Y77 Release
Error: Power consumption for the Determination via terminal
front attachment reverse current valve Y77 front attachment
too high
backward is too high.
Perform front attachment
diagnostics
Recommend Check
Determination via terminal
KMC2 shows an internal fault
(input from job computer KMC2
defective)
Possible Reason
2608
Meaning
2607 Valve Coil Y77 Release
Error: Power consumption from
front attachment reverse current valve Y77 release front
too low
attachment backward is too low.
Description
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
2607
Error No.
Page No. 123/228
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Replace the wiring to the valve
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Replace the wiring to the valve
Replace job computer KMC2 and
carry out the front attachment
drive calibration again
Remedial measure
Description
The setting stated in the
machine terminal for the braked
cutting drum parameter 25655
\\”Cutting drum brake
available\\\" does not correspond
to the actual configuration on
the machine.
Meaning
Check current equipment and
compare it with the set
parameters.
Check the voltage from valve
Y77 in the diagnostics braked
cutting drum in the machine
terminal. A voltage of approx.
8.5V must always be present
here if no braked cutting drum is
installed.
Check whether a cable
break/short circuit valve Y77 is
available. To do this, check the
current as well as the voltage
from valve Y77 in the diagnostics
braked cutting drum in the
machine terminal. If a braked
cutting drum is installed, a
voltage of approx. 0V must be
present here if the valve Y77
release front attachment
backward is not controlled. If
the valve Y77 is controlled (front
attachment reversed), a voltage
of more than 10V is present
here.
There is no braked cutting drum
installed but valve Y77 can be
detected. The voltage from valve
Y77 must be approx. 8.5V if
parameter 25655 ”Cutting drum
brakes available\" is 0 (brake not
installed).
A braked cutting drum is
installed but valve Y77 cannot be
detected. The voltage from valve
Y77 in the non-switched state
must be approx. 0V if the
parameter 25655 \"Cutting drum
brakes available\" is 1.
Recommend Check
The parameter 25655 does not
correspond to the actual
equipment on the machine.
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
2609 Malfunction cutting drum
brake
Status: 29.08.2016
2609
Error No.
Page No. 124/228
Output KMC2.PWM_LA_8 or
output KMC2.HBPWM_6 defective
or input KMC2.Dig_3 defective
==> replace control unit KMC2
The current from valve Y77 is
approx. 0 mA and the voltage
from valve Y77 is approx. 8.5 V
==> Check valve Y77 and the
wiring from output
KMC2.PWM_LA_8 to valve Y77 as
well as from valve Y77 to output
KMC2.HBPWM_6
The current from valve Y77 is
greater than 500 mA. However,
the voltage is approx. 8.5V ==>
Check the wiring from input
Dig_3 from KMC2 to valve Y77.
Internal fault in the control unit
KMC2 ==> replace KMC2
Check plug 2X2 from KMC2 to
make certain it is not soiled or
moist. Also make certain that
there is no short circuit. Clean
the plug, if necessary.
Set the parameter correctly
Remedial measure
2611 Malfunction cutting drum
brake
2612 Malfunction relay 20K2.1
front attachment in front - KMC2
2613 Malfunction relay 20K2.3
feed drive in front - KMC2
2611
2612
2613
Status: 29.08.2016
2610 Malfunction cutting drum
brake
Description
\"The front attachment has
detected a speed while the
cutting drum has been braked.
The parameter 25661 - Cutting
drum brakes deactivated - has
been set automatically to 1
(deactivated) and the brake for
the cutting drum is no longer
controlled.
The parameter can only be
changed by a service
technician.\"
A speed has been measured on
the cutting drum even beyond
11 seconds.
Meaning
Check the hydraulics
Fault in the hydraulic system
Fault in the hydraulic system
Check the hydraulics
Fault on sensor front attachment Check the front attachment
speed B27
speed in the diagnostics front
attachment and the actual
movement of the front
attachment.
Check the mechanical setting of
the cutting drum speed sensor
Recommend Check
Wrong mechanical setting of
cutting drum speed sensor
(B58).
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
2610
Error No.
Page No. 125/228
The sensor B27 must be
replaced it the front attachment
does not move but a speed for
the front attachment drive is
displayed in the front
attachment diagnostics.
Set the sensor correctly.
Remedial measure
2615 Malfunction relay 20K2.4
front attachment backwards
release - KMC2
3100 Voltage electronics - KMC3
2615
3100
Status: 29.08.2016
2614 Malfunction relay 20K2.2
feed drive backwards - KMC2
Description
Error: Electronic voltage voltage out of range
Meaning
Check the charge indicator lamp, If required, replace charge
check the wiring
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Charge indicator lamp defective
Turn Page please!
Replace wiring
Check wiring
Short circuit in the wiring to a
12V sensor
Replace cabling
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Check the cables.
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD62 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Wiring defective
Check fuse +22-F62
LED +22-LD44 not lit
KMC3 power supply defective
Check fuse +22-F44
Remedial measure
Run electronics diagnostics.
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
2614
Error No.
Page No. 126/228
3101 Undervoltage electronics KMC3
3101
Status: 29.08.2016
Description
Test function of dynamo
Dynamo defective
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC3
Turn Page please!
Replace cabling
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Check the cables.
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD62 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Wiring defective
Check fuse +22-F62
LED +22-LD44 not lit
Check fuse +22-F44
Replace the KMC3
Replace battery change-over
relay
Power supply voltage of KMC3
too low
Run electronics diagnostics
Test function of the relays
according to circuit diagram
Change battery
Check battery voltage
Battery change-over relay
defective (500, 800, and 1000)
Charge battery,
Replace the dynamo
Replace cabling
Remedial measure
Check battery acid,
Battery dead
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Recommend Check
The controller of the dynamo is
defective
Possible Reason
Error: Electronics voltage too low Determine via the terminal
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
Error No.
Page No. 127/228
Description
Error: Electronics voltage too
high
Meaning
Check wiring
Check charge indicator lamp,
Check wiring
Short circuit in the wiring to a
12V sensor
Charge indicator lamp defective
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC3
Check the cables.
Test function of the relays
according to circuit diagram
Battery change-over relay
defective (500, 800, and 1000)
Wiring defective
Check battery acid, Check
battery voltage
Battery dead
Run electronics diagnostics
Test function of dynamo
Dynamo defective
Power supply voltage of KMC3
too high
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
The controller of the dynamo is
defective
Turn Page please!
If required, replace charge
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Replace wiring
Replace cabling
Replace the KMC3
Replace battery change-over
relay
Charge battery, Change battery
Replace the dynamo
Replace cabling
Check the charge indicator lamp, If required, replace charge
check the wiring
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Charge indicator lamp defective
Replace wiring
Remedial measure
Check wiring
Recommend Check
Short circuit in the wiring to a
12V sensor
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
3102 Overvoltage electronics KMC3
Status: 29.08.2016
3102
Error No.
Page No. 128/228
Description
Test function of the relays
according to circuit diagram
See Remedial action
Battery change-over relay
defective (500, 800, and 1000)
Internal error KMC3
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Turn Page please!
Replace fuse F13 in KMC3
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Check fuse F13 in KMC3
Check fuse +22-F60
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Fuse F13 in KMC3 defective
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD35 not lit
Check fuse +22-F81
Replace the KMC3
Replace battery change-over
relay
Output voltage of V1 defective
Run electronics diagnostics
Check battery acid Check battery Charge battery Change battery
voltage
Battery dead
Replace the dynamo
Test function of the dynamo
Dynamo defective
Replace cabling
Remedial measure
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Recommend Check
The controller of the dynamo is
defective
Possible Reason
Error: KMC3 output voltage of V1 Determine via the terminal
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
3103 Malfunction Voltage V1 KMC3
Status: 29.08.2016
3103
Error No.
Page No. 129/228
Description
See Remedial action
Check the charge indicator lamp, If required, change charge
check the wiring
indicator lamp and/or replace
cabling
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Check battery acid, Check
battery voltage
See Remedial action
GAL component defective
Charge indicator lamp defective
Dynamo defective
Battery dead
Internal error KMC3
LED +22-LD34 not lit
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Output voltage of V2 defective.
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Run electronics diagnostics
Check release logic
GAL component release logic
wrong (wrong GAL component)
Turn Page please!
Check fuse +22-F63
Check fuse +22-F80
Replace KMC3.
Charge battery Change battery
Replace the dynamo
Replace GAL component
Replace GAL component
Replace release switch
Test function of release switch.
Release switch defective
Replace cabling
Remedial measure
Check wiring
Recommend Check
Wiring of release switch
defective
Possible Reason
Error: KMC3 output voltage of V2 Determine via the terminal
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
3104 Malfunction Voltage V2 KMC3
Status: 29.08.2016
3104
Error No.
Page No. 130/228
Status: 29.08.2016
Error No.
Page No. 131/228
Description
Meaning
Test function of release switch.
Check release logic
See Remedial action
Check charge indicator lamp
Check the cables.
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Check battery acid Check battery Charge battery Change battery
voltage
See Remedial action
Release switch defective
GAL component release logic
wrong (wrong GAL component)
GAL component defective
Charge indicator lamp defective
Dynamo defective
Battery dead
Internal error KMC3
Replace the KMC3
Replace the dynamo
If required, replace charge
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Replace GAL component
Replace GAL component
Replace release switch
Replace cabling
Check wiring
Wiring of release switch
defective.
Change fuse F6 in KMC3
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Check fuse F6 in KMC3
Check fuse +22-F60
Remedial measure
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Recommend Check
Fuse F6 in KMC3 defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
Description
Possible Reason
Test function of release switch.
Check release logic
See Remedial action
Check the charge indicator lamp, If required, replace charge
check the wiring
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Release switch defective
GAL component release logic
wrong (wrong GAL component)
GAL component defective
Charge indicator lamp defective
Turn Page please!
Replace GAL component
If required, change GAL
component
Replace release switch
Replace cabling
Check wiring
Wiring of release switch
defective
Replace fuse F12 in KMC3
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Check fuse F12 in KMC3
Check fuse +22-F60
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Fuse F12 in KMC3 defective
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check fuse +22-F78
Remedial measure
LED +22-LD32 not lit
Run electronics diagnostics
Recommend Check
Output voltage of V3 defective
Error: KMC3 output voltage of V3 Determine via the terminal
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
3105 Malfunction Voltage V3 KMC3
Status: 29.08.2016
3105
Error No.
Page No. 132/228
Description
Check wiring
Test function of release switch.
Check release logic
Wiring of release switch
defective
Release switch defective
GAL component release logic
wrong (wrong GAL component)
Turn Page please!
If required, change GAL
component
Replace release switch
Replace cabling
Replace fuse F2 in KMC3
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Check fuse F2 in KMC3
Check fuse +22-F60
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Fuse F2 in KMC3 defective
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check fuse +22-F79
LED +22-LD33 not lit
Output voltage of V4 defective
Run electronics diagnostics
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC3
Replace the KMC3
Check battery acid Check battery Charge battery Change battery
voltage
Battery dead
Replace the dynamo
Remedial measure
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Recommend Check
Dynamo defective
Possible Reason
Error: KMC3 output voltage of V4 Determine via the terminal
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
3106 Malfunction Voltage V4 KMC3
Status: 29.08.2016
3106
Error No.
Page No. 133/228
Description
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC3
Check the charge indicator lamp, If required, replace charge
check the wiring
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Charge battery
Change battery
Check sensors
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Check battery acid
Check battery voltage
Digital sensor defective
Charge indicator lamp defective
Dynamo defective
Battery dead
Turn Page please!
Replace the dynamo
If required, replace sensors
Check wiring
Replace wiring
Replace the KMC3
Short circuit in the wiring to a
digital sensor
Run electronics diagnostics
Check battery acid Check battery Charge battery Change battery
voltage
Battery dead
Replace the dynamo
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Dynamo defective
Remedial measure
Check the charge indicator lamp, If required, replace charge
check the wiring
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Recommend Check
Charge indicator lamp defective
Possible Reason
Error: 12 volts - voltage of digital Determine via the terminal
sensors
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
3107 Malfunction Voltage 12V
digital sensors - KMC3
Status: 29.08.2016
3107
Error No.
Page No. 134/228
3109 Malfunction Voltage 8V
analogue sensors - KMC3
3109
Status: 29.08.2016
3108 Malfunction Voltage 8V
digital sensors - KMC3
Description
Error: 8 V voltage of analogue
sensors
KMC3 Spg. 8V dig.sensors
Meaning
Check wiring
Check sensors
Check charge indicator lamp,
Short circuit in the wiring to a
digital sensor
Digital sensor defective
Charge indicator lamp defective
Run electronics diagnostics
Check wiring
Determine via the terminal
Short circuit in the wiring to an
analogue sensor
Turn Page please!
Replace wiring
Replace the KMC3
Check battery voltage
See Remedial action
Change battery
Check battery acid
Battery dead
Internal error KMC3
Charge battery
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Replace the dynamo
Replace cabling
If required, replace sensors
Replace wiring
Replace the KMC3
Remedial measure
Dynamo defective
Check wiring
Run electronics diagnostics
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Internal error KMC3
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
3108
Error No.
Page No. 135/228
3110 Voltage battery 3V too low
- KMC3
3111 Cutting drum no speed!
3110
3111
Status: 29.08.2016
Description
Error: No cutting drum speed!
Error: Backup battery voltage 3
volts too low
Meaning
Check battery voltage
Replace KMC2
Internal error KMC2
See Remedy
Replace the sensor
Cutting drum speed sensor (B58) Check sensor
faulty
Check wiring to the cutting drum Replace wiring to the cutting
speed sensor (B58)
drum speed sensor (B58)
Short circuit/broken cable in
wiring for cutting drum speed
sensor (B58)
Replace the KMC3
Perform work diagnostics
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC3
Replace backup battery in KMC3
Replace the KMC3
Determined via the terminal
Measure voltage on the battery
Discharge the backup battery
See Remedial action
Change battery
Check battery acid
Battery dead
Internal error KMC3
Charge battery
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Dynamo defective
Replace the dynamo
Check the charge indicator lamp, Replace cabling
check the wiring
Charge indicator lamp defective
If required, replace sensors
Remedial measure
Check sensors
Recommend Check
Analogue sensor defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
Error No.
Page No. 136/228
3201 M11 Cracker motor current Error: Minimum current engine
too low
cracker has fallen below the
normal level
3201
Status: 29.08.2016
3200 M11 Cracker motor current Short-circuit Cracker engine
too high
(M11)
3200
Error: Joystick type set
incorrectly
Meaning
3112 Joystick not correct!
Description
Check Cracker engine
See Remedial action
Engine cracker defective
Internal error KMC3
Perform cracker diagnostics
Check plug
Plug defective
Determine via the terminal
Check wiring
Short circuit in the engine
cracker wiring
Turn Page please!
Replace the KMC3
Replace the engine cracker
Replace plug
Replace wiring
If required, increase current
Check parameters
Wrong parameter value for
maximum current of cracker
engine
Set joystick type
Remedial measure
Remove the dirt; grease the
mechanics
Perform cracker diagnostics
Check settings
Recommend Check
Power consumption too high due Check mechanism for
to sluggish mechanics
contamination
Determine via the terminal
Error: Maximum current engine
cracker has been exceeded
Current joystick type not set
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
3112
Error No.
Page No. 137/228
Description
Error: When reducing the cracker
gap, the current is monitored for
the zero position of the cracker
rollers. The current has a value
between the normal and the
maximum current
Meaning
Check wiring and plug
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC3
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC3
The wiring to the engine cracker
is defective
Test engine
Engine cracker defective
Test default setting of the
Cracker parameter s
Test function of plugs and
contacts
Plug defective
Wrong parameter value for
cracker
Check wiring
Broken cable in the engine
cracker wiring
none
Check output voltage
Output voltage defective
The zero position of the cracker
has been reached
Check parameters
Recommend Check
Wrong parameter value for
minimum current of cracker
engine
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
3202 Cracker motor minimum
distance reached
Status: 29.08.2016
3202
Error No.
Page No. 138/228
Replace the KMC3
Replace cabling or plugs
Perform a default setting of the
parameter crackers
none
Replace the KMC3
Replace the engine cracker
Replace plug
Replace wiring
Adjust output voltage
If required, reduce current
Remedial measure
3203 Malfunction cracker sensor
B42
3204 Sensor BM17 position rear
wall of discharge accelerator
malf.
3203
3204
Status: 29.08.2016
Description
Error: Sensor cracker position
detected
Meaning
Replace the sensor
Replace the KMC3
Remove engine and actuate
electrically, check whether it
rotates continuously. As long as
the engine is supplied with
current, a signal from the sensor
is expected. If this does not
occur, an error message is
issued.
Check whether corn conditioner
is mechanically jammed
Cracker position sensor defective Measure voltage on the sensor
See Remedial action
Test engine at no load
Check that corn conditioner
moves easily
Internal error in KMC3
Engine does not rotate
continuously
Set supply voltage
Replace cabling and plugs
Check power supply voltage
Power supply voltage for
analogue sensors incorrect
Wenn der Motor dreht, muss die
Mechanik vom Cracker gereinigt
werden.
Wenn der Motor nicht dreht
siehe weitere Ursachen.
Remedial measure
Wiring to cracker position sensor Check wiring and plug
defective
Cracker-Motor ausbauen und im
ausgebauten Zustand testen
Recommend Check
Mechanik vom Cracker-Motor ist
zu schwergaengig
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
Error No.
Page No. 139/228
3211 Lifting gear pressure too
high during counterblade
adjustment
3301 M9 counterblade left motor Error: Maximum current left
current too high
counterblade engine has been
exceeded
3211
3301
Status: 29.08.2016
3210 Lifting gear pressure low
during counterblade adjustment
3210
Meaning
Description
Check wiring
Check plugs and contacts
Check counterblade engine left
Short circuit in the left
counterblade engine wiring
Plug defective
Left counterblade engine
defective
Turn Page please!
Replace left counterblade engine
Replace plug
Replace wiring
Run default setting parameters
Check parameters
Wrong parameter value for the
maximum current left
counterblade engine
Remedial measure
Remove the dirt; grease the
mechanics
Perform counterblade
diagnostics
Recommend Check
Power consumption too high due Check mechanism for
to sluggish mechanics
contamination
Determine via the terminal
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
Error No.
Page No. 140/228
Status: 29.08.2016
Error: Maximum current right
counterblade engine has been
exceeded
3303 Motor M10 counterblade
right maxiimum current
3303
Meaning
3302 M9 counterblade left motor Error: Minimum current left
current too low
counterblade engine has fallen
below the normal level
Description
Check output voltage
Check plugs and contacts
Test function of engine
See Remedial action
Check wiring
Output voltage defective
Plug defective
Left counterblade engine
defective
Internal error KMC3
Broken cable in the left
counterblade engine wiring
Power consumption too high due Check mechanics
to sluggish mechanics
Perform counterblade
diagnostics
Check parameters
Wrong parameter value for the
minimum current left
counterblade engine
Determine via the terminal
Perform counterblade
diagnostics
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Internal error KMC3
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
3302
Error No.
Page No. 141/228
Turn Page please!
Remove the dirt; grease the
mechanics
Replace wiring
Replace the KMC3
Replace left counterblade engine
Replace plug
Set output voltage
Run default setting parameters
Replace the KMC3
Remedial measure
Description
Error: Maximum current right
counterblade engine has been
exceeded
Meaning
Check plugs and contacts
Test function of the engine
See Remedial action
Plug defective
Right counterblade engine
defective
Internal error KMC3
Check parameters
Check wiring
Wrong parameter value for the
maximum current right
counterblade engine
Short circuit in the right
counterblade engine wiring
sluggish mechanics
Power consumption too high due Check mechanics
to
Perform counterblade
diagnostics
Check wiring
Short circuit in the right
counterblade engine wiring
Determine via the terminal
Check parameters
Recommend Check
Wrong parameter value for the
maximum current right
counterblade engine
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
3304 M10 counterblade right
motor current too high
Status: 29.08.2016
3304
Error No.
Page No. 142/228
Turn Page please!
Replace wiring
Run default setting parameters
Remove the dirt; grease the
mechanics
Replace the KMC3
Replace right counterblade
engine
Replace plug
Replace wiring
Run default setting parameters
Remedial measure
Description
Error: Minimum current right
counterblade engine has fallen
below the normal level
Meaning
Check parameters
Check output voltage
Check wiring
Check plugs and contacts
Test function of engine
See Remedial action
Wrong parameter value for the
minimum current right
counterblade engine
Output voltage defective
Broken cable in the right
counterblade engine wiring
Plug defective
Right counterblade engine
defective
Internal error KMC3
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC3
Perform counterblade
diagnostics
Test function of engine
Right counterblade engine
defective
Determine via the terminal
Check plugs and contacts
Recommend Check
Plug defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
3305 M10 counterblade right
motor current too low
Status: 29.08.2016
3305
Error No.
Page No. 143/228
Replace the KMC3
Replace right counterblade
engine
Replace plug
Replace wiring
Set output voltage
Run default setting parameters
Replace the KMC3
Replace right counterblade
engine
Replace plug
Remedial measure
3307 Reserve Alarm
3308 Valve coil Y12 main
coupling current too low
3307
3308
Status: 29.08.2016
3306 Reserve Alarm
Description
Error: Minimum current main
coupling valve has fallen below
the normal level
Meaning
Check coil. The coil must have a
resistance of approx. 2.2 ohm
See Remedial action
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Internal error KMC3
Replace the KMC3
- Coil with the valve \"Y11 1/2
intake volume HA\" has been
interchanged. The valve Y11
\"1/2 intake volume HA is
connected to connection A from
the valve block. The main
coupling valve is connected to
connection B from the valve
block. The valve Y11 \"1/2 intake
volume HA\" has an internal
resistance of approx. 8 ohm.
- Change coil
Replace valve plug
Check valve plugs and contacts
Valve plug defective
Remedial measure
Replace wiring
Perform work diagnostics
Recommend Check
Broken cable in the wiring for the Check wiring
main coupling valve
Determine via the terminal
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
3306
Error No.
Page No. 144/228
3401 Sensor B84 external
temperature signal too low
3402 Sensor B85 hydraulic oil
temperature signal too large
3403 Sensor B85 hydraulic oil
temperature signal too low
3401
3402
3403
Status: 29.08.2016
3400 Sensor B84 external
temperature signal too large
Description
Determined via the terminal
Error: Short circuit in hydraulic
oil temperature sensor (B85)
Error: External temperature
sensor (B84) has broken cable
Error: Short circuit in external
temperature sensor (B84)
Meaning
Perform engine diagnostics
Perform engine diagnostics
Turn Page please!
Replace the KMC3
See Remedy
Internal error KMC3
Replace wiring and plugs
Replace the sensor
Check wiring and plug
Short circuit in the wiring to the
sensor (B85)
Replace the KMC3
Replace the sensor
Replace wiring and plugs
Replace the KMC3
Replace the sensor
Replace wiring and plugs
Remedial measure
Hydraulic oil temperature sensor Measure sensor supply voltage
(B85) faulty
Perform engine diagnostics
See Remedy
Internal error KMC3
Determined via the terminal
Measure sensor supply voltage
External temperature sensor
(B84) faulty
See Remedy
Internal error KMC3
Check wiring and plug
Measure sensor supply voltage
External temperature sensor
(B84) faulty
Broken cable in the wiring to the
sensor (B84)
Check wiring and plug
Recommend Check
Short circuit in the wiring to the
sensor (B84)
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
3400
Error No.
Page No. 145/228
3404 Engine fan speed too high
3405 Engine fan speed too low
3404
3405
Status: 29.08.2016
Description
Error: Engine fan speed below
minimum value
Check coil
See Remedy
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Internal error DIOM
Valve plug defective
Broken cable in the
Check wiring
wiringHydraulic fan control valve
(Y82)
Perform engine diagnostics
Check valve plug and contacts
Valve plug defective
Determined via the terminal
Check wiring
Short circuit in the wiring to the
hydraulic fan control valve (Y82)
Perform engine diagnostics
Turn Page please!
Replace wiring
Replace wiring
Replace DIOM
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Replace wiring
Replace the KMC3
See Remedy
Internal error KMC3
Replace wiring and plugs
Remedial measure
Replace the sensor
Check wiring and plug
Recommend Check
Hydraulic oil temperature sensor Measure sensor supply voltage
(B85) faulty
Broken cable in the wiring to the
sensor (B85)
Possible Reason
Error: Maximum speed of engine Determined via the terminal
fan exceeded
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
Error No.
Page No. 146/228
3406 Sensor B36 grinding stone
left signal too large
3407 Sensor B36 grinding stone
left signal too low
3406
3407
Status: 29.08.2016
Description
Error: Broken cable left position
grinding stone sensor
Error: Short circuit left position
grinding stone sensor
Meaning
Check wiring and plug
Measure voltage on the sensor
Left grinding stone sensor
position defective
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC3
Broken cable in the wiring to the
left position grinding stone
sensor
Measure voltage on the sensor
Left grinding stone sensor
position defective
Perform grinding diagnostics
Check wiring and plug
Short circuit in the wiring to the
left position grinding stone
sensor
Determine via the terminal
Perform grinding diagnostics
See Remedy
Internal error DIOM
Determine via the terminal
Check coil
Check valve plug and contacts
Recommend Check
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
Error No.
Page No. 147/228
Turn Page please!
Replace the sensor
Change wiring and/or plugs
Replace the KMC3
Replace the sensor
Replace wiring and/or plugs
Replace DIOM
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Remedial measure
3408 Sensor B37 grinding stone
right signal too large
3409 Sensor B37 grinding stone
right signal too low
3408
3409
Status: 29.08.2016
Description
Check wiring and plug
Measure voltage on the sensor
See Remedial action
Short circuit in the wiring to the
right position grinding stone
sensor
Left grinding stone sensor
position defective
Internal error KMC3
Check wiring and plug
Measure voltage on the sensor
Check power supply voltage
Broken cable in the wiring to the
right position grinding stone
sensor
Right grinding stone position
sensor defective
Power supply for digital sensors
incorrect
Perform grinding diagnostics
Perform grinding diagnostics
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC3
Determine via the terminal
Check power supply voltage
Recommend Check
Power supply for digital sensors
incorrect
Possible Reason
Error: Broken cable right position Determine via the terminal
grinding stone sensor
Error: Short circuit right position
grinding stone sensor
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
Error No.
Page No. 148/228
Turn Page please!
Replace the sensor
Screw
Check wiring and/or plugs
Replace the KMC3
Replace the sensor
Change wiring and/or plugs
Replace the KMC3
Set supply voltage
Remedial measure
Status: 29.08.2016
3411 Sensor B59 maintenance
Error: Broken cable grinding
flap ginding device signal too low device maintenance flap sensor
closed
3411
Error: Short circuit grinding
device maintenance flap sensor
closed
Meaning
3410 Sensor B59 maintenance
flap ginding device signal too
large
Description
Check wiring and plug
Measure voltage on the sensor
Check power supply voltage
See Remedial action
Grinding device maintenance
flap closed sensor defective
Power supply for digital sensors
incorrect
Internal error KMC3
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC3
Broken cable in the wiring to the
grinding device maintenance
flap sensor closed
Measure voltage on the sensor
Grinding device maintenance
flap closed sensor defective
Perform grinding diagnostics
Check wiring and plug
Short circuit in the wiring to the
grinding device maintenance
flap sensor closed
Determine via the terminal
Perform grinding diagnostics
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Internal error KMC3
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
3410
Error No.
Page No. 149/228
Replace the KMC3
Set supply voltage
Replace the sensor
If required, replace wiring and/or
plugs
Replace the KMC3
Replace the sensor
Replace wiring and/or plugs
Replace the KMC3
Remedial measure
3501 Engine 2 speed too low!
3501
Status: 29.08.2016
3500 chute not in parking
position!
Description
Replace the sensor
Measure voltage on the sensor
See Remedial action
Sensor for discharge chute
centre position or discharge
chute lower position defective
Internal error KMC2.
Run diagnostics via MiniDiag
See Remedy
Determined by the diagnostic
unit
Engine control of second engine
faulty
Perform engine diagnostics
Replace cabling and/or plugs
Wiring to one of the sensors
Check wiring and plug
discharge chute centre position
or discharge chute lower position
defective
Replace engine control of second
engine
Consult KRONE Service
Replace KMC2
Correct setting of the sensors
Perform discharge chute
diagnostics
Discharge chute centre or lower
position sensor defective
Move discharge chute into
parking position
Remedial measure
Discharge chute centre position Check setting of the sensors
or discharge chute lower position
sensor not adjusted correctly
Check whether discharge chute
is in parking position
Recommend Check
The discharge chute is not in
parking position
Possible Reason
Error: Speed of 2nd diesel engine Determined via the terminal
below minimum value
Error: Discharge chute not in
parking position
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
3500
Error No.
Page No. 150/228
3505 SmartDrive safety signal
missing
3505
Status: 29.08.2016
3504 Malfunction sensor B52
pendulum frame
Description
Replace wiring and/or plugs
Error in the wiring to the sensor
transverse incline position
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC3
Check the Smart Drive power
supply and check the wiring
Check wiring
See Remedial action
See Remedial action
SmartDrive power supply
defective
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring of the safety signal
Internal error - Smart Drive
Internal error - KMC3.
Run travelling gear diagnostics
Set supply voltage
Check power supply voltage
Power supply voltage for
analogue sensors incorrect
Replace the KMC3
Replace Smart Drive
Replace wiring
Replace cabling to the
SmartDrive
Replace the KMC3
Replace the sensor
Sensor for transversal inclination Measure voltage on the sensor
position defective
Check wiring and plug
Set lifting gear
Sensor for transversal inclination Perform lifting gear diagnostics
position defective
Remedial measure
Make adjustment
Recommend Check
Sensor for transversal inclination Check setting on sensor
position not adjusted
Possible Reason
Error: Safety signal - Smart Drive Determine via the terminal
to KMC3
Error: Sensor for transversal
inclination position
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
3504
Error No.
Page No. 151/228
3508 Air filter contaminat.
Status: 29.08.2016
3508
Error: Air filter contamination
(800 and 1000 have 2 air filters)
Check wiring
See Remedial action
Short circuit in the wiring to
another KMC3 sensor
Internal error KMC3
Turn Page please!
Replace air filter contamination
sensor
Measure voltage on the sensor
Air filter contamination sensor
defective
If required, change air filter
Replace wiring to air filter
contamination sensor
Cleaning the Air Filter
Perform engine diagnostics
Have maintenance performed at
the intended factory, and have
the maintenance reminders reset
Replace the KMC3
Replace wiring
Replace fuel tank filling level
sensor
Change series resistor
Replace wiring to fuel tank filling
level sensor
Remedial measure
Short circuit/broken cable in
Check wiring to air filter
wiring for air filter contamination contamination sensor
sensor
Air filter dirty
Determine via the terminal
Check fuel tank filling level
sensor
Filling level fuel tank sensor
defective
Check whether the maintenance
interval has expired
Check series resistor
Protective resistor defective
3507 Diesel engine maintenance Note: Maintenance work must be The maintenance interval has
performed
elapsed
Check wiring to filling level fuel
tank sensor
Recommend Check
Error in the wiring of the filling
level fuel tank sensor
Possible Reason
3507
Error: Filling level fuel tank
sensor
Meaning
3506 Malfunction Sensor B44
tank sensor
Description
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
3506
Error No.
Page No. 152/228
3510 Fault suct. return filter 1
3510
Status: 29.08.2016
3509 Fill level hydraulic oil
control
Description
Error: Suction return filter 1
filling level
Error: Hydraulic tank filling level
Meaning
Check power supply voltage
Check wiring
See Remedial action
Power supply voltage for
analogue sensors incorrect
Short circuit in the wiring to
another KMC3 sensor
Internal error KMC3
Perform work diagnostics
Check hydraulic tank filling level
sensor
Hydraulic oil level sensor
defective
Determine via the terminal
Perform work diagnostics
Determine via the terminal
Clean suction return filter 1
Check wiring
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the hydraulic oil level
sensor
Suction return filter 1 dirty
Check hydraulic fluid level
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
The hydraulic oil level is too low
Internal error KMC3
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
3509
Error No.
Page No. 153/228
Turn Page please!
If required, change suction
return filter 1
Replace the KMC3
Replace wiring
Correct supply voltage
If required, replace hydraulic
tank filling level sensor
Replace wiring
If required, top up hydraulic fluid
Replace the KMC3
Remedial measure
Description
Perform work diagnostics
Check main distributor,
subdistributor and lubrication
points for blockage
Determine via the terminal
Jam in the system or at a
connected lubrication point.
Check grease filling level
LED +22-LD42 not lit
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC3
Clean and, if required, replace
main distributor, subdistributor
and lubrication points
Add grease as described in the
BiG X operating instructions,
chapter Maintenance central
Lubrication System. See also
Central Lubrication System in the
operating instructions
See also Central Lubrication
System in the operating
instructions
Check fuse +22-F89
Replace the KMC3
Replace suction return filter 1
sensor
Measure voltage on the sensor
Suction return filter 1 sensor
defective
Remedial measure
Replace wiring
Recommend Check
Short circuit/broken cable in the Check wiring
wiring for the suction return filter
1 sensor
Possible Reason
Error: Central lubrication
Power supply voltage for central
IMPORTANT: All malfunction
lubrication defective
messages from the central
lubrication system must be
confirmed and deleted using the
DK key on the central lubrication
system. This will simultaneously
delete any intermediate
lubrication. Before deleting the
No grease present
error message, determine the
cause of the error, and eliminate
it. See also Central Lubrication
System in the operating
instructions.
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
3511 Malfunction M12 central
lubrication
Status: 29.08.2016
3511
Error No.
Page No. 154/228
Status: 29.08.2016
3600 Malfunction CAN1 between Error: CAN bus communication terminal - KMC3
KMC3 to terminal
3600
Error: Main gearbox oil pressure
3513 Oil pressure main gearbox
3513
Error: Hydraulic oil filling level
Meaning
3512 Malfunction B43 sensor
filling level hydraulic oil
Description
Replace the sensor
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
CAN1 terminating resistors
defective
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Turn Page please!
Replace wiring and/or
terminating resistors
Replace wiring
LED +22-LD62 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check wiring
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD44 not lit
KMC3 power supply defective
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN1 bus
Check fuse +22-F62
Perform CAN diagnostics
Determine via the terminal
Check fuse +22-F44
Replace the sensor
Sensor defective
Measure voltage on the sensor
Replace wiring
Short circuit / broken cable in the Check wiring
wiring to the sensor
Measure voltage on the sensor
Sensor defective
Remedial measure
Replace wiring
Recommend Check
Short circuit / broken cable in the Check wiring
wiring to the sensor
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
3512
Error No.
Page No. 155/228
4001 Malfunction voltage 10V metal detetction
4001
Status: 29.08.2016
4000 Metal detection
deactivated!!!
Description
Error: Power supply voltage for
metal detection
Alarm: Metal detection has been
switched off
Meaning
Check battery acid Check battery Charge battery Change battery
voltage
Battery dead
Turn Page please!
Check the charge indicator lamp, If required, replace charge
check the wiring
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Charge indicator lamp defective
Replace cabling
Check the cables.
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Wiring defective
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Replace fuse +22-F55
Check fuse +22-F55
Change metal detection settings
Replace the KMC3
If necessary, update the
software version of the autopilot
Remedial measure
Power supply voltage for metal
detection defective
Perform metal detection
diagnostics
See Remedial action
Internal error KMC3
Metal detection has been
switched off
If the serial number of the
hardware autopilot is greater
than 13.154157.1022 the
autpilot software version must
be at least 150200029-20
Recommend Check
In some cases an incorrect CAN
configuration from the autopilot
may be the cause. The hardware
does not match the autopilot
autopilot software and
sporadically causes this and /or
other CAN error messages
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
4000
Error No.
Page No. 156/228
Description
Error: Power supply voltage too
low (<8V)
Meaning
Check battery acid Check battery Charge battery Change battery
voltage
Test function of dynamo
See Remedial action
Battery dead
Dynamo defective
Metal detection internal error
Replace the metal detection
system
Replace the dynamo
Check the charge indicator lamp, If required, replace charge
check the wiring
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Charge indicator lamp defective
Replace cabling
Check the cables.
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Wiring defective
Check fuse +22-F63
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Change fuse +22-F55
Replace the metal detection
system
Check fuse +22-F55
See Remedial action
Metal detection internal error
Replace the dynamo
Remedial measure
Power supply voltage for metal
detection too low
Test function of dynamo
Recommend Check
Dynamo defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
4002 Malfunction voltage 8V metal detetction
Status: 29.08.2016
4002
Error No.
Page No. 157/228
4010 Stop valve Y35 current too
low - metal detection
4011 Stop valve Y35 current too
high - metal detection
4010
4011
Status: 29.08.2016
4003 Metal detetction
activated!!!
Description
Error: Short circuit in quick stop
valve
Error: Broken cable - quick stop
valve
Note: Metal detection has been
turned on
Meaning
LED +22-LD71 glowing
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Check wiring to valve
Test coil
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Short circuit in the wiring for the
valve
Coil for solenoid valve defective
See Remedial action
Metal detection internal error
Error: Short circuit in quick stop
valve
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Turn Page please!
Replace coil
Replace wiring to valve
Check fuse +22-F92
Check fuse +22-F71
Replace the metal detection
system
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Check valve plugs and contacts
Valve plug defective
Check fuse +22-F92
Replace wiring to valve
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check fuse +22-F71
none
Remedial measure
Broken cable in the wiring for the Check wiring to valve
valve
LED +22-LD71 glowing
none
Recommend Check
Quick stop valve - broken cable
none
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
4003
Error No.
Page No. 158/228
4013 internal malfunction metal detetction
4013
Status: 29.08.2016
4012 stop valve Y35 - metal
detetction
Description
Error: Quick stop valve output
defective
Error: Overload quick stop valve
Meaning
See Remedial action
Metal detection internal error
See Remedial action
Metal detection internal error
Perform metal detection
diagnostics
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Output defective
Check wiring to valve
Wiring to the valve defective
Check parameters
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Parameters for metal detection
system incorrect
LED +22-LD71 glowing
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Quick stop valve overload
Metal detection internal error
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
4012
Error No.
Page No. 159/228
Replace the metal detection
system
Replace the metal detection
system
Set the factory settings of the
metal detection in the display of
the metal detection diagnostics
Metal detection internal error
Replace coil
Replace wiring to valve
Check fuse +22-F92
Check fuse +22-F71
Replace the metal detection
system
Remedial measure
4033 internal malfunction metal detetction
4034 internal malfunction metal detetction
4048 internal malfunction metal detetction
4033
4034
4048
Status: 29.08.2016
4032 internal malfunction metal detetction
Description
Error: Metal detection internal
Error: Metal detection internal
Error: Metal detection internal
Error: Metal detection internal
Meaning
Check parameters
See Remedial action
Metal detection internal error
Parameters for metal detection
system incorrect
Check parameters
See Remedial action
Metal detection internal error
Parameters for metal detection
system incorrect
Check parameters
See Remedial action
Metal detection internal error
Parameters for metal detection
system incorrect
Check parameters
Recommend Check
Parameters for metal detection
system incorrect
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
4032
Error No.
Page No. 160/228
Turn Page please!
Set the factory settings of the
metal detection in the display of
the metal detection diagnostics
Replace the metal detection
system
Set the factory settings of the
metal detection in the display of
the metal detection diagnostics
Replace the metal detection
system
Set the factory settings of the
metal detection in the display of
the metal detection diagnostics
Replace the metal detection
system
Set the factory settings of the
metal detection in the display of
the metal detection diagnostics
Remedial measure
4050 internal malfunction metal detetction
4220 Malfunction CAN2
communication - metal
detetction
4050
4220
Status: 29.08.2016
4049 internal malfunction metal detetction
Description
Error: Metal detection internal
Error: Metal detection internal
Error: Metal detection internal
Meaning
Check parameters
If the serial number of the
hardware autopilot is greater
than 13.154157.1022 the
autpilot software version must
be at least 150200029-20
In some cases an incorrect CAN
configuration from the autopilot
may be the cause. The hardware
does not match the autopilot
autopilot software and
sporadically causes this and /or
other CAN error messages
See Remedial action
Metal detection internal error
Parameters for metal detection
system incorrect
Check parameters
See Remedial action
Metal detection internal error
Parameters for metal detection
system incorrect
Check parameters
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Parameters for metal detection
system incorrect
Metal detection internal error
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
4049
Error No.
Page No. 161/228
Turn Page please!
If necessary, update the
software version of the autopilot
Set the factory settings of the
metal detection in the display of
the metal detection diagnostics
Replace the metal detection
system
Set the factory settings of the
metal detection in the display of
the metal detection diagnostics
Replace the metal detection
system
Set the factory settings of the
metal detection in the display of
the metal detection diagnostics
Replace the metal detection
system
Remedial measure
4224 Internal malfunction metal detetction
4301 METAL DETECTED!!!
4302 Malfunction metal
detetction
4224
4301
4302
Status: 29.08.2016
4222 internal malfunction
(parameter error) - metal
detetction
Description
See Remedial action
Metal detection internal error
Error: Fault, metal detection
Error: Metal detected in feed
drive
Incorrect default setting
Check default setting
Check whether there is metal in
the feed drive
See Remedy
Metal detection internal error
Metal in feed drive
See Remedy
Restore factory settings for
metal detection
Perform metal detection
diagnostics
Check parameters
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Parameters for metal detection
system incorrect
Metal detection internal error
Possible Reason
Error: Fault in metal detection or Determined via the terminal
data saving
Error: Metal detection internal
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
4222
Error No.
Page No. 162/228
Turn Page please!
Remove metal and then reverse
feed drive/front attachment
Replace the metal detection
system
Restore factory settings for
metal detection in metal
detection diagnostics.
Replace the metal detection
system
Set the factory settings of the
metal detection in the display of
the metal detection diagnostics
Replace the metal detection
system
Remedial measure
4400 pressure sensor steer B63
signal too low
4400
Status: 29.08.2016
Description
Error: Broken cable steering
wheel pressure sensor
Meaning
Turn Page please!
Set steering hydraulic pressure
Check steering hydraulic
pressure (0 - 200 bar)
If required, replace wiring and
terminating resistors
Steering hydraulic pressure
defective
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
CAN2 terminating resistors
defective
Replace wiring
Check the function using manual Replacing the Pressure Sensor
operation on the hydraulic block
valve. Ensure easy motion and
no noises in the steering!
Check wiring
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN2 bus
Replace KMC2
Steering pressure sensor
function defective
Run KMC2 diagnostics
KMC2 input defective
Replace the metal detection
system
Perform autopilot diagnostics
Perform metal detection
diagnostics
Metal detection output defective
Perform test stop in metal
detection diagnostics display
Perform default setting in the
display in the metal detection
diagnostics
Remedial measure
Determine via the terminal
Check wiring between the metal
detection and the KMC2
Recommend Check
Conditions output metal
detection, and input KMC2
deviate from each other
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
Error No.
Page No. 163/228
4401 pressure sensor steer B63
signal too high
4401
Status: 29.08.2016
Description
Error: Short circuit steering
wheel pressure sensor
Meaning
Check wiring to sensor
Check sensor plugs
Measure voltage on the sensor
Check wiring
Short circuit in the wiring to the
sensor
Sensor plug defective
Sensor defective
Short circuit in the wiring to
another autopilot sensor
Turn Page please!
Replace wiring
Replace the sensor
Replace sensor plug
Replace wiring to the sensor
Set steering hydraulic pressure
Check steering hydraulic
pressure (0 - 200 bar)
Steering hydraulic pressure
defective
Replace autopilot
Check the function using manual Replace pressure sensor
operation on the hydraulic block
valve. Ensure easy motion and
no noises in the steering!
See Remedial action
Internal error autopilot
Replace the sensor
Steering pressure sensor
function defective
Measure voltage on the sensor
Sensor defective
Replace sensor plug
Perform autopilot diagnostics
Check plugs and contacts
Sensor plug defective
Replace wiring to the sensor
Remedial measure
Determine via the terminal
Check wiring to sensor
Recommend Check
Broken cable in the wiring to the
sensor
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
Error No.
Page No. 164/228
4403 sensor steer.axis B64
signal too high
4403
Status: 29.08.2016
4402 sensor steer.axis B64
signal too low
Description
Internal error autopilot
Possible Reason
Error: Short circuit steering axle
angle sensor
Check wiring to sensor
Check sensor plugs
Measure voltage on the sensor
Check wiring
Sensor plug defective
Sensor defective
Short circuit in the wiring to
another autopilot sensor
Measure voltage on the sensor
Internal error autopilot
Short circuit in the wiring to the
sensor
Measure voltage on the sensor
Sensor defective
Perform autopilot diagnostics
Check sensor plugs
Sensor plug defective
Determine via the terminal
Check wiring to sensor
Perform autopilot diagnostics
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Broken cable in the wiring to the
sensor
Error: Broken cable steering axle Determine via the terminal
angle sensor
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
4402
Error No.
Page No. 165/228
Turn Page please!
Replace wiring
Replace the sensor
Replace sensor plug
Replace wiring to the sensor
Replace autopilot
Replace the sensor
Replace sensor plug
Replace wiring to the sensor
Replace autopilot
Remedial measure
4405 sensor row-tracer B65
signal too high
4405
Status: 29.08.2016
4404 sensor row-tracer B65
signal too low
Description
Error: Short circuit sensor row
tracer left
Error: Broken cable sensor row
tracer left
Meaning
Check sensor plugs
Measure voltage on the sensor
Check wiring
Sensor plug defective
Sensor defective
Short circuit in the wiring to
another autopilot sensor
See Remedial action
Internal error autopilot
Check wiring to sensor
Measure voltage on the sensor
Sensor defective
Short circuit in the wiring to the
sensor
Check sensor plugs
Sensor plug defective
Perform autopilot diagnostics
Check wiring to sensor
Broken cable in the wiring to the
sensor
Determine via the terminal
Perform autopilot diagnostics
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Internal error autopilot
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
4404
Error No.
Page No. 166/228
Turn Page please!
Replace wiring
Replace the sensor
Replace sensor plug
Replace wiring to the sensor
Replace autopilot
Replace the sensor
Replace sensor plug
Replace wiring to the sensor
Replace autopilot
Remedial measure
4407 sensor row-tracer B61
signal too high
4407
Status: 29.08.2016
4406 sensor row-tracer B61
signal too low
Description
Error: Short circuit sensor row
tracer right
Error: Broken cable sensor row
tracer right
Meaning
Check sensor plugs
Measure voltage on the sensor
Check wiring
Sensor plug defective
Sensor defective
Short circuit in the wiring to
another autopilot sensor
See Remedial action
Internal error autopilot
Check wiring to sensor
Measure voltage on the sensor
Sensor defective
Short circuit in the wiring to the
sensor
Check sensor plugs
Sensor plug defective
Perform autopilot diagnostics
Check wiring to sensor
Broken cable in the wiring to the
sensor
Determine via the terminal
Perform autopilot diagnostics
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Internal error autopilot
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
4406
Error No.
Page No. 167/228
Turn Page please!
Replace wiring
Replace the sensor
Replace sensor plug
Replace wiring to the sensor
Replace autopilot
Replace the sensor
Replace sensor plug
Replace wiring to the sensor
Replace autopilot
Remedial measure
Meaning
Internal error autopilot.
Possible Reason
Status: 29.08.2016
See Remedial action
Internal error autopilot
Perform autopilot diagnostics
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
4410 valve coil Y40 steering axis Error: Broken cable steering axle Determine via the terminal
right current too low
valve right
Check wiring to valve
Short circuit in the wiring for the
valve
4410
Perform autopilot diagnostics
Determine via the terminal
See Remedial action
Internal error autopilot
4409 valve coil Y39 steering axis Error: Short circuit steering axle
left current too high
valve left
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Turn Page please!
Replace autopilot
Replace coil
Replace wiring to valve
Replace autopilot
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Check valve plug
Valve plug defective
Replace autopilot
Remedial measure
Replace wiring to valve
Perform autopilot diagnostics
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Broken cable in the wiring for the Check wiring to valve
valve
4408 valve coil Y39 steering axis Error: Broken cable steering axle Determine via the terminal
left current too low
valve left
Description
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
4409
4408
Error No.
Page No. 168/228
Status: 29.08.2016
Error: Electronic voltage voltage out of range
4412 Malfunction power supply
voltage outputs - Autopilot
4412
Meaning
4411 valve coil Y40 steering axis Error: Short circuit steering axle
right current too high
valve right
Description
Check fuse +22-F76
LED +22-LD30 not lit
Turn Page please!
Check fuse +22-F50
Replace autopilot
LED +22-LD50 not lit
See Remedial action
Internal error autopilot
Replace coil
Power supply voltage for
autopilot incorrect
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Replace wiring to valve
Perform diagnostics for autopilot
and electronics
Check wiring to valve
Short circuit in the wiring for the
valve
Replace autopilot
Determine via the terminal
Perform autopilot diagnostics
See Remedial action
Internal error autopilot
Determine via the terminal
Test coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Check valve plugs and contacts
Valve plug defective
Remedial measure
Replace wiring to valve
Recommend Check
Broken cable in the wiring for the Check wiring to valve
valve
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
4411
Error No.
Page No. 169/228
Status: 29.08.2016
Error No.
Page No. 170/228
Description
Meaning
Test function of dynamo
While engine is running,
measure on batteries. Voltage
must not be over 14.8V
Test function of the relays
according to circuit diagram
See Remedial action
Dynamo defective
The controller of the dynamo is
defective
Battery change-over relay
defective (500, 800, and 1000).
Internal error autopilot
Replace autopilot
Replace battery change-over
relay
Replace the dynamo
Replace the dynamo
Check the charge indicator lamp, If required, replace charge
check the wiring
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Change battery
Check battery voltage
Charge indicator lamp defective
Charge battery
Check battery acid
Battery dead
Replace cabling
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Check the cables.
Check fuse +22-F63
Remedial measure
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Recommend Check
Wiring defective
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
4413 Malfunction sensor voltage
- Autopilot
4414 Malfunction reserve 0/14 Autopilot
4415 Malfunction reserve 0/15 Autopilot
4419 Internal malfunction Autopilot
4432 Malfunction CAN between
terminal - Autopilot
4413
4414
4415
4419
4432
Status: 29.08.2016
Description
Error: CAN bus communication autopilot to KMC3.
Internal fault in the autopilot
computer
Error: Power supply voltage too
low
Meaning
Measure voltage on the sensor
See Remedial action
Sensor defective
Internal error autopilot
Determine via the terminal
Perform diagnostics for autopilot
and CAN
Check wiring to the sensors
Short circuit in the wiring to the
sensors
ISOBUS-ID is not available in the
control unit
Perform diagnostics for autopilot
and electronics
Recommend Check
Determine via the terminal
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
Error No.
Page No. 171/228
Turn Page please!
Replace control unit
Replace autopilot
Replace the sensor
Replace wiring to the sensors
Remedial measure
Description
Error: Backup battery voltage
Meaning
See Remedial action
Internal error autopilot
Check battery voltage
If the serial number of the
hardware autopilot is greater
than 13.154157.1022 the
autpilot software version must
be at least 150200029-20
In some cases an incorrect CAN
configuration from the autopilot
may be the cause. The hardware
does not match the autopilot
autopilot software and
sporadically causes this and /or
other CAN error messages
Discharge the backup battery
Check wiring and terminating
resistors
CAN1 terminating resistors
defective
Turn Page please!
Replace backup battery in
display
Replace autopilot
If necessary, update the
software version of the autopilot
If required, replace wiring and/or
terminating resistors
Replace wiring
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Check wiring
Check fuse +22-F63
Check fuse +22-F76
LED +22-LD30 not lit
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Check fuse +22-F50
Remedial measure
LED +22-LD50 not lit
Recommend Check
Short circuit/broken cable in the
wiring for the CAN1 bus
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Power supply voltage for
autopilot incorrect
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
5000 Display battery empty
Status: 29.08.2016
5000
Error No.
Page No. 172/228
5004 Diesel engine maintenance Note: Maintenance work must be The maintenance interval has
performed
elapsed
5005 Software inconsistent
5004
5005
Status: 29.08.2016
5003 Diesel engine maintenance Note: Maintenance work must be The maintenance interval has
performed
elapsed
The installed software versions
of the individual control unts are
not compatible.
One or more control units on the
machine have an incorrect
software version.
Wrong software loaded
5003
KMC3 software - incorrect
machine type
5002 KMC3 software wrong
machine type
Wrong software loaded
Internal error display
Possible Reason
5002
Error: Wrong software
Meaning
5001 KMC2 software wrong
machine type
Description
Check whether the maintenance
interval has expired
Check whether the maintenance
interval has expired
Check software version
Check software version
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
5001
Error No.
Page No. 173/228
Turn Page please!
Perform engine diagnostics
Have maintenance performed at
the intended factory, and have
the maintenance reminders reset
Perform engine diagnostics
Have maintenance performed at
the intended factory, and have
the maintenance reminders reset
Load new software
Load new software
Replace display
Remedial measure
5007 Recalibrate cracker
5008 Memory for error list full
5007
5008
Status: 29.08.2016
5006 Electronic Autopilot still
active
Description
See Remedy
Calibration required
Attention: For the engine error
5008 please open engine error
list MAN MFR!
See Remedy
Run grain conditioner diagnostics
See Remedy
Autopilot release switch turned
on
Check whether calibration is
required
Perform autopilot diagnostics
Display the software versions on
the terminal of the machine on
the \"Software Info\" screen and
compare with the software
information in the
KroneDownloadCenter. The
control unit where the incorrect
software version has been
transferred, transfer
correspondingly new software
Recommend Check
Determined via the terminal
Possible Reason
Error: Wait queue for saving data Wait queue for saving data full
full
Note: Calibration work must be
performed
Note: Autopilot electronics still
active
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
5006
Error No.
Page No. 174/228
Consult KRONE Service
Perform calibration
Turn off Autopilot release switch
Remedial measure
5013 Check wear on brake lining
on main drive
5013
Status: 29.08.2016
5012 Machine data inconsistent! The saved machine number or
A control unit has been replaced
the engine type in the individual
control units as well as in the
terminal are not compatible with
each other.
5012
Setting of diesel engine not
available
Enter engine type anew by using
the “Krone-Helper” PC
programme
Enter machine number anew
Check the machine number in
the terminal with the actual
machine number
Contact KRONE customer service
Check the set engine type in the
terminal of the machine
Check engine type setting in the
terminal
Run diagnostics using the engine Consult KRONE Service
diagnostic device
Determined by the diagnostic
unit
5011 Check diesel engine type
setting
Perform engine diagnostics
Clean the radiator
Determined via the terminal
5011
Fault: Diesel engine type lost
See Remedy
Engine control faulty
5010 Cooling water temperature Error: Cooling water temperature The cooling water temperature is Check radiator to ensure it is
too high
too high!
too high
clean
Run diagnostics using the engine Consult KRONE Service
diagnostic device
Determined by the diagnostic
unit
Replace engine control
Perform engine diagnostics
Remedial measure
Determined via the terminal
5010
Error: Diesel engine oil pressure
has fallen below minimum value
Recommend Check
5009 Diesel engine oil pressure
too low
Possible Reason
5009
Meaning
Description
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
Error No.
Page No. 175/228
7002 Malfunction acceleration
sensor left BXX - RockProtect
7003 Acceleration sensor B76
Error: Acceleration sensor right
right signal too low - RockProtect broken cable
7002
7003
Status: 29.08.2016
7001 Acceleration Sensor left
BXX overvoltage - RockProtect
7001
Error: RockProtect acceleration
sensor left
Error: Acceleration sensor left
voltage too high
Error: Acceleration sensor left
broken cable
7000 Acceleration sensor left
BXX signal too low - RockProtect
7000
Meaning
Description
Measure voltage on the sensor
Right acceleration sensor
defective
See Remedy
Internal error KMC4
(RockProtect)
Check wiring and plug
Measure sensor supply voltage
Acceleration sensor faulty
Broken cable in the wiring to the
right acceleration sensor
Run RockProtect diagnostics
Determined via the terminal
See Remedial action
Internal error - KMC4
Turn Page please!
Replace left sensor
Replace wiring and plugs
Replace KMC4 (RockProtect)
Replace the sensor
Replace KMC4
Replace left sensor
Measure voltage on the sensor
Replace KMC4
Left acceleration sensor
defective
See Remedial action
Internal error - KMC4
Replace left sensor
Replace wiring and/or plugs
Measure voltage on the sensor
Left acceleration sensor
defective
Renew wiring and plugs
Remedial measure
Short-circuit of operating voltage Check wiring and plug
for acceleration sensor left
Check wiring and plug
Recommend Check
Broken cable in the wiring to the
left acceleration sensor
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
Error No.
Page No. 176/228
7005 Malfunction acceleration
sensor B76 right - RockProtect
7006 Path sensor BXX signal too
low - RockProtect
7007 Path sensor BXX
overvoltage - RockProtect
7005
7006
7007
Status: 29.08.2016
7004 Overvoltage acceleration
sensor B76 signal too high RockProtect
Description
Measure sensor supply voltage
See Remedy
Acceleration sensor (B75) faulty
Internal error KMC4
(RockProtect)
Error: Path sensor voltage too
high
Measure voltage on the sensor
See Remedial action
Path sensor defective
Internal error - KMC4
Check wiring and plug
Run RockProtect diagnostics
Determined via the terminal
See Remedial action
Internal error - KMC4
Turn Page please!
Replace KMC4
Replace sensor
Replace wiring and/or plugs
Replace KMC4 (RockProtect)
Replace the sensor
Replace KMC4
Replace right sensor
Measure voltage on the sensor
Right acceleration sensor
defective
Replace KMC4
Remedial measure
Replace wiring and/or plugs
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
Short-circuit of operating voltage Check wiring and plug
for acceleration sensor right
Internal error - KMC4
Possible Reason
Error: Broken cable - path sensor Broken cable in the wiring to the
path sensor
Error: RockProtect acceleration
sensor right
Error: Acceleration sensor right
voltage too high
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
7004
Error No.
Page No. 177/228
7009 Stop valve Y35 current too
low - RockProtect
7010 Stop valve Y35 current too
high - RockProtect
7009
7010
Status: 29.08.2016
7008 Path sensor BXX
Malfunction - RockProtect
Description
Error: Maximum valve current
exceeded
Error: Valve current is below the
minimum level
Error: RockProtect distance
sensor
Meaning
Check wiring
See Remedial action
Internal error - KMC4
Short circuit in the wiring for the
valve
Check coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Turn Page please!
Replace wiring
Internal error - KMC4
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Check valve plugs and contacts
Replace KMC4 (RockProtect)
Valve plug defective
See Remedy
Internal error KMC4
(RockProtect)
Replace the sensor
Replace wiring
Measure voltage on sensor
Distance sensor (B72) faulty
Broken cable in the wiring for the Check wiring
valve
Run RockProtect diagnostics
Determined via the terminal
See Remedial action
Internal error - KMC4
Replace KMC4
Replace sensor
Measure voltage on the sensor
Path sensor defective
Remedial measure
Replace wiring and plugs
Recommend Check
Short-circuit of operating voltage Check wiring and plug
path sensor right
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
7008
Error No.
Page No. 178/228
Status: 29.08.2016
Dynamo defective
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Check the cables.
Check charge indicator lamp
Turn Page please!
Replace the dynamo
If required, replace charge
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Change battery
Check battery voltage
Charge indicator lamp defective
Charge battery
Check battery acid
Battery dead
Replace wiring
Check wiring
Replace cabling
Replace KMC4 (RockProtect)
Replace KMC4
Replace coil
Replace valve plug
Remedial measure
Short circuit in the wiring to a
12V sensor
Check the cables.
See Remedy
Internal error KMC4
(RockProtect)
See Remedial action
Internal error - KMC4
Run RockProtect diagnostics
Check coil
Coil for solenoid valve defective
Run RockProtect diagnostics
Check valve plugs and contacts
Recommend Check
Valve plug defective
Possible Reason
Error: Voltage in KMC4 is too low Wiring defective
7012 Undervoltage electronics RockProtect
7012
Meaning
7011 Malfunction valve coil Y35 - Determined via the terminal
RockProtect
Description
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
7011
Error No.
Page No. 179/228
7014 Undervoltage sensors RockProtect
7014
Status: 29.08.2016
7013 Overvoltage electronics RockProtect
Description
Test dynamo
Test function of the relays
according to circuit diagram
See Remedial action
Dynamo defective
Battery change-over relay
defective (500, 800, and 1000)
Internal error - KMC4
Change battery
Check battery voltage
Turn Page please!
Check the charge indicator lamp, If required, replace charge
check the wiring
indicator lamp and/or check
cabling
Charge battery
Check battery acid
Battery dead
Charge indicator lamp defective
Replace wiring
Replace cabling
Replace KMC4
Replace battery change-over
relay
Replace the dynamo
Replace the dynamo
Replace KMC4
Remedial measure
Wiring to a 12 V sensor defective Check wiring
Check the cables.
While engine is running,
measure on batteries. Voltage
must not be over 14.8V
See Remedial action
Recommend Check
The controller of the dynamo is
defective
Internal error - KMC4
Possible Reason
Error: Voltage on sensors too low Wiring defective
Error: Voltage in KMC4 is too
high
Meaning
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
7013
Error No.
Page No. 180/228
7016 Rock detected!!
8000 ensilage tank empty
7016
8000
Status: 29.08.2016
7015 Overvoltage sensors RockProtect
Description
Error: silage tank empty
Error: Rock detected in the feed
drive
Error: Voltage on sensors too
high
Meaning
Test function of the relays
according to circuit diagram
See Remedial action
Battery change-over relay
defective (500, 800, and 1000)
Internal error - KMC4.
Check tank
Measure sensor supply voltage
Check wiring and plug
Silage tank empty
Sensor (B60) defective
Wiring faulty
Check whether stone in feed
drive
Test dynamo
Dynamo defective
Rock in feed drive
While engine is running,
measure on batteries. Voltage
must not be over 14.8V
See Remedial action
Internal error - KMC4
The controller of the dynamo is
defective
Check the excitation voltage,
check wiring
Recommend Check
Dynamo defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
7015
Error No.
Page No. 181/228
Turn Page please!
If required, replace wiring and/or
plug
Replace sensor (B60)
Fill tank
Remove rock and then reverse
feed drive/front attachment
Replace KMC4
Replace battery change-over
relay
Replace the dynamo
Replace the dynamo
Replace KMC4
Replace the dynamo
Remedial measure
9611 Overvoltage - AutoScan
9611
Status: 29.08.2016
8001 Error ensilage pump
Description
Error: Power supply voltage too
high
Error: Silage agent pump
defective
Meaning
Test function of dynamo
See Remedy
Internal error KMC3
Dynamo defective
Measure sensor supply voltage
Silage agent flow sensor (B77)
faulty
While engine is running,
measure on batteries. Voltage
must not be over 14.8V
Check wiring
Short circuit/broken cable in
wiring for the silage agent flow
sensor (B77)
The controller of the dynamo is
defective
Check silage agent pump
Silage agent pump faulty
Perform AutoScan diagnostics
Check wiring
Short circuit/broken cable in the
silage agent pump wiring
Determine via the terminal
Perform work diagnostics
See Remedy
Recommend Check
Determined via the terminal
Internal error KMC2/3
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
8001
Error No.
Page No. 182/228
Turn Page please!
Replace the dynamo
Replace the dynamo
Replace the KMC3
Replace sensor (B77)
Replace wiring
Replace silage agent pump
Replace wiring
Replace KMC2/3
Remedial measure
Description
Error: Supply voltage too low (
Meaning
Replace AutoScan
Replace battery change-over
relay
Remedial measure
Run AutoScan diagnostics.
Check fuse +22-F58
Determine via the terminal
AutoScan power supply voltage
too low
Turn Page please!
Change fuse +22-F58
bis Mat.-Nr 20 080 287 2 ==>
SW AutoScan = 150 200 162-03
aufspielen. Eine Neukalibrierung
ist mit der MAT-Nr 20 080 287 2
nicht notwendig.
bis Mat.-Nr 20 080 287 1 ==>
SW AutoScan = 150 200 162-01
aufspielen. (Ist die SW-Version
150 200 162-02 auf dem
AutoScan - Sensor mit der MATNr. 20 080 287 1 aufgespielt
gewesen ist eine Kalibrierung
vom Sensor notwendig. Dazu
muss der Sensor zu Krone
zurueck)
Software-Version vom AutoScan- SW-Version in Abhaengigkeit der
Sensor im Terminal der Maschine vorhandenen Hardware-Version
kontrollieren
(Mat.-Nr,) vom AutoScan-Sensor
aufspielen.
See Remedial action
Internal error - AutoScan
Falsche Software-Version im
AutoScan-Sensor
Test function of the relays
according to circuit diagram
Recommend Check
Battery change-over relay
defective (500, 800, and 1000)
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
9612 Undervoltage 10V AutoScan
Status: 29.08.2016
9612
Error No.
Page No. 183/228
Description
Error: Supply voltage too low (
Meaning
Test function of dynamo
See Remedial action
Dynamo defective
Internal error - AutoScan
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD63 not lit.
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Turn Page please!
Check fuse +22-F63
Check fuse +22-F58
AutoScan power supply voltage
too low
Change fuse +22-F58
Perform AutoScan diagnostics
Determine via the terminal
Replace AutoScan
Replace the dynamo
Check the charge indicator lamp, If required, replace charge
check the wiring
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Change battery
Check battery voltage
Charge indicator lamp defective
Charge battery
Check battery acid
Battery dead
Replace cabling
Check fuse +22-F92
LED +22-LD11 not lit
Check the cables.
Check fuse +22-F63
Remedial measure
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Recommend Check
Wiring defective
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
9613 Undervoltage 8V AutoScan
Status: 29.08.2016
9613
Error No.
Page No. 184/228
Status: 29.08.2016
9616 Malfunction LED 2 AutoScan
9616
Error: AutoScan LED2 defective
Error: AutoScan LED1 defective
9615 Malfunction LED 1 AutoScan
9615
Meaning
9614 Glass scratched - AutoScan Error: AutoScan glass scratched
Description
Perform AutoScan diagnostics
Test function of LED
AutoScan LED 1 defective
Determine via the terminal
Perform AutoScan diagnostics
Check AutoScan for scratches
AutoScan glass scratched
Determine via the terminal
Perform AutoScan diagnostics
See Remedial action
Internal error - AutoScan
Determine via the terminal
Test function of dynamo
Dynamo defective
Turn Page please!
Replace AutoScan
Replace AutoScan
Replace AutoScan
Replace the dynamo
Check the charge indicator lamp, If required, replace charge
check the wiring
indicator lamp and/or renew
cabling
Change battery
Check battery voltage
Charge indicator lamp defective
Charge battery
Check battery acid
Battery dead
Replace cabling
Remedial measure
Check the cables.
Recommend Check
Wiring defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
9614
Error No.
Page No. 185/228
Status: 29.08.2016
9907 Malfunction CAN2 between Error: CAN bus communication KMC2 and Rock Protect
RockProtect to KMC2
9907
Error: AutoScan wrong
parameters
9618 Internal Malfunction
(parameter error) - AutoScan
9618
Error: AutoScan photo diode
defective
Meaning
9617 Malfunction Photo diode AutoScan
Description
Check fuse +22-F60
LED +22-LD60 not lit
Turn Page please!
Check fuse +22-F63
Check fuse for KMC4
(RockProtect)
LED KMC4 not lit/not flashing
LED +22-LD63 not lit
Check fuse +22-F39
LED +22-LD6 not lit
Central electrical power supply
voltage defective
Check fuse +22-F40
LED +22-LD4 not lit
RockProtect supply voltage
faulty
Program control unit
In the menu - Info software
versions - check the software
version of the control units
Control unit not programmed
Correct parameters
Replace AutoScan
Replace AutoScan
Remedial measure
Run diagnostics for RockProtect
and CAN
Check parameters
See Remedial action
Test function of LED
Recommend Check
Determined via the terminal
Wrong AutoScan parameters
AutoScan photo diode defective
AutoScan LED 2 defective
Possible Reason
Error descriptions BiG X 600-1100+750C
9617
Error No.
Page No. 186/228
Status: 29.08.2016
9911 Malfunction CAN2 between